Nissan GTR R32 Service Manual

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the mechanic and the efficient functioning of the vehicle. The service methods i n this Service Manual are described i n such a manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately. Service varies w i t h the procedures used, the skills of the mechanic and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must first completely satisfy themselves that neither their safety nor the vehicle's safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected.
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE
CHASSIS
--
BODY HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SERVICE DATA

(Australian Design Changes - See Rear)
GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION
1
2 5
CONTENTS
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 HOW TO USE THIS M A N U A L GENERAL PRECAUTIONS MODEL VARIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G l - . 7 VEHICLE AND UNIT IDENTIFICATION PLATE LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI- 8 TOW TRUCK TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI-10 4WD INSPECTION AND REPAIR PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GI-11 4WD VEHICLE TOWING PRECAUTIONS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . .GI-
A1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

1. Preparation Operation Explanation
This manual describes important items for installation, removal, assembly, disassembly, inspection and repair. CAUTION: A general description of a visual inspection and cleaning of disassembled parts has generally been omitted. However, when the parts will be used again, make sure to perform visual inspection and cleaning as necessary.
2.Configuration Components, Operation Contents and Procedures

The configuration components and operation contents and procedures are shown after the title of the operation. The preparation standards and important operation points such as parts which cannot be used again, tightening torque and lubrication locations are also indicated.
2-1 CONFIGURATION COMPONENTS AND OPERATION CONTENTS

The necessary operations for installation, removal, assembly and disassembly are indicated by the part (part name). This description is used if the only ideal procedure cannot be determined or there are many types of components. [Point] is used to indicate operation procedures which are necessary, Example: Front accelerator assembly and disassembly
Inner grease seal
Screw (3) 3 4 ( . 0.4, 22 29) 03 B d t ( 4 ) E - S ( 2 5 - 3 . 4 , 18-25)
: Mrn (kg-ITI,ft-lb)
: Should be lubricated with grease. Unless otherwise indicated, use recommended mltipurpose grease.
Outer bearing
I
W e 1 hub
,:Always replace after every disassembly.
A1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 2,Configuration Components, Operation Contents and Procedures (Cont'd)
2-2 STRUCTURAL PARTS DIAGRAM AND OPERATIONAL SEQUENCE
The names of the parts required for removal and replacement and assembly and disassembly operations are shown. The operational sequence must be performed in the sequence of the indicated numbers. Assembly is the reverse of disassembly except when otherwise indicated. Example: Light combination switch ASSY installation and removal
Shell cwer
2-3 OPERATION NAME SYMBOLS

(1) (Removal) (Installation) (Additional work required ) ., . , . (Removal): lndicates an ob&ation (preparation, inspection adjustment, etc.) that is only necessary for removal. (Installation): lndicates an operation (preparation, inspection adjustment, etc.) that is only necessary for installation. (Removal) (lnstallation): lndicates an operation (preparation, inspection adjustment, etc.) that is only necessary for both removal and installation. (Additional work required): lndicates a supplementary operation (removal, installation, etc.) to be performed before the operation indicated in the section title. (2) Tightening torque lndicates an operation where the torque should be checked and the standard torque value that should be used. When X to Y N.m (kg-m, ft-lb) is indicated, the standard tightening torque is the mean value. : Should be lubricated with grease. lndicates a type of grease. (3) (4) 0 : Always replace after every disassembly. : Should be lubricated with oil. (5) (6) @ : Sealing point (7) *:Select proper parts. : Indicates when the CONSULT electronic system diagnosis is used. (8) : lndicates when the CONSULT electronic system diagnosis is not used.
m:
A1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 2.Configuration Components, Operation Contents and Procedures (Cont'd)
(9) [Point No.] ([Point I], [Point 21, [Point 31 ....) These sections describe the techniques, special tools, and repair reference values required to perform operations properly .
A2 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
1. Safety Precautions
The RB26DETT engine exhaust valves contain metallic sodium. Be careful when using or discarding the valves. (Refer to section B3, 80, Cylinder Head Removal and Installation.) Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without proper exhaust ventilation. Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed space, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials. Do not smoke while working on any vehicle. Before jacking up the vehicle, use wheel chocks or tire blocks on the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at the points designated for proper lifting and towing before working on the vehicle. These operations should be done on a level surface. When the automobile is lifted on a rigid rack, it should be supported in fixed locations. Before starting removal and installation of the electrical system or other repairs which do not require battery power, always turn off the ignition switch, then disconnect the ground cable from the battery to prevent accidental short circuits.
2. Fast, Accurate Operations

Check the vehicle damage carefully, make a careful diagnosis of the damage and perform the correct operation systematically. Check the correct part assembly condition before removal or disassembly. Make alignment marks when necessary in locations which will not interfere with the part functions. Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones. These items are indicated, "Always replace after every disassembly." and must be replaced with a new part. Before servicing the vehicle, protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. Be careful so that keys, buckles or buttons on your person do not scratch the paint. Refer to the lubrication section and only use the lubricants which are described. When replacing parts always use genuine Nissan replacement parts. Verify the inspection circuit in a wiring figure before performing any inspection with a circuit tester. An inspection may be difficult with a normal test probe when a connector pin is extremely small. If this occurs, wind a small pin or wire around the test probe, or sharpen the end of the probe to perform the inspection.
r
Wnd wire around probe. Test probe
Sharpen the end.
B02-000;
3. Electronic Trouble Diagnosis System

Use measurement equipment such as the CONSULT electronic system diagnosis tester and an oscilloscope to perform diagnosis operations efficiently. The CONSULT unit is a hand-held compact type of tester. It transmits signals to the vehicle loading control units when the diagnosis connector is connected and can perform all types of diagnosis and testing.
A2 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
3. Electronic Trouble Diagnosis System (Cont'd)
Main functions and aoolications
Work support
Transmits commands to the electrical control unit for setting the status suitable for required operation. Receives the self-diagnosis results from the electrical control unit and displays malfunctioning system names and the number of times a malfunction occurs. Receives input and output signals from the control unit, displays and records data used to easily determine cause of malfunction. Sends commands to the control unit and performs the operation inspection and verification of the output system according to output signal changes. Displays the part number of the electrical control unit.
Self-diagnosis results
Data monitor
Active test
E.C.U. part number
Note: Refer to the CONSULT Operation Manual for further details.
4. Environmental Protection
a
Do not pour waste oil or cleaning fluids into a drain after an oil change. Use a disposal method that conforms to local laws.
A3 MODEL VARIATION
-
Body type Drive system 4WD Engine RB26DETT Grade GT-R 4-door sedan 2-door coupe
Remarks Transmission Manual 5-speed
A4 VEHICLE AND UNIT IDENTIFICATION PLATE LOCATION

1. Vehicle Identification Plate and Starting Number
a
E-BNR32 model BNR32-000001 - (equipped with RB26DETT engine)
RB26DETT Engine
A5 TOW TRUCK TOWING

1. Towing
Front side
After removing front spoiler, attach a cable to the hook in the front part of the front side member.
Rear
Attach a cable to the hook mounted in the rear part of the rear side member.
2. 2-pole Lift
The 2-pole lifting points are the same as for the rigid rack. CAUTION: (1) Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. (2) When lifting the vehicle, make sure the side sill and lift arm (rear part) do not contact each other.
3. Board-on Lift
The board-on lift attachment (LM4086-0200) set at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front door opening. Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift. CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
Attachment (Standard position)
' 1 11 1
D01-0065
A5 TOW TRUCK TOWING

4. Hydraulic Jack Lifting and Jack Stand Support
CAUTION: (1) Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting. (2) When the front side is jacked up, raise the front sill edge slightly using the jack and then jack the vehicle up. (3) Use the attachment (LM4519-0000) whenever a vehicle is supported by jack stands. (4) When using jack stands, be careful not to allow the jack stand to crush brake tubes or fuel lines.
Safety stand points
suspension member.
A6 4WD INSPECTION AND REPAIR PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following precautions to measure the speedometer reading and to check braking performance in the 4WD mode.
1. Speedometer Measurement
The two methods to measure the speedometer are described below.
(1) Measurement with front wheels jacked up

0
Attachment
LM4519 0000
Place the rear wheels on the roller. Use the attachment to lift up the front wheels and support the car on jack stands as shown in the figure on the left. Place the transmission in 2nd gear and gradually release the clutch. When the test is completed, do not apply the brakes suddenly. CAUTION: (1) Place the jacks securely, and perform the measurement after making sure the vehicle is stable. (2) Use the free rollers described below whenever possible.
Simple free roller
IM2485 0000
(2) Measurement with simple free roller
Set the simple free roller the length of the wheel base 9 12,615 mrn (102. 5 in)] forward of the middle of the measurement roller as shown in the figure on the left.
The length of the wheel base 2,615 mrn (102.96 in)
Place the front wheels on the simple free rollers and the rear wheels on the measurement rollers. Place the transmission in 2nd gear and gradually release the clutch. When the test is completed, do not apply the brakes suddenly.
simple free roller
~easurement roller
A6 4WD INSPECTION AND REPAIR PRECAUTIONS
2. Braking Performance Check

2-1 PRE-INSPECTION PREPARATIONS
The performance check must be performed in the 2WD mode. To set the 2WD mode, either use the front propellor shaft removal method or remove the fusible link from the engine compartment. Use the method most suitable for the test location.
A6 4WD INSPECTION AND REPAIR PRECAUTIONS 2. Braking Performance Check (Cont'd) 2-2 INSPECTION POINTS (when fusible link in engine compartment is removed)
Stop engine and remove the 4WD fusible link 30A from the engine compartment relay box.
tion from full throttle to no throttle until the 4WD warning
1
1
NOTE: The vehicle may not enter 2WD mode when this operation is performed.
Make sure the 4WD warning lamp lights, then turn key switch off once.
I v
Press brake pedal. Release pedal when OK zone is reached or OK lamp lights. NOTE: If the drag force exceeds 10% of the axle weight when the drag test is performed, the wheel rotation must be checked with the vehicle jacked up. If there is no abnormality at this time, it can be assumed that the drag is caused by the viscous torque and there is no brake abnormality.
I
W -e lchucks Ai e
A 00 0004
Stop the engine and install the fusible link in the normal location.
v
Restart engine and make sure the 4WD warning lamp goes off and 4WD mode is set.
I
End
A7 4WD VEHICLE TOWING PRECAUTIONS 1. Towing Precautions

Never tow a 4WD model with front or rear wheels raised and opposite rear or front wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.
ENGINE
SECTION
EN
CONTENTS
B ENGINE 91 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................EN1.Main Engine Specifications ............................................................................................ EN2.Emission Control Equipment Specification .................................................................... EN3.System Diagram .............................................................................................................. EN4.Vacuum Diagram ............................................................................................................. EN92 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE .......................................... EN1.ldle Inspection and Adjustment ...................................................................................... EN2.Com~ressionPressure Inspection ................................................................................. EN3.Belt Tension Inspection and Adjustment ....................................................................... EN- 17 4.Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment ................................................................. EN- 19 5.Lubrication System Inspection ....................................................................................... EN- 32 6.Exhaust System Inspection ............................................................................................. EN- 23 7.Fuel System Inspection ................................................................................................... EN- 25 8.Evaporative Gas Control System Inspection ................................................................. EN- 26 9.Blowby Gas Reduction Equipment Inspection ............................................................... EN- 26 10.Removal and Installation of On-vehicle Parts ............................................................. EN- 27 11.Engine Removal and Installation .................................................................................. EN- 89 12.Oil Pan, Oil Pump and Oil Strainer Removal and Installation .................................... EN- 92 13.Engine Overhaul ............................................................................................................ EN- 98 93 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) ....................................... EN-119 1.Trouble Diagnosis ........................................................................................................... EN-120 2.Diagnostic System ........................................................................................................... EN-150 3.Basic Inspection .............................................................................................................. EN-165 4.System Figure and Circuit Diagram ............................................................................... EN-169 5.Actuator System Inspection ............................................................................................ EN-174 6.Sensor System Inspection .............................................................................................. EN-203 7.ECCS Control Unit Input/Output Signals (RB26DETT) ................................................... EN-234 8.Deceleration Exhaust Gas Emission Control Equipment Inspection ............................ EN-245 9.Air Conditioner Cut System Inspection .......................................................................... EN-245
B4 ENGINE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ............................................................................... EN-246 1.Battery Inspection ........................................................................................................... EN-247 2.Alternator ......................................................................................................................... EN-247 3.Starter Motor Removal and Installation ......................................................................... EN-248 4.Platinum Plug Inspection ................................................................................................ EN-248 5.1gnition Coil Inspection ...................................................................................................EN-248 B5 COOLING SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... EN-249 1.Radiator Inspection ......................................................................................................... EN-249 2.Radiator Cap Inspection ................................................................................................. EN-250 3.Cooling Water Filling Procedures .................................................................................. EN-250 4.Radiator Removal and Installation ................................................................................. EN-251 5.Therrnostat Inspection ..................................................................................................... EN-252 6.Sub Electrical Fan Inspection ......................................................................................... EN-252 7.Sub Electrical Fan Removal and Installation ................................................................. EN-253 B6 FUEL SYSTEM ................................................................................................................ EN-254 1.Fuel Tank Removal and Installation ............................................................................... EN-255 2.Fuel Gauge ASSY ............................................................................................................ EN-257 3.Fuel Pump Removal and Installation ............................................................................. EN-258 B7 EXHAUST SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... EN-260 1.Exhaust Pipe, Catalytic Converter and Heat Panel Tightening Torques ...................... EN-261 2.Exhaust Temperature Warning Equipment Inspection .................................................. EN-261 B8 ENGINE CONTROL ......................................................................................................... EN-262 1.Accelerator Pedal Inspection and Adjustment .............................................................. EN-262 B9 ENGINE MOUNTING (4WD) ............................................................................................ EN-263 1.Front Engine Mounting (RB26DETT) .............................................................................. EN-263 2.Rear Engine Mounting (RB26DETT) ............................................................................... EN-263
B1 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Item
1. Main Engine Specifications

Model
Displacement Combustion chamber Valve arrangement Bore x stroke Compression ratio Compression pressure
cm3 (cu in) Pent-roof type DOHC belt drive m m (in) 86.0 x 73.7 (3.386 x 2.902)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm
I
Dimensions (L x W x H) Valve mm (in)
1 Intake valve opening angle (BTDC)
(degrees) (degrees) (degrees) (degrees) m m (in) m m (in) 7 (BTDC)
Intake valve closing angle (BBDC) and Exhaust valve opening angle (BBDC) closing Exhaust valve closing angle (BTDC) cycle Valve clearance Intake (warm) Exhaust (warm) (rPm) (BTDC4/rpm)
Idle speed Ignitior timing PrepaIdle CO density ration target Idle HC density value Engine Standard oil (facCold climate version tory) Oil pan capacity (H level) Oil filter capacity Total engine coolant capacity
M/T M/T
(%I
(PPm)
0.1 max. 50 max.
7.5W-30 (SG grade for turbo)
(Imp qt)
f, (Imp qt)
Approx. 0.4 (318) Approx. 9.0 (7-718)
Use recommended genuine Nissan SG grade engine oil [Turbo X (7.5W-30)] or equiva nt.
2. Emission Control Equipment Specification
Model Item Engine fuel system
-
E-BNR32 RB26DETT ECCS (MPi) Airlfuel ratio feedback
Engine
Airlfuel ratio control system Temperature control air cleaner Supplemental start equipment Intake heat system Ignition system EGR control system NOx reduction equipment TV valve operation temperature Catalyzer type CO, HC (NOx) reduction equipment Catalytic converter size [capacity in liters (Imp qt)] Fuel cutoff equipment
I I
Bi-metal type air regulator Hot water heating Breakerless type (ECCS electrical distributor)
'C (OF)
Three-way catalyst
X3 [1.7 (1-1/2)]
Deceleration exhaust gas reduction equipment . .
Exhaust aas temperature warnina eauipment rsettina temperature "C (OR1 Evaporative gas control system Blowby gas reduction system
Thermocouple 1850 (1,56211
Canister system Closed system
61 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
3. System Diagram
RB26 DOHC - EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE
GI
3
?
speed signal
[
LJ-
'
1 T h r d e valve opening angle sensor
4. Vacuum Diagram
4-1 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE
Turbocharged pressure control sdenoid
h M e vacuum tube
Dcuble clamp band
Vacuum c m r d tube Swing valve contrdler (rear)
Number
Length mm (in) 580 (22.83)
Part Turbocharged pressure control solenoid
@ @ @ @
- vacuum gallery
1 1 1
560 (22.05) 425 (16.73) 425 (16.73) 80 (3.15) 290 (11.42) Molded 120 (4.72) 90 (3.54) 60 (2.36) 90 (3.54)
1 Turbocharged pressure control solenoid - vacuum gallery

- vacuum gallery Canister - vacuum gallery
Canister
@
@
(3
1 Throttle chamber - vacuum gallery

Air chamber
- vacuum gallery
Pressure r e ~ u l a t o r balance tube
@ @ @ @ @ @
1 Vacuum gallery - vacuum gallery

Vacuum gallery
Molded Molded 90 (3.54)
- vacuum gallery Vacuum gallery - vacuum gallery Vacuum gallery - vacuum gallery Vacuum gallery - swing valve controller Vacuum gallery - swing valve controller
Vacuum gallery
(rear) (front)
- vacuum control tube
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE

1. ldle Inspection and Adjustment
Tools required
Name
- -
Use
Super tuner After number EG1151-9000, EGll52-9000, EGll53-9000 and EG1154-9000
Otherwise, tachometer tester (after number EGl334-9000)
gngine speed inspection
Timing light (internal battery) EG1444 0000 Measurement tool CO and HC meter
Measures ignition timing.
Measures CO and HC levels.
Electronic system diagnosis tester CONSULT E G l l 8 0 0000
ldle test and adjustment
ldle standard values
Idle speed (when air conditioner is ON) Ignition timing COIHC density
(r~m) (BTDC"lrpm) (%) (PP~)
950 (950) 201950 0.1 max, 50 rnax.
CAUTION: The idle speed, ignition timing, CO and HC density are inter-related. Any adjustment to one effects the others and requires an additional inspection.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 1. Idle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
Diagnosis connector
unit (inside left dash side lower finisher)
1-1 IDLE SPEED INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Engine speed measurement unit
(attached to fuse block area). Turn ignition switch to ON. a "DIAGNOSIS MODE SELECTION" is displayed. Note: Refer to section B3, 2, 2-2 (2) for details.
a Warm engine adequately.

a Connect CONSULT to diagnosis connector on vehicle
Connect the measurement unit to the speed detection terminal in the harness connected to the ignition coil from the power transistor. After the measurement is completed, always replace the terminal cap in the detection terminal. CAUTION: Be sure to check the tachometer specifications because a 6V voltage is generated.
Inspection
Warm engine adequately. Make sure air conditioning load, power steering oil pump load and electrical loads are not applied. Check "IDLE POS" and "CAS - RPM -(POS)" in "DATA MONITOR" mode in CONSULT unit. Perform inspection using engine speed measurement.
Note: The measurement unit is limited because the speed output voltage is low (approx. 6V Vp-p). CAUTION: Before inspection, make sure the throttle valve switch (idle connection point) is on when the accelerator pedal is not pressed.
Adjustment
1 AAC
VALVE ADJ
ENG WARMED LIP NO ILVW
The idle speed adjustment is basically not necessary because the rated value (control target value) is returned to the control unit. If adjustment becomes necessary, perform the following procedures: @ Select "AAC valve adjustment" in the "WORK SUPPORT" mode. Turn AAC valve assembly idle adjustment screw with a screwdriver until idle speed is 900 rpm. @ Return the "AAC VALVE ADJUSTMENT" screen to "DATA MONITOR'' and check idle speed shown on screen meets the specification.
Caution Adjust within indicated range. Do not turn wKh excessive force.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 1. Idle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd) (D Make sure ECCS control unit idle control adjustment
-
. .
. .
Idle speed Self-
Red
volume is turned all the way to the left. CAUTION: Never turn idle control speed adjustment volume with excessive force. The adjustment screw turning range is 314 of a turn.
@ Remove the 2-pin harness connector from the AAC valve to stop the idle speed feedback control. The AAC valve is completely closed at this time and the idle speed should be 900 rpm maximum under normal conditions.
@ Turn the AAC valve assembly idle adjustment screw with a

screwdriver to adjust engine speed to 900 rprn.
(S) Connect AAC valve harness connector. Make sure idle

speed is maintained at specified value. The engine speed increases when adjustment screw is and decreases when turned to the right turned to left (CCW)
(CW).
Caution Adjust within indicated range. Do not turn with excessive force.
(5) If idle speed increases for any reason, turn idle control
adjustment volume in ECCS control unit to adjust speed. Idle adjustment volume increases engine speed when turned to right by a maximum 250 rprn. CAUTION: The adjustment volume must be set 40' 50' from the self-diagnosis position because idle speed is lowered (lowest rpm 50 rpm) if it is turned all the way to the right (self-diagnosis position).
Low
-G
1-2 IGNITION TIMING CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
Timing light connection
(1) When using "super tuner"

Connect super tuner to timing detection terminal. CAUTION: After operation i s completed, always attach terminal cap to timing detection terminal (check connector).
(2) Using primary current detector timing light
0
When using EG1444 0000, attach sensor to No. 1 cylinder primary line. (No. 1 cylinder primary line is looped because it is longer than other cylinder primary lines.) CAUTION: When using EG1444 0000 (internal battery model), make sure that the sensor direction (arrow direction) faces spark plug when sensor is clipped to primary line. (If primary line direction is not clear, measure with sensor connected in both directions. The correct installation direction is indicated when lower advanced angle value is obtained.)
~ m e transistor r unit side
#
....-..
Timing indicator
= / -
Spark @ug side

B02-151;
-- -\
Y ,
>----
I I
Inspection Make sure idle speed is standard value. Make sure ignition timing at engine idle is at standard specification. Make sure ignition advances to correct advance angle when engine is raced. CAUTION: The O0 timing mark on crank pulley is orange and other points are painted white.
Camshaft rotati
Adjustment Since there is no variation in ignition timing, over an extended time period, ignition timing adjustment is not necessary in principle. Adjust ignition timing when crank angle sensor is installed. 0 Set ignition timing by adjusting crank angle sensor installation position. Make sure idle speed is standard. Loosen the three crank angle sensor mounting bolts and 0 rotate crank angle sensor. Turn sensor to left to advance ignition timing.
EN-11
After adjustment, attach sealing tape to one of the three bolts that secure crank angle sensor.
Sealing tape part number
B2235 U7410
6 2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 1. Idle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
1-3 CO, HC DENSITY INSPECTION
The airlfuel ratio feedback system which has a self-learning function is used and CO and HC density adjustment is not necessary because the correction range is wide.
*MONITOR
* N O FAIL
123V
1 10V
CAS.RPM(POS) EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R M / R F/C M N T M / R F I C MNT-R
950rpm
RICH RICH
RECORD
Warm up the engine adequately and make sure the idle speed and ignition timing are standard. Check CO, HC density with CO and HC meter. If values do not conform to standard perform the following procedures to inspect the airlfuel feedback condition: (T) In the data monitor mode, select "EXHAUST GAS SENSOR MONITOR" and "EXHAUST GAS SENSOR MONITOR (R)". (2) Set the engine speed above 2,000 rpm and make sure "RICH" and "LEAN" are displayed alternately.
Short t h e a j u p for appro~irnately two secofxfc then open them tha diagnosis mode will then change. (The mode zhanges each time this operation is performed.)
(Fuse block)
Short-circuit the self-diagnosis connector on the vehicle side (near fuse box installation). Otherwise, remove ECCS control unit and operate adjustment volume on control unit side. (D Set the ignition switch "ON" and use a lead line to shortcircuit the CHK pin and IGN pin of the diagnosis connector for more than two seconds to release the setting. (Otherwise turn the ignition switch to "ON" and turn the adjustment volume on the side of the ECCS control unit to the right (CW) until it stops in the self diagnosis mode switching position (6) for more than two seconds and then return it to the original position.)
Caulion Adjust~~thin indicated range. Do nqt turn with excessive force.

I
Red
@ After warming up the engine adequately, raise the engine
speed until the exhaust temperature warning lamp (or the red lamp on side of control unit) flashes (the flashing will start above approximately 2,000 rpm). The exhaust gas sensor output monitor (R) mode will be set. CAUTION: The accelerator pedal must be pressed intentionally during idling to perform the inspection because the airlfuel ratio feedback control is stopped. @ Make sure the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp or red lamp on the side of the control unit flashes in this condition.
Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp
Short these pins for approximately two seconds then open

hem, the diagnosis mode will change. (The mode changes tach time this operation is performed)
(3) Use a lead to short the CHK pin and the IGN pin of the
diagnosis connector for more than two seconds one more time to release the self-diagnosis mode. (Otherwise turn the adjustment volume of the ECCS control unit side to the right (CW) until it stops to select the self-diagnosis mode CB) for more than two seconds and then return it to the original position). Note: Refer to section (63, 2, Diagnosis System) for explanation of air fuel feedback monitor.
(Fuse Hock)
Exhaust gas sensor moiitor

Switching the signal for exhaust gas sensor - exhaust gas sensor (R)
mode switching display
Exhaust gas sensor output monitor
(T) Set the ignition switch to "ON". Use a lead line to short CHK pin and IGN pin of diagnosis connector for more than two seconds to switch mode. (Otherwise turn ignition switch to "ON" and turn adjustment volume on side of the ECCS control unit to the right (CW) until it stops at self-diagnosis mode switching position @ for more than two seconds and then return volume to original position.)
@ After warming the engine adequately, raise the engine

Switching the signal for exhaust gas sensor (R) Exhaust gas sensor exhaust gas sensor output monitor
speed until the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or the red lamp on side of control unit) flashes (the flashing will start above approximately 2,000 rpm). The rear exhaust gas sensor output monitor mode will be set. CAUTION: The accelerator pedal must be pressed intentionally during idling to perform the inspection because the air-fuel ratio feedback control is stopped.
Make sure the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp or red lamp on the side of the control unit flashes in this condition. (3) Short CHK pin and IGN pin of the diagnosis connector for more than two seconds one more time to release the mode. (Otherwise, turn the adjustment volume on side ECCS control unit to the right (CW) until it stops at self-diagnosis mode switching position (&) for more than two seconds and then return volume to original position.) After the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp on control unit side) flashes two times, the mode switches to the front exhaust gas sensor output monitor mode. @ Make sure that the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp on side of control unit) flashes at about 2,000 rpm. Note: Refer to section B3, 2, Self-diagnosis System for details about airlfuel ratio feedback monitor. Note: When switching the exhaust gas sensor output monitor from the No. 1-3 cylinder bank to No. 4-6 cylinder bank, adjust the diagnosis connector (or control unit adjustment volume). The signal pattern is shown in the diagrams.
6 2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 2. Compression Pressure Inspection

Tools required
Name Application
Tool
Spark plug wrench EG1740 1600 o r other regular spark plug wrench set)
1
Removal and installation of small size hexagonal spark plug
Enaine soeed measurement unit
To check engine speed.
(T) Alien compression gauge

EG 1505 0000 Measuremen, tool For engine compression pressure inspection.
@ Compression gauge adaptor

EG1505 0101
Compression pressure standard values

Engine
Item Standard value Limit value

-
RB26DETT 1,177 (12.0, 171)/300 883 (9.0, 128)/300 98 (1.0, 14)/300
1 kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm 1

Compression variance limit between cylinders
Engine speed measurement unit installation

Connect the engine speed measurement unit to the speed detection pin on the harness connected to the ignition coil from the power transistor. Always attach the terminal cap with rubber seal after measurement is completed.
Compression gauge installation

Warm up engine. Release fuel pressure. (Refer to "Releasing fuel pressure" section 62, 7-1.) Remove all spark plugs. (Refer to "SPARK PLUGS" section 62,10-9.) Attach the adaptor to the Allen compression gauge and set it in a spark plug hole.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 2. Compression Pressure Inspection (Cont'd)
Inspection Press accelerator pedal all the way down. Turn ignition switch to "START" and crank the engine. When gauge needle stops moving read compression pressure and engine speed. When engine speed is out of specifications, check specific gravity of the battery and perform test again if battery is functioning properly. If the compression pressure is still not standard, inspect the components around the combustion chamber (valves, valves seat, hydraulic valve lifters, piston rings, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket, etc.). Correct any malfunctions and repeat compression test.
Fan belt
Power steering
3. Belt Tension Inspection and Adjustment

Inspection The inspection should be performed when the engine is cold or more than thirty minutes after the engine has stopped.
Belt deflection mm (in) [When 98 N (10 kg, 22 Ib) of force is applied at the " V " position.] New
Belt specification
Power steering belt Air conditioner compressor belt Fan belt
P l y - V low-maintenance belt tenance belt tenance belt
1
]
Adjustment
8 - 10 10 12 (0.31 - 0.39) (0.39 0.47)
Tension limit 16 (0.63) 12 (0.47) 7.5 (0.295)
CAUTION: (1) When the belt is replaced with a new belt increase the tension slightly more than for the used belt to allow for wear-in of the new belt. (2) When the belt deflection exceeds the limit, adjust to the "Adjustment" value. (3) When the belt is installed, make sure pulley groove is aligned correctly.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 3. Belt Tension Inspection and Adjustment. (Cont'd)
Adjustment
Adjustment position Power steering belt Air conditioner compressor belt Fan belt
B02-2333
Adjustment bolt in power steering Pump Adjustment bolt in idler pulley Adjustment bolt in alternator
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS} TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE

4. Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment
Additional work required: Remove the following parts: Air duct Rocker cover (Refer to "SPARK PLUGS and ROCKER COVER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" section B2, 10-9, 10.)
Inspection
Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold. Remove the air duct, ornaments and rocker cover
Valves to be adjusted. Intake side
Turn crankshaft and align crankshaft pulley mark with belt cover indicator. No. 1 cylinder is at the compression stroke top dead center when both the intake and exhaust side cams do not move the valve lifters.
Valve clearance measurement
Exhaust side Firing order: 1-5-3-6-2-4
< Valves to be adjusted.
Intake side
Turn crankshaft one revolution ( 6 ' and align mark on 30) crankshaft pulley with belt cover indicator. (No. 1 cylinder piston exhaust T.D.C.)
Item Intake side Exhaust side Valve clearance measurement Cylinder No. 3, 5, 6 Cylinder No. 2, 4, 6
- n
Exhaust side
Valve clearance standard values

Part
Intake
Exhaust
Valve clearance (cold) (Reference value: warm)
mm (in) mm (in)
1
I
0.45 i 0.03 (0.018*0.001) 0.51 i 0.03
1
I
0.38 i 0.03 (0.015i 0.001)
CAUTION: Always check valves when they are cold.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI [ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 4 . Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
Valve clearance measurement
Insert a 0.15 - 0.20 mm (0.0059 - 0.0079 in) feeler gauge @ from spark plug side. Insert feeler gauges @ from opposite side. Select a gauge thickness that will reduce the clearance to 0 mm (0 in). Do not use more than two gauges for. @I. Note: The feeler gauge must conform to JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) 150A25.
Valve clearance = gauge @
+ gauge 0)
Reasons for measurement using gauges @ and 0 : (T) The valve clearance setting is larger compared to previous engines. @ Larger gauges cannot be placed parallel to the measurement surface. 0 Thick feeler gauge blades have a high rigidity and do not bend easily, so the measurement will be incorrect. 0 The error factor increases if a number of thin gauges are layered and the measurement will be incorrect.
falve clearance adjustment

The valve clearance adjustment is performed by selecting and inserting a shim of suitable thickness. When the measurement valve clearance (t) is out of specification, measure the shim thickness (T) and replace it with a shim that will produce the standard clearance.
(X> Shim thickness calculation method

Example: When the intake valve clearance (t) is 0.50 mm (0.020 in): 0.50 (t) - 0.45 (specified value) = 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) The valve clearance is 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) greater than specified value. 0 Use a shim which is 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) thicker than the current shim to reduce the valve clearance.
@ Current shim thickness (T) calculation method

Measure the center of removed shim to determine thickness. CAUTION: Do not use measured shims again.
0
0: Always replace after every dis'assembly.
d Shim 4
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE Valve Clearance Inspection and Adjustment 4. (Cont'd)
(3) Shim selection
Removed shim thickness (T) is 2.40 mm (0.0945 in). 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)= 2.450 -+ 2.40 (T) mm (0.0945 in) selection shim thickness a Select new shim with stamped mark [2,4] (T = 2.440 - 2.455). CAUTION: Select a shim which is within standard value range 2~0.03mm ( 0.0012 in).
a
--
This indicates a thickness of T = 2.440 -2.455 mm (0.0961 - 0.0967 in)
(4) Shim types and classification

a
There are 70 types of shims The shim sizes range from 2.275 mm (0.0896 in) to 3.325 mm (0.1309 in) in 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) increments. After the camshaft is installed, measure valve clearance again and make sure clearance conforms to standard value.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI fECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE

5. Lubrication System Inspection
Name I Oil filter wrench KV101 062SO
602-0038
Application I
Special tool
Oil filter removal and installation
Measurement tool
Oil pressure gauge
Used for oil pressure measurement
5-1 LUBRICATION OIL LEVEL INSPECTION Inspection

The engine oil level should be checked before starting the engine. If the engine has been started, perform the measurement ten minutes after the engine has cooled. The oil level should be between the H and L lines on the dipstick. The oil must not have any white turbidity or dirt.
1
Oil level must be i n this range.
Replacement interval
I I
Use SD, SE, SF or SG class oil. Change oil every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months.
Note: Use genuine Nissan [Turbo X (7.5W-30)] for service.
Oil level
(Imp qt)
4.5 (4)
L
Only oil replacement Oil and oil filter
I
Oil supplement volume when replaced (Imp qt)
3.5 (3-118) Approx. 4.2 (3-314) Approx. 4.6 (4)
replacement
I
I
5-2 OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION

Inspection
Remove the oil pressure switch and connect oil pressure gauge. After warming engine, make sure the pressure is appropriate for engine speed.
Engine speed Outlet pressure (rpm) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 800 2,000 6,000
Approx. 147 Approx. 294 Approx. 451 11.5, 21) (3, 43)
I
(4.6. 651
[Oil temperature: 80 (176'F)]
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 5. Lubrication System Inspection (Cont'd)
5-3 OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT
Refer to "OIL COOLER, OIL FILTER INSTALLATION" section B2, 10-15.) REMOVAL AND
Removal
Use oil filter wrench (special service tool) to remove filter. CAUTION: Catch any dripping oil in a rag when removing the filter.
0
Installation
Before installing new oil filter, clean the oil filter bracket mounting surface on cylinder block and coat the oil filter seal lips lightly with engine oil. Screw in the oil filter by hand until a slight resistance is felt 0 and then tighten an additional 213 turn. CAUTION: Start engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage.
Periodic exchange interval Use SD, SE, SF or SG class oil. Change oil every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 1
1 year.
6. Exhaust System Inspection

Tools required
Name Application
Measurement Compound gauge EG1508 0001 tool
Used to check turbocharger for excess pressure.
6-1 AIR CLEANER ELEMENT INSPECTION
Inspection
Remove parts from vehicle. Refer to Section 10-2, AIR CLEANER ELEMENT INSTALLATION. 0 There should be no excessive dirt or damage in the air cleaner element.
RB26DETT
Periodic exchange interval every 60,000 km (36,000 miles)
6-2 TURBOCHARGER INSPECTION
Function inspection
0
Remove the intake manifold canister hose, and place a cap on the hose. Connect test hose to intake manifold and attach pressure gauge (compound gauge). When engine operation test is performed, check that pressure does not rise above approximately 78 to 88 kPa (0.8 to 0.9 kg/cm2, 11 to 13 psi).
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 6. Exhaust System Inspection (Cont'd)
a. When the pressure does not reach specified level: Check for vacuum leak in intake or exhaust system or exhaust gas leak. b. When the pressure exceeds the maximum pressure level (approx. 78 to 88 kPa (0.8 to 0.9 kg/cm2, 11 to 13 psi): Check if swing valve controller rubber hose is disconnected or cut. Check if swing valve controller motion malfunctions (stays closed).
Swing valve controller inspection

Remove the swing valve controller rubber hose from the vacuum tube side. When compressed air [approx. 69 to 78 kPa (0.7 to 0.8 kg/cm2, 10 to 11 psi)] is forced into the hose by an air gun, the control rod must start operation. Stop blowing compressed air into the hose as soon as control rod operation is verified. CAUTION: The diaphragm may be damaged if excessive air pressure is applied. Use the LPG pressure gauge (special service tool for [98 kPa (1 kg/cm2, 14 psi)]) to verify that the air gun pressure is approx. 78 to 88 kPa (0.8 to 0.9 kg/cm2, 11 to 13 psi) before testing the air hose.
6-3 RECIRCULATION VALVE INSPECTION Function inspection

Remove hose on upper flow side of recirculation valve compressor (cover end of hose with cap) and check if air blows back when throttle is closed quickly.
Unit inspection
Use a hand vacuum pump to create negative pressure [-20.0~t4.0 (-1503 mmHg, -5.91 1.18 inHg)]. The kPa recirculation valve diaphragm must start to lift and the vacuum pressure must be maintained.
Recirculationvalve

7. Fuel System Inspection
Tools required
Fuel pressure measurement
7-1 FUEL PRESSURE INSPECTION
Releasing fuel pressure

After starting engine, remove fuel pump fuse. After the engine stops, crank the engine over two or three times and the fuel in the pipe will be consumed. If the engine does not start, remove the pump fuse and crank the engine three to four times to consume the fuel in fuel lines. CAUTION: The battery may become weak easily, so use booster cables to connect it to another vehicle or charged battery if necessary.
.
Fuel pressure meter installation

Connect the fuel pressure meter between fuel filter and fuel line. Attach fuel pump fuse.
Fuel pressure inspection

Start engine and check if the fuel pressure is standard value. If the engine does not start, check fuel pressure after 5 seconds when the ignition switch has been turned ON.
Fuel pressure measurement
1 1
--
When ignition switch is ON During idling
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) kPa (kglcm2, psi)
Appro~. 294 (3.0, 43) Approx. 245 (2.5, 36) Approx. 294 (3.0, 43)
Idling when pressure regulator vacuum hose is removed. kPa (kglcm2, psi)

8. Evaporative Gas Control System lnspection
8-1 PURGE CONTROL VALVE INSPECTION
lnspection
Use a hand vacuum pump to apply approximately -53.3 kPa (-400 mmHg, -15.75 inHg) and make sure vacuum pressure is maintained. In the preceding condition, check that a small amount of air can be sucked from the manifold vacuum path.
9. Blowby Gas Reduction Equipment lnspection

Blwb control
valve
9-1 BLOWBY CONTROL VALVE INSPECTION lnspection

Check the blowby control valve flow path,
Condition
Air passes.
Air is blown.
Air is drawn in.
No air passes.

10. Removal and Installation of On-vehicle Parts
10-1 INTERCOOLER AIR DUCT ASSEMBLY
@ : Am-
R : Mm (kg-rn lt-ib) -replace alter every disassembly.
@- U 'N
(2) m l 6 21 (1.6 21, 12 15)
Remove front bumper. (Refer to Section Dl-1, Body.)
[Point I] hose, air duct cleaning Air

8
Before removing each air hose and air duct, blow off any dirt or dust with an air gun.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 10. Removal and Installation of On-vehicle Parts (Cont'd)
[Point 21 Remove and install each air hose and tube. Removal
a
Draw alignment marks before removing air hoses and tubes. Position air hoses and tubes so the alignment marks coincide. Insert [approximately 30 mm (1.18 in)] hose or tube and tighten clamps securely .
Installation
a
[Point 31 Remove and install the intercooler inlet hose. Removal

a
Remove the resonator and tube
before removing hose
Go.
Installation a Attach hose @ , then combine resonator and tube @ as a
single unit and install.
[Point 41 Remove and install intercooler. Removal @ Remove the bumper finisher and bumper reinforcement.
(Refer to Section D Body for details.)
@ Separate the intercooler inlet and outlet hoses. @ Remove the mounting bolt and two nuts, Detach intercooler without scratching the fins .
CAUTION: (1) The fins are aluminum and can be damaged easily. Never place anything on the intercooler or allow tools or other hard objects to contact the fins. (2) The main unit (tank, fins, tube) cannot be disassembled.
Installation
0
Assembly is the reverse of disassembly. Perform steps in the sequence @ , @ , @ . Tightening torque 9.1 11.8 N-m (0.93 1.2 kg-m, 6.7 8.7 ft-lb)
[Point 51 Recirculation hose removal and installation

Remove and install the recirculation hose and tube as shown in the figure on the left.
[Point 61 Recirculation hose clamp installation
When the recirculation hose clamp is installed, it must not contact the bumper finisher.
[Point 71 Recirculation valve inspection Unit inspection

Use a hand vacuum pump to apply a vacuum [-20.04~2.7 kPa (-150 k 20 mmHg, -5.91 & 0.79 inHg)] and check that recirculation valve diaphragm lifts and vacuum pressure is maintained.
Recirculation valve
'
[Point 81 Turbocharger outlet tube removal and installation

Remove and install turbocharger outlet tube as shown in figure on left.
10-2 AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
Additional work required:

Remove turbocharger outlet hose. [Point 2 1
Air duct
[Point 11 Air hose and air duct cleaning
Use an air gun to blow off any dirt or dust before removing the air cleaner element.
[Point 21 Air cleaner element removal and installation Removal (T) Remove turbocharger outlet hose.
(2) Remove the four band clips from air cleaner. Lift air cleaner
cover and remove air cleaner element.
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal.
[Point 3 Air cleaner element inspection 1

Air cleaner element must not be dirty or damaged.
Periodic replacement interval: Every 60,000 km (36,000 miles)
'
'
element
I
[Point 41 Air cleaner cover installation
First connect air flow meter connector for front turbocharger and then install air cleaner cover.
10-3 COLLECTOR ASSY
(1) Collector ASSY removal and installation
No. 3 throttle chamber
Qf Throttle chamber gasket\
NO. 2 throttle chamber
Knock in (61
Bolt
16 21 (1.6 21, 12 15)
@ Always replace after every disassembly.
n: Mm (kg-ro ft-lb)
I
Additional work required Drain and refill cooling water. [Point 21 Release fuel pressure in the fuel lines. [Point 11 Acceleration control wire [Point 3 1 Air inlet hose EGI harness connector, harness clamp All hoses
[Point 11 Release fuel pressure
Start the engine. After engine starts, remove fuel pump fuse and wait until engine stops. Crank engine two or three times to use up fuel remaining in fuel lines. If the vehicle will not start, remove the fuel pump fuse, crank the engine 4 to 5 times to use up fuel in fuel lines. CAUTION: Connect the battery with booster cables to a battery in another vehicle or charged battery since the battery may drain easily.
[Point 21 Drain the cooling water.

Remove drain plug from cylinder block to drain all coolant from block. CAUTION: Make sure coolant does not fall on front exhaust pipe.
., ,
.-
[Point 3 Accelerator wire adjustment 1

Loosen lock nut to provide adequate slack for the accelerator wire and pull outer case in the direction of the accelerator. Return lock nut 1.0 to 1.5 turns from the position the throttle drum starts moving (when there is no play in cable) and tighten. Tightening torque: 8 10 N-m (0.8 1.0 kg-m, 5.8 7.2 ft-lb)
n: Always replace after every disassembly.

[Point 41 Remove throttle chamber linkage.
Remove mounting nuts indicated by arrow marks. Separate the three throttle chamber links from collector side. Remove harness from throttle sensor and throttle valve switch.
[Point 51 Fuel pipe removal
Remove the three bolts indicated by the arrows and separate the fuel pipe.
[Point 61 Air hose removal

0
Separate air hoses
0, @
and @ from the collector side
/if^
[Point 71 Booster vacuum tube removal

Remove the clamp bolts, separate booster vacuum tube from collector and air chamber and remove tube.
Booster vacuum tube
[Point 81 Air chamber bolts removal and installation Removal

0
Remove the three bolts and separate air chamber. Insert bolt @ in air chamber bolt hole, before performing final assembly.
Installation
0
Tightening torque:
16
- 21 N-m (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb)
[Point 91 Collector nut removal and installation Removal

0
Remove the nuts in the reverse order of the figure on the left. Tighten nuts in order shown in figure on left uniformly in two to three stages.
Installation
0
Tightening torque:
16
- 21 N-m (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb)

Additional work required: a Drain and refill cooling water. (Refer to section B6, 3.) a Remove and install: Cooling fan, water pump pulley Alternator adjustment bolt Timing belt cover, timing belt CAUTION: Loosen engine drain plug to remove cooling water from cylir der block. (If water is only drained from the radiator drain cock, the cy inder block will not drain completely.)
[Point I] Water pump removal and installation
Removal
a
When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to ge coolant on timing chain. If any water does spill, wipe it 01 immediately. Remove water pump bolts in the reverse of sequence ii figure on left. Install bolts in the numbered sequence in figure on left.
I
: M6 (1) *bl : (long)
.,
Installation
a
: MI0 (short) others a re M (6) B
Installation location
Bott size
Number of bolts
Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and cleaning

Insert stubby screwdrivers in bolt holes as shown, anc move them up and down to remove water pump, CAUTION: Be careful not to damage screws in cylinder block side. a Use a scraper to remove all traces of liquid gasket from mating surface. CAUTION: Also remove any liquid gasket remaining in grooves. Clean installation surface with white gasoline.
5 2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE

I
Installation
Cut nozzle end of liquid gasket tube (KP510 00150) as shown in figure and use tube presser for application.
, qCut here.
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket 2.0 to 3 0 mm (0,079 to 0.118 in) wide along the . groove of installation surface. In sections where there is no groove arround bolt hole, coat middle of inside seal surface.
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket (KP51000150) to water pump sealing surface. CAUTION: (1) Be sure liquid gasket is 2.0 to 3.0 mm (0.079 to 0.118 in) wide. (2) Installation should be done within 5 minutes after liquid gasket application.
[Point 21 Water pump inspection Rotate water pump by hand and check for abnormal sound 0 and smooth operation. 0 There must be no traces of water leaks. 10-14 THERMOSTAT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Tools required
Name
Tube presser
Application Liquid gasket application
WS3993 Tool
,
Measurement Thermometer tool Water temperature measurement
0 Thermostat
housing [Point 1 1
Additional work required: Drain and refill cooling water, CAUTION: Loosen engine drain plug to remove cooling water from cylinder block. (If water is only drained from the radiator drain cock, the cylinder block will not drain completely.) Disconnect and connect water inlet hose.
: Liquid gasket 12. 15 ft-lb)
6 2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE

[Point 11 Thermostat housing removal and installation
Removal and cleaning

Insert screwdriver handle into thermostat housing. Pry lightly up and down and remove housing. Use a scraper to remove the liquid gasket, 0 CAUTION: Be sure to also remove liquid gasket in grooves. Clean mating surface with white gasoline or equivalent.
Installation
Cut nozzle end of liquid gasket (KP510 00150) tube as shown in figure.
Cut here.
r
1
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket (KP510 00150) to sealing surface using tube presser, and install the housing within 5 minutes after coating. CAUTION: Be sure liquid gasket is 2.0 to 3.0 mm (0.079 to 0.118 in) wide.
Tightening torque
Apply a continuous coat of liquid gasket 2.0 to 3.0 mm (0.079 to 0.118 in) wide to center of flat mating surface and inner sealing surfaces of bolt holes (if provided).
16 - 21 N-rn (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb)
Jiggle valve
[Point 21 Thermostat installation

"TOP" mark (jiggle valve) must face up when thermostat is inserted in housing.
[Point 3 Thermostat inspection 1

8
Check valve opening temperature and maximum valve lift. Hang thermostat by string in valve and submerge in heated water in double walled container and stir water while heating it up. The opening temperature is the temperature when the valve opens and thermostat falls from string.
Valve opening temperature ' (F C ') rnm (in)IoC(OF) Max. valve lift
1 1
Standard, cooled location 76.5 (170)

10 (0.39) min./90 (194)
8 2 RB26 DOHC EG! (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE

10-15 OIL COOLER, OIL FILTER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Tools required
Name
Application Oil filter removal and installation
1 Oil filter wrench

Special tool
Oil pressure switch
: Always replace after every

16 21 (1.6 2.1, 1
disassembly.
: N"n (kg-m, ft-lb)
(0.64 0-85, 4.6
- 6.1)
Oil filter
sensor
Additional work required: Drain and refill cooling water. CAUTION: Loosen engine drain plug to remove cooling water from cylinder block. (11 water is only drained from the radiator drain cock, the cylinder block will not drain completely.) Disconnect and connect switch harness connectors.
[Point I] Oil f l e itr
removal and installation
Removal
1. Remove ol level gauge. i 2. Remove turbocharged pressure control vacuum hose clamp and move vacuum hose out of the way. 3. Move main harness clamp out of the way. 4. Remove oil filter using oil filter wrench.
Small ratchet
wen&

Installation
Before installing new oil filter, wipe off dust, etc. from oil filter mounting bracket surface. Apply a thin coat of engine oil to oil filter O-ring, Screw oil filter on bracket by hand until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 213 turn with oi! filter wrench. After tightening, start engine and check for oil leaks.
Removal
e
Face lower part of oil filter down and move out in direction of arrow in figure on left. Remove through aperture behind manifold collector.

11. Engine Removal and Installation
Basic items
This section describes how to use an engine hoist and transmission jack to remove and install the RB26DETT engine. Additional work required: Inspection and adjustment after installation Position vehicle on a flat and solid surface. Remove and install: Battery Engine hood Cooling water Radiator Starter motor Front drive shaft Transmission ASSY Engine compartment left side: Exhaust gas sensor harness disconnection Ground line connector separation Power steering oil pump [Point 41. Air conditioning compressor [Point 41. Air inlet pump, air cleaner upper case Engine compartment front side: Cooling fan Engine compartment upper side: ECCS harness connectors Engine compartment right side: Fuel feed, return hoses separation [Point 11. Accelerator cable separation [Point 21. Engine main harness and ground line separation [Point 31. 0 Heater hose separation Vacuum hoses separation Vehicle body, lower side: Engine under cover Front section of exhaust pipe separation 1 Right and left engine mount brackets [Point 6, 7 a Power steering oil tube separation [Point 51
[Point 1 Release fuel pressure 1 After starting engine, remove fuel pump fuse and run engine until it stops. Crank the engine over two or three times to consume fuel in fuel lines. When unable to start vehicle, remove fuel pump fuse and crank engine four to five times to consume fuel in fuel lines.
CAUTION: The battery can be run down easily, so connect booster cables l o another vehicle or charged battery.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 11. Engine Removal and Installation (Cont'd)
6;
!yo
. , ,,,.
>
N.~II (0.8
- 3.0
l l
[Point 21 Accelerator wire adjustment

Loosen lock nut to provide adequate slack for the acceier ator wire, and pull outer case in the direction of the accel erator pedal until throttle drum starts to move (when there is no play in cable). Return lock nut 1.0 to 1.5 turns t h e r
Tightening torque
Q-~II, 5.8
- 7.2 ft-b)
8 - 10 N-m (0.8- 1.0 kg-m, 5.8- 7.2ft-lb)
[Point 31 Engine main harness, ground line separation

Disconnect connectors behind battery for harnesses o alternator, starter motor and transmission systems,
[Point 41 Air compressor, power steering oil pump movement

Remove bolts securing each unit to brackets. Leave pipes connected and secure to side of body with string, being careful not to scratch body.
[Point 51 Power steering fluid tube bracket separation

Remove bolts, and separate power steering fluid tube bracket, and move toward body side,
[Point 61 Front engine mounting nut removal

0
Make sure engine slings are securely hooked by engine hoist chain and remove front engine mounting nuts.
Tightening torque
43 - 55 N-m (4.4 - 5.6 kg-m, 32 - 41 ft-lb)
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI
(ECCS)TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 11. Engine Removal and Installation (Cont'd)

[Point 71 Right front engine mounting bracket removal
Remove nut and remove right engine mounting bracket to move engine toward front of vehicle.
[Point 81 Engine ASSY removal and installation

Operate hoist chain, and change engine angle gradually, being careful so it does not interfere with vehicle and remove engine.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 12. Oil Pan, Oil Pump and Oil Strainer Removal and Installation
Tools required
Name
Seal cutter KV101 11100 Oil pan removal
Special tools
Oil seal drift
Oil seal insertion
Liquid gasket application
Tool
(1) OIL PAN, OIL PUMP AND OIL STRAINER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
a Engine ASSY removal and installation a Engine oil draining and refilling
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 12. Oil Pan, OH Pump and Oil Strainer Removal and Installation (Cont'd)
[Point 11 Oil pan bolt, nut removal and installation
Removal
Remove bolts and nuts in reverse order of installation
shown in figure on left.

Installation
Tighten nuts and bolts in numerical order shown in figure on left. CAUTION: Make sure there is no dirt, dust or debris on oil pan installation surface.
Installation position
Bolt size
Number of bolts
@(7)@@-@,@-
@@@
() @ @ @ @ @ @ I
MI0
14
31 - 42 (3.2- 4.3, - 31) 23
M I 0 (nut)
3 - 42 1 (3.2 - 4.3. 23 - 31)
[Point 21 Oil pan removal and installation Removal and cleaning

a
ln'sert seal cutter between cylinder block and oil pan and remove oil pan by tapping seal cutter.
Use a scraper to remove all traces c iquid gasket from mating surface. CAUTION: (1) Use a scraper to remove all liquid gasket and seal material attached to cylinder block and oil pan flange groove. Remove all gasket material and other debris that falls into the oil pan. (2) Be careful not to scratch' oil pan. Clean all contact surfaces with white gasoline or equivalent.
Installation
Cut off nozzle tip of liquid gasket (KP510 00510) at point shown in figure on left and insert in tube presser.
Cut here
B2 RB26 DOHC EG1 (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 12. Oil Pan, Oil Pump and Oil Strainer Removal and Installation (Cont'd) Tube presser
WS3993
Installation
Apply liquid gasket to inner sealing surfaces as shown in figure. Installation should be performed within 5 minutes after coating. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket (KP510 00150) to mating surfaces of oil pan.
T3
(0.28
in) '
Apply liquid gasket (KP510 00150) to areas 7 m m (0.28in) inside from center of oil pan bolt holes. CAUTION: (1) Be sure liquid gasket application is 4.0 mm (0.157 in) wide. (2) Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling engine oil and engine coolant.
Groove
Bolt hole
[Point 3 Oil strainer installation 1 When installing oil strainer, make sure O r i n g is inserted securely in groove and then install.
M8
M6
16 - 21 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 15)
6 . 3 - 8 3 (0.64 -0.85. 4.6 .
- 6.1)
: N-m (kg-m, ft-Ib) : Always redace after everv disassembiv.
^^
[Point 41 Oil pump installation bolts There are 4 types of bolts so be careful not to mistake them when they are installed.
I
Length below head mm (in)
Number of bolts
Tightening torque N-m tka-m. ft-lbl
[Point 51 Front oil seal removal and installation Removal

Use a screwdriver to remove front oil seal from front cover.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI fECCSl TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 12. Oil Pan, Oil Pump and Oil Strainer Removal and Installation (Cont'd)
Installation a Be careful not to scratch or damage oil seal retainer. Use oil seal drift and insert it at same level as front surface 01 oil pump housing. Apply engine oil or chassis grease to area around oil seal lip.
[Point 61 Oil leak and oil pressure check After installation, warm up engine and check for oil leaks 0
and proper oil pressure. To perform oil pressure inspection, remove oil pressure switch and attach oil pressure gauge.
Engine speed
(rpm)
Idling
2,000
6,000
Delivery pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Approx. 147 Approx. 294 Approx. 451 (4.6. 65) (1.5, 2 1 ) (3, 431
Oil temperature at 80bC (176-F;
n :NTO (kg-m, ft-lb)
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 12. Oil Pan, Oil Pump and Oil Strainer Removal and Installation (Cont'd)
(3) OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Screw (7) m3.7 5.0 ( . 8 0.51.27 03

" I [Point 21
- 3.7)
fle~ulator washer
Re hator plug 69 (4.0 7.0, 29 511
[Point 11 Oil pump inspection

Check inner gear, outer gear and housing for scratches c wear. Use a feeler gauge and measure the following clearance:
I
Measurement position and housina clearance
Standard value
m m (in
-Outer dear
1 0.114- 0.2 (0.0045- 0.00791

0.180 (0.0071) rnax. 0.05- 0.07 (0.0020 0.0028)
0.05 0.11 (0.0020 0.0043)
-Outer gear and inner gear top clearance 1

Inner gear and housing side clearance
Outer gear and housing side clearance
Inner gear and housing flange clearance
0.045- 0.091 (0.0018 0.0036) -
Measurement position (5) is the figure obtained by subtractin the housing flange outside diameter from the inner gear insid diameter.
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 12. Oil Pan, Oil Pump and Oil Strainer Removal and Installation (Cont'd) Measurement position (3), @
\
Measurement position (5)
Measurement position @
I,
[Point 21 Regulator inspection

0
Check oil pressure regulator valve sliding surface and spring for wear and damage.
Valve and valve hole clearance
0.04 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in)
[Point 31 Inner gear installation

Be careful because the inner gear has specific assembly direction. The side with the groove must face the cover side.
Groove

13. Engine Overhaul
This section describes the complete disassembly of the engine assembly removed from vehicle without transmission. It also explains the inspection, replacement of malfunctioning, damaged or worn parts, necessary adjustments and sequential assembly order to produce a standard engine condition.
13-1 OVERHAUL CAUTIONS
(1) Disassembly (D Use correct and suitable tools whenever possible, and do not try any unsafe or unreasonable procedures, (5) Be careful with operations on mating surfaces and sliding surfaces to prevent loss of surface accuracy. @ Make marks on disassembled parts for organized, thorough damage detection and precise assembly. @ Loosen nuts and bolts in a diagonal direction from the outside, being careful to follow the numerical order when indicated. (2) Inspection, repair and replacement (D Repair or replace after completing parts inspection following the inspection procedures. Perform the same inspection for the new parts and replace parts as necessary. (3) Assembly (D Always use a torque wrench to tighten nuts and bolts to the specified torque. @ Tighten nuts and bolts from the center to the outside diagonal direction, gradually in two or three successive stages. Follow the numerical order when indicated. (S) Gaskets, packing, oil seals and O-rings should be replaced with new ones in principle. (3) Each part should be cleaned thoroughly and blown off with compressed air. In particular, check that oil and water passages are not clogged or obstructed. @ Be careful not to scratch or damage sliding or mating surfaces. Clean off all dust, debris or foreign matter. Lubricate all sliding surfaces with an adequate coating of oil.
13-2 CYLINDER BLOCK ASSY ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY

Tools required
. ..- . .
Name
Application
Engine stand ASSY ST0501 SO00
Engine main unit overhaul
Engine attachment
KV101 06500 Special tools
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 13. Engine Overhaul (Cont'd)
Name
Application
Rear oil seal installation
Rear oil seal drift
Special tools
Pilot bearing puller ST1661 0001
Pilot bushing removal
I
Piston ring compressor Tools Piston ring expander Dial gauge Magnetic stand Piston ASSY installation Piston ring removal and installation
CL,,nO,,~,.,
ate. inspection
Crankshaft, etc. inspection -od, etc. inspection
Measuremen tools
.
-
Connecting rod aligner Bore gauge
Connecting rod inspection Cylinder block, etc. inspection
I
Service settings
Straightedge
t
Cylinder block, etc. inspection
Engine slinger
I
Front
f9\
Rear
tngine removal
. ..
..---..-,
--A
anu inaiaiiaiiuiu
:"-*mil-+;*,,
Rear oil seal [Point 71
seal retainer
4.6 - 6'1'
142 - 152 (14.5
- 15.5, 105 - 112)
[Point 14, 15. 17, 331

nap ring (Point 131
[Point 10, 18, 28, 291
(1.5+0.1, 10.8zkO.7)
[Refer to EN-921
Additional work required: Drain and refill: cooling water [Point 1 1 Remove and install: Engine Collector Throttle chamber intake manifold Turbocharger, exhaust manifold Timing belt Cylinder head ASSY Alternator Starter motor Clutch cover, clutch disc Oil pan, oil strainer
Water pump Oil pump Oil cooler, oil strainer All harnesses and connectors
Part -
Grade Indication
Selection Combination
Reference: Engine selection assembly
fi) Piston selection iston arade
urn1 mm (in; 3
Front mark
Grade Mo
.-
(No. 1
86 010 ( 3 38621 Man. 85 965 1 3844 Max . 3 Greater lean 85 955 63 38AO)
86 020 1 38661 Man 3 85.975 - 13 3801 Mas Greater than 85 965 13 3844: 0 035. 0 055 (0 OOlA - 0 00221
86 030 (3 3870) Max
-- -.
P'ston dld'TieIfrr
-.---.".. .
85 985 (3 3852) Max Greater Ittan 55375 f.1 3WSi
Piswn clearance
Piston pin grade (0.1)
'
'\< 1
Front
>) Main bearing selection

block beanno hOuSi19 inner d%ameler
unit rnm (in)
r ont
Bearing housing grade No. No I No. 2

No 3
Crankshaft lour-,
Grade No
1
Oil clearance
58 651 1 3091! 2 Greater titan 58 645 (2.30891 n
2 i
- - i -Greater than 58651 12.3091 1 l ~ r e athan l ~

58 657 12 30931
58 657 (2 3W3)
1
I 1
Greater tnan 56 663 m 30961 2 . 3
No.4
None
Yellow
ST0 A
No 5
STD 3
5-1 989 (2 1641)
No. 6
No 7
Max Greater than 54.963 (21639)
54.963 I2 1639)
Max Greater than 5-1.957 I2 16371
!
..
-v5
1 830
1.833
v I~OW
Blue
1 833 1 836
lueriiilicalion color IBearing gnae No.

54.957 12 1637)
None
Vellow ST0 4
Blue
Green
Max. Greater than 54 951 i 2 16341
1
'"
STO 3
ST0 5
STD 6
Bearlnp th'ckness
i
I
i
8
.
' I cleara"e loentificatnon color
1.827-1630 :630-1.8M 1833-1836 1836-1839 {o,071$ 0 07201 (0.0720 0 07221 100722 .0 0723) 1 4 0 0723. 0 0724)
a O 2 M 046 (0 OOWO 0018) Yellow
0 02810.046 (0.001110.0018)
0 02810 046 1 001110 0018) 0 Green
0.02810 047 (O.W11~00019> pink
'
Blue
Service setting pans. STD 0 . 6. US 0.25 mm (0 OW8 in1
/S&i
Front mark
Piston pin selection

1stamp11 1
2
Uml- mm (in1
Q
Piston oir
Cylinder
Grade No. Piston pin hole diameter vision pin external diameter Piston pin clearance
Service sotting Pislon ana pisto* pin ST0 1, STD 2. ST0 3. 0.506. 1 0 0 s
I
~ln)
I
21 006-21 000 10 0270 0.6266) 21.012
- 21.006 -
(~01 (ml
20.995 - 20 999 1 82% - 0 82631 0 -
10 B977. 0 827m ,. - .. . . . . ,
21 001 20 W5 10 8268 0 82661
0 005 0 017 10 0002 0 00071
Large end hole grade 10.1) No. (1-6)
symbol
0 Connecting rod bearing selection

Connecting roo large end. inside d i a m l e r Crank pin diameter
Upper journal grade No.. No. 1 to No. 7from left s d ie
.
1
I
.
Less than 51.007 (2 00611 51.000 (2.0079) Min

. . ""--~ ..
51.013 12.008^1 Max 51 007 (2.0081] Man. 1
I
I
Qraae No stamp
0
~ e a n r.. ig oraae NO
47 974 (1.8887) Max. Greater than 47.960 11.68851
c ~ n ~eartn~ thickness 1.500 1 503 (0 0591 - C I " Oil cleatance 0 02010.039 (0 CQo610 0015) lderitiiicalton color: None
STD 1
oii2i 1
-
STD 1 1.503. 7 506 10 0592 0 05931 O.02110.039 (0 OMS!O 0015) Brown
47 968 (1 6885) Man. Gnaler man 47 961 '.1.86821
. 1.503 - 1 506 (0 0592 - 0 0593)

0 020:0040 !0.000810 UOi6) Brown
STD 2 1.506 1.509 (0 0593 0 (15941 0 02110.040 (0 000810 00161 Green
Service selling pafis US 0 08 miT! (0 0031 in;. US 0 12 mm (0 0017 in). L'S 0 25 mm
(C W98 jn!
[Point 11 Cooling water, drain and refill
Draining
a
Drain the water in the cylinder block completely from thf drain plug.
Refilling
a
Refer to Cooling Water Filling Method (86) details. for
[Point 21 Engine stand installation and removal

a
The engine sub-attachment is attached by 6 bolts to engine mounting bracket on right side of engine.
[Point 31 Flywheel runout

a
Set dial gauge to flywheel where it contacts clutch. Turn the flywheel and measure the runout,
Runout (total indicator reading)
0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
[Point 41 Flywheel removal and installation Removal
Use ring gear stopper to secure flywheel and remove.
Installation
Before installing bolts, coat the thread and flange of bolt with engine oil, After tightening the flywheel installation bolts halfway, use the ring gear stopper to secure flywheel and tighten bolts,
Flywheel bolt tightening torque
(14.5
- 15.5 kg-m, 105 - 112 ft-lb)
142- 152N-m
8 8.5 mm (0.315 0.335 In)
[Point 51 Flywheel knock pin insertion

Insert the flywheel knock pin so pin protrudes 8 to 8.5 mrn (0.315 to 0.335 in).
Flywheel
[Point 61 Rear oil seal retainer removal and installation Removal

Insert a screwdriver in the gap between main bearing cap and rear oil seal retainer to remove seal.
'
Cleaning
Use a scraper to remove liquid gasket, CAUTION: Also remove liquid gasket in grooves. a Clean the cylinder block side in the same way. Clean mating surface with white gasoline or equivalent.
6 2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 13. Engine Overhaul (Cont'd)
Installation
a
cut here.
Apply liquid gasket to mating surface and install unit within 5 minutes after coating. Cut nozzle end of liquid gasket (KP510 00150) tube as shown in figure and use tube presser for application.
liaOC^
Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to mating surfaces 2.0 to 3.0mm (0,079 to 0.118 in'
Apply liquid gasket continuously to rear oil seal retainer as shown in the figure on left. CAUTION: (1) Be sure liquid gasket i s 2.0 to 3.0 mm (0.079 to 0.118 in) wide. (2) Refill engine oil and start engine 30 minutes after assembly is completed.
Align rear oil seal retainer with dowel pins. Tighten the 6 bolts uniformly.
torque
Rear oil seal retainer bolt tightening

(0.64
- 0.85kg-rn, 4.6- 6.1 ft-lb)
6.3 - 8.3 N-m
[Point 71 Rear oil seal removal and installation Removal Use a screwdriver or suitable tool to remove the seal
Installation
0
Be careful not to scratch or damage the oil seal perimeter area. Use an oil seal drift [outside diameter: 100 m m (3.94 in)] to install new oil seal. Apply a coat of engine oil or chassis grease to oil seal lip perimeter area.
B2 RB26 DOHC EG1 (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE
[Point 91 Piston and connecting rod ASSY removal and installation

Use a hammer handle or similar too! to press unit to cylinder head side.
Installation Set crank pin at B.D.C. (bottom dead center) position. Coat cylinder bore, crank pin and piston with engine oil. Assemble piston with front mark on piston head facing the front of engine. Use a piston ring compressor to install piston and connecting rod assembly in cylinder block.
CAUTION: Be careful not to strike or deform oil jet pipe with large end of connecting rod.
F r ont
[Point 101 Connecting rod nut tightening Apply engine oil to connecting rods and nuts before assembly. Tighten nuts in two or three stages.
I
1st time
Torque wrench
Angle wrench (")
14 - 16 N-m
(1.4
- 1.6 kg-m, 10 - 12 ft-lb)

60 65
2nd time
CAUTION: Do not use visual angle measurement for tightening torque if an angle wrench is not available.
EN-105
B2 RB26 DOHC EG1 (ECCS)TWIN-TURBOCHARGE ENGINE

13.
Engine Overhaul (Cont'd)
[Point 101 Connecting rod bearing installation a Apply engine oil to bearing surfaces when assembling connecting rods and bearings. Do not apply engine oil to rear side of bearing, only clean this area. Align connecting rod bearing retainer notches and install. Align connecting rod oil holes and bearing oil holes.
[Point 111 Oil jet installation a Set oil jet position securely and check that it does not interfere with piston. If oil jet pipe contacts piston or is bent, replace it with new part.
Oil jet tightening torque
30 40 N-m (3.1 - 4.1 kg-rn, 22 30 ft-lb)
[Point 121 Piston ring removal and installation

Removal Use piston ring expander to remove rings.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch piston.
Installation
a
Use piston ring expander to install piston rings in correct position.
Identification
mark
The stamped marks on top and second piston ring openings must face up.
Oil ring spacer \
Top ring opening ,Oil ring Upper rail opening
Position piston ring openings as shown in the figure on left and install. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch piston.
second ring opening
Lower rail opening
[Point 131 Snap ring removal and installation
Removal
Use snap ring pliers to remove rings.
Installation
Use snap ring pliers and install ring securely in groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap rings.
[Point 141 Piston pin removal and installation When removing and installing piston pin, use a heat gun to heat piston to 60 to 70% (140 to 158OF).
Place suitable tool against piston pin and use press or plastic hammer.
Piston pin press-fit

Apply a liberal amount of oil to pin, pin hole, and connecting rod small hole.
1
Oil hole
Front mark
Position piston front mark so the connecting rod oil hole faces right side of engine (left side when viewed from front) and press-f it. CAUTION: Press-fit piston pin from the front of piston to the rear side of piston.
Front
[Point 151 Piston pin inspection

Measure outside diameter of piston pin with micrometer.
Standard
20.989 - 21.001 m m (0.8263 0.8268 in)
Micrometer
[Point 161 Piston inspection

Measure outside piston skirt diameter with micrometer.
Measuring point Distance from bottom: 13 mm (0.51 in)
Standard
85.955 - 85.985 mrn (3.3840- 3.3852 in)
1
-
Measure inside diameter of piston pin hole with inside micrometer.

Standard
20.987 - 20.999 mrn (0.8263- 0.8267 in)
Five types of pistons are available for service (STDI, STD2, STD3, 0.50S, 1.00s).
[Point 171 Piston pin clearance inspection

0
Piston pin clearance is the figure obtained by subtracting the piston pin outside diameter [Point 151 from the piston pin hole inside diameter [Point 161.
I
Piston pin clearance at normal temperature [20nC(68OF
0 t -0.004 (0 t -0.0002 in) o o
[Point 181 Connecting rod inspection Bend and torsion inspection

Measure the bend and torsion with connecting rod aligner
- --
Bend limit Torsion limit
0.15 m m (0.0059in)
0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Small end inside diameter inspection 0 Using an inside micrometer, measure inside diameter of connecting rod small end.
Standard
21.000 - 21.012 mm (0.8266 0.8272 in) -
Connecting rod bearing inside diameter inspection a Install connecting rod bearing in connecting rod and cap.
Tighten connecting rod nuts to specified torque and measure connecting rod bearing inside diameter.
Connecting rod nut tightening torque Standard value
1st time
2nd time
Torque wrench Angle wrench
14 - 16 N-m (1.4 1 6 kg-m, - . 10 - 12 ft-lb) 6' - 6' 0 5
47.989- 48.007 m m (1.8893- 1.8900 in)
[Point 191 Connecting rod small end bushing clearance The measurement difference of the small end inside diameter [Point 181 and outside diameter of piston pin [Point 151 is the bushing clearance. (Full float type)
Bushing clearance standard
0.005- 0.017 rnm (0.0002 0.0007 in) -
Cylinder
No. ( 1 - 6)
symbol
The connecting rod small end and piston pin outside diameter are separated into two grades at the factory. Check that the grades (0.1) conform for both parts because the rod and pin are selected and fitted according to bushing clearance.
[Point 201 Connecting rod cap bolts Connecting rod cap bolts have grooves to prevent them
from disengaging. For this reason, do not tap the ends to remove bolts.
[Point 211 Piston ring end gap and side clearance Ring end gap inspection Using a piston, press the piston ring into the middle of the
cylinder, and measure the g a p .
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
Bore grade 1, 2,
(0.0094- 0.0134)
- 0.0224)
- 0.0236)
Side clearance inspection

Measure the clearance between piston ring and piston ring groove.
Top ring
2nd ring
Oil ring
Standard mm (in)
I
0.040 - 0.075 (0.0016 0.0030) a
0.030 - 0.065 0.065 - 0.135 (0.0012- 0,0026) (0.0026- 0.0053)
Three types of piston rings (STD, 0.50S, 1.003) are available for service.
[Point 221 Crankshaft thrust clearance inspection a Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance between the
thrust bearing (No. 4 bearing) and the crank arm when moving the crankshaft toward front and rear of engine.
Standard
Limit 0.05 0.18 mm (0.0020 - 0.0071 in)
0.3 rnm (0.012 in)
[Point 231 Pilot bushing removal and installation Removal

Use a pilot bearing puller to remove pilot bushing.
(I/
Pilot bearing puller ST1661 0000
Installation a The pilot bushing installation position is shown in figure on

left.
[Point 241 Main bearing bolt removal and installation Removal

Remove bearing bolts in reverse order of numbered sequence shown in the figure.
Installation
Tighten the bearing bolts to the specified torque in two or three steps in the sequence shown in the figure. After tightening to the specified torque, check that crankshaft turns smoothly.
Main bearing bolt tightening torque
46
- 52 N-m (4.7- 5.3 kg-m, 34 - 38 ft-lb)
Apply a coating of engine oil to the bolt threads and bolt seats.
[Point 251 Main bearing cap removal and installation
Removal
Use screwdrivers to pry the bearing caps open. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the oil pan rail surface.
Installation
Position main bearing cap ensuring the installation direction, then fit onto cylinder block by lightly tapping it in a number of locations with a copper hammer or suitable tool.
[Point 261 Main bearing inspection

0
The bearing end should protrude when installed in main bearing cap or cylinder block.
This protrusion is called the crush height.
c
[Point 271 Crankshaft inspection Out-of-round and taper inspection Use a micrometer to check each journal (No. 1 to No. 7) and each pin (No. 1 to No. 6) in four locations shown in the figure. The out-of-round value is the difference of the dimensions in directions ( and @I. The taper value is the difference of the dimensions measured at points (T) and @ .
Out-of-round and taper limit
0.005 m m (0.0002in)
Pin and journal inspection Use a micrometer to measure pin and journal diameters.
Pin diameter standard
47.961 47.974 m m (1.8882
Journal diameter standard
- 1.8887 in) 54.951 - 54,975 mm (2.1634 - 2.1644 in)
6 2 RB26 DOHC EGI E C C S ) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 13. Engine Overhaul (Cont'd) Curve inspection
I
Use V-blocks on a fixed surface and support journals o both ends of crankshaft (No. 1 and No. 7). Position the dial gauge vertically on middle of No. 4 joui nal as shown. Turn crankshaft by hand in one direction and read die gauge movement. The runout is equal to one-half of dial gauge movement.
Limit
0,05rnrn (0.0020in)
[Point 281 Connecting rod bearing oil clearance inspection
Method A (using inside micrometer and micrometer)

0
The oil clearance can be calculated from the connectin! rod bearing inside diameter and the crankshaft pin diame ter measured in [Point 181 and [Point 271. (oil clearance) = (bearing inside diameter) - (crankshaf pin diameter)
Method B (using plastigage) 0 Remove all dust from crankshaft pins and bearing surfaces
Cut off a piece of plastigage slightly shorter than the bear-
ing width. Place the plastigage on crankshaft in direction o axis, being careful not to place on oil hole. Assemble connecting rod bearing in connecting rod car and tighten connecting rod nuts to specified torque.
connecting rod nut tiaht" ening torque
me 2nd time
Torque wrench
I
14 16 N-m (1.4 1.6 kg-m, 10 12 it-lb)
Angle wrench (')
60 - 65
CAUTION: Do not turn crankshaft or connecting rod while plastigage is being inserted. Remove connecting rod cap and bearing. Measure plastigage width with plastigage scale.
Standard
Limit
0.020- 0.040 m m (0.0008 0.0016 in) -
0.090mrn (0.0035in)
If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, refer to [Point 291 and select the appropriate bearing,
[Point 291 Connecting rod bearing selection and engaging
Select the proper sized bearing because connecting rod bearing prevents fluctuation in the oil clearance. Three bearing thicknesses are available to fit the inside diameter of the big end of connecting rod and the crank pin diameter grade. When replacing connecting rod bearing, check big end inside diameter grade (indicated on the opposite side of connecting rod oil hole) and the pin diameter grade (indicated on crankshaft No. 1 counterweight front surface). Select connecting rod bearing with proper thickness according to the following table,
Main iournal orade number,
./
Connecting rod bearing selection chart

Unit: rnm (in)
*w
example
end inside Grade

Crank pin diameter
51.013 (2.0084) max. (2.0081) 51.007 (2.0081) min. diameter 51.000 (2.0079)ma%.
umber
Less than 51.007
stamp
Bearing grade No.: STD 0 Bearing thickness:
ST0 1
47.974 (1 3887) max. Greater than 47.968 (1.8885)
1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591- 0.0592) Oil clearance: 0.020/ 0.039 (0.0008/0.0015) Identification color:
None
1.503- 1.506 (0.0592 0.0593) 0.02110.039 (0.000810.0015)

Brown
STD 1
47.968 (1.8885) max. 47.961 (1.8882)min.
1
ST0 2
1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592- 0.0593) 0.020/0.040 (0.0008/0.0016) Brown
1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 0.0594) 0.021/0.040 (0.000810.0016)

Green
a
When using undersize bearings, measure bearing inside diameter when bearing is installed. Grind pin so oil clearance conforms to specified value.
Unit: mm (in)
I
Size
Thickness
Grade No
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch fillet roll when the crank pin is being ground for use with undersize bearing.
[Point 301 Main bearing oil clearance

Method A (using bore gauge and micrometer)
0
Install main bearing in cylinder block and attach bearing cap. Tighten bearing cap bolts to specified torque and rneasure bearing inside diameter.
46 - 52 N'rn (4.7 - 5.3 kg-m, 34 38 ft-lb)
Bearing cap bolt tightening torque
The oil clearance distance can be calculated from the values for the outside diameter of crank journal measured in [Point 271. (Oil clearance) = (bearing inside diameter - (crankshaft outside diameter)
B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE 13. Engine Overhaul (Cont7d)
Standard Limit
0.028- 0.047 mm (0.0011 0.0019 in) 0.090 mm (0.0035 i n )
If oil clearance exceeds limit value, refer to [Point 311 and select suitable bearing. Method B (using plastigage) e Remove all dust and oil from each crankshaft journal and bearing surface. Cut off a piece of plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width. Place the plastigage on crankshaft in direction of axis, being careful not to place on oil hole. Assemble main bearing and bearing cap. Install bearing cap onto cylinder block and tighten cap bolts to the specified torque.
Bearing cap bolt tightening torque
I
46 - 52 N'm (4.7 - 5.3 kg-m, 34 - 38 fl-lb)
CAUTION: Do not turn crankshaft while plastigage is being inserted. Remove bearing cap and bearing. Measure plastigage width on plastigage scale. CAUTION: If excessive bearing clearance still exists, use a thicker main bearing or undersized bearing so that the specified bearing clearance is obtained when measured by Method A as well.
[Point
Main bearing selection and engagement
Select the proper sized bearing because main bearing prevents fluctuation in the oil clearance. Seven bearing thicknesses are available to fit the cylinder block bearing housing and crank journal diameter grade. Note: Selection engagement is performed only for standard size.
No. 1 bearing housiw grade No.
Pin journal grade, No, 1 to No. 6 from left side
When replacing main bearing, check the bearing grade (indicated on bottom face of cylinder block) and journal diameter grade (indicated on crankshaft No. 1 counterweight front surface). Select main bearing with proper thickness according to the following table.
Stamp
example ir\

13.
Main bearing selection table
Unit: mm (in
r
Engine Overhaul (Cont'd)
Cylinder block bearing
58.651 (2.3091) Max.

Greater than
58.657 (2.3093) Max.

Greater than
58.663 (2.3096)
Max. Greater than
58.670 (2.3098)
Max. Greater than
58.645 (2.3089)
Crankshaft journal diameter irade No. stamp
58.651 (2.3091) 1
58,657 (2.3093)
2
58.663 (2.3096)
1 Bearing grade No. 1

54.975 (2.1644) Max,
Greater than Bearing thickness
n
STD 0
STD 1
1.821 - 1.824 (0.0717 0.0718)
STD 2 1.824 1.827 (0.0718 - 0.0719) 0.028t0.046 (0.0011/0.0018)

None
STD 3 1.827 1.830 (0.0719 0.0720)
1.818 - 1.821 (0.0716 - 0.0717)
54.969 (2.1641)
Oil clearance Identification color Bearing grade No.
002810.046 st.001 I/O.OOIB)

Black
0.028/0.046 (0.001110.0018)
Brown
1 11 1
1
1 1 1
1
0.028/0.047 (0.0011/0.0019)
Yellow STD 4
STD 1
STD 2 1.824 1.827 (0.0716 - 0.0719)
STD 3
54.969 (2.1641)
Bearing thickness Oil clearance

.
Max. Greater than
1
-
1.821 1.824 (0.0717 0.0718)
1.827 - 1.830 (0.0719 - 0.0720) 0.028/0.046 (0.001l/O.OOl8)

Yellow-
54.963 (2.1639)
0.028/0.046 ( 0 ~ ~ 1 1 / ~ : ~ (0.001l/O.OOl8) ~18

Brown None
STD 3
0.028/0.047 (0.001l/O.OOl9)
Blue
Identification color Bearing grade No.
ST0 2 1.824 - 1.827 (0.0718 0,0719)
ST0 4
STD 5 1.833 1.836 (0.0722 0.0723)
54.963 (2.1639)
A
Bearing thickness
9
Max. Greater than
1.827 - 1.830 (0.0719 0.0720)
1.830 - 1.833 (0.0720 0.0722)
54.957 (2.1637)
Oil clearance Identification color B e a r i n g grade NO.
0.028/0.046 0.02810.046 0.02810.047 ( O Q ~ ~ ~I ~- ~ ~ : ~ ~ ~ (0.001~~0.0018) ~0.~01110.0019) ~0.0011~0.0018) 8 ) I I

None Yellow Blue
STD 5
1
1
Green
STD 6
STD 3
STD4 1.830 - 1.833 (0.0720 0.0722)
54.957 (2.1637)
Max. Greater than
Bearing thickness Oil clearance Identification color
1.827 - 1.830 (0.0719 0.0720)
54.951 (2.1634)
1
I
0.028/0.046 0.028/0.046 ( D 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ I ~ (0.DOlllO.OOl8) 3 I ) (0.001l/O.OOlB) ~ : ~ ~ ~ f

Yellow Blue Green
1.833 1,836 (0.0722 0.0723)
1
1
1.836 1.839 (0.0723 0.0724) 0.028/0.047 (0.0011/0.0019)

Pink
When using undersize bearings, measure bearing inside diameter when bearing is installed and grind journal so oi clearance conforms to specified clearance.
Unit: mrn (in Size Thickness
Grade No.
Unit : mm(in)
-w
CAUTION: When crankshaft journal is being ground for use with undersizc bearings, do not scratch the fillet roll.
[Point 321 Cylinder block inspection and correction Remove all oil and water deposits, gasket, seal material and carbon from cylinder block,
I
Straightedge
/I
Upper surface distortion and wear inspection

Clean upper face of cylinder block and measure the distortion in six directions.
Limit
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
If the distortion exceeds the specified limit, resurface face with surface grinder or replace block if necessary.
Cylinder inside diameter inspection Use bore gauge and measure cylinder bore for wear, outof-round and taper. Measure in three vertical locations (A, B, C) and two directions (X, Y) for a total of six locations.
Unit: mrn (in) Cylinder inside diameter standard Wear limit Out-of-round limit
Taper limit
86.000- 86.050 (3.3858- 3.3878)

0.2 (0.008)
0.015(0.0006)
0.010 (0.0004)
(1) Out-of-round measurement is difference of measurement in two directions (X. Y). (2) Taper is difference of measurement at top and bottom (A, C).
Perform honing or boring when abnormality is inspected.
Unit: mrn
(in)
Cylinder honing
0
There are three types of oversize pistons, STD (standard 0,021,OS (0.5) and OS (1.0). When oversize pistons ar used, hone the cylinder so the clearance between pisto and cylinder conforms to the specified value described i [Point 331. Oversize piston rings must be used that fit th oversize piston. The clearance can be calculated from the measured value for the piston skirt outside diameter [Point 161 and cylinde inside diameter [Point 321 (X direction B location). (piston skit (Clearance) = (cylinder inside diameter) outside diameter)
[Point 331 Piston-to-cylinder bore clearance

e
Standard at normal temperature
0.035
- 0.055 mm (0.0014 - 0.0022 in)
63 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System)
=
Tools required
Measurement tool
Name
Application Fuel pressure measurement
EGI fuel pressure gauge ST19590000
Circuit tester Handy vacuum pump EG1513 000
Resistance, voltage measurement Part inspection Engine speed inspection System inspection, diagnosis
1 Engine tachometer
Electronic system diagnosis tester CONSULT
Control unit input and output signal inspection
1 Oscilloscope

1. Trouble Diagnosis
1-1 TROUBLE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Customer interview
------ --------
occurrence condition, environment
I
1
Self-diagnosis
Check problem and understand -------------- occurrence conditions.
1
------------- Narrow down suspected systems
v
Basic inspection
Spark? Fuel?
Inspection for individual systems
-------------
Output signal Harness a Input signal
a Sensor
Confirmation test
CAUTION: Engine problems are roughly divided into two types: problems relating to engine main body and those related to control system. This section explains the trouble diagnostic method for the control system under the assumption that the engine main body is normal. Consequently, attention should also be paid to the condition of the engine main body and gasoline quality.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 1. Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)

KEY POINTS
WHAT WHEN WHERE HOW
(1) Diagnostic worksheet

There are many kinds of operating conditions that lead to malfunctions on engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trouble-shooting faster and more accurate. In general, feelings for a problem depend on each customer. It is important to fully understand the symptoms and conditions when a customer complains. Make good use of a diagnostic worksheet such as the one shown below in order to utilize all the complaints for troubleshooting,
VIN Mileage In Service Date
I
..... Vehicle & engine model

..... ..... .....
Date, Frequencies Road conditions Operatingconditions, Weather conditions, Symptoms
Worksheet sample
;ustomer name [ngine # ncident Date
I
MRtMS
Model & Year Trans. Manuf. Date
0 Startability
D Impossible to start
0 No combustion
D Partial combustion
0 Partial combustion affected by throttle position

D Partial combustion NOT affected by throttle position D Others [ Possible but hard to start
0 Idling
Symptoms
0 No last idle 0 Others I
0 Unstable
D High idle
Q Low idle
1
C
Surge
0 Stumble 0 Driveability
C Detonation
d Lack of power
El Intake backfire
D Exhaust backfire
0 Others [
0 At the time of start
D Engine stall
While accelerating Just after stopping
1
0 While idling
G While decelerating
0 While loading
ncident occurrence =requency Neather conditions
1 0 Just after delivery

D In the morning '"I All the time
0 Recently 0 At night D In the daytime

0 Sometimes
0 Under certain conditions

D Snowing G Cool
0 Not affected 0 Fine

D Hot D Cold
1 Weather
Temperature Engine conditions
0 Raining
0 Others [
U Humid
O F
warm-up
I
C Warm
C Cold
0 During warm-up
Zl After
I
Engine speed I
2.000
D In suburbs
4,000
Q Highway
6.000
J 8,000 rom
Road conditions
In town
0 Off road (uptdown)
Driving conditions
D Not affected 0 At starting C While idling 0 At racing 0 While cruising E While accelerating D While turning (RHILH) While decelerating
v e h i c l e speed i
1
3
10
20
. 30
1
40
50
60MPH
Check engine light
D Turned on
3 Not turned on

(2) Problem confirmation
Customer's explanation is often insufficient in clarifying the status of the problem. Reproduction of the problem on the actual car and its confirmation and analysis are therefore essential. If unable to reproduce the problem, ask the customer in detail about its occurrence conditions and try to reproduce it under the indicated conditions. If unable to reproduce, manually shake the concerned harness to check for poor contact or other problems. It is also recommended to collect and analyze the data using CONSULT while driving. When checking the actual vehicle, record data on normal portions to assist in diagnosing a problem.
(3) Self-diagnosis
If problems are attributable to the ECCS signal system, problem diagnosis should be narrowed down using the self-diagnostic function.
a What happened up to present?
How about the signal system at present? Self-diagnosis Real-time diagnosis or switch ONIOFF diagnosis using the CONSUIT "Data Monitor"'function.
(4) Basic inspection a Check if the three elements of combustion are functioning
normally. Find out which system is faulty; fuel system, ignition system or idling control system.
Fuel? Ignition?
--
Are injector and fuel pump operating? Are sparks present? Is AAC valve operating? Is air-fuel ratio feedback function normal?
a idling control?
a Air-fuel ratio?
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 1. Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd) (5) Individual system inspection
An efficient method for ECCS diagnosis is to check the control unit output signals first. Continue by checking individual parts such as actuators and sensors as well as input signals according to the results of the output signal check.
[Procedure]
Note: The input data must be monitored first when usina CONSULT (Only checking the output data does not provide accurate results.)

[Analysis]
Sensor
Control unit
Actuator
L
sensor.
No sensor output indicates a faulty
if sensor output is present even though there is no input signal, the harne-is is broken.
If no output signal is present though input signal is provided, the harness is faulty or control unit is
If actuator and contrd unit are
norral when no
output signal is pfwi-%d, the harness is broken.
If actuator does not operate though output signal is provided the actuate.' is faulty.
53
ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System)

1.
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)

-
(6) Trouble diagnosis using measuring instruments (Operations in square frames1 - 1 performed with CONSULT.)
. . . .. . . .. .
to be
Diagnosis
(T) Reproducible problems

When using CONSULT

"SELF-DIAG RESULTS"
"DATA MONITOR"
Switch ONIOFF Real-time diagnosis
-1
(Data collection)
"DATA MONITOR" Input signal monitoring 'Monitoring of calculation results sent to output system
4-Analysis
"ACTIVE TEST"
(Checks operation of in put & output signal system.)
"
Understanding -Oscilloscope the cause (Waveform observation for injector, ignition system, AAC valve and other output signals) When not using CONSULT

Self-diagnosis(on-board)
Oscilloscope (or circuit tester) (110 signal waveform observation)
@ Nonreproducible
problems
1
"DATA MONITOR" ''ACT1 VE TEST"
(Waveform observation using Or oscilloscope) -Waveform observation using oscilloscope
<-Analysis Understandin! the cause

1-2 MAJOR ECCS INPUT SIGNALS AND CONTROL ITEMS Understanding the relationship between the input signals and control items (output) of ECCS is essential to efficiently determine the cause of oroblems.
Fuel injection control (injector)
D
Ignition control (power transistor, IGN coil)
Idle control (ACC valve)
Crank angle sensor 1 0 signal 2'

D
Determination of injector injection timing Engine rpm input signal Engine speed input signal Intake air volume measurement and control of injector injection pulse width Engine temperature enrichment correction Fuel cut range change Start time enrichment
-
* Ignition timing start point
..
Engine rpm input signal
Crank angle sensor 1' signal
D 1
Air flow meter
Engine temperature sensor

0
perature
Start signal
0
Ignition timing control during cranking
Throttle sensor
.
0
Fuel injection interrupt Enrichment correction during acceleration and deceleration Fuel cut judgment during speed change control Intake air volume measurement
-
. -
Soft idle switch (idle judgment by throttle opening angle)
Fuel cut due to ON signal ON* -* OFF time enrichment
Ignition timing change
Idle control start by ON signal

I
Note *: Throttle sensor judges ON- FF time instead of idle contact. During the ON time, fully closed throttle or "fully closed throttle + a (partially open)" throttle is detected. (The idle contact is used as backup system if throttle sensor problem occurs.)

-
Fuel injection control (injector) Fuel cut changeover vehicle speed 0 Fuel cut at 0 kmlh (0 MPH) vehicle speed a Transmission shift position judgment Pulse width control by air-fuel ratio feedback
Ignition control (power transistor, IGN coil)
Idle control (ACC valve) Idle control start at vehicle speed below 8 km/h
(5 MPH)
Vehicle speed sensor
Exhaust gas sensor Detonation sensor Battery voltage Air conditioner switch Neutral switch
1
Ignition timing change
-
Pulse width correction
Excitation angle change
Target rpm change

0
I
Ignition timing change (at idle)
Target rpm change after engine warms up Idle control start in neutral ~ o s i t i o n Prevention of engine speed reduction when power steering is turned.
Power steering switch
1-3 DIAGNOSIS CHART ITEM BY PROBLEM (1) Unable to start ... No initial combustion (2) Unable to start ... Initial combustion occurs but is incomplete. (3) Hard to start ... Hard to start when engine is cold. (4) Hard to start ... Hard to start after warm-up. (5) Hard to start .., Hard to start when engine is hot or cold. (6) Poor idling ... Fast idling inoperative (7) Poor idling ... Low idle rpm (after warm-up) (8) Poor idling ,.. High idle rprn (after warm-up) (9) Unstable i.dling ... Cold engine only (10) Unstable idling ... During warm-up (11) Poor driveability ... Engine breathing (12) Poor driveability ... Knocking (13) Poor driveability ... Lack of output, poor acceleration, poor response (14) Engine stalls when starting off (15) Engine stail during idling (16) Engine stall during driving (17) Engine stall when decelerating or immediately after stopping (18) Engine stall when electrical load or power steering load is applied

Diagnostic chart by problem I (1) Unable to start No initial combustion
...
[Analysis]
Ignition spark is not generated or no fuel is injected. Check if fuel pump is rotating. a If no ignition spark is generated and no injector operating noise is heard, check the control unit input (crank angle sensor signal) or control unit power supply. 0 If injector is operating but no spark is generated, the control unit and crank angle sensor can be judged as normal. In this case, check the ignition output system (power transistor, ignition coil, etc.) a If ignition spark is generated but injector is not operating, check the ignition output system (injector power supply, harness, etc.).
0
[Chart]
1 Fuel pump? 1
Loperating?
(See 5-1)
Check fuel hose for tension in CONSULT active test mode. Or Check if pump operating noise is heard for five seconds after turning ignition switch ON. (If NOT, check fuel pump system,) (See 5-2) Check if injector operating noise is heard when cranking engine, Check using CONSULT data monitor mode if injection pulse is output when cranking engine. (The injection pulse value monitored on CONSULT indicates the calculation results of input signals from the crank angle sensor and air flow meter. As a result, the injector may not be operating even if this value is correct.) If not correct: Check control unit terminal voltage when cranking engine. Check injector power supply circuit 0 Crank angle sensor input signal inspection
Operating?
1 Ignition spark? 1
L- Is there a spark?-
Check if tachometer needle moves during cranking. Check using real-time diagnostic mode. (CONSULT data monitor) Check using a timing light. a Remove plug and visually check for spark. If NOT O.K.: Check control unit output signal (ignition signal) Check control unit input signal (crank angle sensor) Check power transistor and ignition coil resistance value
6 3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System)

1.
I(2) Unable to start
... Initial combustion occurs but is incomplete
[Analysis] Occurrence of initial combustion means that sparks are created. The following three cases are possible. (T) Initial combustion only Is fuel system (fuel pump, fuel injector) operating? @ Engine fires incompletely Check if fuel injection quantity is too small or large. 0 Check if fuel pressure is normal. 0 Check if water temperature enrichment is provided. 0 Check if start-time enrichment is provided. 0 Check if ignition timing is normal. (5) Engine fires completely if accelerator pedal is moved up and down. Check if AAC valve operation is normal. [Chart]
(See 3-3) Is pump operating? Check fuel hose for tension in CONSULT active test mode. Or Check if fuel pump operating noise is heard for five seconds after ignition switch is turned ON. Is fuel pump operating during cranking? (If NOT O.K., check the fuel pump system.)
1 Injection quantity? 1
-
Engine temperature enrichment provided?
-Check water temperature of CONSULT data monitor mode.

Or Disconnect engine temperature sensor connector and check for any change. Check water temperature resistance value. Check engine temperature sensor output voltage.
k a r t - t i m e enrichment provided?
-Check "START"
(See 5-4)
signal [ON/OFF] (CONSULT data monitor mode)
1 Idling control? 1
L l s idling rpm increased?
Check AAC valve operation (CONSULT active test). Check if AAC valve is fully closed (CONSULT data monitor). Check AAC valve circuit for disconnection or loose connectors.
1 Ignition system? 1
1 1 s ignition timing normal? -1s ignition correct? Try to advance or retard timing angle. Check spark plugs for fouling. Check lor ignition misfiring (Check using a timing light or CONSULT real-time diagnostic mode.)

(3) Hard start
[Analysis]
The systems relating to water temperature must be checked because this problem only occurs when the engine is cold. Fuel injection enrichment from engine temperature sensor signal is not functioning when temperature is low. Idling speed control is not functioning normally. 0 Start-time enrichment is not functioning. Cranking speed is too low.
... Hard to start when engine is cold.
[Chart]
(See 6-6) Check using CONSULT data monitor mode. Engine temperature sensor signal? Disconnect engine temperature sensor connector and check for any change. Check engine temperature sensor resistance value. Check engine temperature sensor output voltage.
Idling control?
Check AAC valve for operation (CONSULT active test) Check if AAC valve is not fully closed. (CONSULT data monitor) Check AAC valve circuit for disconnection, loose connector, etc. (See 6-10)
Check if START signal is provided.
(Check using CONSULT data monitor mode.)
^ check
Is battery normal? starter system including starter and cable (resistance, poor contact, etc.).
I (4)
Hard start
... Hard to start alter warm-up
-1
[Analysis]
This problem may be related to the water temperature control. Check if engine temperature correction is inaccurate. Check if fuel pressure is correct or if air bubbles are generated in the fuel when the engine is hard to start, especially when water temperature is high. Check if engine cranking speed is low.
[Chart]
(See 6-6)
r--Check using CONSULT data monitor

- ~ n g i n e temperature sensor signal?
8
Disconnect engine temperature sensor connector and check for any change. Check engine temperature sensor resistance value. Check engine temperature sensor output voltage.
1 Fuel pressure?1
Check by increasing fuel pressure.-Disconnect pressure regulator vacuum hose or block return line by clamping return hose. -lieat-resistance problem? Cool fuel hose using damp rag
Is battery normal? ^ ~ h e c starting system.

I(5) Hard start
... Hard to start regardless of engine temperature
[Analysis] Spark arc is created but air-fuel ratio seems to be incorrect. Check fuel pressure. Check fuel injection quantity. (Is engine temperature correction accurate?) Check if idling speed is controlled. Check for misfiring and incorrect ignition timing. Check if cranking speed is too low.
] Fuel
pressure?
(See 3-3)
Fuel pump?
Set CONSULT active test mode and check fuel hose tension. Or Check i f pump operating noise is heard 5 seconds after turning ignition switch ON, Check if pump operating noise is heard even when cranking. 0 Check if fuel pressure is approx. 245 to 294 kPa (2.5 10 3 kg/cm2, 36 to 43
Psi)
Check by increasing fuel pressure. -Disconnect pressure regulator vacuum hose and check for any change. (Also check by clamping return hose.)
Check fuel system for clogging. Engine temperature correction?

(See 6-6)
Check fuel filler
Check engine temperature sensor signal.
Check using CONSULT data monitor mode. Disconnect engine temperature sensor connector and check for any change. Check engine temperature sensor resistance value. Check engine temperature sensor output voltage. Check i f AAC valve operation is normal. (CONSULT active lest mode) Check i f AAC valve is not fully closed. (CONSULT data monitor mode) Check AAC valve circuit for disconnection, such as loose connector, etc.
-hc cek
idling control.
IIgnition system? 1
(See 6-1) Check for ignition misfiring.
L
Is ignition timing normal?
Check in real-time diagnostic mode (CONSULT data monitor mode). Check crank angle sensor output for missing pulses. (Check by CONSULT data monitor mode or with oscilloscope.) is spark plug gap normal?
Check by advancing or retarding the angle.
B3
Cranking Speed?

1.
Is battery normal?

l(6) Poor idling
[Analysis]
This problem may be due to abnormal control of AAC valve and air regulator because idling speed is controlled by these devices. The air-fuel ratio and ignition timing also relate to this problem.
... Fast idle inoperative
1-1
[Chart]
(see 5-41 Check air regulator operalion. IS air regulator resistance normal? Is air regulator seized? Is AAC valve control signal output? Is AAC valve operation normal? (CONSULT active test mode) Is idle judgment ON? (CONSULT data monitor mode) Check AAC valve circuit for breaks or loose connectors.
Check using CONSULT data monitor mode. Or Disconnect engine temperature sensor connector and check for any change. o Check engine temperature sensor resistance value. Check engine temperature sensor output voltage..
Check AAC valve operation.
e temperature signai?
-4
'7
Air-fuel ratio?
{See 6-7)
r Enrich using "FUEL
INJECTION'' in CONSULT active test mode. Increase fuel pressure (by disconnecting pressure regulator vacuum hose).
1
Check by making the mixture lean.
Reduce the mixture ratio by using "FUEL INJECTION'' in CONSULT active test mode. Reduce fuel pressure. (Use CONSULT active test or apply vacuum greater than -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) to the regulator using hand vacuum pump.

(7) Poor idling
... Low idling rpm (after warm-up)
[Analysis]
Idling speed is controlled by the AAC valve. A low idling rpm means insufficient auxiliary air volumf through AAC valve.
[Chart]
Idling control system
(See 5-4) Is AAC valve control signal issued? Is AAC valve operation normal? (CONSULT active test) Measure resistance value of single AAC valve and check for seizure. Check AAC valve circuit for breaks and connector for looseness. Is idle adjustment screw adjusted correctly? Is idle judgment ON? (CONSULT data monitor) Is air conditioner switch and neutral switch turned ON? (Check in CONSULT data monitor mode.)
AAC valve operation?
,. .
.,
Input signal?
Is ignition tlming normal?
1 (8) Poor idling ... High idle rpm (after warm-up)

[Analysis]
I33 ECCS (Efectronically Concentrated Engine Control System) I . Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)
High idling can be caused by the following factors. Low engine temperature signal. (Actual engine temperature differs from monitored temperature.) Idle judgment (throttle sensor) is OFFAir conditioner switch and power steering switch are ON continuously. AAC value is seized. Idle adjustment screw is not adjusted correctly. (Excessive throttle open position does not redu( engine rpm even if AAC valve is fully closed.) Air regulator is not energized. Air regulator is seized. Control unit adjustment knob is set at HIGH position. Throttie valve is open. Air is being sucked in.
[Chart]
1 Idling control system 1
(See 5-4) Check by CONSULT data monitor. Engine temperature signd?
<r o
Disconnect engine temperature sensor connector and check tor any change. a Check engine temperature resisiancq value. a Check engine temperature output voltage. Check idle judgment in CONSULT data monitor mode. Adjust idle rpm. Is AAC valve control signal output? Is AAC valve operation normal? (CONSULT active test) Check AAC valve for seizure, Disconnect AAC valve connector and close the valve to see if engine rprn towers. Turn air conditioner switch or power steering switch OFF and see i f ON signal is disconnected. Check if neutral switch is OFF or vehicle speed signal input is O.K. Check air regulator circuit for breaks o loose connectors. -Check air regulator for seizure.
IS adjustment knob set at HIGH position?
Throttle sensor
Idle adjustment screw
AAG valve control
Air regulator Control unit adjustment knob
1 Others ]
1 Throttle valve
Air suction
Is valve open? (Check for wtre binding. Block blow-by hose passage and check for any change.
1 (9)
Unstable idling
... Cold engine only
[Analysis]
Since idling is unstable only when the engine is cold, cause of this problem can be narrowed down to the relationship between the engine temperature and idle control system. This problem also relates to the air-fuel ratio, ignition timing, misfiring, etc.
[Chart]
Idle control system
(See 5-4) Engine temperature sensor signal
Check by CONSULT data monitor mode.

a Check engine temperature sensor
resistance value. a Check engine temperature sensor output voltage. See if the valve is fully closed. (See if idle adjustment is within specification.) Is AAC valve operation normal? (CONSULT active test)
1 Air-fuel ratio? 1
(See 6-7)
Use "FUEL INJECTION" in CONSULT active test mode to make the mixture Check by making the mixture rich lean. Increase or decrease fuel pressure. (Disconnect pressure regulator vacuum hose or apply additional vacuum.)
Is ignition timing normal? Advance or retard ignition timing and check for any change. Check ignition system condition by realtime diagnostic method. (CONSULT data monitor) Check crankangie sensor by r e 4 time diagnostic method (CONSULT data monitor) Check condition of spark plug.
1 (10) Unstable idling ... After warm-up
[Analysis] This problem relates to various factors including air-fuel ratio, ignition systern and compression. It is necessary to determine factors beginning with items that are easy to check. ldle rpm control system ... AAC valve operation? Air-fuel ratio ... Fuel pressure? Injection quantity? (Enriched?) a Air suction? Ignition system ... Ignition timing a Ignition misfiring (missing signal pulse) Engine main unit ... Poor compression
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) I. Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)

[Chart]
Idle control system
(See 5-4) Check by disabling control function.Disconnect AAC valve connector and check for any change.
-Check i f control signal is output and

check signal condition. {Use CONSULT data monitor or oscilloscope.) Is AAC valve operation normal? (CONSULT active test) -Disconnect AAC valve connector and check by adjusting with IAS. Check AAC valve for seizure. Check i f idle judgment is ON. (CONSULT data monitor) Check circuit for breaks and connectors for looseness.
Control circuit
(See 6-7) check by enriching the mixture.-
Enrich using "FUEL INJECTION" item of CONSULT active test mode, or by disconnecting regulator vacuum hose and clamping off the return hose.
Check by making the mixture lean.
-Reduce the mixture ratio by using

"FUEL INJECTION" item of CONSULT active test mode, or applying vacuum greater than -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) with hand vacuum pump l o pressure regulator.
Check by stopping feedback.
-4
r
Perform CONSULT active test mode (clear with "SELF-LEARNING CONT" item)
Or Disconnect exhaust gas sensor connector. (Set the circuit from racing mode to idling mode.) Check using CONSULT data monitor mode. Disconnect engine temperature sensor
Engine temperature signal?
-+-
connector and check for any change. a Check engine temperature sensor resistance value. Check engine temperature sensor output voltage. Check vacuum line and blow-by hose.
Check for air suction.
1 Ignition system 1
Is ignition timing normal? Advanced or retarded ignition timing angle and check for any change. Check ignition system by real-time diagnosis (CONSULT data monitor mode). Check condition of crank angle sensor by real-time diagnosis (CONSULT data monitor). Check condition of spark plug.
Ignition misfiring

Engine main body
compression pressure?
Measure compression pressure. (Check valve timing, valve seats, piston rings, etc.)
I (11) Poor driveability ... Engine breathing

-- -
[Analysis]
Items to be checked vary if this problem occurs during acceleration or during cruising. (D During acceleration Engine breathing while depressing the accelerator may be caused by momentary misfiring, or momentary occurrence of lean mixture (no interrupt injection). Increased tension of harnesses or air duct due to inclination of engine during acceleration can also be a cause of poor contact. Clogging in fuel system is a cause for engine breathing because sufficient fuel pressure cannot be maintained during acceleration. <S) During cruising Lean mixture and engine breathing caused by poor feedback of air-fuel ratio data. Misfiring of ignition system caused by leaks. Poor contact or malfunction of signal system, use of low quality gasoline.
[Chart]
(D When accelerating
Air-fuel ratio
(See 6-7)
Stop feedback
Perform CONSULT active test mode (set to 0% by "FUEL INJECTION" item). Or Check by disconnecting exhaust gas sensor. Perform CONSULT active test mode (increasing "FUEL INJECTION" item) or enrich mixture by disconnecting engine temperature sensor connector and inserting a 600ft resistance after warming up the engine. Check idle judgment ON/OFF operation in CONSULT data monitor mode. Check if output voltage varies with throttle opening. Check if fuel pressure is maintained even while racing the engine. Check air duct for looseness.
Enrich mixture
Idle judgment Throttle sensor Fuel pressure Air leak Air flow meter output
Check output voltage (by CONSULT data monitor).

1.

Check signal system (ignition signal, crank angle sensor signal, air flow meter signal) for instantaneous break by using real-time diagnosis (CONSULT data monitor) or oscilloscope. Check spark plug gap. Check if ignition coil power supply voltage is lowered. Check if fail-safe mode is not set due to a detonation sensor error. (Check by self-diagnosis.)
Ignition misfiring
1
(2) When cruising
Ignition timing
1 Air-fuel ratio 1
(See 6-7)
Check by CONSULT active test mode. (Set mixture ratio by fuel injection quantity correction to 0%.)
Feedback function
Check by disconnecting exhaust gas sensor connector. - Set self-diagnosis mode 2 and see if exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or control unit red lamp) is flashing (exhaust gas sensor monitor diagnosis) or check in CONSULT data monitor mode. Set self-diagnosis mode 2 and check if exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or control unit red lamp) is flashing more than 5 times in 10 seconds when engine is running at 2,000 rpm, or check by CONSULT data monitor.
Idle judgment
Check if throttle sensor is OFF when accelerator pedal is depressed. (CONSULT data monitor)
1 Ignition system 1
I Ignition misfiring
Check for instantaneous break in signal
system using real-time diagnosis. (Ignition signal, crank angle sensor signal, air flow meter signal) (Use CONSULT data monitor or oscilloscope.)
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System)

1.
(13) Poor driveability [Analysis]
Lack of power, poor acceleration and poor response are generally caused by insufficient mixture quantity (lack of fuel, lack of air) or incorrect air-fuel mixture ratio. In the injection system, these problems are caused by lack of ignition energy or incorrect ignition timing. Lack of compression pressure and excessive friction due to seizure in engine main body are also causes of these conditions.
... Lack of output, poor acceleration, poor response
[Chart]
1 Mixture air quantity, air-fuel ratio? 1 - 1
(See 5-1, 5-2, 6-2)

Fuel pressure? Check if fuel pressure drops during racing. (Check condition of fuel pump and fuel system for clogging.) Enrich by "FUEL INJECTION" menu of CONSULT active test mode. Raise fuel pressure (use CONSULT active test mode or disconnect pressure regulator vacuum hose). Check i n CONSULT active test mode (set to 0% by "FUEL INJECTION"), disconnect exhaust gas sensor connector and check for change. Clean with engine conditioner. (Use CONSULT active test mode, or pour conditioner into fuel filter, start engine and race engine.) Check output voltage. (See i f voltage varies with opening.)
c
1 Ignition system?
Engine main body?
Injector clogging?
Air flow meter output?
Spark plug?
Is plug gap normal?
Ignition timing?
Is ignition timing normal? Check by advancing or retarding ignition timing angle. Check condition of detonation sensor. (Check by self-diagnosis function for harness disconnection and shorts.)
Check ignition coil power voltage.
Ignition energy?
compression pressure?
Measure compression pressure. (Also check valve timing, valve seat contact pattern, pistons and rings.) connectors to stop control.
Check if turbocharging control system-Remove is normal.
Check engine with CONSULT data monitor "WIG CONT SIV" mode.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 1. Trouble Diagnosis (Coni'd)

(14) Engine stalls when starting
[Analysis]
Misfiring while depressing accelerator pedal or insufficient torque causes engine to stall when starting off. Misfiring 0 Too lean or too rich air-fuel mixture ratio 0 Large error in ignition timing 0 Weak spark a Insufficient torque 0 Lean or rich mixture 0 Insufficient intake air quantity 0 Insufficient compression pressure
[Chart]
1 Self-diagnosis 1
Check if occurrence of error is stored by self-diagnosis function. (See 6-4, 6-6, 6-7) Check by enriching the mixture. Enrich using "FUEL INJECTION" item of CONSULT active test mode or by disconnecting regulator vacuum hose. Reduce the mixture ratio by using "FUEL INJECTION" item of CONSULT active test mode, or applying vacuum greater than -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) with vacuum hand pump to pressure regulator. Perform CONSULT active test (0% airfuel ratio is obtained by "FUEL INJECTION")
Check by making the mixture lean.-
1
1 Disconnect exhaust gas sensor connec-
I - 1
L
tor. (Race engine and return to idle.) Check canister. Check idle judgment. Check by blocking purge line.
r-I,
1
Check if idle judgment is OFF when accelerator is ON. (Check by CONSULT data monitor mode.)
Check if accelerator opening signal is
output.
Check engine temperature sensor. Check throttle sensor.
^ Ignition? intake air quantity?
Spark?
Ignition timing Ignition error?
Check spark plug (fouling, gap, electrodes) Check i f ignition timing is correct. Check by "REAL-TIME DIAG" (CONSULT data monitor mode).
-'
Check if throttle valve opens normally. Check for leaks from turbocharger system (rear flow) or ducts.

1.
Compression pressure?

Check vaive timing for error, valves for incorrect contact pattern, pistons and rings for damage.
Measure compression
I (15)
Engine stall during Idling
[Analysis] Engine stall during idling may be caused by one of the following conditions. (Check idling speed, and
then check for misfiring.) a Improper idling speed Improper AAC valve control (Check for delayed response.) Excessively lean or rich mixture ratio Ignition error 0 Poor contact of connector, etc. Relation to electrical load ON-OFF
[Chart]
1 Self-diagnosis 1
L.
I Idling control? l ( ~ e e 5-4)
Check for proper control.
<
-
Check if any abnormal data is stored in self-diagnosis.
Is idling speed normal or adjusted? Is AAC valve fully closed? (Check for loose connector.) Close AAC valve and check for any change. Is AAC valve control signal issued? (Race engine and check voltage.) Is AAC valve operation normal? (CONDisconnect AAC valve connector, and check by adjusting with IAS. SULT active test) See if idle judgment is ON.

Air-fuel ratio? (See 6-7) Is air-fuel ratio normal? Select self-diagnosis mode 2 and check if exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp on control unit) is flashing more than 5 times in 10 seconds when engine is running at 2,000 rpm, or check by CONSULT data monitor Enrich using "FUEL INJECTION" item of CONSULT active test mode, by disconnecting pressure regulator vacuum hose or closing off the return hose. Reduce the mixture ratio by using "FUEL INJECTION" item of CONSULT active test mode, or applying vacuum greater than -66.7 kPa (-500 mrnHg, -19.69 inHg) with hand pump to pressure regulator. Perform CONSULT active test (0% airfuel ratio is obtained by "FUEL INJECTION") Or Disconnect exhaust gas sensor connector. (Set circuit from racing mode one time and return to idling mode.) Check for pump stop Race engine and check fuel pressure for drop.
Check by enriching the mixture.
Check by making the mixture lean,-
-4
- 1
I
Others
Check fuel pump operation. Check fuel system for clogging.-
Check for poor contact.
Using real-time diagnosis mode, check ignition signal, crank angle sensor signal and air flow meter signal for instantaneous break and missing pulses. (Use CONSULT data mode or oscilloscope.) Check for fouling and plug gap.
Check spark plugs.
8 3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 1. Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)

(16) Engine stalls during driving
[Analysis]
Engine stall during cruising may be caused by misfiring. If engine stalls during acceleration, it may be caused by misfiring or insufficient torque. Too rich or lean air fuel mixture Ignition error Incorrect ignition timing Insufficient intake air quantity Insufficient compression pressure Misfiring, fuel pump stop, etc. caused by poor electrical contact
[Chart]
Self-diagnosis
1
(T) When cruising
Air-fuel ratio? (See 6-7)
Check the stored data by self-diagnosis for any abnormality.
Idle judgment?
I
Check for normal feedback.
Check if idle judgment goes OFF when accelerator pedal is pressed. (Check in CONSULT data monitor mode.) Race engine at 2,000 rpm in self-diagnosis mode and check if exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp on control unit) is flashing more than 5 times in 10 seconds or check by CONSULT data monitor. Perform CONSULT active test.
Ignition?
Stop feedback and check for any change. Intake air quantity signal
Check by disconnecting exhaust gas sensor connector.
Check for poor contact using CONSULT data monitor ("REAL-TIME DIAG") mode.
Ignition timing?
Is ignition timing normal? Check ignition signal and crank angle sensor signal for missing pulses in CONSULT data monitor ("REAL-TIME DIAG") mode.
Ignition misfiring

(2) During acceleration
Idle judgment? Check if idle judgment goes OFF-ON when accelerator pedal is pressed and released. (Check in CONSULT data monitor mode.) Check if voltage output varies with throttle opening. (Check in CONSULT data monitor mode.)

1 I
1
Throttle sensor?
Check for normal feedback.
Race engine at 2,000 rpm in self-diagnosis mode and check if exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp on control unit) is flashing more than 5 times in 10 seconds or check by CONSULT data monitor.
Perform CONSULT active test. ("FUEL INJECTION" set to 0%) Check by disconnecting exhaust gas sensor connector. Check for poor contact using CONSULT data monitor ("REAL-TIME DIAG") mode. Check for air flow or leaking after turbocharger operation.
Stop feedback and check for any change.
Intake air quantity signal
Misfiring?
Ignition timing? Is ignition timing normal? Check ignition signal and crank angle sensor signal for missing pulses in CONSULT data monitor ("REAL-TIME DIAG") mode.
1 Compression pressure? 1
Measure compression pressure.
Ignition misfiring?
B 3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 1. Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)

(17) Engine stalls when decelerating or immediately after stopping.
[Analysis]
Reduced engine rpm when releasing accelerator can lead to engine stall. Another cause is misfiring. a Incorrect adjustment of idling control Incorrect air-fuel ratio Ignition error
[Chart]
Idle control? (See 5-4) Idling speed? Check if idling speed is normal and idle adjustment is correct. Check if AAC valve is fully closed. Check if AAC valve control signal is output. Check if AAC valve operates normally. (CONSULT active test) Check if AAC valve is OK. s Check if idle judgment i ON when accelerator is OFF. (CONSULT data monitor) Check by disconnecting AAC valve connector (fully closed AAC).
Is control normal?
Air-fuel ratio? (See 6-7)

Stop feedback and check for any change.
I -
Perform CONSULT active test, Or Check by disconnecting exhaust gas sensor connector. Race engine at 2,000 rpm in self-diagnosis mode and check if exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp on control unit) is flashing more than 5 times in 10 seconds or check by CONSULT data monitor. CONSULT active test mode or disconnecting regulator vacuum hose.
I------
Check for normal feedback control.-
Check by enriching the mixture.
-Enrich using "FUEL INJECTION" item of

Reduce the mixture ratio by using "FUEL INJECTION" item of CONSULT active test mode, or applying vacuum greater than -66.7 kPa (-500 rnrntlg, -19.69 inHg) with hand vacuum pump to pressure regulator.
Check by making the mixture lean.-
Ignition?
Check for ignition error.
Check ignition signal and crank angle sensor signal for missing pulses. Check by CONSULT data monitor ("REAL-TIME DIAG") mode.

(18) Engine stalls when electrical load or power steering load is applied
[Analysis]
Check if idling is increased when load switch is turned ON (AAC valve correction quantity increases when load is applied). Check if ON signal is input from each switch. Check if AAC valve is operating.
[Chart]
-Check if idling speed is normal and idle adjustment is correct. Check if AAC valve is fully closed.
Check idling speed.
Check if control is functioning.
Check if AAC valve control signal is output. Check if AAC valve operates normally. (CONSULT active test) Check if AAC valve is OK, Check if idle judgment is ON (when accelerator is not depressed). (CONSULT data monitor) Check by disconnecting AAC valve connector (fully closed AAC).
Check input signals.
Check if air conditioner switch and power steering switch signals are provided (CONSULT data monitor).
2. Diagnostic System
2-1 GENERAL
The diagnostic system performance has been greatly improved concerning warning indication to drivers, operation of the self-diagnostic system, and application of the newly developed electrical system diagnostic tester CONSULT. (1) Enhanced fault alarm items If an error occurs in the ECCS system during driving, the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp flashes in the combination meter. At the same time, the backup function is activated to ensure the safety of the occupants and vehicle. (2) Simplified troubleshooting The following features have been incorporated for ease of inspection and problem diagnosis of ECCS system. (T) Improvement of self-diagnostic function The diagnostic modes have been rearranged and the mode shift and display systems have been simplified.
New system Diagnostic mode Fault alarm (Same as the former backup display mode) Exhaust gas sensor monitor (Same as the former air-fuet ratio feedback display) Mode selection Display
1 2
Current system Diagnostic mode Backup display Air-fuel ratio [feedback disOrdinary selfIndicated by exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (also linked with the red lamp on control unit) Mode selection Display
1
By adjustment knob on control unit.
1
Indicated by red or green lamps on control unit.
By diagnostic connector installed on 2 lower side of fuse block (Also adjustable by Self-diagnosis the knob (The former ONIOFF installed on switch diagnosis and control unit) real-time diagnosis are included in the operations performed by CONSULT as explained in item @ on the next page.)
ONtOFF switch
Real-time diagnosis
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 2. Diagnostic System (Cont'd)

To change diagnostic mode, short-circuit these
terminals for approx. 2 seconds then open the (The mode terminals. operation is performed.)
Fuse
Mock
L~xhaust temperature gas warning lamp
(D Adoption of electronic system diagnostic tester for problem

diagnosis. The diagnostic functions have been modified to enable use of the newly developed electrical system diagnostic tester CONSULT to simplify complex diagnosis procedures. CONSULT is a compact and lightweight hand-held type test device especially designed for automotive service operations, and can be used by simply connecting it to the diagnostic connector installed on the vehicle. This tester permits data display, recording and printing.

The CONSULT system has the following functions.
Mode SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Description Mode selection Display
1 The same number

self-diagnosis
I1
of items are possible as previously described <3)
Diagnostic mode
3ATA MONITOR
Used to identify major cause of fault, according to results of self-diagnosis. Permits monitoring (observation and recording) and printing of input and output data of the control unit. Permits data to be recorded in case of engine damage or engine stall. The former diagnostic modes listed below are included i n this monitor item. gas sensor output ture is lean or rich. Switch ONIOFF
I
rn Exhaust gas
Same as former function.
Iiagnostic modes :an be selected 'asily by the ouch-sensitive ;eys of CONSULT.
Displayed data can be read easily on the CONSULT screen.
Real-time diagnosis
--
1 Same as the
1 former function
ACTIVE TEST
Used to examine major causes of problems according to self-diagnosis results and data monitor. Used to check actuator operation by giving driving signal to the actuator. Used to reduce additional operation when checking idling, etc. (Example: When adjusting AAC valve, feedback control can be fixed by using this mode.)
Supplemental
WORK SUPPORT

ECCS control unit inputloutput signals and applicable modes
Sell-diagnosis Data monitor Active test Work support
1 Crank angle sensor 1 Air flow meter

Engine temperature sensor Exhaustoas sensor
1 1
1
1 1
1
0 0 0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1 Vehicle speed sensor

--
1 1 1
Battery voltage Input Throttle sensor
0 0 0
1 Idle position (throttle sensor) 1 Intake temperature sensor

- .
1 1
1 1
0 0
-
1 1
Detonation sensor Ignition switch (Start signal) Air conditioner, neutral, power steering oil pressure switch Injectors
0 0 0
0
0
1 Power transistor (ignition signal) 1

- -
0 (Ignition timing) 0 (Ignition timing)
1 I
A.A.C. valve
Output Air conditioner relay
0.
I F U ~pump relay I
Wastegate valve control solenoid valve
o
0

2.
2-2 SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Self-diagnosis can be performed by indications from the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp in the combination meter and the red lamp on the ECCS control unit, or by displaying data on the CONSUL1 screen. (1) Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp indication Two diagnostic modes are available. In each mode, diagnosis is performed by operating the diagnostic connector terminal installed on the vehicle. (Diagnosis can also be performed using the adjustmen' knob on the control unit.) The diagnosis results are displayed by the exhaust gas temperature warnins lamp in the combination meter and the red warning lamp on the control unit. -
Diagnostic System (Cont'd)
6asic operation and indication

Operation Indication (Flashing of exhaust gas temperature warning lamp and red warning lamp of control unit.) Alarm: Faulty system is indicated by warning lamp flashing pattern (backup function). Normal: Warning lamp remains OFF.
Mode I
1
I
Fault alarm
1
I
Ignition switch ON Engine rotation Ignition switch ON
I
Self-diagnosis Mode2 Diagnosis mode shift
I
Exhaust gas sensor monitor Operation
-
1
Engine stop (with ignition switch remaining ON) Self-diagnosis status described above
Fault Faulty system is indicated by flashing code. Normal: Flashing code "55" is displayed
1
Engine rotation
Lamp ON means "lean" mixture; OFF means 'rich" mixture.
<T) Step
Fault alarm mode (Mode 1)

Indication
--
Turn ignition switch ON. Mode 1 is normally set by this operation. [Pay attention to the' following case that may occur: If the ignition switch is turned OFF in the self-diagnosis mode and then turned ON in-a few seconds, the self-diagnosis mode will be executed. In this case, the self-diagnosis mode must be selected. (See item Run engine.
Indicated by flashing exhaust gas temperature warning lamp in combination meter and red lamp of control unit. (These lamps are linked together.)
Engine rotation
Indication
Condition
Stop Alarm Rotating
ON (lamp check)
CPU backup (All models) (Lamp flashes when engine is OFF.)
ON
1 sec.
OFF
OFF
1
1
OFF
ON (lamp check)
Norma Rotating
- @ -11

2.
@ Self-diagnostic mode (Mode 2)
Step

Indication
Operation
Turn ignition switch ON. Select the diagnostic mode by the method indicated below because the fault alarm mode is normally set after turning the ignition switch ON. Use a lead to short-circuit the CHK and IGN terminals connected on the diagnosis connector located on the vehicle (near the fuse block) for approx, 2 seconds, then separate the terminals. (Diagnosis connector)
b flashing of the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp y

n combination meter and red lamp in control unit is sed. (Operation of these two lamps is linked together.) example: Indication of code number "43"
f 1 m l
HK IGN
--
-0.4
sec x 4
0.2 sec x 3
OFF
nn
(The fault alarm mode and self-diagnosis mode alternate each time the operation described above is performed. )
Shut off engine (with the ignition switch remaining in ON
I1
position.) (If the engine i operated in this condition, the s exhaust gas sensor monitor in the next mode is activated. )
.
-
-.
(Reference) Names of diagnostic connector terminals CHK: Diagnosis start (check) IGN: Ignition power supply @: GND RX: Control unit data reception TX: Control unit data transmission CLK: Transmission synchronization s n a l (clock)
Code No.
Diagnosis item
. .. -.
-
Error (code number) state

a I * signal or 1 0 signal is not input for a certain period of time after 2' starting engine. 0 Incorrect signal waveform (abnormal correlation between 1' signal and 120signal)
0 0
Crank angle sensor signal system
Air flow meter signal system

0
Hot wire disconnection Disconnection or short-circuit in air flow meter power supply line, ground line or signal system. Signal output is below 0.5 volts for a certain period during engine operation. Signal output is higher than 2 volts for a certain period of time with engine stalled, or when ignition switch is set to ON from OFF. Break or short-circuit in engine temperature sensor signal system
Engine temperature sensor signal system

0
Ignition signal system Detonation sensor signal system

-
Ignition signal is not generated continuously even though crank angle sensor signal is entered. (Disconnection between power transistor and control unit) Disconnection or short-circuit in detonation sensor signal system
Intake temperature sensor signal system
Disconnection or short-circuit in intake temperature sensor signal system Disconnection or short-circuit in throttle sensor signal system (When engine is running, short-circuit occurs when voltage is 0.2V maximum except for N range. Disconnection occurs when voltage is 5V minimum.) No abnormality was detected in any of the above signal systems.
Throttle sensor signal system
No error

How to erase memory
(a) Stop engine in mode 2 and short-circuit terminals "CHK" and "IGN" of the diagnostic connector for approx. 2 seconds, then disconnect. This will erase the memory on all diagnosis items. (The memory is also erased when the self-diagnosis mode is switched to the fault alarm mode.) Refer to the diagram indicated in table above. (b) When method (a) is not used: The memory is erased automatically if the ignition switch "START" operation is performed successfully 50 times. (The memory is automatically erased every 50 "START" operations of the ignition switch.) @ Exhaust gassensor monitor mode (mode 2)
Step Operation Set ignition switch to "ON". Make sure self-diagnosis mode is set. If problem alarm mode is set, connect diagnostic connector "CHK" and "iGN" terminals 'or approx. 2 seconds then disconnect the terminals. (See item (2) above.) Indication ndication is made by the warning lamp (exhaust gas temperaure warning lamp) on the instrument panel and the red lamp on he control unit. (These two lamps are linked together.) T) During air-fuel ratio feedback control: When exhaust gas sensor output is "RICH": Lamps are OFF When exhaust gas sensor output is "LEAN": Lamps are ON Reference) The lamp ON and OFF indication is the same as that of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction coefficient indicated by the red lamp in the former control unit. (S) When air-fuel ratio feedback control is clamped: The status immediately before clamping is maintained. (S) When air-fuel ratio feedback control is faulty: OFF Display example
(Lean) Start engine. Note: Mode cannot be changed while engine is operating. OFF (Rich) After engine warms up adequately, increase engine speed until Lean: #A 0 x 100 exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (approx. 2,000 rpm or cycle ratio! Rich: B/A B xlOO until red lamp in control unit starts to flash) and exhaust gas sensor output monitor (R) mode i set. s rhe status of the air-fuel ratio is indicated by the duty ratio in Caution: Check by pressing the accelerator pedal slightly we cycle. because the air-fuel ratio feedback control Is clamped whiuii g a s r m w *nd during idling. Exhiwt QM e Check that exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp 7 kUrt in control unit) flashes in this condition. Connect terminals "CHK" and "IGN" of the diagnostic connector WF for approx. 2 seconds, then disconnect. After the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp (or red lamp in control unit) Hashes 2 times. the exhaust gas sensor output monitor mode is switched.
+ +
SAC
aPCCK.4tec

2.
(2) CONSULT display screen m Connect CONSULT to the diagnostic connector on the vehicle (lower side of fuse block) on the vehicle. Data is displayed on the CONSULT screen as the touch-sensitive keys of CONSULT are operated. The exhaust gas sensor monitoring, switch ON/OFF operation and real-time diagnosis are performed using the data monitor mode (see item 2-4).
(D "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" mode The diagnosis items are the same as those listed in item (1) @ . Faulty system name is indicated.
Step
Operation Connect CONSULT to diagnostic connector of vehicle.
Display
I SELF-DIAG
RESULl S
I [
The number of limes the vehicle has been driven after detecting the last problem is displayed here. If the same problem is still present, "0" is displayed.
Set ignition switch to "ON". (Shut off engine.)
ENGINE TEMP SENSOR
Check with "SELF-DIAGNOTIC RESULTS".
To print, touch "PRINT" key. To erase stored data, touch "ERASE" key.

2-3 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION AND BACKUP FUNCTION
The fail-safe function ensures the safety of the driver and vehicle using the control unit control signals in case of an error in an important system device such as a sensor, etc. The backup function ensures normal vehicle operation even when an error occurs in a vital sensor. For this purpose, the control unit ignores the signal sent from a failed sensor like this and outputs prearranged control signals. When the backup function is operating, the fault alarm mode is set and the exhaust gas temperature warning lamp flashes in the combination meter. Item
CPU backup
Description of problem When detecting error in internal circuit of control unit

0
Fail-safe or backup Ignition timing is fixed at a specified value. Fuel injection is fixed in 3 patterns: start-time injection, idling injection and driving injection.
Alarm indication Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp flashes in 1-sec intervalsReduce driving speed when CPU backup is performed.
("12" is indicated in self-diagno-
r
Air flow meter Engine temperature sensor Detonation sensor backup
When intake air quantity signal is a There are two air flow meters disconnected during engine operto provide a backup meter if one is faulty (which enables ation. almost normal operation). If both meters malfunction, the fail-safe function is set. Fuel injection pulse width is fixed at a specified value. Fuel is cut off at 2,400 rpm. When short-circuited or disconnected. When short-circuited or disconnected.
0.2V max.) or disconnected (approx. 5V min.) during engine
sis mode.)
Normal engine operation is enabled.

A maximum 5 angle is delayed O in knock control area.
("13" is indicated in self-diagnosis mode.)

Idle judgment is switched from a software switch (throttle sensor) to mechanical switch (throttle valve switch).

2-4 DATA MONITOR The data monitor can be utilized when performing troubleshooting or trouble diagnosis according to the
self-diagnosis results. CONSULT performs monitoring (display and recording) and printing of the ECCS control unit input and output signal data. In case of engine malfunction or engine stall, the data before and after occurrence of the error can be recorded by manual or automatic operation.
(1) Monitoring items and description Some monitor items are not applicable to all vehicles. (Inapplicable items are not displayed.) . .
1
Description CAS. RPM
Remarks accuracy slightly lowered at less than die speed. Joltage is fixed at approximately 0V when engine is stopped.
t disconnection or short-circuit occurs in sensor circuit, fail-safe function is actirated and engine temperature is fixed at i certain level. (The value increases until 1certain value of the timer is reached .ight after the ignition switch is turned 3N.)
(POS)
rprn
engine rprn computed from POS ( l o )signal ,ent from crank angle sensor Mr flow meter output voltage
AIR FLOW METER-R
ENG TEMP SEN
Engine temperature value converted from ingine temperature sensor voltage
EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R MIR FIC MNT
Exhaust gas sensor output voltage
Sensor output is fixed at 0V when engine is stopped. After turning ignition switch "ON", "LEAN" status is displayed until airfuel ratio feedback control starts. If clamp occurs, the status just before , clamp occurrence is indicated.
'1
M/R FIG MNT-R
Mr-fuel ratio of exhaust gas sensor signal during air-fuel ratio feedback control (RICH/ RICH: Sensor detects rich mixture and control LEAN) is performed to reduce mixture ratio. LEAN: Sensor detects lean mixture and control I is oerformed to increase mixture ratio. Value computed from vehicle speed sensor signal ECCS control unit power supply voltage
CARSPEEDSEN
THROTTLE SEN
Throttle sensor output voltage
INTI* TEMP SEN
"C"I
The value converted from intake temperature sensor output voltage to intake temperature.
Fail-safe is activated if disconnection or short-circuit occurs and this value is fixed. (The value right after ignition switch is turned ON is increased to a certain value by the timer.) "OFF" is indicated irrespective of starter signal after starting engine.
START SIGNAL
IDLE POSITION
Idle judgment determined from throttle sensor output. (When throttle sensor is ONIOFF setting is determined from each signal faulty, a backup is performed using the output. ihrottle valve switch.)
AIR GONO SIG NEUTRAL SW PWIST SIGNAL
1
Value computed by control unit A value is indicated with engine stopped.
INJ PULSE
INJ PULSE4
6 3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 2. Diagnostic System (Cont'd)

Monitor item IGN TIMING Unit
I
Description
Remarks
BTDC ..
n
yo
Value computed by control unit Value computed by control unit ' % " : Proportional solenoid system (Opening increases with numerical value.) Mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor for each cycle Control condition computed by control unit.
4 fixed value is indicated with engine ;topped.
AAC VALVE A/F ALPHA AIF ALPHA-R AIR COND RLY

FUEL PUMP RLY OFF)
4 fixed value is indicated with engine stopped.
WIG CONT SIV
ON: Correction passage o p e n " OFF: Correction passage "closed"
VOLTAGE PULSE
-.
Voltage probe measurement value is indicated. Pulse probe measurement value is indicated.
Note: AIR FLOW METER, EXH GAS SEN, M/R F/C MNT, INJ PULSE, A/F ALPHA are monitored independently by cylinders groups 1-3 (-R) and 4-6.

eration and display
Operation
1
Connect CONSULT to diagnostic connector on vehicle.
&MONITO *NO FAIL

CAS-RPM (POS) AIR FLOW MTR AIR FI OW MTR-R
[-I
ENG TEMP SEN
950rpm 0.92V 0.82V

1 44V
570c
Run engine or drive vehicle.
EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R M i R F!C MNT M/R F!C MNT-R CAR SPEED SEN BATTERY VOLT
-
0.02V RICH RICH Okm/h 14.0V
RECORD
Select a desired item on "DATA MONITOR" menu.
*RECORD4/8 <r CAS-RPM IPOS) AIR FLOW MTR AIR FLOW MTR ENG TEMP SEN EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R M/R F!C MNT M/R F/C MNT-R CAR SPEED SEN BATTERY VOLT
1 40V
0.90V RICH
RICH
Okmjh 14.0V
Press "RECORD" key.
RECORD
(D Exhaust gas sensor monitor Exhaust gas sensor output voltage and RICHtLEAN status are displayed.
Step Operation Connect CONSULT to diagnostic connector on vehicle. *MONITOR Run engine.
--
Display (example)
&NO FAIL
01
Select EXH GAS SEN, EXH GAS SEN-R, M/R F/C MNT and M/R F/C MNT-R items on "DATA MONITOR" menu.
CAS-RPM (PCS) EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R M/R FIC MNT M/R F/'C MNT-R
950rpm
123V 1 10V RICH RICH
I
4
To record data, press "RECORD" key.
RECORD
63 ECCS (Electronicallv Concentrated En jine Control System) 2. Diagnostic Sys !em(Cont'd)

(5) Switch ONIOFF
The ON/OFF status of each switch is indicated.
Step
1
Operation Connect CONSULT to vehicle's diagnostic connector.
Display (example)
fiMONIIOR *NO FAIL
0 1
S!AH I SIGNAL. IDLE POSII'ION AIR COND SIG NElJ'lRAI. SW

PW/ST SIGNAL
OFF
ON
OFF
0N
OFF
I
Select each switch on "DATA MONITOR" menu,

I
Set operating condition for applicable switch and check ONIOFF display,
RECORD
Diagnosis item (1) Ignition switch START signal system (2) Air conditioner switch signal system (3) Neutral switch signal system (4) Power steering switch signal system (5) Throttle position (throttle sensor system) Real-time diagnosis Although the diagnosis items are the same as those listed in item (2) Self-diagnosis, and Switch ON/OFF in section 2-2, this diagnostic mode provides higher detection capability than the self-diagnosis mode (2).
Step
1
Operation Connect CONSULT to vehicle's diagnostic connector.
Display (example)
REAL-TIME OIAG
ENGINE TEMP SENSOR

2
Check using "DATA MONITOR" REAL-TIME DiAG mode. [If any abnormality is detected, data monitoring is stopped and data is recorded automatically.]
1 1-
STORE (ii~cunui) DISPLAY
1
0
1

2.
2-5 ACTIVE TEST The active test mode is utilized to examine the problem diagnosis according to self-diagnosis results and data monitor results. CONSULT gives driving signals to the actuators while isolating the on-board
ECCS control unit, to check if the actuator is functioning normally.
(1) Test items and description

Some test items do not apply to all vehicle models. (Inapplicable items are not displayed.)
Active test item FUEL INJECTION Varies air-fuel ratio. Sets control value (opening). Sets engine temperature. Sets delay angle correction value. Fixes AAC valve opening and can stop specified injector operation. Engine speed at this time can be displayed. Turns ONIOFF. Clears learned data on air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor Description
AAC VALVE OPENING

-
ENGINE TEMPERATURE IGNITION TIMING POWER BALANCE

--
FUEL PUMP RELAY

SELF-LEARNING CONT
(2) Operation and display

I
Step
1
Operation Connect CONSULT to vehicle diagnostic connector.
Display (example)
2OC
Fiun engine or drive vehicle.
I-
Setting value
Select desired test item on "ACTIVE TEST" menu.
Press "START" key and input a set value.
I
Note:
0
The set value will be canceled if test is terminated, caneell3d or power is turned OFF (CONSULT power OFF, ignition switch OFF, disconnection of battery terminal) during active test. If the diagnostic connector is disconnected during active test, the active test set status is maintained until the ignition switch is turned OFF.

2.
2-6 WORK SUPPORT
CONSULT can be used as a powerful aid for idling checks and other engine tune-up operations. It issues instructionsto the ECCS control unit to perform control and displays the input and output signal data being used. Actual tune-up operation (for example, turning adjustment screw, etc.) must be performed manually by the mechanic. (1) Support items and description
Work support item
-
Description Fuily closes AAC valve and displays idling rpm. Closes AAC valve completely and displays throttle sensor output voltage.
AAC VALVE ADJ THROTTLE SENSOR ADJ
Note: Although it is possible to adjust the "IGNITION TIMING", this adjustment should not be performed because it may cause the timing to become unstabilized.
beration and display

Operation Display (example)
Connect CONSULT to vehicle diagnostic connector.
1
8
IAAC
VALVE WJ
SET ENGINE OPM AT T H E SPEOHEO VALUE UNDER 1HE FOLLOWING CONUll ION FNG WAIIMRV UP NO LOAD
Run engine.
I__________I
I
Select desired item on "WORK SUPPORT" menu.
START
- -CONDITION SETTING - AAC VALVE FIXED - - - MONiIlUl7 = = =

ENG TEM!' SLN IDLE PCSIDON Ail1 CONU SIG
83OC
OFF
Press "START" key and execute operation.
Note: 'he work support mode is maintained until ignition switch while CONSULT is being used as a support.
turned OFF if the diagnostic connector is disconnected or

3. Basic Inspection
Inspect the three elements of combustion (1. Is fuel injected? 2. Does the spark arc? 3. Does the AAC valve work?) and determine if the faulty system is the fuel system, ignition system or idle control system.
1 INJECTOR OPERATION INSPECTION Place a stethoscope or screwdriver on the injector and

check for injector operation noise (click, click, click) while cranking engine. If NG: Inspect the injector control circuit.
3-2 FUEL PUMP INSPECTION
@
-
a Connect CONSULT to the diagnosis terminal on the side of the vehicle (near fuse block). Note: See B3, 2.2-2 (2)
Turn the ignition switch "ON" and select the "ACTIVE TEST" mode. Press the operation key when "FUEL PUMP RELAY" is displayed and check for pump operation noise.
- - - MONI I O H --CAS'RI'M (POS)
===
950rpm
After turning ignition switch "ON", check for fuel pump operation noise for 5-sec interval. a There must be a fuel pump operation noise while cranking engine. If NG: Inspect fuel pump control circuit.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 3. Basic Inspection (Cont'd)

3-3 FUEL PRESSURE INSPECTION
(1) Simple inspection a When the fuel pump is operating, press the hose between fuel filter and fuel gallery with a finger. There must be tension and pulsations i n the hose,
@
'
a Run the engine. Select the "FUEL PUMP RELAY" Item in the "ACTIVE TEST" mode. Press the OFF button to release fuel pressure.
- - - MONITOR= = = 1 - -CAS-RPM (POS)
950rpm
I
(2) Inspection using fuel pressure gauge
Fuel pressure release a After starting engine, remove fuel pump fuse. Crank engine 2 or 3 times to remove fuel in lines. a When engine will not start, remove pump fuse and crank engine 4 to 5 times to remove fuel in lines. Note: The battery may become weak easily, so use booster cables to connect it to another vehicle or battery if necessary.
Fuel pressure gauge installation Connect the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel strainer and fuel gallery. Install the fuel pump fuse. Start engine and check if fuel pressure reaches standard value. Fuel pressure inspection
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2,psi)
Idling
When pressure regulator vacuum hose is removed
Approx. 245 (2.5, 36)

Approx, 294
(3.0, 43)

In vehicles with starting problems, turn ignition switch ON and check fuel pressure for 5-sec interval when fuel pump is rotating.
Ignition switch "ON" for 5-sec interval
Approx. 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
If NG;
Fuel pressure is abnormallv hiah. Fuel pressure is abnormally low.
1
Pressure regulator is faulty. Return svstem is cloaaed or hose is bent.
a Pressure regulator is faulty. a Fuel pump output is faulty. a Fuel supply system is clogged.
Note: The fuel pressure should be also checked when the engine speed is increased.
3-4 SPARK INSPECTION

Measure the voltage with a test probe at power transistor coil side terminal for spark signal of the primary system. Terminals 1 - 6 when cranking engine Approx. 9.5V Primary system check can also be performed by timing light or tachometer needle deflection.
To check if spark actually arcs or not, remove ignition coil (No. 1 cylinder is easiest), connect spark plug and place it against collector or other part for ground. Check if spark arcs when engine is cranked. If NG: Inspect ignition control system.
3-5 AAC VALVE OPERATION INSPECTION

ACTIVE TEST
- - - MONITOR= --CAS*RPM (POS) AIR FLOW MTR AIR FLOW MTR-R ENG TEMP SEN
AAC./V OPENING
16%
= =I
950rpm 093V 088V 87OC
Start the engine, Set any angle in the "AAC VALVE OPENING" item of "ACTIVE TEST" mode. Check if idle speed at this time varies from set value.
,
I

0
After warming engine, check if idle speed lowers fror specified value when AAC valve connector is removed.
AIR REGULATOR OPERATION INSPECTION Start engine when cold, and check if idle speed lower when air regulator hose is closed or partially pressed. Start engine when cold and check if specified idle spee increases after AAC valve connector is removed an engine warms up. Connect AAC valve connector, and warm up engine ade quately. After warming up, remove AAC valve connector again an check if idle speed gradually decreases below specific value.
3-7 INTAKE MANIFOLD VACUUM After warming up engine, check vacuum when idling.
Reference
Approx. -64.0 kPa (-480 mrnHg, -18.90 inHg)
The vacuum value will be abnormal if there are air leak or other problems with combustion or main engine bod! Locate and correct the cause of problem.

4. System Figure and Circuit Diagram
4-1 SYSTEM FIGURE (RB26DETT)
8
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 4. System Figure and Circuit Diagram (Cont'd)
4-2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (RB26DETT)
ECCS control unit pin layout figure: RB26DETT
Terminal number
1 2
Description Ignition signal (power transistor) Cyl, No. 1 Ignition signal (power transistor) Cyl. No. 5 Ignition signal (power transistor) Cyl. No. 3
Terminal number
11 12
Description Ignition signal (power transistor) Cyl. No. 6 Ignition signal (power transistor) Cyl. No. 2 Ignition signal (power transistor) Cyl. No. 4
3
4
13
14
AAC valve
Sub electrical tan relay (engine temoerature switch)
15
16
ECCS relay
7 8
Tachometer speed signal
17 18
19
,
Fuel pump relay
Air conditioner relay (air conditioner cut signal) Ground (ignition signal system) Receive (control unit data reception,
Power steering oil pressure switch Ground (ignition signal system) Clock (synchronization signal) Monitor and check lamp (red)
10
21 (Rx)
20
31 (CLK)
(Txl
Transmit (data sent from control unit) Detonation sensor 1 (cyl 1 to 3) Detonation sensor 2 (cy! 4 to 6) Wastegate valve control solenoid valve Air flow meter ground Air flow meter intake air quantity signal (rear) Engine temperature sensor Exhaust gas sensor (front) Sensor ground (throttle sensor, engine temperature sensor)
23
24
33
34
Air flow meter ground Air flow meter intake air quantity signal (front) Intake air temperature sensor
25 26
27 28 29
35
36
37 38
39
Throttle opening output -
40
51
Crank angle sensor (120' signal) Crank angle sensor (1' signal) Vehicle speed sensor Throttle valve switch (idle connection point)
41
Crank angle sensor (120' signal) Crank angle sensor ( I e signal)

. .
42
52
-- .
43
44 45 (IGN) 46
Ignition switch START signal Neutral switch

-
53
Ignition switch (IGN) Air conditioner switch
55
56
Exhaust gas sensor (Rear) Throttle sensor output signal
47 (CHK)
48
I Check (diaanosis activation)
1
r
57
1 Throttle valve switch cower sumlv

Battery power supply
I
I
Throttle sensor power supply supPIY Control unit power supply Ground (control unit)
49
50
59
60
Control unit power supply Ground (control unit)
((3)
102
103
104
Injector No. 3 Fuel pump terminal voltage control outout (FPCM) 1 Injector No. 2 Fuel pump terminal voltage control output (FPCM) 2 Injector ground Injector ground
I
110
111
Injector power supply. (counter electromotive reflex circuit) I Injector No. 5
Injector No. 6
1
113 115 116
105 106 107 108
Injector No. 4
-
Injector ground
The terminal symbol enclosed in parentheses ( ) is the self-diagnosis connector symbol.
ECCS Component Parts
Component part
Type
1 valve
Wastegate valve control solenoid
solenoid system
Diaphragm system Top feed type Roller vane type Bi-metal type Solenoid type Mini mold type
1
1
Strut tower right Fuel pipe front end Intake manifold Fuel tank Intake manifold lower part Intake manifold collector lower part Cylinder head (above each plug)
Pressure regulator Injector Actuator system Fuel pump Air regulator AAC valve Ignition coil Power transistor unit Crank angle sensor
Air flow meter (2)
For 6-channel low-voltage electronic Rocker cover ornament distribution - .- .. .- - . Photocell (camshaft drive) Hot wire type Thermistor type Variable resistor type ONIOFF switch Thermistor type Heater attached (titanium) Pressure-electrical type Operation amplifier Cylinder head left front Front left Intake manifold collector Accelerator work unit Accelerator work unit Water outlet Front and rear exhaust outlets Cylinder block Rear pillar inner
Intake air temperature sensor Throttle sensor Sensor system Throttle valve switch Engine temperature sensor Exhaust gas sensor Detonation sensor Fuel pump modulator

5. Actuator System Inspection
Use measurement equipment such as a circuit tester, CONSULT electrical system diagnosis tester and oscilloscope to perform the inspection. Refer to item l., 1-1 (6) for the measurement equipment operation procedures. The following preparation must be performed when using this equipment.
(1) Using circuit tester and oscilloscope Use check adapter to perform the measurement.
(2) Using CONSULT Connect CONSULT to the diagnostic connector on vehicle

(near the fuse block). Note: See section 2, 2-2 (2) for details.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 5. Actuator System Inspection (Cont'd)
5-1 FUEL PUMP SYSTEM INSPECTION
Fuel pump relay
*
ECCS relay
ECCS control unit

FPCM p!n layout
Pin number Description
1 ] FIW volume control signal (FPC 11
1 ~ ~ w v d u m a signal (FPC 2) consrot
Fuel pump control
Fuel pump system trouble diagnosis flowchart
pump oneration sound inspacticp1 Pump sounds when ignition switch is ON f a only 6-sec intervat. r
pump doesn'l soundIOthef conditions.
1 f
I
fuel pump relay operation sound lrspsclion
When ignition switch is ON,

fuel pressure Is 294 kPa
Wien ignition switch is ON, there is inlay operation sound.
1 (V} "DATA MONITOR"

"ACTIVE TEST' Moirnal
NOsound 1
I
T
Abnormal Fuse, relay
0 ) and@
I
I
Other conditions
1
I
Battery voltage when ignition switch is OM for 5-sec and "ACTIVE TEST" is ON.
Fuel purm inspection 1 Measure resletance between cmnp . terminals @ and (2). 2. Apdy battory voltage directly between terminal8 @ 0 and @ @.
1. ApptCK. 0.50.
Harness continuity inspection Measure ~esislaoce between relay terminal <g) and pump tarmlnal @,
Normal
Fuel pump relay power i m p e c t i ~ Measure voltage between relay terninal @ snd <g> end the ground.
Abnormal
1
Replace fusa or relay.
00
Other than 00
2. Pump operation'
sound is produced. Connector Check for faulty connection and impact circuit system
Othar conditions
Repair harness.
Battery voltage with
Harness continuity inspection Measure ruistanca betwoen rehY terminal @ and C/U tarmind @.
T
Fuel pump control modulator cortrol signal inspection ~ h e r t v d t a g e b e t ~ a n ~ ~ ~ @ @ e ~ ground.
<S) "DATA MONITOR" @ Measure voltage between C U I

ground. Battery voltage when ignition switch i s ON.
terninal
@ and
-ox.
4V when Ignition
I
Other
twitch is ON lof 6sec and enginw is cranking. ~ p p r c xW at engine . speed after warming up.
Harness continuity inspection Measure resistance from FPCM terminal to C/Uterminal <yS> end FPCM terminal to C/U terminal
check connector for breaks and input signal System.
Repair
ECCS C/U
pmef Supply circuit
(T)
CiOfD.
.. . . . .
ECCS control unit terminal arramment
Measure vdtage between C/U terniml e~ gr~".
Repair brness.
Battery voltage when ignition switch is ON
Fuel purw control modulator inspection Check voltage b e m e n FPCM terminals and @.
7 l o 8V: When voltage
from FPCM terminal ( ) to round i s 1 less than I V max. Battery voltage when: Voltage from FPCM 1 to ground is 4V Volkag~ from FPCM
check for connector breaks and circuit iystem.
EN-176

5.
Actuator System Inspection (Cont'd)
(1) Fuel pump relay operation inspection Turn ignition switch "ON", select "FUEL PUMP RELAY" of "ACTIVE TEST" mode. Press the ON key and check if pump operation makes an operation sound.
ON - - - MONI 1011 = = = FUEL PUMP I'iELAY
CAS.nPM(POS]
95Uipii1
Inside of trun
a When the ignition switch is "ON", the relay operation sound must be audible. The pump must sound in 5 sec after relay is turned on, After the engine has stopped, turn ignition key to OFF i n 1.5 sec.
(2) Fuel pump relay power inspection

0
Disconnect fuel pump relay and measure the voltage between following terminals and ground when the ignition switch is ON.
RB26DETT
\~easurernentlocation Condition
1
ON.
terminal (2) on fuel
terminal (3) on fuel
When ignition switch is
Battery voltage
FUEL PUMP RELAY
(3) Fuel pump control signal inspection Select "FUEL PUMP RLY" item of "DATA MONITOR" mode and check following items.
Condition
^""""'-^^^^He
1
Fuel pump relay OFF
When ignition switch is ON (engine is not running) When cranking engine When idling
ON
ON
a Measure the voltage between t h e following terminals and the ground when the ECCS control unit connectors are connected.
ECCS control unit
RB26DETT
Condition When ignition switch is ON (with engine stopped).
- .- -
Between ECCS C/U terminal (18) and ground Within 5 seconds right after switch oN,
control
Approx. 1V Battery voltage Approx. 1V Approx. 1V
modulator
B02-441'
After 5 seconds right after turning switch ON.
Cranking engine Idling
Fuel pump control modulator control signal

inspection
Measure the voltage between the following terminals and the ground when the ECCS control unit connectors are connected.
Engine
RB26DETT
Measurement location Between ECCS CIU terminal (104) and ground (FPCM1) Ignition switch ON (with engine stopped) Starting or with high load Idling Medium load Approx. 4V 0V after 5 sec. Approx. 4V
I
I Between ECCS CIU terminal (106) and ground (FPCM2)

4
1
I
Approx. OV
Approx. OV
Approx. 4V
. Check voltage
Condition Idling Medium load Starting or with high load
at FPCM terminals 4 and 7.

Between FPCM terminal 4 and ground
Between FPCM
terminal 7 and ground
Battery voltage
- ADD~OX. 1 6V
Battery voltage - Approx. 8V
Approx. OV
Battery voltage

5.

in "DATA MONITOR" mode and perform the following inspection.
Item
(5) ECCS control unit power inspection 0 Select "BATTERY VOLTAGE" item
Condition Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
11
- 14V
CAUTION: The same setting as ON state is maintained for a few seconds right after the ignition switch is turned ON 4 OFF and then ON again.
ECCS
@
-
Measure the voltage between the following terminals and the ground when the ECCS control unit connectors are connected.
RB26DETT
control
unit
16
149
e r e m e n t location Condition Ignition switch OFF Ignition switch ON Cranking Idling
11
I
Between ECCS C/U terminal (16) and ground Battery voltage

V Approx. O
1
I
Between ECCS C/U terminal (49) and ground Approx, OV Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage
Approx. OV
Approx. OV
(6) Harness continuity inspection a Disconnect harness connectors of ECCS control unit, fuel
harness side
pump relay and fuel pump and measure resistance between the following terminals.
~ngine RB26DETT
Measurement location Between ECCS C/U harness terminal (18) and fuel pump relay harness terminal (1) Between fuel pump harness terminal (2) and fuel pump relay harness terminal (5)
o n
o n

5.

Remove each connector and measure the resistance between the followina terminals.
relav harness
Fuel pump harness

side
side
Between ECCS C/U terminal (104) and FPCM harness terminal (1) Between ECCS C/U terminal (106) and FPCM harness terminal (2) Between fuel pump relay harness terminal (5) and FPCM harness terminal (5) Between fuel pump relay harness terminal (5) and FPCM harness terminal (7) Between fuel pump harness terminal (1) and FPCM harness terminal (4)
Trunk, right side
ss connector
(7) Fuel pump voltage inspection Disconnect the fuel pump connector and measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground.
Engine
RB26DETT
Measurement location Between fuel pump harness terminal (2) and ground
5 sec after ignition switch is turned
ON
Cranking
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
(8) Fuel pump inspection

e
Disconnect the fuel pump connector and measure the resistance between the followinq fuel Dump terminals.
Engine RB26DETT
Measurement location Between fuel pump terminal (1) and
APP~OX. 0.4
(2)
- 0.7Q
Disconnect the fuel pump connectors, apply the battery voltage directly to the following fuel pump terminals and check fuel pump operation.
Pump terminal (2) to battery positive terminal ( + ) Pump terminal (1) to battery negative terminal (-)
CAUTION: Be careful because damage will occur if connection is made with the incorrect battery polarity. Do not generate any sparks because fuel tank is nearby.

5.
(9) Fuel pump control modulator inspection a When fuel pump control modulator connector is connected, measure the voltage between the following terminals.
Voltage between FPCM terminal (1) and ground Voltage between FPCM terminals (7) and (4)
,
Voltage between FPCM terminal (2) and ground
- 7.0V 8.8 - 9.2V

6.6
0 - 1V
Approx. 4V Approx. 4V
0 - 1V
+
Battery voltage
5-2 INJECTOR SYSTEM INSPECTION [Control circuit diagram]
IGN
n45
ECCS
valve
switch
IDLE
Crank angle sensor Air flew meter (front)
ECCS control unit

2
Exhaust gas sensor (rear)
Intake aif quantity signal
meter (rear)
Air flow
Engine temperature
sensor
Throttle
48
44
534~
sensor
38
-1
[Control description]
Input signal Crank angle sensor 120' signal Crank anale sensor 1' sianal Terminal number Control description
D
Remarks
41, 51 42, 52
Determines injector injection timing. Reads engine speed. Detects intake air quantity, and determines basic injection quantity (injection pulse width) based on engine load. Increases fuel quantity when starting. Determines injection quantity when starter SW is ON. Performs injection increase according to engine temperature. Fuel cut range changes according to engine temperature. Fail-safe function activated when disconnected.
Air flow meter intake air quantity signal
27, 35
-- . - . -
START signal
43
Engine temperature sensor signal
I
29,55
s Fail-safe activated when

short-circuit or disconnection occurs. a According to control block condition.
Exhaust gas sensor signal Throttle valve SW (idle connection point)
Injection pulse width control according to air-fuel ratio feedback.
a Activated when throttle sensor damage occurs. 0 Idle judgment backup.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Con trol System) 5. Actuator System Inspec :ion (Cont'd)
Input signal
1
1
Terminal number
Control description
I
Remarks
I
Throttle sensor
1
38
a Fuel cut during deceleration
Flow correction during acceleration or
1 a decelerationinjection Interruption
1
1
Idle judgment Deceleration fuel cut according to ON signal. Acceleration increase when ON goes to OFF. Fuel cut interrupts speed and fuel cut at 0 km/h (0 MPH ) vehicle speed Injection pulse width correction
Vehicle speed sensor Battery voltage Intake air temperature sensor
53 49
36
Detects intake air quantity temperature and corrects injection pulse width.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 5. Actuator System Inspection (Cont'd) Injector system trouble diagnosis flowchart 1
Inspect ether Iniectof overation sound inspeaia'i No operation sound
Operation makes sound r
t
Injector control sional inspection Measure voltage between injectcr connectof terminal leach cylinder) and ground.
Note: Injector control signal must be verified on

oscilloscope.
I
Other
I
Battery voltage when engine i s running
Verify waveform on oscilloscope.
Injector power 'supply inspection Measure voltage between injector CinnectW terminal Q) (each cylinder) and around,
Inspect connectas fen breaks and disconnections.
Battery voltage measurement when ignition switch is ON.
Ortw l l w n voltage msastxement

wlwn Ignition switch i not ON. s
ECCS control unit terminal arrangement

Dropping re~istor Inspection
Injector inspection Measure rasislsnce between termnals <3) and @.
supply circuit system
Resistor
(5)
between
Apptox. 50
Other
Harness continuity Inspection (resistance measurement)
\
Replace dropping resistor
0 0
f
ECCS CIU power supply inspection
'
I
Oilier
000
1
Repair harness
(S) "DATA MONITOR"
@ Voltage measureinent betweenterminal @ and ground

Battery voltage when ignition switch i s ON.
1
T
Repair ECCS C/U power supply circuit system.

5.
* BALANCE* * * = = = MONITOR = = =
$ *POWER
I ACTIVE
TEST I
CASsRPM (POSI
950rpm
27%
AAC VALVE
Use "POWER BALANCE" in the CONSULT active test mode to change the idle speed and check the injector operation. CAUTION: (1) There is a necessary minimum test time limit to prevent error. (2) Avoid performing the test during driving.
(1) Injector control signal and power inspection [Injector connectors] Disconnect the injector connectors and measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground.
Engine Measurement location Condition
-
RB26DETT
Control circuit nal (2) and ground
1 Between harness terrni- 1 Between harness terrninab (1) and ground

I
Power supply circuit
Ignition switch ON
..
Battery voltage Approx. 10V
+
4 -
Cranking engine
Engine running
1 as the engine speed 1 increases (approx. 0.2V 1 1 decrease for each 1
The voltage decreases
Battery voltage
1 engine speed increase 1
[ECCS control unit connectors]

Engine Measurement location
p.
RB26DETT
Control circuit Between ECCS C/U terminals (IOl), (103), (105), ( l l o ) , (112), (114) and ground Battery voltage Approx. 10V Power supply circuit Between ECCS C/U terand ground minal (109)

602-4462
Cranking engine
1 decreases as the bat- 1 tery voltage and engine

Engine running
The control unit voltage
speed increases (approx. 0.2V decrease for each engine speed increase of 2,000 rpm).
Battery voltage
1
1
(2) ECCS control unit power supply inspection 0 Refer to fuel pump system.
5 Actuator System Inspection (Cont'd) .

(3) Harness continuity inspection a Disconnect the control unit and injector connectors an
measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Measurement location RB26DETT Injector harness terminal (2) to to to to to to No. 1 cylinder
No. 2 cylinder
ECCS C/U harness

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
(101)
(105) (103)
(114)
(110) (112)
No. No. No. No.
3 4 5 6
cylinder cylinder cylinder cylinder
o n
Disconnect the harness connector from the injector a m dropping resistor and measure the resistance between thi following terminals.
I
Measurement location Dropping register harness Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal Injector harness terminal (1) to to to to to to No. 1 cylinder No. 5 cylinder NO. 3 cylinder No. 6 cylinder NO. 2 cylinder No. 4 cylinder
RB26DETT
(1) (4) (5) (6) (7) (6)
I
on
(4) Injector inspection Disconnect the injector connectors and measure the resis tance between the terminals for each injector.
Engine Measurement location Between injector terminals (1) and (2) (for all cylinders) RB26DETT Approx. 2
- 30
(5) Dropping resistor inspection
a
Disconnect the dropping resistor connector and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Engine
Measurement location Terminal (1) Terminal (4) Terminal (5) Terminal (6) Terminal (7) Terminal (8)
RB26DETT
Dropping resistor terminal (3) and
I
Approx. 5ft
5-3 IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION
[Control circuit]
IGN
Power
transistor
Ignition relay
ECCS relay
Throttle valve
switch
1-
IDLE
w.
ECCS
control
unit
42
Ground Engine temperature
50
Detonation
I
Input signal
Terminal number
Control description
Remarks
Crank angle sensor 120e signal
41, 51
Ignition timing start point.
The ignition cannot be performed if there is an instantaneous break in the 120

signal. rn The ignition cannot be performed if there is an instantaneous break in the 1' signal. Fail-safe is performed when there is a short-circuit or disconnection. [20( 6 8 T ) at starting, gradually increasing to 80bC (176OF)I Activated when throttle sensor damage occurs. Idle judgment backup.
a Ignition timing count.
Crank angle sensor l o signal
42,
52
The ignition timing is set according to the map indicated by 120 signal.
28
Changes injector injection timing according to engine ternperatureControl for low and high engine temperature conditions.
Throttle valve SW (idle connection point)
54
Input signal Terminal number Control description
Fuel cut during deceleration Flow correction during acceleration or deceleration Interruption injection Idle judgment Deceleration fuel cut according to ON signal. Acceleration fuel increase during ON-OFF operation.
Remarks
Throttle sensor
s
START signal
Detonation sensor
Controls ignition timing when cranking engine. Detects detonation and changes ignition timing. Fail-sate is activated if shortcircuit or disconnection occurs. (Fixed volume delay angle)
23,24
5.
Ignition system trouble diagnosis flowchart
Strong spark arcs.

Olfw system inspection
Other condition
I
Normal
Abncimal
(B)
"DATA MONITOR" {real-tima diagfw~ia)
Normal
Abncx m ~ l
--
Power transistor control signal inspodon (power transistor unit) M6a~ure voltage between power tran6ittoi
Approx. 0.1V to 0.3V when ergina is running
Otlwr
i
Acpfox. 14V while
Appra. 0.14' to 0.3V wilh engiria running
cnhel
Powor transistor inspection
Harness continuity inspection
ECCS C/U power supply inspection
+
t
@ "DATA
MONITOR" Mesew& v d t a w between CIU larmnel end wound Ofltar
Normal Harness continuity inspection Measure resistance between p o w transistor terminal Q) and ignition coil termnel (D.
Abnum~il
Battery voltage mhnn ignition switch is ON.
1
Input igna inspection system.
Ignition coil power supply inspection Inspect voltage between coil @ and ground. Battery vol1a9e when ignition switch is ON.
lot
Inspect connectors faulty contact check circuit
1 systems.
i
\vfat
ECCS c o m d unit terminal
IGN coil inspection between Measure resis~anm coil termiceis @ end @.
coil power supply
0.6 to 0.9Q
Ignition system secondary
Replace ignition coil.
Note: An oscilloscope must be used to check the output waveform d the Ignition system
(1) Self-diagnosis When the ignition switch is ON and engine is cranking, check faulty system name in "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS" mode. When there is abnormal output, inspect the assumed locations in the following sequence. Power transistor (short) 4 ECCS harness (short) 4 ECCS control unit
m Set ignition switch to ON.
a Perform the diagnosis mode selection procedure with the diagnosis connector in vehicle- Check the code number of the faulty system displayed by the flashing exhaust gas temperature warning lamp on the instru.) ment panel. (See 2, 2-2, d)
(2) Power transistor control signal inspection

Measure voltage between the following connectors and ground when ECCScontrol unit connectors are connected.
Measurement location Condition
RB26DETT
Voltage between ECCS CIU terminals 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 and ground
ECCS
control unit
Cranking Idling
0.2
- 0.3V
- 0.3V
0.2
2,500 rprn
Approx. 0.4V
(3) Ignition primary voltage signal inspection

a Measure the primary voltage of coil side connector of power transistor.
Voltage between power Voltage between IGN transistor IGN coil side coil side terminal E and terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, ground. and ground
\ Measurement location
Condition Cranking Idling
-
Approx. 14V Approx. 14V
OV
O V
2,500 rprn
(4) Harness continuity inspection
Disconnect the connectors on the input side of the ECCS control unit and power transistor unit, and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Engim Measurement location Power transistor unit harness (6 polarity terminal) and and and and and and terminal 1, terminal 2. terminal 3. terminal 4. terminal 5. terminal 6.
B26DETT
ECCS
Between Between Between Between Between Between
C/U harness
terminal 1 terminal 12 terminal 3 terminal 13 terminal 2 terminal 11
Oft
B3

5. Actuator System Inspection (Cont'd)
Disconnect the connector from the power transistor unit output side and ignition coil, and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Engine Ignition coil connector harness (terminal 1)
Measurement location Power transistor unit harness (7 polarity terminal side) Terminal 1 Terminal 2 Terminal 3 Terminal 4 Terminal 5 Terminal 6
to to to to to to
RB26DETT
No. 1 cylinder
No. 2 cylinder No. 3 cylinder No. 4 cylinder No. 5 cylinder No. 6 cylinder
Disconnect ignition coil connector and measure the voltage between the followina terminals.
Condition
Measurement location Between ignition coil connector harness terminal (2) and ground Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON
(5) Power transistor inspection a Check the resistance value between all power transistor terminals with an analog circuit tester probe by changing the positive @ and negative 0 poles.
Inspection terminals and values
@I-@ @ -
@ ~ o 0tor sot2
< @ - 0 -Q
@-@
@I-@
- ~ ~ o t 0 o r m Q ot@-@Oor=ft N \ -@NotOorooR
<
Q-@mft
(6) Ignition coil inspection

Measure primary coil resistance value.
Measurement location Primary coil resistance value (Q)
R B26DETT
@)
(0)
0.6
- 0.9
(Reference): Secondary coil resistance value ((3)
@): -!2

5[Control circuit]
5-4 IDLE SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION
AAC valve
valve switch
57
54
ECCS
control
angle
Ground
1
44 4
;
Fuel pump relay
l z q q
modulator
Air conditioner switch
Engine temperature
(
Neutral switch Power steering oil pressure switch
-5 >3
Input signal Crank angle sensor 1' signal Engine temperature sensor Throttle valve SW (idle connection point)
1
I
Terminal number
1
I
Control description Engine speed is read and feedback control is performed for the speed value. The target engine speed is changed according to cooling water temperature.
42*52
28
54
I
1
a Activated when throttle sensor damage occurs. (Idle judgment backup.)

Deceleration fuel cut Flow correction at acceleration or deceleration Interruption injection Idle judgment Deceleration fuel cut according to ON signal. Acceleration increase when ON goes to OFF.
Throttle sensor
1
53
Vehicle speed sensor Air conditioning switch Neutral switch
a Idle control starts at vehicle speed under 8 km/h (5 MPH).
46
44
I
I
After engine warms up, increases idle when air conditioning is turned ON. Starts idle control in neutral position.
Input signal
Terminal number
19 49
Control description Increases idle speed when power steering fluid pressure is too high. When battery voltage is low (less than 12V), idle speed is increased.
Power steering oil pressure switch Battery voltage
63 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 5. Actuator System Inspection (Cont'd)
Idle speed control system trouble diagnosis flowchart
Idle speed changes

I
Otl~r
1
AAC valve control signal inspection

Battery voltage irisiiection between A A C valve terminal (l) a d around
2 to 3V when cranking 6 to 10V when idling
Other
T
Supplemental air supply part inspection [Check for disconnected hoses, clogqirq, etc.)
AACvalve power supply inspection Measure vdlaae between AAC lertknal (j) a n d ground.
I
No hose disconnection or clogging
Hose disconnection a clogging
Battery voltage when ignition switch i s ON.
Air regulator. inspection (power supply.main unit) Abnormal
o~)
Other system inspection
Measure resistance bemoan AAC
Replace AAC valve. Measure resistance t a m e n AAC hainesu terminal l5) and C/U harness terminal (4).
N r ma! o
0Q
Note: The output data for the AAC vulva system must ba checked with an oscilloscope.
I
Olhr

ooQ
Repair or replae air regulator.
ECCS CtU power supply inspection
Repair harness.
(g)
"DATA MONITOR" terminal
@ Measure the voltage between CIU supply

(3) and ground.
Battery voltage when ignition switch is ON.
r
Input signal system inspection
Repair ECCS C/U power supply
ECCS m r o l unit terminal layout
I
(1) AAC valve control signal inspection a When ECCS control unit connector is connected, measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground
RB26DETT
ECCS 4 control
i>
@
Ignition switch is ON Cranking engine
002-4447
Battery voltage
2 3V
When cold
fdling
6 - 7V
8 - 10V
After warm-up
Measure the voltage between the AAC valve connector terminal (2) and middle harness connector terminal (3) and ground
(2) AAC valve function inspection

ACTIVE TEST
- - - MONITOR --CAS-RPM (POS) AIR FLOW MTR AIR FLOW MTR-R ENG TEMP SEN
AAC/V OPENING
I I ===
r")
27%
950rpm 0.93V 0.92V 68OC
Use "AAC VALVE OPENING" item of "ACTIVE TEST" mode to set an optional angle. Check that idle speed changes corresponding to setting value at this time.
(3) AAC valve power inspection 0 Disconnect AAC valve connector and measure voltage between the following terminals and ground.
Engine
nt location
RB26DETT
Condition
When ignition switch is ON.
Between AAC valve connector harness terminal (1) and ground.
Battery voltage
Measure the voltage between the middle harness connector terminal (7) and the ground.
(4) Harness continuity inspection Disconnect the connector from the ECCS control unit and AAC valve and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
RB26DETT
Between ECCS control unit harness terminal (4) and AAC valve harness terminal (2)
o n
Measurement location
Between Middle connector AAC valve terminal (3) and AAC valve harness terminal (2)
o a
(5) AAC valve inspection Disconnect the AAC valve connector and measure thc resistance between the following AAC valve terminals.
Between AAC valve terminals (1) and (2)
9-
ion
Measurement can also be performed at middle connect~ terminals.

Engine Measurement l o c a t i o n Between AAC valve terminals (3) and (7)
9-
ion

5.
0

Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground when the air regulator middle harness is connected.
Engine
(6) Air regulator power supply inspection
\
Ignition switch ON Cranking idling
RB26DETT Between middle harness connector terminal (8) and ground

5-sec interval battery voltage Approx. 1V Approx. 1V
(7) Air regulator inspection (T) Shutter opening angle inspection (static characteristic)
0
Visually inspect the shutter angle.
60 (140) min.
802-4442
Fully closed
@ Inspection (dynamic characteristic)

Apply current from the battery to the terminals and check changes in shutter opening angle. The shutter must gradually close fully within 7 minutes. [Ambient temperature approx. 20 (68'F)] (Reference) Heater resistance value: 7 f [20 ( 6 8 O F ) J 5t
5-5 WASTEGATE VALVE CONTROL SYSTEM INSPECTION
Wastegate valve contrd solenoid valve
IGN
-,
45
,a9
I
I6
25
ECCS contrd unit
Wastegate valv
actuator
Wastegate valve actuator
Wastegate valve control system trouble diagnosis flowchart
signal inspection Measure tha voltage between SV terminal
@,
Other
Battery voltage when idling without engine load: 0 V
1
Inspect air supply system. Inspect solenoid power supply. Measure the voltage h e w n S/V terminal Battery voltage w i t h ignition switch ON.
Other
I
Solenoid valve inspection Measure the resistance between S/V terminals and @.
<D
-ox.
r
30 400
Other
i
ECCS C/U power supply inspection
(B)
"DATAMONITOR"
c5
Replace solenoid valve.
Measure the voltage between U U @ teitniml @ and a d .

Other
Battery voltage when ignition switch is ON. t '
Harness continuity inspection Measure the resistance between S/V terminals
ECCS control unit terminal layout
I
Inspect circuit system for connector break o disconnection. r
(1) Wastegate valve control solenoid valve control signal inspection

When wastegate valve control solenoid valve connectors are connected, measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground. , When ECCS control unit connectors are connected, measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground.
Engine Measurement location Condition Idling
With accelerator pedal depressed
RB26DETT
a Between solenoid valve terminal (2) and ground 1 Between ECCS C/U terminal (25)
and around
Battery voltage Approx. OV

5.
(2) Wastegate valve control solenoid valve power suppi: inspection Remove the wastegate valve control solenoid valve cor
nector and measure the voltage between the following ter rninals and the ground.
Engine
RB26DETT
7
\
Condition
Measurement location Between solenoid valve harness terminal (1) and ground Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON
(3) Wastegate valve control solenoid valve inspection Disconnect the wastegate valve control solenoid valve cor nector and measure the resistance between the followin terminals.
Measurement location Between solenoid side terminals (1) and (2)
B02-4444
Engine
(4) ECCS control unit power supply inspection Refer to the fuel pump system section.
f\testegate valve

Disconnect the connectors from the wastegate valve contn solenoid valve and ECCS control unit and measure th resistance between the following terminals. -
is?-
ement terminal
Engine RB26DETT
Between ECCS C/U harness termi-
5-6 SUB ELECTRICAL FAN SYSTEM INSPECTION Refer to item 66,6.

6. Sensor System Inspection
Use a circuit tester, CONSULT electrical system diagnosis tester and oscilloscope to test the sensor system. Refer to section 1, 1-1, (6) for an explanation of the measurement equipment operation procedures. Refer to section 5. for preparation.
6-1 CRANK ANGLE SENSOR SYSTEM INSPECTION
ECCS relay
Crank angle sensor
42
unit
Power supply Ground

4
52
u SD
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 6. Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd)
Crank angle sensor system trouble diagnosis flowchart
ECCS control unit ~erminel layout
----.
---3
--
-Normal
[@
I@
"SELF.DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS' Self-diagnosis (coda number 11)1
t
Normal
Abnormal
1
-.
t
Crank angle sensor Input signal inspection
(g) "DATA MONITOR"

deal-time d i a g d s ) Abnormal
Inspect other systems.
(B)
"DATA MONITOR"
Measure the voltage betwaun terminals and ground.
@ ECCS CIU
When engine is running:
@, @
(fl)
Engine rpm display
@ Approx. 0.5V between terminal

-ox.
2.5V between terminal
#andground i
and ground
0 hr t
Crank angle sensor powa r supolv and ground i nsPeclion Measure the voltage b e t w e n termiwle (3) end 0.
Crank angle Sensor o t signal inspection u m Mflasure the v o l t e p between terminals end (4) and terminals @ end g).
Battery voltage when ignition switch it ON.
Other
d
Mwn engine is runniw: W O0.5V. K between terminals 1 and

Appfm. 2.5" bewean terrninuls
04
8
4
1
Harness cortinuitf Inspection Measure the resistance betweenib terminals indicated below.
Crank angle sensor hYpe~tiOn Rotate shaft by hand and measure voltage betwoen each crank engla serrf.or terminal end ground.
Repair crank angle
sensor p w f upp ply
Inspect crank angle sersot and ECCS C/U connectc~s beaks fa of disconnections.
00
Other than 00
i
Voltage between terminal 1 and ground r e p a m betweon 0.5V and W. Voltage between terminal and ground repeats between 2.6V end OV.
Other
d
Inspect crank angle sensor conrector for contact and defects,
Replace crank angle sansu.
-B02-4445
Note: For crank angle sensor system inspection, use CONSULT and oscilloscope to check output waveform.

6.
(1) Self-diagnosis
Normally in a self-diagnosis operation, when "CODE 11" or "FAULTY SYSTEM NAME " (when using CONSULT) is displayed if the 1' or 120" signal is not input within a fixed period of time. When this occurs, examine the following items carefully. 0 When the malfunction reoccurs, use the real-time diagnosis (CONSULT "DATA MONITOR" mode) or oscilloscope to detect disconnections. When an abnormality is detected, consider these locations in the following sequence because there may be other malfunctions besides the crank angie sensor. ECCS harness (faulty contact)
->
Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd)
crank angle sensor + ECCS control unit
T?MONITOR * N O FAIL
ffi)
EXH GAS SEN-R M/'R F i C MNT M/R FjC MNT-R CAR SPEED SEN I___________I
CAS-RPM (POS) AIR FLOW MTR AIS FLOW M'R-R ENG TEMP SEN EXH GAS SEN
975rpm
0.92V
78OC
091V
1
(2) Input signal inspection a Use the "CAS-RPM(POS)" item of the ''DATA MONITOR" mode to determine engine speed.
22V 0.02V RICH RICH 0krn/h
RECORD
@
-
a Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with ECCS control unit harness connected.
Engine Between ECCS C/U terminal (42) and ground (1' signal)
t
1
[
t~:
sensor
2[zj42ECC.S
control
unit
1\
Ignition switch ON Cranking
\^^_4
Measurement location Between ECCS C/U terminal (41) and ground Condition (120' signal)
0V or approx. 5V
I
5V
lasignal
- - Average
voltage
ov
CAUTION: The voltages in this chart are average voltage values of the pulse waveform measured by a circuit tester and these are the reference values. The waveform must be checked by an oscilloscope.

6.

Connect crank angle sensor connector, insert voltage measurement probe behind rear of connector and measure the voltages between following terminals.
Engine
(3) Sensor output signal inspection
RB26DETT
I
[Measuremen
Between crank a n g l e sensor terminal (3) and ground (power)
Ignition switch
ON
Cranking engine Idling
0V or approx. 5V
Battery voltage
- 3V
2 3V
Approx. 0.5V
Battery voltage Battery voltage
0.3 - 0.7V
(4) Harness continuity inspection a Disconnect connectors of ECCS control unit and crank angle sensor. Measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Engine
RB26DETT
1
ECCS CJU harness
1 Crank angle sen- 1

sor harness
Terminals (41)
- (1)
0n
(5) Crank angle sensor inspection

Disconnect crank angle sensor from engine, turn shaft by hand and measure connector voltage.
E
Engine Condition
Between crank Measurement location angle sensor
Between crank angle sensor
signal) 0V or approx. Battery voltage
Ignition switch
ON
CAUTION: To prevent injector from operating, remove fuse or connector before inspection. When an apparent abnormality is detected by self-diagnosis according to shaft rotation, be careful because it may not be an actual abnormality in this case.
6-2 AIR FLOW METER SYSTEM INSPECTION
\1 - ^
! I
~ 4 9
Air flew meter (front)

Intake air quantity Signal
*>35
4
9aoal ground
---
Ignition timing control

I
A-1
I (1
*.34
^& ^ ,*I
Air flow meter (rear\*
Intake air auaniiiy signal
Signal ground
ponwr supply
ECCS control unit
2 6
* Differs from CONSULT display (-R).
Cylinder air flow meter, CONSULT (data monitor) display items

Cylinder No.
.
-
Air flow meter
ECCS C/U terminal number

ECCS C/U @ l
CONSULT (data monitor) disolay AIR FLOW METER-R
No. 1, 2, 3 cyl.
No. 4, 5, 6 cyl.
AFM (Front) AFM (Rear)
ECCS CIU @
AIR FLOW METER
Air flow meter system trouble diagnosis flowchart
ECCS contrd unit termlnal layout
Saildiagnosis
1
12)
/@
"SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.'
I(^)Selfdiagnosis (code nu&,
I1
Abnormal
AI(mv nnwr input sigml impaim I(K'! "DATA MONITOR"

make sure there are no
ECCS U U Meaoure the V ~ U W batwaen (ha idl-"o Air Hew muter (front); Air f l w m t e r (rear):
1
termnal*.
8:z8
I( *
No air leaks.
Air leaks present. Cranking: Appra. 1V Idling: Approx. 1.1V 25001pmAwrm. 2V

1
'
Air flow meter output signal inspection Measure the voltage between terhinils and@.
Air flow meter power supply and ground inspection Measure the &tag- b e w e n termirals (5) and (3):
Battery voluipe when ignition switch it ON.
Clanking: Apprc~.I V Idling: Approx. 1.1V 2500 rum Acixox. 2V
Air flow mater Inepoetioo Apply thf battery vdiaw d r c t l v to terminal (?) @ and (3) Q and manturm the v o l t e ~ ~ a n the t t r m i m t t @ m arid (j) W l blowing air into meter.
Repair air flow meter power supply or ground.
Ottw
Check air flow meter end ECCS C/U connectors fa faulty contact a defects.
Harnata continuity inspection Measwm tho r e t i s t a m between tha fdlcwing terminal!.
4
Check ECCS C/U comectora for tau*
connections at Meets
Other than 00
I
Check intake myatem for air leaks.
Other
Clean or replace air (low mater.
No air leaks.
I 1
Air leaks pfearx
Repair lriake
Check air flow matar
connectors for faulty connection) or defects.
(1) Self-diagnosis
When the "CODE No. 12" or "FAULTY SYSTEM - AIR FLOW METER" (when CONSULT is used) are normally displayed in self-diagnosis, the intake air quantity signal voltage is abnormally high or low, and a disconnection or short-circuit in the signal system should be considered. When the malfunction occurs again, use real-time diagnosis (CONSULT "DATA MONITOR" mode) or oscilloscope to detect instantaneous breaks. When an abnormality is detected, consider these locations in the following sequence because there may be other malfunctions besides the air flow sensor. ECCS control When intake air quantity is low: ECCS harness (faulty contact) -+ air flow meter unit 4 intake system (not airtight) When intake air quantity is high: ECCS harness (faulty contact) + intake system (not airtight), faulty wastegate valve control, air flow meter 4 ECCS control unit
-
(2) Input signal inspection

CAS. RPM (POS)
950rpm
a Use "AIR FLOW METER" and "AIR FLOW METER (R)" i n the "DATA MONITOR" mode to check the following items.
-
1I
Air flow meter (F)
Air flow meter (R)
Idling
1 1
Approx. 0.3V
Approx. 1.1V
1 1
+
t
RECORD
@
meter (front) 44
,134
Measure the voltage between the following terminals with the ECCS control unit harness connected.
Hem Air flow meter (F)
ECCS C/U terEccs 'Iu minal (35) and minal (34) and ground (intake ground (ground air quantity signal) signal)
Air flow meter (Ft)
Air flow meter (rear)
= 1 yZTunit 1 Condition
26
Eccs' u I
minal (27) and ground (intake air quantity signal)
c,lJterminal (26) and ground (ground signal)
--
Ignition switch ON Cranking enuine Idling
Approx. 0.3V Approx. 1V
OV
OV
Approx. I V Approx. 1.1V

OV
appro^. 1.1V
(3) Air flow meter output signal inspection a Measure the voltage between the following terminals with the air flow meter connectors connected.
Air flow meter (F)
Air flow meter (R)
Air How meter Air flow meter Air flow meter Air flow meter terminal (2) k ?h l m-a (2) terminal (4) "al (4) and ground and and ground and ground {intake air (intake air (ground signal) (ground signal) quantity signal) quantity signal) Approx. 0.3V Cranking engine Approx. 1V
Approx. 1.1V
O V
Approx, 0.3V Approx. 1V Approx. 1.1V
OV
OV
OV
OV OV
(4) Air flow meter power supply inspection

Measure the voltage between the following terminals and the ground with the air flow meter harness connected.
\
Condition
Engine
RB26DETT
Between air flow meter terminal (5) and ground Battery voltage
~easurement location
Ignition switch ON and engine running
(5) Harness continuity inspection Disconnect the ECCS control unit and air flow meter connectors and measure the resistance between the following terminalsAir flow meter (Front)
Air flow meter (Rear) Air flow meter har-
Air flow meter harness
ECCS C/U
harness
ECCS C/U
harness
terminal (2) to terminal (35) terminal (4) to terminal (34) terminal (3) to body ground terminal (5) to ECCS relay harness terminal (3)
terminal (2) to terminal (27) terminal (4) to terminal (26) terminal 43) to body ground terminal (5) to ECCS relay harness terminal (3)
Oft

6.

Apply the battery voltage directly to terminal (5) @ and (3) Q and measure the voltage change between the terminals (2) and (4) while blowing air on hot wire.
I
1
Hot wire
(6) Air flow meter inspection

0
No air blowing
.
-
Approx. 0.8V Approx. 2V
Blow air.
..
6-3 THROTTLE VALVE SWITCH SYSTEM INSPECTION The throttle valve switch sianal operates when the throttle sensor is faulty.
Throttle valve switch
Jk =
Ignition timing control
Idle speed control
Throttle valve switch system trouble diagnosis flowchart

Throttle valve twitch outn *ignat inspection M ~ B S W ~ voltage bahwen the tarmiralt 5) and @.
8 to 10v *ti
w when accelerator pedel IB pfeitad.
accelerator -&I 1 rot p f a m d . 8
Otliar
connectors and ECCS C/U cmacto-s f faulty a omnectlmm or datectt.
Measure the resistance between terminals @ and Q).
tho voltage
Switch and ground Intpsctim Meaiue b e i w n termlnalu @
throttle valve switcl. Adjust or replace
O when eccaleratw ~ d a is p e s s e d V l IDV w t ~ ecceleratu pedal is not wassad n
. Other
Harness continuity inspection Measure tha resistance bBtwmn tho follcMflng terminelt.
or ground or raplaw
c m t r d unit
Thratle valve switch harness
(1 I ::
ECcs C A I harness
ECCS control unit terf&nal layout
hnspect ECCS C / u c m c t o r * tor faulty connections or detect*.
I1

6. Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd)
(1) Inputloutput signal inspection Measure the voltage between the following terminals and the ground with the ECCS control unit harness connected. Measure the voltage between the throttle valve switch connector terminal (2)and body around.
control unit
valve switch
\
Condition
Between ECCS control unit terminal (54) and Measurement location ground (orIo ;;;oh ;; tt r switch terminal (1) and
1 Accelerator pedal is not 1
\ pressed (idle contact 1

Ignition switch ON or engine running
- 10V
OV
m)
Accelerator pedal is pressed (idle contact OFF)
Cranking engine
Approx. 8V
@
a
Measure the voltage between the following terminals and the ground with the ECCS control unit harness connected. Measure the voltage between the throttle valve switch connector terminal (2) and body ground.
Engine location
RB26DETT
Between ECCS control unit terminal (57) and ground (or throttle valve switch terminal (2) and ground)
Ignition switch ON
- 1DV
(2) Throttle valve switch inspection (idle contact point) a Remove the throttle valve switch connector and measure
the resistance between the following throttle valve switch terminals.
Engine surement location Condition Accelerator pedal is not pressed (idle contact ON) Accelerator pedal is pressed (idle contact OFF)
RB26DETT
Between throttle valve switch terminals (2) and (1)
o n
-0

0
Remove the throttle valve switch and ECCS control uni connectors and measure the resistance between the follow, ing terminals.
RB26DETT
ECCS CIU Throttle valve switch harness to
to
Engine
harness Terminal (54) Terminal (57)
terminal (1) terminal (2)
o n
(4) Idle contact point (touch speed) inspection and adjustment Remove the AAC valve connector and inspect the unit wher the AAC valve is fully opened.
Idle contact point tachometer speed (rpm)
1,200 500
When the tachometer speed does not conform to the specific< value, perform the adjustment as follows. Loosen the throttle valve switch tightening bolts (2). a Remove the throttle valve switch connectors, place a tes probe between throttle valve switch terminals (1) and (2 and measure the resistance. Press on the accelerator pedal and gradually release peda to lower the engine speed. Rotate the throttle valve switcl body and secure it in the position where the tachomete speed conforms to the specified value and the idle contac point is "ON" (the resistance between terminals (1) and (2 is On). Tighten the throttle valve switch tightening bolts. Make sure that the idle is ON observing by the tachomete speed as described above, Connect the throttle valve switch connectors.
EN-214
THROTTLE SENSOR SYSTEM INSPECTION
Throttle sensor
r--control
Fuel injection
quantity contrd
Ignition timing
control
Idle speed control
Throttle sensor system trouble diagnosis flowchart
Selfdiagnosis
0 "SE LF-DIAGNOSTIC
@
RESULTS~~ Self-diagnosis (code No. 43)
$ "DATA
Normal
I
MONITOR" {real-time diagnosis) Abnormal
I
Throttle sensor input signal inspection
Throttle sensor Inspection Measure the resistance between terminals @ end @.

Change from eppiox. 2 k 0 to 10 kQ when
accelerator pedal is pressed. Inspect other system.
Other Replace tlwottle sensor.
ECCS C/U connectors for faulty contact or defects.
Measure the retistanse
Inspect tensof a ground. Measure tire voltage between termfnals @ and @.
Replace throttle sensor.
I
Harness continuity inspection Measure the resistance bstwsmn the following terminals. Inspect ECCS control unit Power supply and ground and replace
C/U connectors for faulty contact
002-443
(1) Self-diagnosis There is a disconnection or short-circuit in the signal system when "CODE No. 43" is displayed in regular self-diag) nosis (mode 2 . If this occurs, check throttle sensor
resistance, harness continuity, etc. If the problem reoccurs, use real-time diagnosis mode or an oscilloscope to check for instantaneous break in the signal.
A MONIFOR
A NO FAIL
Input signal inspection
Use the "THROTTLE SENSOR" setting of "DATA MONITOR" mode to check the following items.
Throttle sensor Accelerator pedal not pressed Approx. 0.5V
0.5
Ignition switch ON
Accelerator pedal pressed
Half-way Fully pressed
- 4.0V
Approx. 4.0V
@
88
Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with ECCS control unit harness connected. Measure the voltage between terminal (2) and ground with throttle sensor harness connected.
Engine
~
ECCS control
unit
Condition Ignition switch ON Cranking engine
Between ECCS CIU terminal Measurement location (38) and ground (or throttle sensor terminal (2) and ground) Approx. 0.5V Approx. 0.5V Approx. 0.5V
Accelerator pedal not Engine running Pressed Accelerator pedal pressed (half-way)
(3) Throttle sensor power inspection

a
Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with throttle sensor harness connected.
Engine RB26DETT Measurement location Between throttle sensor terminal (1) ., and ground
Condition
L \
Ignition switch ON and engine running
Approx. 5V
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd)
Throttle sensor inspection Remove the throttle sensor connector and measure the resistance between the following terminals when the accelerator pedal is pressed and not pressed.
\\
Condition
RB26DETT
Between throttle sensor terminals
(2) and (3)
Accelerator pedal not pressed. Accelerator pedal partially pressed. Accelerator pedal fully pressed.
1 1 1
Approx. 2 kft (Resistance increases as pedal is pressed.) Approx. 10 kQ

Remove the ECCS control unit and throttle sensor connectors and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
-.
Engine
ECCS CIU harness
RB26DETT
Throttle sensor harness
THROTTLE SEN A D J
(6) Throttle sensor inspection
@
THE !~Et.~!~CiR &li[:l1$ UNDER THE FOLLCili.l I HI; CQHD1T Idt.4 Ii:H sli! "fiH" * EHQ HOT RlJHHIHG
Warm engine adequate1y and check operation using "THROTTLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENTp in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. (The throttle sensor does not need to be adjusted.)
7
8 THROTTLE SEN AUJ
mC
-----
THHOITLE SEN
0.50V
MONITOR CASoRPM (POS) 950rpm IDLE POSITION ON
= ==
6-5 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SYSTEM INSPECTION
r
Intake air temperature
sensor
"36
Fuel injection control
ECCS
contrd
e3Q unit
Intake air temperature sensor system trouble diagnosis flowchart
.
Normal
ECCS control unit t~rminel layout
Selfdiagnosis
Abnormal Intake air temperature sensor output signal inspection
Measure the resistance between Apprm. 2.5 kQ when cold. Appfox. 0.8 to 1.0 k 0 after warring.
Check intake air and ECCS C/U connector* for faulty contact or defects. Approx. 2.6 kQ when cold.
ECCS CIU power supply and ground inspection
1 fS'1
h
(V) "DATA MONITOR"

Measure the voltage between terminals Intake air temperature dimla. Battery voltage
S> end (A.
1
Other
8
I
Intake air termnals
Harness continuity inspection Measure the resistance b e e e n the following termingls.
I v
'
Inspect ECCS control unit power supply and ground.
Check intake air iemwrature sensor and ECCS C/U connectors for faulty contact o defects. r
5 3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 6. Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd)
(1) Self-diagnosis a There is a disconnection or short-circuit in the signal system when "CODE No. 41" in regular selfdiagnosis or "FAILURE DETECTED IN T/A TEMP SEN" (when CONSULT is used) is displayed. If the problem reoccurs, use real-time diagnosis mode (CONSULT data monitor) or an oscilloscope to check for instantaneous break in the signal.
*MONITOR
*NO
FAIL
5]
CAS-RPM (POS)
950rpm
@
Idling
Use the "INTlA TEMP SEN" setting of "DATA MONITOR" mode to check the following items.
Intake air temperature sensor Temperature display corresponds to intake air temperature.
RECORD
@
Intake air
Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with ECCS control unit harness connected.
Measurement location Between ECCS CIU terminal (36) and ground
OV
temperature
Condition lanition switch OFF Ignition switch ON
sensor
Approx. 20% (68@F) Approx. 45% (113'F)
1.5V
0.8V
Approx. 20-C(68F Approx. 45'C (113'F)
1.5V
0.8V
(3) Harness continuity inspection a Remove the ECCS control unit and intake air temperature sensor connectors and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
I
Between ECCS control unit harness terminal (36) and intake air temperature sensor harness terminal (1)
6.
(4) Intake air temperature sensor inspection Remove the intake air temperature sensor connector, heat or cool it with a hair dryer or industrial dryer and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Condition
Heat or cod with a hair drier, etc.
temperature sensor
602-4453
6-6 ENGINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR SYSTEM INSPECTION
ECCS control unit
Engine temperature sensor system trouble diagnosis flowchart

d) "DATA MONITOR"
(real-time diagnosis 1
Engine tempareture sensor input signal inspection
(D "DATA MONITOR"
<S>
Measure the voltage between terminal

!
@ and ground
0;; Engine temperature display
0
Other
d) 3V when cold
I V after warming.
Engine temperature *emor ln~p9ct)on M a a w e the reslstanca b o t w n terminnla @ and @
I I
Engine temperature a e r s u inspection Measure the resistance betwaan tertninalu
Apprm. 2.6 kc2 when cold. ApproK. 0.3 kO alter warning.
(3) and 0 .
Other
Acofm. 2.6 k 0 when cold.

Apprc~.0.3 kCl efter warming.
Inspect other system
OthT
i
Swna and ground inspection Measure the voltege b e m e n tmrminals @
1
6).
t
Replace engine terrcerature sensol.
(g) Engine temperatura display 03V when cold I V efter warming.
Other
Harems continuity inspection Measue the resistance between the following terminals
control unit if necessary.
harness
t"
Other than 00 Check engine temperature sensor and ECCS U U connectus for faulty cm tact or defects.
(1) Self-diagnosis a There is a disconnection or short-circuit in the signal system when "CODE No. 13" in regular selfdiagnosis or "FAILURE DETECTED ENG TEMP SEN" (when CONSULT is used) is displayed. a If the problem reoccurs, use real-time diagnosis mode (CONSULT DATA MONITOR mode) or an oscilloscope to check for instantaneous break in the signal.
E N G TEMP SEN
(2) Input signal inspection a Use the 'WATER TEMP. SENSOR" setting of "DATA MONITOR" to check the following Items.
Item Engine temperature sensor Engine temperature is displayed.
Ignition switch ON
CAUTION: When engine temperature sensor malfunctions, it is set to a fixed value by the fail-safe function.
@
ECCS cqtrd 130 unit
Between ECCS C/U terminal (28) and ground
Measurement location Condition
B02-442!
hgine temperature
6 3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 6. Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd)
(3) Engine temperature sensor resistance value inspection
Remove the engine temperature sensor connector and measure the resistance between the following terminals. Engine
1
RB26DETT
Measurement location Condition Engine ternperature Approx. 20 (68OF) Approx. 80 (176F
Between engine temperature sensor connector terminals (1) m d (2) Approx. 2.5 kft Approx. 0.3 k 0
(4) Harness continuity inspection Remove the ECCS control unit and engine temperature sensor harness connectors and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Engine RB26DETT Engine temperature sensor harness to to terminal (1) terminal (2)
ECCS CIU harness

Terminal (28) Terminal (30)
o n
6-7 EXHAUST GAS SENSOR SYSTEM INSPECTION
Exhaust gas
Air-fuel ratio feedback control
Heater
Exhaust gas sensor (rear)
1!B
Exhaust gas sensor
ECCS contrd unit
--
Cylinder, exhaust gas sensor, CONSULT (DATA MONITOR) display

Cylinder No. ECCS C/U terminal number
No. 1, 2, 3, cylinders No. 4, 5, 6 cylinders
Exhaust gas sensor (Front) Exhaust gas sensor (Rear)
ECCS CIU terminal (29)
CONSULT (DATA MONITOR) display EXH GAS SEN-R
ECCS ClU terminal (55)
EXH GAS SEN
Exhaust gas sensor system trouble diagnosis flowchart
ECCS control unit lerminai layout
@ "WTA
Normal
mcda (real-time diagno*!~)
1 " -1 ;11
1
Normal
Abnormal
. 1
ACTIVE TEST"
@;ENGINE
FUEL INJECTION)
Abnormal Normal
I
Abnormal
A
Inspect another system.
- .
Exhaust gas sansor (F)
sensor (F) larmnat
Measure the voltage between exhaust gas @, exhaust gat sensor (R}
Exhaust gas censor (R)
Deflection between 0 I V
Other
Check exheifit gas sensor
ECCS ClU
vower supply inweetion
la faulty contact or defects.
R a m the exhaust gas sensor connector and measure the vdtsga between the ECCS C/U terminal @$ end wound.
Battery voltage when ignition swiich i s ON.

I
Other
Harness continuity inspection Measma the resistance between the following
Check ECCS CIU powti or replace
contrd unit.
terminals
d) and 0) and b a t w e n exhaust gas
c
(.
Repair harnase.
Battery voltage when ignition switch ON.
Other
Check for faulty connections a replace exhaust gas

sensa.
Measure lhvoltage between exhaust gas sensor terminals @ and 0) and between exhaust gas censor (R> terminals @ and
Exhaust gas sensor healer inspection 1 Measure the voltage between exhaust gas sensa (R) terminals @ and ground and exhaust BS sensor IF)
Reelfica
Power voltage with

ignition switch ON.
Othai
t
Repair exhaust gas sensor hearer power supply circuit.
Repair axhaust MS sensor ground circuit

6.
*MONITOR

Warm the engine and check the following items with YXH GAS SEW. TXH GAS SEN-R" (output voltage) and "MJR F/C MNT", "MJR FIC MNT-R" (IeanJrich) displayed in "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Exhaust gas sensor, exhaust gas sensor (R) (Output voltage display) Approx. 0 1V is displayed. The display cycle is 5 times or more in 10 sec interval. Exhaust gas sensor monitor, exhaust gas sensor monitor (R)
(1) Fuel-air ratio feedback function inspection

+NO
FAIL
CAS. RPM [PsSj EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R M,'R F/C MNT-R
1.975rpm 1 .14V 1 03V

RICH
'
RECORD
Condition Engine speed, at approx. 2,000 rpm
RICH, LEAN display

RICH, LEAN display must be synchronized with output voltage display.
I ACTIVE T E S T FUEL INJECTION
0
=
Provide setting value in "ACTIVE TEST" (fuel injection quantity correction) and check exhaust gas sensor function
- -O N I T O R : = M
CAS-RPM (REF) ENG TEMP SEN EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R 1NJ PULSE AAC VALVE
937rprn 5g0C 1.33V 1.35V 1 8rnsec 17%
a Using diagnosis connector on the vehicle side (at fuse block), set CONSULT to "EXHAUST GAS SENSOR MONITOR" and check fuel injection condition by flashing of exhaust gas temperature warning lamp on instrument panel.
Exhaust aas sensor function

Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp must flash 5 times or more in 10-sec interval when engine is running at approx. 2,000 rprn.
Feedback function
Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp must flash periodically when engine speed is running at approx. 2,000 rpm.

6.
Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd) (1) Fuel-air ratio feedback function inspection
Warm the engine and check the following items with GAS SEN", GAS SEN-R" (output voltage) and "M/R F/C MNT", "MIR F/C MNT-R" (leanlrich) displayed in "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Exhaust gas sensor, exhaust gas sensor (R)
b
CAS-RPM (PQS! EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R MiR F/C MNT M/R F/C MNT-R
7.975rpm 1.14V 1 03V RICH RICH
RECORD
Exhaust gas sensor monitor, exhaust gas sensor monitor (R) RICH, LEAN display RICH, LEAN display must be synchronized with output voltage disPlay.
Condition Engine speed, at approx. 2,000 rpm
(Output voltage display) Approx. 0 - 1V is displayed. The display cycle is 5 times or more in 10 sec interval.
a ACTIVE TEST fl
Provide setting value in "ACTIVE TEST" (fuel injection quantity correction) and check exhaust gas sensor function
- - - MONITOR = = = -+
FUEL INJECTION
CAS-RPM (REF) ENG TEMP SEN EXH GAS SEN EXH GAS SEN-R INJ PULSE AAC VALVE
937rpm 5g 1.33V
-
1.35V
1-8rnsec 17%
- - -
Using diagnosis connector on the vehicle side (at fuse block), set CONSULT to "EXHAUST GAS SENSOR MONITOR" and check fuel injection condition by flashing of exhaust gas temperature warning lamp on instrument panel. Exhaust gas sensor function
Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp must flash 5 times or more in 10-sec interval when engine is running at approx. 2,000 rpm.
Feedback function
I
Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp must flash periodically when engine speed is running at approx. 2,000 rprn.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 6. Sensor System Inspection (Cont'd) (2) Input signal inspection
ECCS contr@
unit
location Condition ground Racing at approx. 2,000 Deflection between approx. 0 and 1V
(Rear)
ground
6
rPm

Remove the ECCS control unit and exhaust gas sensol connectors and measure the resistance between the following terminals.
Exhaust gas sensor (front) Measurelocation unit harness terminal (29) and exhaust gas sensor Exhaust gas sensor (rear) Between ECCS control unit harness terminal (55) and exhaust gas sensor harness terminal (2)
6-8 DETONATION SENSOR SYSTEM INSPECTION
Detonation sensor 2
5. 2 6
I
11
24
Ignition
timing
control
7 3
4
'.
-8
23
ECCS
control
Detonation sensor 1
unit
(1) Self-diagnosis There is a disconnection or short-circuit in the signal system when "CODE No. 34" in regular selfdiagnosis or "FAILURE DETECTED DETONATION SENSOR (when CONSULT is used) is displayed. If the problem reoccurs, use real-time diagnosis mode (CONSULT DATA MONITOR mode) or an oscilloscope to check for instantaneous break in the signal.

Detonation
RB26DETT
Between ECCS control unit terminal (23) and ground Approx. 0.3V Approx. 0.3V Approx. 0.3V
I Between ECCS control

unit terminal (24) and ground
+
t
Ignition switch ON Cranking engine Idling
CAUTION: The detonation sensor input signal must be measured by an oscilloscope because its resistance is larger than the circuit tester resistance. The signal should also be checked with selfdiagnosis and harness continuity inspection.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 6. Sensor System inspection (Cont'd)
Remove the ECCS control unit and detonation sensor middle connector and measure the resistance between the following terminalsEngine Detonation sensor middle harness connector terminal
and and
ECCS control unit

Measurement location harness terminal
(23)
(24)
Oft
(2)
(1)
6-9 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SYSTEM INSPECTION

Fuel cut control
1
speed
control
ECCS
k- T p e l -I a e d d
*MONITOR
UNO FAIL
ffi
a Select
"VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR" in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check following items.
item Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed is displayed.
Condition
When drive wheels are rotating.
-
RECORD
009-0026
@
Vehicle speed
RB26DETT
Measurement location Between ECCS control unit terminal (53) and ground
When drive wheels are rotating slowly
Deflection between 0V and 5V (also appears as deflection around 1V).
6-10 IGNITION SWITCH (START switch) SIGNAL INSPECTION

(1) Input signal inspection w In "DATA MONITOR" mode, perform key operation to check if ignition switch "START" signal is input correctly. 0 Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with ECCS control unit harness connected.
Engine Condition
RB26DETT
Measurement location Between ECCS control unit terminal (45) and ground
Other than ignition switch at "START" Ignition switch at "START"
ov
Battery voltage
6-11 AIR CONDITIONER SIGNAL INSPECTION

Air concBtioner ralav
Dual pressure '

switch
ECCS
Engine speed signal (crank angle sensa)
6 clutch ]
Haator fan switch
"46
unit
@ @
(1) Input signal inspection a In "DATA MONITOR" mode, perform air conditioner
switch operation to check if air conditioner switch signal is input correctly. Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with ECCS control unit harness connected.
RB26DETT
Between ECCS control unit terminal (46) and ground Between ECCS control unit terminal (9) and ground
Battery voltage
0 - 1V
\I Engine
Air conditioner OFF
8 - 9V
+
Air conditioner ON
Neutral switch
6-12 NEUTRAL SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION

(1) Input signal inspection . In "DATA MONITOR" mode, perform shift lever operation to check if neutral switch signal is input cor-
@ @
rectly. a Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with ECCS control unit harness connected.
Measurement location Condition Not "N" position Ignition switch ON At "N" position
4
- 5V
Approx. OV
Fewer steering oil
pressure switch
6-13 POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL INSPECTION (1) Input signal inspection e In "DATA MONITOR" mode, perform power steering operation to check if power steering oil pressure switch signal is input correctly. Measure the voltage between the following terminals and ground with ECCS control unit harness connected.
@
-
\
Condition
- 1
Between ECCS control unit terminal (19) and around
Idlina
Power steering OFF
Approx. 5V
Power steering ON
Approx. 0V

7. ECCS Control Unit InputIOutput Signals (RB26DETT)
7-1 CONSULT INSPECTION VALUES (1) Data monitor
Note; The output signal is displayed as the calculation data on console unit so the correct value will be displayed even i f the output circuit (harness) is inadvertently disconnected.
-
Data Monitor
Monitor item Condition CAS-RPM (POS) (detected engine speed according to 1 and 120" sig nals) AIR FLOW MTR (output voltage) AIR FLOW MTR-R (Output voltage) ENG TEMP SEN (engine temperature ) Tachometer set Engine running Normal reference value There must be no abnormal change in speed.
Problem Inspection Item ;rank angle sensor system
I 1
After warming up engine Idling (N range, air conditioner OFF)
Approx. 0.7 1.2V (1.0 - 1.7V at 2,000 rpm with no load) Note: The two air flow meters may have a difference of 0V to 0.4V in some cases. Above approx. 70'C (158T) Changes between 0 0.3V and 0 6 -lV.
Air flow meter system
- -
Mter warming up engine Wer warming 2,000 rpm ip engine with no load
EXH GAS SEN (output voltage) EXH GAS SEN-R (output voltage)
M/R F/C MNT (RICHILEAN)
-
--r1
Engine temperature sensor system Exhaust gas sensor system Intake system air leak or air intake Injector system
RICH, LEAN repeats 5 times or more in 10
MfR FIC MNT-R (RICH1 LEAN)
sec.
CAR SPEED SEN (vehicle speed signal)

-
While driving or with drive heels turning.

1
Should generally conform to speedometer dis- Vehicle speed sensor system play.
BATTERY VOLT
Ignition switch ON Engine stopped
Battery ECCS control unit power system Throttle sensor system
THROTTLE SEN (output voltage)

1
Engine open.
-
INT/A TEMP SE (intake temperature sensor output) INJ PULSE (injection pulse width)
Mter warming up engine.
Intake air temperature is displayed.
Intake temperature sensor system
conditioner INJ PULSE-R (injection pulse width) 2,000 rpm with no load.
1.4 2.2 msec

RB26DETT
RB20DET RB26DETT
Air flow meter system Intake system air leaks or air suction (entire input) Input signal system (entire)
1.4 - 2.2 msec
B3 ECCS (Electronicallv Concentrated Enaine Control Svsteml 7. ECCS Control Unit InputIOutput Signals (RB26DETT) (Cont'd)
Monitor Item ~ondition 1GN TIMING After warming up engine. Idling (N range, air conditioner OFF)
2,000 rpm with no load.
Data Monitor Normal reference value RB20DET RB26DETT 15'

20e
Problem Inspection Item Air flow meter systern
Advance greater than 10' angle comoared to idle nosition. Approx. 15 35% (Approx. 30 - 50%)
AAC VALVE
After warming up engine.
Idling (N range. air
IAS adjustment AAC valve system
A/F ALPHA (air-fuel ratio feedback correction coefficient) AJF ALPHA-R (air-fuel ratio feedback correction coefficient) START SIGNAL
. .
After warming up engine. 2,000 rpm with no load.
75 - 125%
Air How meter system Injector system Canister (purge) inspection Intake system air leak or air suction
-
ignition switch ON Engine stopped Idle
"START" "OFF" Air conditioner SW ON Air conditioner SW OFF
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Starter SW system
AIR COND SIG
Air conditioner SW systern

. .. . .
- ...-
NEUTRAL SW
N or P range Other than N or P range
Neutral switch system
PWIST SIGNAL
Steering turning Steering neutral position
OFF
ON OFF
Power steering SW system
IDLE POSITION
Idling Other than idling
Throttle sensor system
FUEL PUMP RLY
Ignition switch ON
Stop Runnina
OFF
Fuel pump system
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF Air conditioner relay system
AIR COND RLY
Idle
Air conditioner ON
Air conditioner OFF Within 10 seconds durina acceleration WIG CONT S/V Air conditioner ON
POWER VOLTAGE PULSE
Voltaoe probe measurement value is disolaved. Pulse probe measurement value is displayed.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 7. ECCS Control Unit Input/Output Signals (RB26DETT) (Cont'd)
(2) Active test
Set item Condition
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
Problem occurrence condition
Active Test Active Test Description
Judgmeni and Inspection Item Perform following inspections to check if problem is solved. Eliminate: Engine temperature sensor system Injector system. Air flow meter, exhaust gas senI sor system Not eliminated: Other item inspection
,Set engine temperature high or low.

Caution: Do not set extreme values as this can cause spark plug burning.
--,
condition
ICaution:
-IGNITION TIMING Problem occurrence condition
Perform following inspections to checkif Set the air-fuel ratio rich or lean. Do not set extreme values because problem is solved. Eliminate: Exhaust gas sensor system this may damage engine or cataAir How meter, engine temperalytic converter. ture sensor system Injector system Not eliminated: Other item inspection
IDelay ignition timing.
-AAC VALVE OPENING Engine running
Perform following inspections to check if Caution: Do not set extreme values because problem is solved. Eliminate: Ignition timing adjustment this may damage engine or cataDetonation sensor system lytic converter. Not eliminated: Other item inspection
--
Increase control duty ratio. The engine speed should increase. Decrease control duty ratio. The engine speed should decrease.
If the condition described on left cannot be verified, check AAC valve system.
-FUEL PUMP RELAY Ignition switch ON. Engine stop.
Set the AAC valve open to stop the specified Eliminate: Injector system injector operation and the injector speed can be displayed at this time. Caution: Do not perform this operation while driving (to preserve the cataIvzer.1 Turn ignition switch ON, OFF and ON so pump operation makes a sound. The fuel pressure will rise. Caution: Do not perform this operation except under conditions described on left.
If the condition described on left cannot be verified. check relay system of fuel pump and fuel pump system.
SELF-LEARNING CONT
The air-fuel ratio feedback correction coefficient learning factor is cleared.
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 7. ECCS Control Unit InputfOutput Signals (RB26DETT) (Cont'd)
Terminal
At idle
Signal Name Circuit Standard
At approx. 2,500 rpm Standard Approx. 0.4V
Number
1
Memo
3 11 12 13
F'ewer transistor control signal

ECCS control unit
Cold: 6 - 7V Warm: 8 -10V
Approx. 5V
4AC valve
<:ontrol signal
ECCS contrd unit
602-1619
I
Approx. 1V Approx. 2.4V
Engine speed signal for

tachometer
ECCS cortrri unit
I
SW
B02-1641
Air
conditioner relay Dual press-
Air conditioner relay
l$cm.
Air conditioner
Air conditioner OFF: Battery voltage Air conditioner ON: Approx. 1V
ECCS contrd unit

BO2- I623
m
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 7 . ECCS Control Unit InputIOutput Signals (R B26DETT) (Cont'd)
Terminal dumber
At idle
Signal Name
Circuit
1
demo
At approx. 2,500 rpm
*
ECCS relay
Standard
Standard
iCCS relay
Approx. 1V (ignition switch OFF: Battery voltage)
Approx. O V
Fuel pump relay
Fuel pump relay
B
ECCS control unit
P w e r stewing dl pressure switch
ao2.1aao
Power steering oil pressure switch signal

ECCS contrd unit
B12- I6 16
Power steering ON: 0V Power steering OFF: 5V
Receive (control unit data reception)
v
Diagnosis connector
Transmit (data transmission from control unit)
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 7. ECCS Control Unit InputIOutput Signals (RB26DETT) (Cont'd)
At idle Signal Name
Circuit
Standard
Memo
Standard
Memo
Detonation sensor signal
Approx. 0.3V
Power voltage
Approx. OV
ECCS corwd unit
Air flow meter (rear) (Intake air quantity signal)
Approx. 1V
Approx. 1.5V
Engine ternperature sensor signal
Engine temperature 80 (176T): Approx. 1V Engine temperature 2' 0C (68OF):Approx. 3V
Ignition twitch Exhaust gas sensor
Exhaust gas sensor signal (front)
Approx. 0 - I V
ECCS control unit
BttS-16ai
Deflects between approx. 0 - 1V
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 7. ECCS Control Unit Input/Output Signals (RB26DETT) (Cont'd)
B26DETT
Terminal ilurnber
At idle Signal Name Circuit Standard
Standard
;lock (syn:hronization iignal)
ECCScoiwd unit
Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp
Monitor and ;heck lamp red lamp)
ECCS control unit
1
1
.amp not lit: lower voltage amp is lit: 0V
r
Mr flow meter (front) [Intake air quantity signal)
F
A B C D E F
Air flow meter
Approx. 1V
Approx. 1.5V
ECCS contrd unit
Intake air temperature sensor signal
Cold: approx. 1.5V Warm: approx. 0.8V
ThrOBIe sansor
Throttle sensor signal

ECCS contrd unit
Approx. 0.5V
0.5 4V (Voltage increases if accelerator pedal is pressed.)
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 7. ECCS Control Unit InputIOutput Signals (RB26DETT) (Cont'd) RB -
802-3d31
At idle
Signal Name
Circuit
Standard
1
Memo
Crank angle sensor 120' signal
^ECCS c n r unit otd
Crank angle
sensor 1' signal
Ignition switch (Start signal)
ov
(Ignition switch at START: battery voltage)
ECCS control unit
Newal switch
Neutral switch signal
I
ECCS contrd unit
1 Other or P. N or P range: 1 N, range: ov than

4
- 5V
A
Air conditioner switch signal
Air conditioner OFF: Battery voltage Air conditioner ON: 0V
B26DETT
Terminal lumber
At idle Signal Name

Circuit
At approx. 2,500 rpr
Standard
Memo
Standard
sensor
48
hrottle senor (power ~PP~Y)
ECCS control unit
ECCS relay
49
control unit ower supply
Battery voltage
53
'chicle peed sensor ignal

ECCS contrd unit
range (or 1st) with rear wheels jacked up: 0.5 1.5V The value actually deflects between 0V and 5V. However, it appears to deflect around I V , according to vehicle sueed.
I
Throttle valve switch (idle sontact point'
'"^Q
Ignition switch
Throttle valve switch
Approx. 10V
Accelerator pressed: 0V
ECCS contrd unit
Exhaust gas sensor signa
qas sensor
Approx. 1V
ECCS control unit
BOZ- 1620
Deflects between 0
- 1V
(rear)
B3 ECCS (Electronically Concentrated Engine Control System) 7. ECCS Control Unit InputIOutput Signals (R B26DETT) (Cont'd)
3B26DETT
Terminal Number
At idle Signal Name
At approx. 2,500 rpm Standard
Circuit
Standard
rhrottle senior output signal
, IP,
ECCS contrd unit
Approx. 0.5V
Approx. 0.5 - 4V (Voltage increases as accelerator pedal is pressed.)
ThroBle valve switch
rhrottle valve switch (power supply)
L=
Battery voltage
Approx. battery -- -- - voltage. . . (V)
Approx. - . battery voltage.

.
60
40
njector control signal
20
0
1
Fuel pump terminal voltage control signal (FPCM1)
ECCS control unit
1
002
- 1664
Fuel c m u ccntrol
moduJator
Idling (after warming engine): 0V

ECCS control unit
During middle load: 4V
602- 1630
Fuel pump
Fuel pump terminal voltage control signal (FPCM2)
modulator
During middle load: 0V
7-3 ECCS CONTROL UNIT OPERATION CAUTIONS
(1) Control unit equipment 0 Never install a control unit that is not specified for the vehicle. Do not apply excessive force to the installation bracket. (2) Connector removal and installation 0 When removing and installing connectors, do not bend or apply unnecessary force and observe following points. (T) Connector removal 0 Turn ignition switch OFF and ECCS relay OFF before removing connectors. Hold connector firmly to disconnect without applying force to harness. 0 Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool to loosen the connector lock. (D Connector installation Turn ignition switch OFF. 0 Make sure pins are not bent on control unit connector and then connect securely. Tighten bolts securely until injector surface reaches orange color indicator of connector and surface is even. (3) Control unit power 0 Never make a reverse connection to the battery. Use battery voltage in 10 - 16V range. (4) Idle speed adjustment knob Do not turn past lock position. Do not turn adjustment knob when ambient temperature lower than 0" (32'F). (5) Water and Oil Be careful not to allow rain drops or water to wet the control unit. Be careful that condensation does not form due to sudden increase in temperature. If there is any moisture, dry control unit adequately before installing in vehicle. Make sure no oil adheres to connectors. 0 Do not clean the control unit with volatile solvent cleaners. (6) Dropping and Impact Do not drop the control unit or subject it to strong impact. Do not use upper and lower covers for the control unit which are dented. (7) Control unit screws and cover Do not remove the upper and lower covers from the control unit. 0 Do not turn the screws in the control unit main body.
8. Deceleration Exhaust Gas Emission Control Equipment Inspection

Throttle valve switch short-circuit
Remove the throttle valve switch harness connector and use a lead line to connect harness connector terminals (2) and (3). (The throttle valve sequence power and idle connection points are set ON.) Fuel cut inspection After warming engine, place the transmission in neutral and run engine at 2,000 rpm. Lower the speed to approx. 1,000 rpm and then raise the speed to 2,000 rpm again and check for fuel cut. (If the accelerator opening angle is fixed, repeat the procedures described above.)
9. Air Conditioner Cut System Inspection

9-1 AIR CONDITIONER CUT SYSTEM FUNCTION INSPECTION a When the engine is idling, turn air conditioner switch ON and then race the engine. Make sure the air conditioner compressor goes ON and then OFF.
B4 ENGINE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Preoaration tools
Name Hydrometer Measurement equipment Circuit tester Application Battery specific gravity inspection Resistance, voltage inspections
Specifications
Item Standard Battery type (capacity) Alternator type (output) Starter motor (output) Injection coil Distributor Option Standard Standard (V-Ah) (V-Ah) Mitsubishi (V-A) Hitachi (kW) Mitsubishi (kW) Hanshin Hitachi Mitsubishi RB26DETT 34B19R (12-17)
80D26R (12-55)
A3T45594 (12-90A) S114-505 (1.4) MIT-70685 (1.4) MCP302

D6Y88-01
TOT4917 1
1
Spark plug (arc gap)
I
Standard Option
Note: The battery capacity value is the 5-hour rate that conforms to the new JIS standard and the value is 80% of the former 20-hour rate. -
[New model name] (example)
I Battery width x box height classification
1
1
NGK
1
I
PFR6A-11 (1.1) PFRSA-11 (1. l ) PFR7A-11 (non-adjustable)
NGK
Terminal polarity position
Battery length dimensions (rounded off)
L P e r f o r r n a n c e rank (Starting function added to 5-hr capacity rate)
B4 ENGINE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

1. Battery Inspection
Voltage inspection
Normal
('4
12.4 - 12.8
12.4V or less
Limit (charge required)

(Start limit)
(v)
(v)
12V [2WC (68'F)I
Specific gravity inspection [20 (68F)J

Normal
~-
1.29
- 1.22
Limit (charge required)

Service life
(v)
1.22 or less
There is a variation width of more than 0.04 between each cell.
Additional water does not need to be added to the battery during the service life of normal driving. When driving for extended periods of time in high temperatures, the fluid level may decrease according to vehicle driving conditions. Check the fluid level with the level indicator (upper, lower) and replenish to the upper level as necessary. Note: Distilled water must be used to refill the battery. If ordinary water is used, fluid loss will increase and may cause discharge.
8dt
'"l ;; ".z> : .
7 91
2. Alternator
(1) Alternator removal and installation
Wisher, Nut
(0.4 0.5, 29 3.6)
Ydt
Nut car
Additional work required: Belt tension inspection and adjustment
(2) Alternator inspection
Output voltage inspection

Turn ignition switch ON and check that charge warning lam^ liahts,
Standard (Vlrprn)
13.9
- 14.912.000 (accessories OFF)
84 ENGINE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Boll
3. Starter Motor Removal and Installation
Nut I
802-4464
Platinum tip
4. Platinum Plug Inspection

Installation Precautions
-
Periodic replacement interval: 100,000 km (60,000 miles) Gap inspection and adjustment and plug cleaning with wire brush should not be performed because this m scrape off the platinum particulate from the platinum I surface. If plugs are cleaned with an air cleaner, the clea ing should be performed in less than 20 seconds at an ; pressure less than 588 kPa (6.0 kg/cm2, 85 psi). When replacing the spark plugs, always use parts specifil by Nissan.
5. Ignition Coil Inspection

Check the primary and secondary coil resistance value.
Item
Engine
RB26DETT
0.6
Primary resistance
Secondary
- 0.9
resistance
65 COOLING SYSTEM
Preparation tools
Name
Application and cap pressure test
Specifications
Engines
Item
Core size (vertical x horizontal x thickness) mm (in) Fin pitch
RB26DETT
1 mm 1
380 x 646 x 25 (14.96 x 25.43 x 0.98)

15
- --
Cap injection-valve opening pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Radiator Radiation performance A/T oil cooler Tank material Core material Shroud External diameter mm (in) x number of layers Coupling External diameter mm (in) x number of layers Sub electrical cooling fan Motor output
88 (0.9, 13)
(kcal/h0C)
1,080
Plastic Aluminum
One-piece unit (lower shroud)
Cooling fan
3 levels
(w) 1
160 90 (194)
Engine temperature switch operation O (OF) C Thermostat injection-valve opening engine temperature [standard]
LLC mixture proportion [standardtcold region]

Reserve tank capacity Cooling water total capacity
*c m (%I 1
(Imp qt)
I
30
-
Approx. 0.7 (518) Approx. 8.7 (7-518)
t (Imp qt)
1. Radiator Inspection
Cooling water leak inspection Use radiator cap tester to apply pressure [limit 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi)] and check for leakage.
CAUTION: When using the radiator cap tester, always connect the hose adapter and make sure filler cap is not deformed.
85 COOLING SYSTEM
2. Radiator Cap Inspection

Inspection
Clean cap rubber packing seal surface and vacuum w dry brush. Attach radiator cap tester to cap, apply pressure and che that valve operates correctly.
Radiator cap relief pressure
59
- 98 kPa (0.6- 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi;
Pull vacuum valve with finger and check operation.
3. Cooling Water Filling Procedures

(D Make sure the radiator hoses and heater hose clamps a
tightened securely.
@ Set the heater control lever to the "HOT" position. (In vel
cles equipped with automatic air conditioners, first tu ignition switch to ON and remove the external sensor co nector.) Release the radiator cap and air drain plug. Fill the radiator gradually [filling speed: slower than 2 life (1-314 Imp qt)/rnin] to the top of the spout with coolant. Fill the radiator until the water in the reserve tank reach4 the "MAX" level indicator. After closing the radiator cap and air drain plug (F system), start the engine and allow it to idle. The engine will continue to idle until the thermostat open (Touch the radiator flow hose and make sure hot water flowing). If a large volume of air remains, the water ter perature gauge needle will move past the middle becau; the engine temperature rises abnormally. If this occur stop the engine until it cools and add water to the radiati repeatedly as described above. After the thermostat open race the engine for 10 seconds at 2,500 rpm two or thrf times. Check that the water temperature does not ri; excessively at this time. Stop the engine and allow it to cool. Release the radiati cap and check the fluid level. If the fluid level lowers, retui to step <S> and repeat the operation. Ifthe fluid level dot not lower, add water until the reserve tank reaches tt "MAX" line. In vehicles equipped with automatic air conditioning, coi nect the fresh air sensor connector.
(g)
(3)
(S)
(T)
B5 COOLING SYSTEM
4. Radiator Removal and Installation
Additional work required: Drain and fill: Cooling water Remove: Supplementary electrical fan connector
[Point 11 Radiator shroud (lower) removal

a
While pushing hooks (left and right, 2 locations) to release, remove pawls and detach shroud.
B5 COOLING SYSTEM
5. Thermostat Inspection
Inspection
Check that valve opening temperature and maximum valvf lift conform to specified value. Place a string in thermostat valve and insert in container o water. While holding thermostat heat the water. The valve opening temperature is the temperature whet the thermostat falls off the string.
Item Valve opening temperature
Engine
RB26DETT
"C
(OF)
76.5 (170)
10 (0.39) minimum/90 (194)
Maximum valve lift
mm/*C (in/'F)
6. Sub Electrical Fan Inspection

Radiator fan relay
Operation
I
Radiator fan "ON" condition

ECCS contrd unit
Thermoswitch "ON" [engine temperature 90eC (194'F) min]
Function inspection
With ignition switch in OFF position, remove switch harnes connectors and short-circuit harness connector. With ignition switch in ON position, check that fan mote operates correctly.
Thermoswitch inspection
Heat thermoswitch with high-temperature water or oil (he: with heat gun, for example) and check if it conforms to va ues in following chart.
Engine temperature
Valve raised: 90 3 (194h5.4) max. O (*F) Valve lowered: 83&3 C (1815.4) max.
Non-continui ty
Valve raised: 90 3 (194 5.4) min. Valve lowered: 83 3 (1815.4) min. Continuity
Thermoswitch connection condition
Thermoswitch tightening torque
3 - 5 N-m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 2.2 - 3.6 ft-lb
B5 COOLING SYSTEM
Additional work required; Remove and instail: Intercooler Harness connectors
16 21 (1.6 21, 12 151 : N-m (kg-iri, ft-lb)
B6 FUEL SYSTEM
Preparation tools
Name
Application Fuel gauge inspection
Measurement tool
Circuit tester
Specifications
Engine Item Nominal capacity
-
RB26DETT
t ?
(Imp gal)
Intake air capacity
t (Imp qt)
72 (15-718)
5.5 (4-718)
Remaining volume capacity for warning lamp activation t (Imp qt) Fuel tank main body Warning lamp effective remaining volume flmo ati
Approx. 13 (11-112) Approx. 12.8 (11-114) Approx. 8 (7) None Tank internal electrical system
Fuel gauge E indication effective volume
(Imp qtl
Drain plug
-
Fuel DUll7D . . TYPe Filler cap

-.
Screw-in (vacuum relief valve installed)
Relief valve opening valve pressure kPa (mmHg, inHg)
-6.0 to -3.3 (-45 to -25, -1.77 to -0.98)

Internal air chamber system (check valve attached)
Fuel overflow prevention system

--
Reservoir tank capacity Gauge system Fuel gauge unit Resistance value
t (Imp qt)
F E
Float arm system Approx. 6 Approx. 80 Thermistor system Canister system
ft
Remaining volume warning system Evaporation system Outlet Fuel tube diameter
-
rnrn (in)
8 (0.31)
Return
mm (in)
8 (0.31)
86 FUEL SYSTEM
1. Fuel Tank Removal and Installation
Fillertube (Point 5 1
Filler cap
Filler tube bolt 3 2 4.2 N-m ( . 3 0.43 kg-m, 2.4 3.1 ft-lb) [Point 41 i 03
Additional work required: Drain: Fuel Remove: Fuel pressure relief valve [Point I] Fuel tank internal pressure relief Filler tube protector Inspection hole cover [Point 21 Fuel gauge unit, fuel pump harness connector [Point 31 Fuel tank protector Hoses
[Point 11 Fuel pressure relief

After starting engine, remove fuel pump fuse and wait until engine stops. Crank engine 2-3 times to consume fuel in lines. In vehicles which cannot be started, remove fuel pump fuse, crank engine 4-5 times to consume fuel in lines. CAUTION: The battery may become weak easily, so use booster cables ta connect it to another vehicle or battery if necessary.
B6 FUEL SYSTEM 1. Fuel Tank Removal and Installation (Cont'd)

[Point 21 Inspection hole cover removal and installation Removal
Remove the trunk floor carpet and detach the inspectior hole cover.
Installation
Check that fuel gauge unit and fuel pump harness connec tors are connected securely. Check that fuel hose connections are secure.
\
/^ hole cover
Bolt tightening torque
3.2- 4.4N'm (0.33- 0.45 kg-m, 2.4 - 3.3 ft-lb)
[Point 31 Fuel gauge unit, fuel pump harness connector removal a Remove inspection hole cover. Detach fuel gauge unit anc
fuel pump harness connector.
[Point 41 Fuel tank removal and installation Removal

Remove feeler tube protector, and detach bolt shown i t figure on left. Remove feeler tube grommet from body. Remove fuel tank protector, fuel tank band mount bolts ant detach fuel tank.
Installation
Attach tank and secure by tightening mount bolt on fron side of right member to soecified toraue.
Band mount bolt tightening torque
Protector nut tightening torque
27 35 N'm (2.8 3.6 ka-m, 20 -26 ft-lb)
3.2 - 4.2 N-m (0.33 - 0.43 kg-m, 2.4 - 3.1 ft-lb)
[Point 51 Filler tube installation

8 8
Insert spacer between fuel tank and filler tube and connec tube. Tighten clamps securely. Tighten filler tube grommets to body.
B6 FUEL SYSTEM
-cap
30-35 N-m (3.1 36 kg-m, . Z2 26 ft-lb) Fuel gauge ASSY point 11
2. Fuel Gauge ASSY

(1) Fuel gauge ASSY removal and installation
Additional work required: Remove: Fuel pressure relief, internal pressure relief inspection hole cover Fuel gauge unit Fuei pump harness connector Fuel hose (return, feed) CAUTION: Install gauge unit with care. Do not touch float and arm to prevent them from bending. Do not bend or twist harness.
[Point 11 Fuel gauge ASSY removal and installation

Removal
Attach alignment marks to the fuel gauge ASSY and fuel tank and then remove the cap. a Raise fuel gauge ASSY, remove 2 hoses in tank (marked section i outlet side), fuel pump harness connector and s detach fuel gauge ASSY. CAUTION: Be especially careful not to damage fuel gauge ASSY.
Installation
Check marking on hose inside tank and connect fuel gauge ASSY. Check that fuel gauge ASSY and fuel tank alignment marks are positioned correctly and tighten cap.
Tightening torque
30 - 35 N-m (3.1 - 3.6 kg-m, 22 - 26 ft-lb)
B6 FUEL SYSTEM 3. Fuel Pump Removal and Installation (Cont'd)

[Point 11 Fuel hose removal and installation Removal
Raise fuel gauge ASSY, remove 2 hoses in tank (marked section is outlet side), fuel pump harness connector and detach fuel gauge ASSY.
Installation
a
Check fuel hose marking, connect fuel gauge ASSY. Posi tion pump harness and clamp band 160 mm (6.30 in) from gauge ASSY connecting part and tighten securely. Be careful that fuel hose and fuel harness turn inside tank from the right to front side of vehicle and do not cause any interference with float arm.
[Point 21 Fuel pump removal and installation
Removal Push the pawl lightly on rear side of pump bracket, and
remove fuel pump in pump rotation direction. CAUTION: The fuel return hose must not be removed.
Installation
Insert fuel pump in fuel chamber and attach pawl on rear side of pump bracket in retaining notch inside fuel chamber. Insert pump in axial direction.
(2) Fuel pump inspection Inspection
Apply voltage from the battery to harness connectors terminals @ and @ to check pump operation.
B7 EXHAUST SYSTEM
Specifications Hem
Engine
RB26DETT
54 (2.13)
Tube outer diameter
r ~ m Single portion (in)

I
Dual portion
70 (2.76)
Front tube
Lona dual tube Flexible tube Pre-muffler
. . ... . ..
1
[capacity
Installed 70 (2.76)
(Imp qt)] mm (in)
Center tube outer diameter Pre-muffler Flexible tube Muffler ASSY Dynamic damper Main muffler capacity Tail pipe external diameter
-
[capacity & (Imp qt)]
Installed [7.0(6-1/8)]
Installed (Imp gal) mm (in) 16 (3- 112) Under body floor, three-way, single-unit
59 x 83 (2.32 x 3.27) (ellipse)
Types Catalytic converter Capacity Catalytic metal Exhaust gas temperature warning equipment operation temperature
(F
(Imp qt)
1.7 (1-112)
Platinum rhodium
850 (1,562)
Exhaust system part inspection, warning precautions

The heat resistance and corrosion resistance in exhaust system parts and component shape have been carefully considered in the design process, so only use genuine Nissan parts for replacement. Clean each connection part and connect securely, making sure there are no gas leaks. Always use new gaskets in the front and rear of catalytic converter. Always use new parts for exhaust manifold connection gasket and nuts. After assembling each part, warm engine, raise speed to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and make sure there are no gas leaks, sealing compound leaks or sealing gaps. Replace parts rather than repairing extreme deformation in heat insulation panels. If extreme amounts of dirt have accumulated, clean these areas. When attaching heat insulation panels, make sure there is adequate clearance and no interference between exhaust pipes.
B7 EXHAUST SYSTEM
1. Exhaust Pipe, Catalytic Converter and Heat Panel Tightening Torques
Nut (41
/
ma-
@ : Always replace after avery disassembly.

0 : N-m l kg-m. ft-l bl
ViewA
13 16 (1.3 1.6,9 12)-11
II
2. Exhaust Gas Temperature Warning Equipment Inspection

Basic inspection Turn ignition key ON and check that exhaust gas temperature warning lamp does not light. 0 Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp must light when ignition is at START and must go off when engine starts. Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp replacement and inspection a Remove vehicle harness from switching module. Use lead line to ground vehicle side harness connector exhaust gas temperature warning lamp terminal. Inspect condition of exhaust gas temperature warning lamp with ignition switch turned ON.
Lamp lights
0
Faulty circuit between ignition switching module Faulty key sensing module or sensor Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp is burned
1
Lamp does not light
Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp power circuit is faulty.
B8 ENGINE CONTROL
1. Accelerator Pedal Inspection and Adjustment
Accelerator pedal inspection
The engine must be at full throttle when accelerator pedal is pressed down fully (pedal lever contacts the stopper completely).
Accelerator pedal adjustment

Loosen lock nuts so accelerator cable has adequate slack Pull outer case in direction of accelerator pedal from position where throttle drum starts operating (there must be nc play at this point), return lock nuts 1.0 to 1.5 turns anc tighten securely.
Tightening torque
- 10 N-m (0.8- 1.0 kg-m, 5.8 - 7.2 ft-lfa)
B9 ENGINE MOUNTING (4WD)

1. Front Engine Mounting (RB26DETT)
2. Rear Engine Mounting (RB26DETT)
Nut I'll P] 22 28 (22 29-16 21)
CHASSIS
SECTION
CH
C1 CLUTCH ............................................................................................................................ C- 3 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ C- 4 2 On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment ............................................................................. C- 5 3. Component Parts Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly ..................... C- 7 C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ............................................................................................... C- 18 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ C- 23 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment ............................................................................. C- 26 3. Transmission Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly ........................... C- 26 C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) ................... C- 57 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ C- 59 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment ............................................................................. C- 61 3. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. C- 66 4 . Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly .................................................. C- 79 C4 PROPELLER SHAFT ............................ ;............................................................................ C-114 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ C-114 2. On-vehicle Inspection ........................................................................................................ C-115 3. Propeller Shaft Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly ........................ C-116 C5 FINAL DRIVE ..................................~.~...............................................................................C-120 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ C-125 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation ............................................................................ C-130 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly ............................... C-135 C6 DRIVE SHAFT ................................................................................................................... C-194 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ C-194 2. On-vehicle Inspection ........................................................................................................ 0195 3. Drive Shaft Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly ............................... (2-196 C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE .................................................................................... C-209 1. Summary .............................................. :............................................................................. C-212 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation ............................................................................ (2-213 3. Part Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly ........................................ . C-218 C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE ...................................................................................... C-229 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ C-229 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation ............................................................................ C-230 3. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly .................................................. C-233
C9 WHEELS AND TIRES ........................................................................................................ 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ 2. Wheels ................................................................................................................................ 3. Tires ................................................................................................................................... C10 BRAKES .......................................................................................................................... 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ 2. On-vehicle Inspection ........................................................................................................
3. Trouble Diagnosis {Anti-Lock Braking system) ................................................................. 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly .................................................. C11 STEERING ....................................................................................................................... 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment ............................................................................. 3 Control Unit Trouble Diagnosis ........................................................................................ 4 . Removal and Installation Assembly and Disassembly ................................................... C12 SUPER HICAS ................................................................................................................. 1. Summary ............................................................................................................................ 2. On-vehicle inspection and Adjustment ............................................................................. 3. Trouble Diagnoses ............................................................................................................ 4. Removal and installation, Assembly and Disassembly ..................................................
C-243 C-243 C-243 C-245 C-246 C-247 C-249 C-257 C-267
C-291
C-294 C-296 C-370 (2-315 C-334 C-335 C-337 C-343 C-364
C1 CLUTCH
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS a Use genuine Nissan brake fluid NR-3 (No. 2500) for the clutch fluid,
Never use the clutch fluid a second time. Do not allow clutch fluid to contact external painted surfaces of other equipment. Use special service tool (CG9431 0000) for the clutch tube installation. Useclean clutch fluid to clean the parts such as master cylinder, operating cylinder and tubes. Never use gasoline or solvents because they may damage rubber parts.
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS

Tool name Tool number Oescription
Base plate ST2005 0010
Clutch cover inspection
Distance piece ST2005 01 00
Same as above
Diaphragm adjustment
Same as above
wrench ST2005 0204
Diaphragm nut torque wrench GG9431 0000
Vacuum hand pump EG15130 0000
Clutch booster and check valve inspection
C1 CLUTCH
1. Summary
Engine Description Clutch cover Model installation weiaht ka (Ib) RB26DETT
C240S
750 (1.654)
1 Model
--
Clutch disk
-
Facing material Torsional characteristic
NN63 1 level 15.87 (518) 19.05 (314) Attached
Master cylinder size Operating cylinder size Separation pipe

.- ... .
--
Inner diameter mm (in) Inner diameter mm (in)
Thrust spring Assist spring Clutch release bearing adjustment core type Model Master-Vac. Booster Diaphragm inner diameter mm (in)
Attached Non-self-aligning core CM19C 78.7 (3.098)
Inspection reference values

Engine Description
-
RB26DETT 171.7
Pedal height Pedal mm (in) Pedal play (clevis play) Clearance from floor when fully depressed Model
- 181.7 (6.76 - 7.15)

81 (3.19)
240TBL
0.3 (0.012)
5 - 12 (0.20 - 0.47) [I 3 (0.04 - 0.12)] -
Disk
mm (in) Wear limit (rivet head depth)

Diameter runout limit
Mnriel
1.Of230 (0.039/9 06)
C240S
37.5 39.5 (1.476 - 1.555)
Cover
mrn (in) Diaphragm spring lever height

Diaphragm spring unevenness limit kPa (mmHg, inHg)
0.5 (0.020) max.
Booster vacuum leak [Vacuum; 66.7 kPa (SO0 mmHg, 19.69 inHg)] Check valve load leak [Vacuum; 66.7 kPa (500 mrnHg, 19.69 inHg)]
3.3 (25, 0.98) rnax. in 15 seconds

1.3 (10, 0.39) rnax. in 15 seconds
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
C1 CLUTCH
2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment

2-1 CLUTCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT
12 15 (1.2 1.5, 9
- ll)(cl~tchswitch)
n:
Wm (kg-rn, ft-lb)
COI-OZOOE
Adjustment
0
Adjust the pedal height (H) with pedal stopper. Adjust the pedal free play (A) with master cylinder push rod. Then tighten lock nut.
Unit: mm (in)
-
Engine Description Pedal height: H, (from clevis)
RB26DETT
Play from pedal pad center: A [clevis play]

Clearance from floor when fully depressed: H ,
5 12 (0.20- 0.47)
81 (3.19)
2-2 AIR BLEEDING

Air bleeder
I n:
Clutch master cylinder
- - t0.6 1-0, Separation pipe 43 -7.2)
fh~ ft-lb) (kg-rn,
C01-0201B
For vehicles equipped with separation pipe, bleed the separation pipe first and then bleed operating cylinder.
C1 CLUTCH 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

Bleeding procedure
Top up master cylinder reservoir with recommended brake fluid. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder valve. 3. Fully depress clutch pedal several times. 4. With clutch pedal depressed, open bleeder valve to release air. 5. Close bleeder valve. 6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 above until clear brake fluid with. out bubbles comes out of air bleeder valve.
1.
2-3 CLUTCH FLUID INSPECTION Check that clutch fluid is between MAX-MIN levels of res.
ervoir tank. Make sure there are no leaks around reservoir tank.
2-4 LEAKING, DAMAGE AND INSTALLATION INSPECTION Check the following items. Check hoses, tubes and connections for leakage, damage twisting and deformations. a Check that there are no leaks from any part when clutct pedal is pressed.
VACUUM PIPE INSPECTION (vehicles equipped with RB26DETT)

Check hose tube and connections for leaking, twisting an( deformations. Check that clamps and connections are not loose. Check that Arrow on E-mark of check valve is positionec facing the engine side.
2-6 BOOSTER FUNCTION INSPECTION (vehicles equipped with RB26DETT engine)

Procedures
Let engine idle approx. 1 minute, apply load to booster ant turn ignition switch OFF. 2. When engine is stopped, press clutch pedal several times After making sure pressure changes, continue pressin! clutch pedal down and start engine. Check if there is an! change in pedal pressure. (A change in pressure is nor mal.)
1.
C1 CLUTCH 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

Clutch master
Clutch booster cylinder
2-7 BOOSTER SEALING INSPECTION (vehicles equipped with RB26DETT engine) a Connect the hand vacuum pump (special service tool) as shown in the figure and perform measurement.
Measurement value: Maximum decrease of 3.3 kPa (25 mmHg, 0.98 inHg) within 15 sec from initial pressure of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.60 inHg).
Intake manifold
2-8 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION (RB26DETT engine) a Use a vacuum pump (special service tool) to perform the inspection.
Maximum decrease of 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) within 15 sec from initial vacuum Attached to booster side (1) pressure of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg).
Attached to engine (2) No load is applied.
--
Operating cylinder
3. Component Parts Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly

Master cylinder
3-1 CLUTCH PIPING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Clutch pedal
Additional work required: Install : Bleed air
0
@
;Flare nut 15
-. .
I
- 18 N-in (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-tb) [Point 21 :Connector 17 - 20 N-m (1,7 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 tt-lb)
Clutch hose IPoint 11
i : Clutch tube
[Point 11 Clutch hose installation

Install hose from cylinder body. Position plate as shown in the figure and secure. CAUTION: (1) The hose and hose bracket must be aligned and with protrusion and assembled as shown in figure. (2) After assembly, make sure the hose is not twisted, or bent and does not interfere with other parts.
C1 CLUTCH 3. Component Parts Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
[Point 21 Flare nut removal and installation Use a flare nut wrench to remove flare nuts. Use a flare nu1 torque wrench (special service tool) for installation. Be careful not to damage flare nut or clutch tube.
Flare nut tightening torque: 15 18 N-m (1.5 1.8 kg-m, 11 13 ft
- Ib)
3-2 Separation pipe removal and installation
Removal
Use a flare nut wrench

remove bracket bolt.
to remove clutch tube piping. Nexl
Installation
Tighten bracket to torques shown in figure. Use flare nut torque wrench (special service tool) to tighter clutch tube piping to specified torque. CAUTION: Always bleed air from system after installation.
3.2 - 4.3)
Additional work required: F e e d air. N-m (kg-m, ft-Ib)
COl-02031
3-3 BOOSTER AND VACUUM PIPING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Power piston ~ o c k nut
[Point 11 Booster removal and installation

CAUTION: Disassemble booster from master cylinder. Do not allow booster operating rod to make a stroke. Be careful not to scratch reservoir tank and body during removal and installation. When installing installing master cylinder in booster, make sure push rod is installed in power piston as shown in figure. Check that dimension A in figure conforms to specified values indicated below and then install master cylinder. CAUTION: To prevent booster push rod from being pressed in, position unit so rod faces up and then install master cylinder. A dimension standard value: 9.6 rnm (0.378 in) Loosen operating rod lock nut and adjust operating rod so B dimension conforms to specified length. B dimension standard value: 94 rnm (3.70 in) After adjusting operating rod to standard value, tighten lock 0 nut temporarily. After unit is installed, adjust pedal height and tighten lock nut to specified torque.
push rod
CH-9
Always bleed air from system after master cylinder is removed or to complete installation.
Clamp
[Point 21 Vacuum hose assembly Insert more than 25 mm (0.98in) of the hose. Do not use lubrication oil during assembly.
+
----.
2 i 5
(0.98 in) m h .
C11-0373B
[Point 31 Check valve assembly

Position the check valve so valves faces engine (vacuum pump) in the direction of the arrow shown in figure.
C l CLUTCH 3. Component Parts Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
3-4 MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
c2
Reservoir cap
y"
Spring guide
L
0 :Always replace ahor overy disassemtiy.
63 :w
y ruber grease (KREOO 00010)
Retwn $ping
ring
Pistm st-r
Piston ASSY [Point 1 2 : 1
[Point 11 Piston ASSY removal

Remove the C-ring. Press the spring guide to prevent the spring from flying out and remove the piston ASSY.
[Point 21 Piston ASSY installation

The piston cup must be exchanged with the piston ASSY. CAUTION: (1) Apply a thin coat of Nissan rubber grease to the sliding part of lhe cylinder piston and cap. (Only use genuine Nissan products.) (2) Check direction of piston cup before assembly.
[Point 3 Part inspection 1

a
Check the following items and replace as necessary. Rubbing surface of cylinder head and piston for uneven wear, rust or damage Piston and piston cup, for wear or damage. Return spring, for wear or damageReservoir tank wear or damage
.
3-5 OPERATING CYLINDER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
PistmJ
[ P a r t I]
\
0 Piston cup [Pant I]
Additional w k Bleed air
[Point 11 Part inspection Inspect the following parts and replace as necessary. Piston and piston cup for wear, damage or deterioration. Piston springs, for wear or damage. Check dust cover for cracks, deformation or damage. Check inner cylinder for scratches or foreign matter.
~ s s e r n band Disassembly (Cont'd) l~

3-6 CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
Fulcrum pn iPedal bracket
Cluch pedal spring
l!l
I "
Snap pin
.: Should be lubricated with
Nissan clutch sleeve grease KRllfj-00010. Unless otherwise indicated, use recommended multi-purpose grease, COl-01686
[Point I] CIutch switch adjustment (for vehicles equipped with ASCD and SUPER HICAS) 1. Loosen clutch switch lock nut @ . 2, Loosen push rod lock nut @ and turn push rod. Adjust pedal to specified height and tighten lock nut. 3. Turn the switch so there is a clearance of 0.3 to 1.0 mm (0.012 to 0.039 in) between stopper rubber and end of clutch switch screw. Tighten lock nut to specified torque.
Lock nut tightening torque N.m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Clearance
@ 12 - 15 (1.2 - 1.5, 9 @ 8
- 11)
mm (in)
- 12 (0.8- 1.2,5.8 - 8.7) 3 - 10 (0.3- 1.0, 2.2 - 7.2)
C1 CLUTCH
3. Component Parts Removal and Installation, ~ s s e - r n band Disassembly (Cont'd) l~

3-7 CLUTCH RELEASE MECHANISM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Release bearing [Point I,2 1
H1 : App4y Nissan cluch sleeve grease (KRIlWXJOlO] m :Apply Nissan duch spring grease ~ K R t ~ ~ l O ) 2
[Point 11 Release bearing removal and installation Removal Use a puller as shown in figure on left to remove bearing. (Position a suitable drift on the sleeve.)
Installation
Use the release bearing drift (special service tool) as shown in the figure to install the bearing. CAUTION: A drifl must be used to press against the inner race.
drift)
KV3Ol 01400
C1 CLUTCH 3. Component Parts Removal and Installation, ~ s s e m band Disassembly (Cont'd) l~

[Point 21 Inspection
Check the following items and replace i f necessary. Release bearing, to see that it rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear rn Release sleeve and withdrawal lever rubbing surface, for wear rust or damage.
[Point 31 Lubrication
Lubricate locations indicated by arrow with Nissan clutch sleeve grease (KRI 16-00010).
: Apply Nissan clutch sleeve grease. (KRll6-00010)

C014114I
3-8 CLUTCH COVER INSPECTION AND DISK, INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

Flywheel {Point 3 1
25
- 33 fl-lb)
: Apply Nissan clutch sleeve grease ( ~ ~ 1 1 6 - 0 0 0 1 0 ) [Point 2, 41
[Point 11 Clutch disk inspection
0
Use calipers to measure the depth of facing surface to the rivet head. If wear exceeds specification limit, replace clutch disc.
Facing wear limit (depth to rivet head)
mrn (in)
0.3 (0.012) rnin.
Facing r . .
If the surface runout or spline backlash (from hub center) exceeds specified limit, adjust or replace disk.
Engine Description
RB26DETT
1.0 (0.039) rnax./230 (9.06) dia.
Facing runout/measurement part position mm (in)
[Point 21 Clutch cover inspection

0
Use the base plate (special service tool) and distance piece (special service tool) to measure the diaphragm spring lever height (dimension H). Replace the cover ASSY if it does not conform to the standard dimensions. Lever set height (dimension H) standard: 37.5 39.5 mm (1.476 1.555 in)
Base plate Distance piece
ST2005-0010 ST2005-0100
ST2005 0100
ST2005 0010
Bdt
CAUTION: In vehicles equipped with the RB26DETT engine, place 0.3 mm (0.012 in) thickness gauge in distance piece (ST2005 0010), place it on clutch cover and measure the distance. Clutch cover tightening torque: 34 44 N-m (3.5 4.5 kg-m, 25 33 ft-lb)
Adjust unevenness of diaphragm spring with diaphragm adjustment wrench (special service tool). Diaphragm spring unevenness limit: 0.5 mm (0.020 in) max. CAUTION: The correction can only be performed if it is within allowable limit before the lever set height adjustment is performed. a Check thrust ring for wear or damage. Replace if necessary.
C1 CLUTCH 3. Component Parts Removal and Installation, ~ s s e r n b and Disassembly (Cont'd) l~

Bend damage: A chattering sound is produced when cover is shaken vertically. Wear: A slightly cracked sound is produced if rivets are struck lightly with hammer. Check pressure plate and clutch disc contact surface for slight burns or discoloration. Repair pressure plate with emery paper. Check pressure plate and clutch disc contact surface for deformation or damage. Replace if necessary.
[Point 31 Flywheel inspection

Check contact surface of flywheel for slight burns or discoloration. Repair flywheel with emery paper.
[Point 41 Clutch disk and cover installation

Apply recommended grease (KRI06-00010) to contact surface of clutch disc spline. Too much lubricant may damage clutch disk facing and pressure plate surface. Use clutch disk alignment tool (special service tool) before tightening clutch cover bolts. Tighten bolts in sequence shown in figure.
0
0
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
0
Only use genuine Nissan gear oil MP-G special GL-4 75W-90 for the transmission. Never reuse transmission oil. Make sure no dirt, debris or foreign matter enters the transmission during assembly or disassernbly. Use a torque wrench to tighten bolts and nuts to specified torque.
Description Striking lever and striking arm assembly and disassembly
COO - 0084

Tool name Too! number
Pin punch KV321 01100 6 m m (0.24 in)
Drift ST3532 2000 Drift bar ST3532 5000
Mainshaft and rear end bearing removal
1 b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.

Drift ST35321000 Drift bar ST3532 5000 Mainshaft and rear end bearing removal
a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.

a: Outer diameter of drift b: Inner diameter of drift
*: Special service tool or commercial equivalent
Tool number Tool name ST23540000" Pin punch
ST30031000" Puller
Removing 1st & 2nd synchronizer assembly Removing counter gear rear thrust bearing Removing main drive bearing
ST33290001* Puller
Removing rear oil seal
ST33230000* Drift
Removing rnainshaft and counter gear
3: 51 mm (2.01 in)
3:
dia. 28.5 (1.122 in) dia. Removing counter gear front bearing (Use with KV38100300.)
ST22350000' Drift

KV38100300* Drift Removing counter gear front bearing (Use with ST22350000.) Installing counter gear rear bearing

Drift Removing rnainshaft front bearing. Installing mainshaft front bearing.
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55.5 mrn (2.185 in) dia.

Tool number Tool name ST33210000* Drift Description Installing counter gear front bearing Installing front cover oil seal
i 44 :
mm (1.73 in) dia.
i 24.5 :
mm (0.965 in) dia.

Removing and installing counter gear and rear end bearing
ST3320000* Drift
5:
37mm (1.46 in) dia.
k 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
ST30613000. Drift
...
Installing main drive gear bearing
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. b: 48 mm (1.89 in) dla.

ST37750000* Drift Removing counter gear rear bearing Installing O.D. gear bushing Installing reverse cone Installing reverse counter gear Installing counter gear rear end bearing
a: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.

ST22452000* Drift
b: 31 rnm (1.22 in) dia.
<Q ^
3
a: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dla.

ST33400001 Drift
Installing reverse hub Installing rnainshaft rear bearing
Installing rear oil seal
a: 60 mrn (2.36 In) dia. b 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. :
a; Outer diameter of drift
b Inner diameter of drift * : Special service tool or commercial equivalent
Special service tool or commercial equivalent Tool number Tool name
ST36730000' Drift
Description
?^
1 a: 50 rnm (1.97 in) dia.
b: 39 mm (1.54 in) dia.
I
Installing sub-gear on reverse idler gear
Spacer hook KV321 02210 Spacer KV321 02900 Bolt KV321 02230 Drift KV321 02700
KV32 1 02210
KV321 02900 ~ K v 3 2 1 Removing 5th gear bushing

,
.I,
;i
02230
(Use with HT72350000.)
Installing 5th gear Installing mainshaft rear bearing Installing reverse gear bushing Installing reverse hub
a: 48.6 mm (1.913 in) dia. b 41.6 mm (1.638 in) dia. : c: 410 m m (16.14 in) dia.
Drift KV321 02800 Installing sub-gear snap ring
a: 41.0 mm (1.614 in) dia. b. 35.5 mm (1.398 in) dia.

Bearing puller ST2247 0000 Removing reverse gear and reverse hub
COMMERCIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool name Tool number Transmission jack Engine sling tool Puller HT235 0000 escription Engine support during transmission removal and installation Removing counter gear rear end bearing Removing mainshaft rear bearing Removing reverse gear synchronizer hub Removing reverse counter gear
Drift
I :
: 44.5 mrn (1.752 in) dia. 38.5 m m (1.516 in) dia.
Drift
Installing 0.0. main gear Installing reverse gear bushing
a
I :
i :
44.5 mm (1.752 In) dia. 40.5 mm (1.594 in) dia.
Puller HT723 4000
'a
Removing reverse gear bushing (Use with HT726 1000.)
Joint
HT726 1000
Removing reverse gear bushing (Use with HT723 4000.)
Puller HT726 0000
Blind bearing puller BL600
1. Summary
Specifications
A
Engine Description Model Model No. (Note 1)
RB26DETT
FS5R30A
05U10 1st gear

2nd gear 3rd gear 3.214 1.925 1.302 1.OOO
Gear ratio
4th gear
5th gear Reverse gear Main drive gear 1st gear 2nd aear Mainshaft
0.752
3.369
31
30
1 3rd gear
5th gear
Reverse aear
1 1
29
24
30
31
Number of gear teeth
1 Drive gear
1st gear
2nd gear Counter 3rd gear 5th gear Reverse aear
13
21
30
43
12
1 Reverse idler gear 1

Transmission switch Total length Recommended oil and quantity Neutral rnm (in) (Note 2)
22
Attached
625 (24.61)
Nissan gear oil MP-G special GL-4 #75-90 approx. 4.1 (3-518)
t (Imp qt)
Note: 1. The model number is indicated in the last five digits of the part number (32010 XXXXX). 2 The total length indicates length from front edge of clutch case to rear edge of OD cover. .
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 1. Summary (Cont'd)

Inspection standard values
Unit: mrn (in)
Description End play
1st gear 2nd gear 3rd gear 5th gear
Standard value
Reverse gear Reverse idler gear Counter gear Baulk ring clearance ?st, 4th, 5th gear 2nd, 3rd gear
0.11 (0.0043) max. 0.33 - 0.43 (0.0130 - 0.0169) 0.10 0.25 (0.0039
- 0.0098)
1.05 1.30 (0.0413 - 0.0512) [Usage limit value: 0.7 (0.028) max.] Clearance a: 0.6 1.10 (0.0236 - 0.0433) Clearance b: 0.70 - 0.90 (0.0276 - 0.0354) [Usage limit value: 0.2 (0.008) max.] Outer baulk ring,
Inner baulk ring

Synchronizer cone
C02-0726B
Clearance C: -0.10 to 0.35 (-0.0039 to 0.0138) [Usage limit value: 0.7 (0.028)) Reverse cone - baulk ring clearance height
-^
Thickness 1.89 1.98 2.05 2.12 2.19 (0.0744) (0.0780) (0.0807) (0.0835) (0.0862)
Reverse baulk ring
End play standard value: 0.1 (0.004) max.
Part number
32204 01GOO 32204 DIG01 32204 01G02 32204 01G03 32204 01GO4
Main drive gear snap ring

1
Thickness 1.89 (0.0744) Mainshaft (front) snap ring
Part number 32204 01GOO
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 1. Summary (Cont'd)

Unit: rnrn (in)
Description Standard value
End play standard value: 0.1 (0.004) rnax.

Thickness
Part number
Mainshaft C ring (rear)
i
Thickness
32348 01G15 32348 01G O O 32348 01G01 32348 01G02 32348 01GO3 32348 01G04 32348 01G05 32348 01G06 32348 01G 7 O 32348 01GO8 32348 01G09 32348 01G10 32348 01GI 1 32348 01G12 32348 01G13 32348 01G14

Part number
Counter gear front thrust washer
0.8 (0.031) 0.9 (0.035) 1.O (0.039) 1.I (0.043) 1.2 (0.047) 1.3 (0.051) 1.4 (0.055)
32218 01G O O 32218 01G01 32218 01G02 32218 01G03 32218 01GO4 32218 01G05 32218 01G06
End
play standard value: 0.1 (0.004) rnax.
Thickness
1.26 (0.0496)
Part number
32236 01G08
Counter gear rear snap ring

p~
Thickness Reverse idler thrust washer
Part number
1.97 (0.0776)
32284 01G10
2. On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment

2-1 OIL LEAK INSPECTION
If there are oil leaks from any transmission part, remove transmission ASSY from vehicle and change oil.
2-2 OIL QUANTITY INSPECTION

0
Check oil quantity through filler plug hole. Use only genuine Nissan gear oil MP-G special GL-4 75W90.
Standard oil quantity

C02-07578
3. Transmission Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly

3-1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Additional work required: Use jack to support transmission during remwal and installation. Drain and refill: Transmissionoil ~ront Transfer oil Remove and install: Speedometer cable Propeller shaft Clutch operating cylinder Starter motor ASSY Control lever (Point 1 1 Reverse lamp switch and neutral switch wiring Exhaust pipe [Point 2 1 E-TS hydraulic unit air bleeder [Pant 41
O-ring
shaft
Rear propeller shaft
65 72)
(01: MID (kg-m ft-lb) 0 :Always replace aftar every disassembly.
4 6h (0.4 0-8 kc-lit 2.9 * 4.3 ft-lb)
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 3. Transmission Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
[Point I] Control lever removal a Remove control lever finisher and control lever dust boot.
Remove snap ring from transmission control cover. Next, remove control lever.
ring - Yl 0 :Always replace after every disassembly.
bs-P
\ T
C02-07
[Point 21 Exhaust pipe clamp removal

Remove exhaust pipe clamp. Consider operability in front end of transmission and detach exhaust manifold and front exhaust pipe.
..
@ Transmission - engine Engine transmission
..
[Point 31. Transmission bolts

Vehicles equipped with RB26DETT engine
Description
Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) Bolt length below head rnm (in)
Length b l o w head
Bolt NO.
@ @*
The
29 - 39 (3.0- 4.0, 22 - 29)

29 - 39 (3.0- 4.0, 22 29)
-
40 (15 7 )
50 (1.97)
Note:
symbol indicates bolls tightened by nuts. The figure on left shows transmission when viewed from engine side.
[Point 41 ETS hydraulic system air bleeding

Refer to "C3, 4, 4-4 HYDRAULIC UNIT AND RESERVOIR TANK, [Point 31" for air bleeding procedures,
Case and shift control components
(0.5
- 0.7, 3.4
- 5.1) (4)
&3-&3<0.4-0Kb4.8-&1
31 42 ( . 4.3.23 32
31)
0 :Always replam after aveW d i l a ~ S @ ~ Y .

One-way
fl :Use Niuan gear dl MP-G special GL.4 fffSW-SO

1Qi:~~pl~ reccnimerded silicon bond sealant (Nissan genuine port: lhrae Bond 1215 KP610-OCBOO; or equivatert.
B :Apply recommended silicon bond sealant (Nissan genuine part: Three Bond 1344) or equivalent. 2
~02-0764
Shift control components
O.D. & reverse fork rod
!! Check ball plug
pl]l9 - 25 (1.9 - 2-6, 1 4 - 19)
13
BOI~ thread
N-m (kg*, fi4b) : Apply recommended sealant (Nissan genuine part: KP610-00250) or equivalent. m(L): Apply locking sealant. : Pay attention to its direction.
[D} :
Gear components
m 3 r d gear media bearing
3rd main near? 3rd inner baulk rin 3rd outer baulk ring 3rd & 4th coupling sleeve
Main drive ge
gear Sub-gear snap ring
w a d e bearing
I gear front thrust bearing Counter

Reverse main gear
R e w r gear m e d e bearing
Ravrw hub
Raw89 d i n g s l i m 1 Mainshaft spacer
0 Front bearing snap ring
Mainshalt front bearing
[
I ;Nissan M special grease No. 2 P
L~su*lbIl Sub-gear spring Sub-mar

Reverse idler shaft
Reverse idler gear ^-Revarse idler f r i thrust wash81
0 :Always replace after every disassembly.
fl :Use Nissan gear oil MP-G special GLd 75W.S'
*:
Selection part
2nd and 3rd gear double cone synchronizer components
"3rd inner baulk
1st & 2nd synchronizer
hub
'Replace as a set
C02-074BB
REAR EXTENSION DISASSEMBLY a Remove upper cover and gasket. Remove return spring and check ball from rear extension. e Remove reverse check, select check plunger and spring. m Remove neutral switch and reverse lamp switch,
Remove bolts and detach guide plate
t! 3i
Striking lever
Use a pin punch (special service tool) to strike the striking lever retaining pin and remove pin.
Remove OD cover bolts. Tap cover with rubber hammer to separate it.
Remove OD cover and striking lever as a set.
Use drift (special service tool) to remove mainshaft rear end bearing.
ST3532 ZDOO
CASE COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY

Remove check ball plug, check spring and check ball- Then remove interlock stopper. If interlock assembly is removed as a unit, the check ball can fall into transmission case. 1.
screwdriver-
\ ,J
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 3. Transmission Removal and Installation; Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Remove front cover and gasket.
Remove stopper ring and main drive bearing snap ring.
Remove transmission case by tapping lightly

Soft hammer
Remove front cover oil seal.
Remove slide ball bearing. Use screwdriver to remove the ball of the slide ball bearing and inner race. Set blind bearing puller on inset part of thrust ball bearing outer race as shown in the figure and remove race. Remove the adapter plate and rear extension slide ball bearing the same way.
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY
1,
Mount adapter plate on vise.
2. Remove O.D. & reverse fork rod,
Remove check ball plug, check ball and return spring.
4. Drive out retaining pin from striking lever. 5. While pulling out striking rod, remove striking lever and striking interlock. Then remove 1st & 2nd, 3rd & 4th and
reverse shift fork.
6. Drive out retaining pin from O.D. shift fork.

7.
Pull out O.D. fork rod and then remove O.D. shift fork.
GEAR COMPONENTS DISASSEMBLY
1.
Before removing gears and shafts, measure each gear end
play.
Gear
1st main gear
End play m m (in)
2nd main gear
3rd main gear
O.D. counter gear

Reverse main gear
If not within specification, disassemble and check contact surface of gear to hub, washer, bushing, needle bearing and shaft.
2. Remove rear side components on mainshaft and counter

a. gear. Remove reverse coupling sleeve.
b.
c.
Remove mainshaft rear snap ring and counter gear rear snap ring. Remove C-ring holder and mainshaft C-rings from mainshaft. Use punch and hammer to remove C-rings.
d.
Use puller to remove mainshaft rear bearing.
e.
f.
Pull out counter gear rear end bearing, Remove reverse idler gear and reverse idler thrust washers.
g.
Pull out reverse main gear together with mainshaft spacer and reverse synchronizer hub. Then remove reverse gear needle bearings.
h. i.
Pull out reverse counter gear. Remove O.D. coupling sleeve together with O.D. baulk ring, reverse baulk ring and spring inserts.
j.
Pull out reverse gear bushing.
Pull out O.D. counter gear together with reverse cone.
3.
Remove 5th gear bushing, mainshaft ASSY, main drive gear ASSY and counter gear. Set the bushing hook (special service too!) in the 5th gear bushing and use gear putter to remove 5th gear bushing.
Position the bushing hook (special service tool) with 3 spacers. 4. Press out rnainshaft and counter gear alternately.
Alternately
Make sure to alternate press between mainshaft and counter gear not to allow the front surface of one to contact the rear surface of the other.
SMT772;
5. a. b.
Remove front side components on mainshaft. Remove 1st gear washer and steel ball. Remove 1st main gear and 1st gear needle bearing.
c.
d.
Press out 2nd main gear together with 1st gear bushing and 1st & 2nd synchronizer assembly. Remove mainshaft front snap ring.
e.
Press out 3rd main gear together with 3rd & 4th synchronizer assembly and 3rd gear needle bearing.
6. Remove front side components on counter gear. a. Remove counter gear rear thrust bearing.
b.
Remove sub-gear components.
c.
Reverse idler sub-gear disassembly Remove snap ring and detach sub-gear from reverse idler gear.
7,
a.
Remove main driver gear bearing. Remove main drive gear snap ring and spacer. b. Press out main drive gear bearing.
8.
counter gear front bearing in transmission case
Remove bearings from case components.

Mainshaft front bearing in adapter plate
counter gear rear end bearing in 0.D. gear case
Counter gear rear bearing in adapter plate

A
Shift fork
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS INSPECTION

Check contact surface and sliding surface for wear, scratches, projections or other damage.
Mainshaft a d gear
GEAR COMPONENTS INSPECTION Gears and shafts

a a
Check shafts for cracks, wear or bending. Check gears for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
Counter gear
Shifting insert
Synchronizers
0
e
0
Check spline portion of coupling sleeves, hubs and gears for wear or cracks. Check baulk rings for cracks or deformation. Check shift inserts for wear or deformation. Check insert springs for deformation.
Baulk ring to gear clears
Clearance between baulk ring and gear gear a. lst, main drive & 0.0.
Unit: mm (in)
I
Standard
1.05
Wear limit
0.7 (0.028)
Main drive
- 1.3 (0.0413 - 0.0512) 1.05 - 1.3 (0.0413 - 0.0512) 1.05 - 1.3 (0.0413 - 0.0512)
0.7 (0.028)
0 7 (0.028) .
If the clearance is smaller than the wear limit, replace baulk ring.
2nd and 3rd gear The outer baulk ring, cone and inner baulk ring are a set and must maintain dimensions described below. If replacement is necessary, replace all three parts as an entire new set and then assemble. Clearance measurement. Measure clearance "a" and "b".
Use a dial gauge to measure clearance dimension "a". Measure the part in two opposite locations and calculate average value.
Cone
Use feeler gauge to measure clearance "b". Measure the part in two adjacent locations and determine the average value.
Unit: mrn (in)
Part
Clearance a Clearance b
New value
Wear limit
0.65 - 1.1 (0.0256 0.0433) 0.7- 0.9(0.028- 0.035)
0.2 (0008) max. 0.2(0008) max.
Measure wear of reverse baulk ring. (Ist, main drive and O.D. gear) a. Place baulk ring in position on reverse cone. b. While holding baulk ring against reverse cone as far as it will go, measure dimension "A" with dial indicator.
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Dimension "A"
Wear limit
-0.1 t 0.35 (-0.0039to 0.0138 ) o
0.7 (0.028)
c.
If dimension "A" is larger than the wear limit, replace baulk ring.
Bearings
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear.
GEAR COMPONENTS ASSEMBLY 1. Install bearings into case components.
1 Counter
gear front bearing in transmission
Mainshaft front bearing in adapter plate
1 Counter gear rear end bearing in O.D. gear case

L ^"a
Counter gear rear bearing in adapter plate
17
.&^
C M T ~ OI A
if) /-KV38100300
" > Be flush with front surface of O.D. gem case.-
Slide ball bearing

a
Use a drift [26 rnm (1.02 in) outer diameter] to install the slide ball bearing flush in the case. CAUTION: Place a 19-mm (0.75 in) socket on the drift. a Use the same method to install the adapter plate and rear extension slide ball bearing.
2 Install main drive gear bearing. . a. Press main drive gear bearing.
b.
Install main drive gear spacer.
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 3. Transmission Removal and Installation, 1 Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
c. Select proper main drive gear snap ring to minimize clearance of groove. Allowable groove clearance: 0 0.1 m m (0 0.004 in) Main drive gear snap ring
Thickness mrn (in) 1.89 1.98 2.05 2.12 2.19 (0.0744) (0.0780) (0.0807) (0.0835) (0.0862)
Part number
32204-01G O O 32204-01G01 32204-01GO2 32204-01GO3 32204-01GO4
d. Install selected snap ring on main drive gear
3. Install components on counter gear a. Reverse idler sub-gear assembly Assemble sub-gear on reverse idler gear as shown in figure. Use drift (special service tool) to press-fit snap ring,
b. Install sub-gear components. When installing sub-gear snap ring, tap sub-gear snap ring into position on counter gear.
c.
Install counter gear rear thrust bearing.
4. a.
~lassification mark
cOupiing/4-^ sleeve
Front
^
C02-0750B
Install front side components on mainshaft. 1st & 2nd synchronizer ASSY assembly Assemble coupling sleeve, shifting insert and spread spring on 1st & 2nd synchronizer hub. CAUTION: (1) Position spread spring end (side bent at angle) so it is engaged in inside groove. (2) Make sure the front and rear spread spring are not engaged in the same shifting insert. (3) Install the shifting insert in the position of the indentation inthe coupling sleeve as shown in the figure. (4) Assemble the coupling sleeve with the groove facing the front. (5) Move hub and coupling sleeve by hand to make sure they move smoothly.
Coupling sleeve
b. 3rd & 4th synchronizer ASSY assembly Assemble coupling sleeve and insert spring in 3rd & 4th synchronizer hub as shown in the figure. CAUTION: (1) Assemble insert spring in groove of coupling sleeve as shown in figure. (2) Install synchronizer hub in direction indicated in figure. (3) Assemble coupling sleeve with groove facing the rear side. (4) Move hub and coupling sleeve by hand and check that they move smoothly.
Front
4-
c.
Press on 3rd & 4th synchronizer assembly together with 3rd main gear and 3rd gear needle bearing. Pay attention to direction of synchronizer assembly.
d.
Select proper snap ring to minimize clearance of groove. Allowable clearance of groove: 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 in) Mainshafl front snap ring
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
1.89 1.98 2.05 2.1 2 2.1 9
(0.0744) (0.0780) (0.0807) (0.0835) (0.0862)
32204-01G O O 32204-01G01 32204-01G02 32204-01GO3 32204-01GO4
e. Install selected snap ring on mainshaft.
f.
Press on 1st & 2nd synchronizer assembly together with 2nd main gear and 2nd gear needle bearing.
g. h.
Press on 1st gear bushing using 1st gear washer. Install 1st main gear and needle bearing.
1st gear
Install steel ball and 1st gear washer. i Apply multi-purpose grease to steel ball and 1st gear washer before installing.
Counter gear front thrust bearing
5.

-Counter gear
Subgear
components
counter gear rear thrust bearing-
-4 4
Select proper counter gear front bearing shim when replacing transmission case, counter gear, counter gear thrust bearing or sub-gear components. a. Install counter gear with sub-gear components, counter gear front and rear thrust bearing on adapter plate. b. Remove counter gear front bearing shim from transmission case. c. Place adapter plate and counter gear assembly in transmission case (case inverted).
d. Tighten adapter plate to transmission case with 2 bolts. e. Place dial indicator on rear end of counter gear. f. Move counter gear up and down and measure dial indicator deflection. g. Select proper shim using table below as a guide. Counter gear end play: 0.10 0.25 mm (0.0039 0.0098 in) Table for selecting proper counter gear front bearing shim
Dial indicator deflection mm (in)
Thickness of correct washer
Part number
32218-01G11 32218-01G12 32218-01G13 32218-01G14 32218-01G15 32218-01G16 32218-01G17
mrn (in)
0.88 (0.0346) 0.96 (0.0378) 1.04 (0.0409) 1.12 (0.0441) 1.28 (0.0504) 1.36 (0.0535) 1.44 (0.0567)
&
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 3. Transmission Removal and installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
6. Select proper reverse idler rear thrust washer when replacing O.D. gear case, reverse idler gear, reverse idler shaft or reverse idler thrust washer. a. Install reverse idler gear, reverse idler needle bearings, reverse idler thrust washers and reverse idler shaft into O.D. gear case. When replacing reverse idler rear washer, install either A or B. Reverse idler rear thrust washer
Thickness mm (in)
A
Part number
Reverse idler shaft
Reverse idler front thrust washer
Reverse idler
needle bearing Reverse idler gear
1.97 (0.0776)
2.07(0.0815)
32284-01 10 G 32284-01G 11
Place dial indicator on front end of reverse idler shaft. Put straightedge on front surface of O.D. gear case as a stopper for reverse idler shaft. Move reverse idler shaft up and down and measure reverse idler gear end play. Reverse idler gear end play: 0.30 0.53 mm (0.0118 0.0209 in) If not within specification, replace reverse idler rear thrust washer with the other (A or B) and check again.
Measured end play
Install mainshaft and counter gear on adapter plate and main drive gear on mainshaft. Mount adapter plate on vise and apply multi-purpose grease to counter gear rear bearing.
Soft hammer
b. Install mainshaft partially on mainshaft front bearing. To enable counter gear installation, do not install mainshaft completely.
c.
Install counter gear on counter gear rear bearing and install main drive gear, pilot bearing and spacer on mainshaft.
Push up with screwdriver.
When installing counter gear into counter gear rear bearing, push up on upper roller of counter gear rear bearing with screwdriver.
Soft hammer
d. Install mainshaft and counter gear completely by tapping

rear side of adapter plate and pulling mainshaft.
8.
a.
Install rear side components on mainshaft and counter gear. Install O.D. gear bushing while pushing on the front of counter gear.
b. Install O.D. main gear Pay attention to direction of O.D. main gear (B is wider than A as shown at left) c. Install adapter plate with gear assembly into transmission case. d. Install O.D. gear needle bearing and then install O.D. counter gear and reverse idler shaft.
Install reverse gear bushing Install steel ball in mainshaft. a Use a drift (special service tool) and install reverse gear bushing. CAUTION: Align steel ball in reverse gear bushing indentation and pressfit to install.
e.
Install reverse cone.
g.
Reverse baulk ring

Front
Install insert springs and reverse baulk ring on 0.D. coupling sleeve. Then install them and O.D. baulk ring on O.D. counter gear. Pay attention to direction of O.D. coupling sleeve.
sleeve
SMT571A
h. i,
Install reverse counter gear. install reverse gear needle bearing and then install reverse main gear, reverse idler gear and reverse idler thrust washers.
j. Install reverse hub. Pay attention to its direction.
k.
Use drift (special service tool) to install mainshaft spacer and mainshaft rear gear bearing.
I. Install counter gear rear end bearing. m. Separate adapter plate from transmission case and mount adapter plate on vice again.
C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION 3. Transmission Removal and Installaticin, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
n.
Select proper mainshaft C-ring to minimize clearance of groove. Allowable clearance of groove: 0 0.1 m m (0 0.004 in)
Thickness mm (in) 2.63 (0.1 035) 2.70 (0.1 063) 2.77 (0.1091) 2.84 (0.1 118) 2.91 (0.1146) 2.98 (0.1 173) 3.05 (0.1201) 3.1 2 (0.1228)
Part Number
Thickness mm (in)
Part Number
32348-01G 15 32348-01G O O 32348-01G S O ' 32348-01GO2 32348-01GO3 32348-01GO4 32348-01GO5 32348-01GO6
o.
Install selected C-ring, C-ring holder and mainshaft rear snap ring.
Install spacer and then select proper counter gear rear snap ring to minimize clearance of groove. Allowable clearance of groove: 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 in) Counter gear rear snap ring p.
~hickneks rnrn (in) 1.26 (0.0496) 1.32 (0.0520) 1.38 (0.0543) 1.44 (0.0567) 1.50 (0.0591)
Part number
32236-01GO8 32236-01G O O 32236-01GO1 32236-01GO2 32236-01GO3 32236-01GO4 32236-01G05 32236-01GO6 32236-01GO7
q.
Snap ring pliers
Install selected counter gear rear snap ring.
r. Install reverse coupling sleeve. Pay attention to its direction. s. Measure each gear end play as a final check. Refer to "DISASSEMBLY".
SHIFT CONTROL COMPONENTS ASSEMBLY 1. Install O.D. fork rod and 0.0. shift fork. Then install retaining pin into O.D. shift fork. 2. Install 1st & 2nd, 3rd & 4th and reverse shift fork in coupling sleeve.
Install striking rod into hole of shift forks, striking lever and interlock and then install retaining pin into striking lever. Make sure that striking rod moves smoothly.
3.
Install 5th & reverse fork rod in reverse fork. Install check ball, return spring and check ball plug. CAUTION: (1) Coat check ball plug screw with sealing material. (2) Make sure that striking rod moves smoothly.
CASE COMPONENTS ASSEMBLY 1. Install front cover oil seal.

Apply multi-purpose grease to seal lip. 2. Install selected counter gear front bearing shim into transmission case. Apply multi-purpose grease. 3. Apply sealant to mating surface of transmission case.
4.
Install gear assembly in transmission case,
5. Install check spring and check ball into interlock stopper

Apply multi-purpose grease to check ball.
6. Install interlock stopper assembly and then tighten check ball plug. Apply sealant to thread of check ball plug.
bolt
SMT46OA
Install stopper ring and main drive bearing snap ring.
8.
Install front cover and gasket. Apply sealant to thread of 3 bolts shown left. 9, Apply sealant to mating surface of adapter plate.
REAR EXTENSION ASSEMBLY

a
Use a drift to align mainshaft rear end bearing in case end surface and install in O.D. cover. CAUTION: Press-fit bearing in direction shown in left figure so bearing end surface is even with case end.
Install striking lever and rear extension at same time as shown in figure.
Use pin punch (special service tool) to install retaining pin in striking lever.
Align guide plate installation direction and tighten bolts to specified torque.
Install reverse check, select check plunger and spring. CAUTION: Coat threads of select check plug with sealant. Install neutral switch and reverse lamp switch. CAUTION: Coat threads of each switch with sealant. Assemble return spring and check ball. Install upper cover and gasket. CAUTION: Coat return spring bolts with sealant.
0
One-way valve
Insertion direction (front side)
One-way valve installation a Insert the one-way valve in the front of the adapter plate s~
the notches on both sides engage. CAUTION: After installing the one-way valve, check that valve operates a: shown in figure.
\
---
Adapter plate
Notch
installation location
'
C02-0747E
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TSl

Only use genuine Nissan special power steering fluid for the E-TS operation fluid. Only use automatic transmission fluid D for the transfer lubrication fluid. Never reuse the E-TS operation oil or transfer fluid. Do not allow dust or foreign matter to enter the system when installing or removing hydraulic unit, piping or transfer unit. Use a torque wrench to tighten bolts and nuts.
0
0
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLOS
COO-0138
Drift KV401 048SO KV401 04810 KV401 04820 KV401 04830 KV401 04840 KV401 04850
Oil pressure gauge KV481 03500 (former ST2909 1000)
KvaoI 04830
Installing rear oil seal of transfer unit.
COO-0267
Oil pump pressure inspection
COO-0042
Oil pressure gauge adapter

'
Same as above
KV481 00410 fl) KV481 00410-1 (2) KV481 00400-2
Drift KV401 047SO KV401 04710 KV401 04720-1 KV401 04720-2 KV401 04730
Front and rear wheels sensor rotor removal and installation
COO-0160
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS)

Tool name Tool number Pin punch KV321 01100 6 mm (0.24 in)
#
COO -0084
Striking arm and striking lever removal and installation
Spring compressor KV311 01100
Bearing replacer ST3006 1000
Release bearing removal

Tool name Tool number
-
Description Clutch hub end play measurement
Depth gauge (calipers type) GG9229
COO-0 129
Span GG9230 0320 320 mm (12-60 in)
Clutch hub end play measurement
I
Depth gauge (micrometer type) Flange wrench HT7278 Puller HT7235
Oil pump side clearance measurement
Companion flange removal Front drive sprocket, spacer, companion flange removal
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 1. Summary
ra
W e l speed sensor
speed sensor
(4) Vttwel speed sensor
Hydraulic control
Hydraulic power Control oressure Operation oil Engine specifications Transmission specifications Model No. (33100) Model
I0
~lectric pump (proportional electromagnetic pressure reduction is eauiuued internallvl . .. I

,f'
1,569 kPa (0 16 kg/cm2, 0 - 228 osi) . .
Nissan special power steering fluid

R B26DETT MIT
05UOO
ETX13A
Transfer
Front wheel control system Lubrication system Speedometer pinion gear (drivetdriven) Oil type and volume
Torque-split by wet multi-plate clutch Oil pump

6/20
E (Imp qt) Nissanmatic fluid D [approx. 1.8 (1-5/8)]
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 1. Summary (Cont'd) Inspection standard values
Transfer
Unit: mrn (in) Description Clutch hub end play Multi-plate clutch end
play
Standard value
0.2
- 0.35
(0.0079 - 0.0138)
Pump inner and outer gear side clearance
Part number
33112 05U04 33112 05U05 33112 05UOO 33112 05U01 33112 05U02 33112 05U03 33112 05U06
Shim thickness
Clutch hub bearing shim
0.40 (0.0157) 0.50 (0.0197) 0.60 (0.0236) 0.70 (0.0276) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.90 (0.0354) 1.00 (0.0394)
Part number
Retainer plate thickness 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 6.0 6.2 6.4 6.6 6.8 7.0
Retainer plate
31537 05UOO 31537 05U01 31537 05U02 31537 05U03 31537 05U04 31537 05U05 31537 05U06 31537 05U07 31537 05U08 31537 05U09 31537 05U10 31537 05U11
(0.189) (0.197) (0.205) (0.213) (0.220) (0.228) (0.236) (0.244) (0.252) (0.260) (0.268) (0.276)
Part number Pump gear (Use set o' inner and outer gears which are the same thickness.) Inner gear Outer gear 31347 05U02
Gear thickness
6.98 (0.2748)
31346 05U02

2-1 4WD FUNCTION INSPECTION Move the car so the front and rear wheels are positioned on the free rollersIn vehicles equipped with MIT, set selector in 2nd gear and release clutch in 2nd gear at low speed so a speed of 20 kmlh (12 MPH) is reached. Check speed of all four wheels visually. Make sure front and rear wheels are moving at approximately the same speed. CAUTION: Perform inspection when vehicle is in 2WD mode. Refer to "3. ETS Troubleshooting" when front wheel speed is noticeably slower than rear wheel speed (the front wheels may move slowly due to the oil viscosity in the transfer unit even in the
2WD mode).
2-2 OIL LEAK INSPECTION
Operation precautions
<3) Determine the type of oil where the leak occurs. (The ETS operation oil uses genuine Nissan power steering fluid special.) (2) When location of the oil leak is not clear, clean the area with white gasoline and check the oil leak location again. (Do not clean the hydraulic unit or harness connectors directly with white gasoline or other cleaning solvent. If the white gasoline or solvents contact any of these parts, wipe it off immediately.) (g) Check parts of related systems during repair. Replace defective parts as necessary. @ Replace the entire hydraulic unit ASSY if oil leaks occur because the unit cannot be disassembled. (1) Leak inspection

2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
Check oil leak location. (Note)
Note: When the leak location is unclear, clean the area with white gasoline and check leak location again. Oil leak location Service description (replacement part)
A: Reservoir tank and piping

Reservoir tank ASSY Tube and hose
Parts requiring inspection
a Reservoir tank cap damage
Service procedures
1
B: Hydraulic unit
Hydraulic unit ASSY Air bleeder damage Remove from vehicle.
I
C: Actuator and piping
C: Actuator and piping Actuator ASSY a Tubes and hoses
a Air bleeder damage

Transfer oil quantity (mixed with oil leak from actuator)
(Note 1)
Replace part.
Install in vehicle. I +
Bleed air, check oil level.
(Note 2)
NOTE 1: Refer to "4-4 HYDRAULIC UNIT AND RESERVOIR TANK" for installation and removal procedures. NOTE 2: Refer to "[Point 3 Air bleeding" in "4-4 HYDRAULIC UNIT AND RESERVOIR TANK" for air 1 bleeding and oil level inspection.
(2) Transfer
0
When there is an oil leak at either front or rear oil seal, replace parts as necessary with unit installed in vehicle. When there is oil leak at actuator, leave unit in vehicle and replace parts as necessary. When there are oil leaks in other locations, remove transfer ASSY from vehicle and replace parts as necessary.
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd) 2-3 OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
(1) Hydraulic unit Set ignition switch ON and check that oil level is between MAX-MIN in reservoir tank. CAUTION: (1) Reservoir tank is installed inside trunk on right side. (2) If ignition switch is turned OFF for a long period of time, the oil in accumulator may return to reservoir tank, causing volume to exceed MAX level. For this reason, the oil level must be checked when the ignition switch is ON. (3) Only use genuine Nissan Power Steering Fluid Special. There must be no oil leaks around reservoir tank.
Filler plug
Standard
1 (2) Transfer
check the oil level through the filler plug hole. CAUTION: Only use genuine Nissan Automatic Fluid D.
2-4 TRANSFER OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT

(1) Front oil seal replacement
Removal
0
Drain oil from transfer case. Remove clutch operating cylinder. Remove front propeller shaft. Place end of screwdriver at 45' angle and turn in metal part of oil seal evenly on diagonal line as shown in figure to remove seal.
Installation
Use a drift (special service tool) and tap the end of a suitable sized socket to insert seal. Install propeller shaft and tighten bolts and nuts to specified torque. Front propeller shaft tightening torque: 24 32 N-m (2.4 3.3 kg-m, 17 24 ft-lb)
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
(2) Rear oil seal replacement
Removal
Remove rear propeller shaft. Attach flange wrench (HT7278) to companion flange and remove flange nut.
Set gear puller (commercial service tool) on companion flange and remove flange.
Attach oil seal puller (special service tool) and remove transfer rear oil seal. Reference: Use KV381 054SO in oil seal puller ASSY.
Installation
0
Use drift (special service tool) and install oil seal in case end.
Install companion flange. Use flange wrench (HT7278) to tighten nut to specified tightening torque. CAUTION: (1) If oil seal sliding part of companion flange has scratches in axle direction, replace companion flange. (2) The flange nut must be replaced after each disassembly. Use a new part and tighten to specified torque. Companion flange nut tightening torque: 226 324 N-m (23.0 33.0 kg-m, 166 239 ft-lb) Install propeller shaft and tighten bolts and nuts to specified torque.
8
CH-64
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
Propeller shaft tightening torque: Flange 88 98 N-m (9.0 10.0 kg-m, 65 72 ft-lb) Constant velocity joint section 64 74 N-m (6.5 7.5 kg-m, 47 54 ft-lb)
3. Troubleshooting
3-1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Circuit diagram
8 2 4
ETS control unit terminals
nigh rear
/^x 4WD warning lamp

T
^^
InMbitu witch (Afn
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 3 Troubleshooting (Cont'd) A=A .
(2) When CONSULT is not used (a) Self-diagnosis procedures If ETS system is normal, the 4WD warning lamp lights when ignition switch is turned ON. The lamp turns off within 1 second after engine starts. If warning lamp does not go off, LED lamp in the ETS control unit below the rear parcel shelf will flash to indicate the abnormal position. The warning lamp lights and LED light flashes continuously when ignition switch is not turned OFF even after damaged area is corrected. For this reason, turn ignition switch OFF one time after repair is completed and then check self-diagnosis results again. When more than two systems are faulty, the LED will flash a set number of times to indicate each problem location.
\ -
Exanl 1; Only one system indicates damage.

1 cycle
+ Right rear wheel speed sensor or circuit is faulty.
E a *2: More than two systems indicate damage. xm Front and tear left wheel sensor or circuits are faulty.
Diagnosis locations are indicated below.

I
Number of LED flashes

1
Detection cycle
Warning lamp
1
Damage location
Right front wheel speed sensor or circuit Left front wheel speed sensor or circuit Right rear wheel speed sensor or circuit Left rear wheel speed sensor or circuit
ABS right front wheel actuator solenoid or circuit
Flow chart
0 (Note 1) 0 (Note 1)
0
0
0
2
3
4
t . .
R -
0
0
0 (Note 1)
0 (Note 1)
0 0
0
B
C
0
0
D
ft
0
-
0 0 0
0
ABS left front wheel actuator solenoid or circult ABS rear wheel actuator solenoid or circuit
ABS actuator motor, motor relay or circuit ABS actuator relay or circuit
0 0
0
0
8
9
10 11
0 0
0
0
ETS control unit power supply or circuit Fore-and-aft G sensor 1 or circuit Fore-and-aft G sensor 2 or circuit Fore-and-aft G sensor 1, fore-and-aft G sensor 2 .. .
0
0
0
0
0 0 0
0
0
0
12
0
0
F
G
l3
14
0
0
0 0
0 .
G sensor power supply 1 or circuit
0
0
H
I
15 16
G sensor power supply 2 or circuit
Lateral G sensor or circuit Air bleed connector or circuit

ETS pressure switch or circuit
ETS motor, motor relay or circuit
0 0 0
9
17
18
0 0
0
0 0
0
0 (Note 2) 0
K
L
19
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 3. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
Number of LED flashes
Detection cycle
Damage location
Warning lamp
Engine
start time
ETS solenoid or circuit
Driving
4WAS
AWD
Flow chart (Note 3)
20
21
22
N
1 0
1 Throttle sensor or circuit 1 ETS oil level switch or circuit

. .
~
0 1
l
0
c
1
alp
0
23
0
Q
24 or continually ON ETS control unit, ground or circuit

or OFF
Note: (1) Detection may not be possible due to sensor short circuit problem. (2) 4WD warning tamp lights during driving but norma! control is possible. (3) Refer to " E l 0 Brakes, 3 Troubleshooting" for items indicated by an asterisk (*).
(b) When warning lamp display is abnormal A. Ignition switch is ON (before starling engine) but 4WD warning lamp does not light.
Is 4 W warning lamp
No
r
Yes
1
Remwe control unit connector and turn i nition switch ON. Connect vehicle connector mrminal to ground and check if warnlng lamp lights.
&
c23
Replace warning lamp.
Lights I
Dces not lighl
Remove control unit connector and turn ignition switch OFF. Ground vehicle connector terminals @, @ , @ I and @ and check for continuitf.
ye5
Control unit is faulty,
NO
rwnd side harness is faulty
6. Ignition switch is ON (before starting engine) but 4WAS warning lamp and 4 W D warning lamp do not
light.
lI
la fuse
and 4 W warning famw?
1 m blowrl for w 1
No
Yes
1
7
lamps burned out?
Yes
Remove cmvd unit connector and turn ignilion switch ON,Ground vehicle terminals @ and @ and c h ~ if k
lamp lights.
( Replace warning lamp.)
Yes
4
Yes
I
NO
Remwe contrd unit connector and turn i nition switch OFF. Short vmhicle connector terminds @, @ and @ t b ground and check if there i s continuity, o w
6,
i
l i a r m s ~ hulty. is
No
J V
rTlwl~,,v,
faulty.

(vehicle harness side)
(3) Troub~eshoatingflowchart
A. Right front whee4 sensor or circuit problem (LED flashes I time) 6. Left front wheel sensor or circuit problem (LED flashes 2 times) C. Right rear wheel sensor or circuit problem (LED flashes 3 times) D. Left rear wheel sensor or circuit problem (LED flashes 4 times)
Turn ignitim switch OFF and remove control unit connectors. Measure resistance between vahicla connectortermimds @ Check if resistance is between 0.8 to 2.2 k f i
(3-63,
- @ , a -@ -,a . @
Yes
s
b m w e sensor connectors and
measure resistance be-en
connector terminals @
- @,
se-mor
IFIS control unit termlnab (vehicle harness side)
Yes I
No
Right and I&
sensor
terminal
sensor terminal
speed sensor terminal
E, Fore-and-aft G sensor 1 or circuit problem (LED flashes 11 times) F, Fore-and-aft G sensor 2 or circuit problem (LED flashes 12 times) G- Fore-and-aft G sensor I , 2 or circuit problem (LED flashes 13 times)
w n vmhicle -b @ e(fore-and-aftharness side) , connectorfore-and-aft@ G sensor I - @ terminals

@ J
Remwe comd unit connectors, hfleasure resistance
Gsensor 2). Check if resistance is between 30 to 50 kf2 Y a
1
~ e r n o v e sensor connectors. Check if resistance -~ between sensor side connector terminals @ @ (fore-and-aft G sensor 1) and terminals @ - @ , (fore-and-aft G sensor 2) is approx. 30 to 50 k!2
Park vehicle on level ground and turn ignition switch ON4Is vdta e between coned wit cmnector terrninals @ or @ - @ approx. 2.5W
Approx. 2.5V I
Oher than Z5V 1
Yes f
1
(J &
No
!
) Control unit is faulty. (
>@
9( G sensor terminal

CH-70
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS} 3. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
H. G sensor
I.
power circuit I or circuit problem (LED flashes 14 times) G sensor power circuit 2 or circuit problem (LED flashes 15 times)
1 Turn ignition switch ON and remove G sensor connecOV or 12V
tor~. Measure resistance between vehicle connector terminais @@- @ @ (G sensor power supply I], @@- @@ (G sensor p m e r supply 2). Check if voltage is approx. W.
Approx. 8V
Turn ignition switch ON. hkasure voltage between control unit connector terminals @@ @3
Be,
@@ Check if voltage is approx. 8V. I ,
0
G sensor is faulty.
*
Cmlrol unit i s faulv.
r-7
Harness is faulty.
ETS contrd unit terminals

(vehicIe harness side)
u sells01
vu4 -
J, Lateral G sensor or circuit problem {LED flashes 16 times)

R e m e control unit connectors. Measure resistance betwen vehich connector terminals @ @ (lateral G sensor). Check if resistance is b m e n 33 to 50 kf?.
I
Yes
I
I
Park vehicle on level ground and turn ignition switch ON.la vdlage m e n cmtrd unit connector terrniMIS @@ @9 apprm 2 . M
Remove G sensor connectors. Is resistance between G sensor connector terminals @ and @ approx. 30 to 50 kn?
Other than 2 %
Yes
I
Harness is faulty.
NO
ETS control
unit terminals (vehicle harness side)
G sensor terminal
K.
Air bleeder connector and circuit (LED flashes 17 times)
Are air bleeder connectors
Yes
No
t
Remwe conlrd unit connectors. Ground vehicle harness connector terminal @ to body and check if there is cmtinuity.
EE conVol unit terminal

(*-Control unit
L. Pressure switch and circuit {LED flashes 18 times)

Remwe comd unit cmneaors. Ground vehicle harness connector terminal @ to b&y and check if there is wdnuity.
I
R m w e hydraulic unit conmctor. Ground vehicle hydraulic unit conwctw terminal @ to body a d check for wdnuity.
I
Remove hydraulic unit connector. Ground vehicle hydraulic connector terminal @ to body and check for
continuity.
3
L
Yes I
Nu
No
1
4
Remove hydraulic unit connector, Ground vehicle harness wnnectcr wrminal @ 20
Yes
hvdraulic unit
i T~round 7
ETS c n r l unit terminal oto (whicle harness side)
EIS hydraulic unit terminals
M. ETS motor, motor relay
and circuit problem (LED flashes 19 times)
i Is f 3 S motor fusible !ink XlA [FA-11)

I disconnected?
4
R e m e ETS motor relay connector and turn igni~ion switch ON. Ground yehicle connector terminals @ and @ m body and measure vdtage. is voltage approxi 12W
No
I
-
El% motor relay terminal
Yes
(relay side]
Harness is fault^,
.
Rernwe - motor relav connector and measure . .- ..- - .- - . . . . resistance beween ~ ~ s ' r n o t o r relay connector terminals @ and @, Is resistance approx, BCI?
R d @ m
a@
yell&
aa
n@
(Vehicla harness side)
Rernwe ETS hydraulic unit connectors and measure resistance between E E h draulic unit connector mrminals a d @. Is resistatwe appro& Oa5i27
motor relay is fauity.
mar m!3
r
0,S-l
hydraulic unit terminals
hvdraulic unit is faulty.)
Remove ETS motor rmlay connector and control unit connector. Does continuity exist between vehicle side ETS motor relay connector terminal @ and vehicle side control ! unit connector terminal @ ?
Yes
No
+I
Rernwa contrd unit connector, Check for continuity between vehicle harness lerminal @ and ETS motor relay connectw terminal @.
I
Yes
Replace conud
No
unit
'
EE control unit terminals (vehicle hame66 side}
N. ETS solenoid and circuit problems (LED flashes 20 times)
Remove ETS actuator relay connector and turn ignition switch ON. Measure voliage between body harness connector terminals @ and ground and @ and ground. Is voltage approx. 12W
I
Approx. 1 2 ~
1
Remove ETS actuator relay connector. Check if resisG) and (z) is
ov
i
tance between ETS actuator terminals approx. 700.
harness i s faulty.
i s fault/.
Remove ETS hydraulic unit connector. Is resistance between connector terminals @ d@4toen? an I
EYS hydraulic unit terminals
ETS actuator relay terminals (relay side)
(Vehicle :h s s
0. Throttle sensor and c i r c u i t p r o b l e m s (LED flashes 21 times)
unit
16 there continuity between the follovAng terminals? ETS actuator relay @ and hydraulic
ETS hydraulic unit
unit @. ETS actuator relay Q) a d n
control unit
@; ETS hydraulic @ and contrd unit @.
2 4 4 14I61620262B
2 5 3 7 3 , 5 13
1s 29
27402 8 39so 1 1 0
No
Yes
1 1
ETS control unit terminals (vehicle harness side)
side] k = ( )
Control unit i s faulty.
Turn ignition switch ON and measure voltage between control unit terminal @@ and @>@. When accelerator is not pressed, (Throttle fully open), is voltage approx. 0 4 V in WT vehicles or 0.3V in N T vehicles?
Yes
No
Control unit is faulty-
1 Turn ignition switch ON and measure

:
+
1
voltage between ECCS control unit terminals @ and @. M e n accelerator is not pressed, (throttle fully open), is voltage approx. 0.375V in WT vehicles or 0.3V in A/T vmhicles?
I'
- 1 1

(vehi~l~harness side)
Yes
~o
1
ECCS control unit or throttle sensor is faulty.

003 3944 B

3. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
P. Oil level sensor and circuit (LED flashes 22 times)
Check if reservoir tank oil level is above MI N.
I
+
I
Above MIN
-I
Below MN
I
Remove control unit connectors. Ground vehicle side harness connector terminal @ to body and check if there is continuity,
Yes
I
I
NO
Check if there is continuity between oil level switch connector terminal (5) and @,
Yes
No
I
(~arness is faulty.')
fi
Replace reservoir tank.
ETS control unit terminals (vehicle harness side)

Q. ETS control unit and ground circuit (LED Hashes 24
Oil level switch

C03 -3945 B
times)
Remove control unit connectors and turn ignition switch ON. Ground vehicle side connector terminal 3) to body and check if voltage is greater than 10V.
I
Yes
I
Remove control unit connectors and turn ignition switch OFF. Ground vehicle side harness connector terminals (?), @, @ and @ to I body and check if there is continuity,
No
Not connected
Connected.
C k 3
Replace fuse,
harness is fadtv,
is faulty,
E k control unit tarminals (vehicle harness side)
R. 4WD warning lamp flashes
If the 4WD warning lamp flashes every 2 sec while driving, this indicates that there is a large difference in tire diameter between front and rear wheels. Replace tires with standard size tires so all four lire dimensions are the same.
Lights
:-^
(4) Part inspection Speed sensor installation and inspection a Check that all parts are installed securely, Tighten any loose parts to specified tightenina torque.
Measure clearance between sensor and rotor as shown in figure. Check if clearance conforms to following values.
-
Clearance standard value m m (in)

Front wheel speed sensor
0.27 - 0.75 (0.0106- 0.0295)
Rear wheel speed sensor
0.6 - 0.93(0.0236 0.0366)
Make sure there are no cracks or damage in rotor gear. Replace sensor rotor if there is any problem. CAUTION: Replace rear side sensor rotor in matched set with companion flange.
G sensor inspection If G sensor has received an impact, the impact detector shown in the figure will turn red. If impact detector turns red, replace G sensor. Air bleeding Refer to "4-4 HYDRAULIC UNIT AND RESERVOIR TANK" in "4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly" for air bleeding procedures.
@ Part Inspection locations
~
i
ETS hy9aulic unit terminal
ETC control unit
Right and left but wheel speed sensors
Air bleed connector
ETS mota relay and E l 5 actuator relay
ETS fusible link

3. Troubleshooting (Cont'd)
3-3 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
(1) Preparation lor troubleshooting The hydraulic unit transmits hydraulic control during driving by commands from ETS control unit. The judgement if the ETS hydraulic unit operates normally is made when vehicle is stopped. Hydraulic pressure is generated by ON/OFF operation of the air bleeding switch (right side of passenger seat dashboard) used for air bleeding operation. The applied power can be checked by measuring the power. CAUTION: The hydraulic system inspection cannot be performed during driving.
Lift the vehicle and remove hydraulic hose and transfer unit from ETS hydraulic unit. Use special service tool (KV481 00410) for connector as
shown in figure. Install power steering pressure gauge and open valve all
I
g of ETS hydraulic circuit.
Note 1: Refer to "4-4 HYDRAULIC UNIT AND RESERVOIR TANK" in "4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly".
T
Turn ignition switch to ON. (Do not start engine.)
Move air bleed switch (ON OFF). Check that hydraulic pressure is 294 to 490 kPa (3 to 5 kg/cm2, 43 to 71 psi] when engaged and 0 kPa (0 kg/cm2, 0 psi) when not engaged. Note 2: Do no1 engage air bleed switch for more than 10 seconds because heat is generated and fail-safe will operate when ETS motor is run continuously Normal (T)
Abnormal
1
Remove power steering unit and connect ETS hose to transfer unit.
I
Perform troubleshooting by self-diagnosis procedures and then check pressure again.
+
ETS hydraulic circuit air bleeding
Abnormal
Normal
Refer lo "4-4 HYDRAULIC UNIT
t
Replace ETS hydraulic unit.
AND RESERVOIR TANK" in "4Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly".
To (TI

4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and
Disassembly
4-1 ETS CONTROL UNIT (1) ETS control unit removal and installation a The ETS control unit is installed under the rear parcel shelf
in the trunk. The body ground is connected to the top side of rear par-
cel shelf,
4-2 G SENSOR (1) Installation precautions Be especially careful not to drop or hit G sensor since it is sensitive to impact. If the unit i subjected to impact do not s use it if the impact detector turns red as shown in figure.
(2) G sensor removal and installation

The
G sensor is installed under sensor
console.
CAUTION:
(1) Observe precautions described above when removing and installing sensor. [2) The G sensor cannot be disabled.

4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
4-3 SPEED SENSOR
(1) Front wheel speed sensor removal and installation
hcmt wheal speed semw
-Sensor
shim
[01: Wm (kg-rnft-lb)
Q : Always replace after every disassembly. f3:Use Three Bond 1215 (KP610 002501 or eauivalent.
[Point 11 Front wheel sensor rotor removal and
installation
CAUTION: Because center rotor I connected to the drive shaft, remove s drive shaft before removing or installing center rotor. Refer l o C6 DRIVE SHAFT, 3-1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.
Removal
For steering gear assembly and disassembly, position attachment (special service tool) or 15-mm (0S9 in) thick support against center rotor and remove with dust shield as a single unit.
^-
Installation
Position drift (special service tool) against center rotor and press-fit bearing. CAUTION: Be careful not l o damage rotor during removal and installation.
Suitable drrft
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
drift
Set drift (special service tool) against dust shield as shown in figure and press-fit to install.
Oust shield
\\\
04T ! 0
v ^
I
Front whwl speed sensor
!%mm*tim
[Point 21 Front wheel speed sensor installation Install sensor shims in knuckle spindle. Install O-ring in front wheel speed sensor. 0 Coat entire knuckle spindle mating surface with sealant (silicon bond 1215 [KP210 002001). Install front wheel speed sensor and tighten to specified torque, Front wheel speed sensor lightening lorque: 11 1 6 N-m (1.1 - 1.6 kg-m, 8 12 fl-lb)
: Lutxiata with i k o n bond '215 or equivaln~.
@ Nover r a m after disassembly
C04-04246
(2) Rear wheel speed sensor removal and installation

Ci
Rear wheel speed
: NTn (kg-ni ft-lb) :Coat with silicon bond 1215 (KP610 00250) or equivalent.
[Point 11 Rear wheel sensor rotor removal and
installation
CAUTION: Remove or install sensor rotor after removing side flange because it i s installed in side flange. Refer to C6 DRIVE SHAFT, 3-1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION for removal and installation
procedures.
Removal
Position attachment (special service tool) for steering gear assembly and disassembly or 15-rnm (0.59 in) thick support against sensor rotor and remove with dust shield as a single unit.
Installation
Position drift (special service tool) on sensor rotor as shown in figure and press-fit rotor to install it.
a :COSTwith silicon bond 1215 or equivalent.
[01 11
[Point 21 Rear wheel speed sensor installation

0
\^ 1^
1 (1.1 l.BJ(B-ni, 8 IZfclb) 8 Rear wheel speed sensor
Install sensor shim in differential case. Coat mating surfaces of differential case with sealant (silicon bond 1215 or equivalent). Install rear wheel speed sensor and tighten to specified torque.
4-4 HYDRAULIC UNIT AND RESERVOIR TANK
(1) Hydraulic unit and reservoir tank removal and installation, assembly and disassembly
[Point 11 Hydraulic unit removal and installation a Remove three bolts from rear final drive for left and right, front and rear wheel speed sensors and hydraulic unit.
Remove rear final drive first. CAUTION: Support hydraulic unit adequately while removing final drive
unit. 0 Remove hose bracket from control pressure piping as shown in figure. Remove control pressure pipe, return hose and suction hose and detach hydraulic unit ASSY.
.
f d~emu w
I
[Point 21 Hydraulic unit assembly and disassembly Remove bracket and rear wheel speed sensor and pipe from hydraulic unit as shown in figure.
CAUTION: The hydraulic unit cannot be taken apart.
Ground wire
To rmmtir tank
[Point 31 Air bleeding Precautions a Only use genuine Nissan special power steering fluid, Make sure all piping connections a r e tightened securely. a The reservoir tank is located inside trunk. To avoid oil spill during operation, remove carpet and spread rags in trunk. a Pay attention to the reservoir lank oil level during operation. Be careful not to allow air to enter from the suction side and replenish as necessary.
Air bleeding procedures
(T) Fill the reservoir tank with oil approx. 30 mm (1.18 in) above
MAX line. CAUTION: Be careful not to spill any oil inside the trunk.
--
Open the air bleeder in hydraulic unit (installed above rear differentia!) and remove all air in suction pipe. When air bleeder stops discharging air, close air bleeder and tighten to specified torque. Reference: If the air bleeder is opened, oil flows into the suction pipe due to the gravityCAUTION: When oil remains inside reservoir tank, it is not necessary to perform the operation described above.
I
CH-84
@ Turn ignition switch ON.
(3) Remove the air bleeder connector (lower dash side) shown in the figure. Reference: If the connection line is disconnected, the air bleed mode is set, pump motor operates and fixed hydraulic pressure is supplied to the transfer actuator.
(S) Open and close the air bleeder on actuator side of transfer
quickly, 1 second each time. To bleed air from system, repeat operation until no more air is discharged. When air bleeding is completed, tighten air bleeder to specified torque.
@ Connect air bleeder connector intermittently, turn pump ON

S t m 1 pole connector
S type 1 pol9
connector
S01MW
Oil filter surface

MiM
Return side
maximum
C02-0763B
and OFF and bleed air from reservoir tank return side. CAUTION: After air bleeding is completed, a maximum air level height of 5 mm (0.20 in) is allowable. Reference: The retaining clip for the connector may be damaged or proper connection may not be possible, make an air bleed switch as shown in figure to perform operation. (7) Connect air bleeder connector. Fill or drain reservoir tank so oil volume is at MAX line, CAUTION: Turn ignition switch ON before adjusting oil level. @ Turn ignition switch OFF to complete air bleed operation.
4-5 TRANSFER
(1) Removal and installation

The transfer unit and transmission should be removed and installed as a single unit. Refer to C2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION, 3-1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.
(2) Disassembly from transmission
(3.2 4 3 2 31) .,3
133.
4.3, 2 31) 3
.: Apply recommended sealant TB1215 (Nissan genuine part: KP610-00250) of equivalent .:Always replace after every disassembly. Co4-0429~
[Point 11 Transfer disassembly Removal

Remove upper cover from transmission. Remove return spring and steel ball from 00 case. Remove control housing and gasket from transfer unit.
Pull striking arm in direction of arrow mark (3rd gear position) shown in the figure. Use pin punch (special service tool) to remove retaining pin from striking arm by tapping striking arm until it can be removed. CAUTION: If retaining pin is tapped out completely, the retaining pin will fall i n the transfer unit.

Disassembly (Cont'd)
Insert a screwdriver in 4th gear position and press striking lever in direction of arrow. When lever is secured, remove striking arm.
1 Transmission -* transfer
@ Transfer
-*
transmission
There are three types of bolts in transfer unit. Remove bolts in sequence indicated in figure. If necessary, tap bolts with rubber hammer to loosen them.
Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) Length below head mrn (in)
75 (2.95) 31 - 42 (3.2 - 4.3, 23 31)
B
C
45 (1.77)
40 (1.57)
CAUTION: (1) The transmission surface shown in the figure is viewed from transmission side. (2) Do not loosen the M8 bolts at this point because they hold the transmission case together. (The transfer unit bolts are all MI0 bolts.) (3) Do not scratch or damage front case or transmission mating surfaces.
Remove transfer unit in upright position and do not tilt.
0 :Apply recornme
[Point 21 Transfer unit installation a Apply recommended sealant TB1215 (Nissan genuine part:
KP210-00200) or equivalent to mating surface and transmission. CAUTION: (1) OD case must be coated with sealant. (2) Coat striking lever end with Nissan MP special grease before installation.
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 4. Removal and installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Rotate companion flange in both directions to align transmission main drive shaft and transfer unit mainshaft serration and install transfer unit. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil seal with the transmission striking rod.
@Transmission-* transfer 0 Transfer 4 transmission
There are three types of bolts in transfer unit. Remove bolts in sequence indicated in fioure.
--
Length below head rnm (in)
CAUTION: The figure shows the transfer installation surface viewed from transmission side.
Press in striking rod, set 4th gear position and install striking arm in striking rod. Use screwdriver and set striking lever in 3rd gear and align striking arm with striking rod retaining pin installation hole position.
Striking lev
Use screwdriver and set striking lever in 5th gear position. Use pin punch (special service tool) to install retaining pin in striking arm.
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSAE-TS) 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Install spring and check bait in transmission'. Install upper cover and gasket. CAUTION: Always replace return spring installation bolt after every disassembly. a Install control housing and gasket in transfer unit. CAUTION: Control housing position is set by @ bolts (2).
0
Tightening torque N'rn (kg-rn, ft-lb)
Length below head mm (in)
(3) Transfer removal and installation, assembly and disassembly
Assembly and disassembly precautions

Operations should be performed in a clean environment and preferably in a dust-free room. Before starting, use steam or white gasoline to remove any debris or foreign matter from outside of unit to prevent it from entering unit during assembly and disassembly. (Do not allow steam to enter the transfer unit. Do not wash rubber surfaces with gasoline.) Visually inspect all assembly parts for damage, deformation, abnormal wear and replace faulty parts as necessary. Always replace O-rings and oil seals after disassembly. Use paper rags to clean dirt off internal mechanisms. Use a bare hands or vinyl gloves in assembly or disassembly operations. Do not allow lint or cloth fibers from rags or gloves to contact the parts. Always follow the specified tightening torque. Coat all new parts with Nissan multi-fluid D or Vaseline. Coat oil pump, front case and rear case mating surfaces with sealant fluid 518 (part number C1335 31X25).
A
(D Removal
Oil pump removal
8
Remove the seven bolts (1 torx bolt).
Use a tire iron or large screwdriver and pry in direction of arrow to remove the housing. CAUTION: Wrap rags around tire iron to prevent scratching front of case.
Remove inner and outer gear and detach pivot pin from mainshaft.
Remove O-ring from housing.
Use oil seal puller (special service tool) as shown in figure and remove oil seal from housing.
Wrap cloth around tire irons and pry cover as shown in figure to remove cover. CAUTION: Wrap cloth around tire irons to prevent scratching front case.
Remove O-ring from strainer in cover.
I :UF-MMJ~ MP (pedal p a a a 5
2
c7 -1
:Ahmys fe@eco after
disassembly.
Use small snap ring pliers to remove seal ring from cover. CAUTION: (1) Do not scratch cover when removing ring. (2) Seal ring must be replaced after every disassembly.
ring
,\ ,
CMUSB
I
Front case removal
Remove bolts from positions indicated in figure.
Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) A (11 bolts) Length from head mm (in)
'
:Alvm+-s raplace sher every disassembly.
45 (1.77)
B (1 bolt)
165 (6.501
D (1 bolt)
100 (3.94)
45 (1.77)
E (1 bolt)
R-R
... ..
Tire iron
a Use a tire iron and remove front case as shown in figure. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch front and rear surface of case.
Remove adjustment shim from front case.
I : Use Nisean MP special grease - . b2

fi
:Selection part
c04-0522i
Oil gutter removal

a Remove oil gutter from front case. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage pawls.
Oil strainer removal Remove three bolts and detach oil strainer
CAUTION: Do not damage screen.
Center drive shaft front bearing removal

Use drift with outer diameter 40 to 60 mrn (1.57 to 2.36 in) to tap out front bearing from center drive shaft.
Front drive shaft and drive chain removal a Hold front drive shaft as shown in figure, and tap rear case
with wooden hammer and remove chain and drive shaft together. CAUTION: Do not hit chain with wooden hammer. This may damage drive chain.
Front drive sprocket
Front drive sprocket and clutch hub front bearing removal a Position suitable drift on center drive shaft. Use a puller
and remove clutch hub front bearing together with front drive sprocket.
Spacer Position suitable drift on center drive shaft and use puller to remove spacer.
Clutch plate removal a Use screwdriver and remove snap ring as shown in figure. CAUTION: Replace snap ring after every disassembly.
0 :Always replaceafter every disassembly.
. . ..
r.IUJU'iri
Raise rear case as shown in figure and remove plate from clutch drum.
Center drive shaft removal a Place flange wrench on companion flange and remove lock nut.
Drift
Position suitable drift on center drive shaft and use puller to remove companion flange.
Use wooden hammer to tap center drive shaft and remove unit.
Withdrawal lever removal Remove withdrawal lever from ball pin in rear case and
detach it by hand.
Remove clutch release rod from withdrawal lever.
Use snap ring pliers to remove retainer spring. CAUTION: Replace retainer spring after every disassembly.
Ql :Always replace after 'kary disassembly.
~04-0464~1
Baffle plate removal

Remove two bolts and detach baffle plate.
Ball pin removal

modification
Use deep socket wrench with two surface 17 mrn (0.67 in) as shown in figure to remove ball pin.
surfamwidth 17 (O.fTTI
.innlinl
C04-0446B
Actuator removal
8
Remove the two bolts and detach bracket.
Actuator
Turn actuator to position shown in the figure and tap with wooden hammer to remove. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch actuator boot.
a
Companion flange oil seal removal
a
Use oil seal puller (special service tool) to remove oil seal.
Center drive shaft rear bearing removal

Use snap ring pliers to remove snap ring. CAUTION: Replace snap ring after every disassembly.
C04-04708
Use drift with 50 mm (1.97 in) outer diameter to remove bearing.
@ Assembly and disassembly

(a) Oil pump
Disassembly inspection
Check side clearance of inner and outer gear Use depth gauge to measure housing depth as shown in 0 figure. Select a set of inner and outer gears which conform to gear and housing clearances indicated below. Clearance standard: 0.02 0.04 mm (0.0008 0.0016 in) Inner gear and outer gears
Gear thickness
mrn (in)
Part number
Inner gear
31346 05U02
Outer gear
6.98 (0.2748)
31347 05U02
Screen
Oil strainer inspection

Check for scratches or damage to oit strainer screen and body. CAUTION: Wash screen section well and remove all metallic deposits and foreign matter.
a
C04.0474E
Front case
Front drive shaft oil seal removal and installation Removal
0
Position' oil seal puller (special service tool) and remove seal as shown in figure.
Installation
Use a drift (special service tool) and install oil seal flush with case surface. CAUTION: Apply a thin coat of grease (Nissan MP special grease No. 2) to oil seal lip.
Striking rod oil seal (MIT only) removal and installation Removal
Use screwdriver to remove oil seal.

CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch front case with screwdriver.
Installation
Use suitable drift with outer diameter 34 mm (1.34 in) and install oil seal flush with case. CAUTION: Apply a thin coat of grease (Nissan MP special grease No. 2) lo oil seal lip.
Check that front case one-way valve has not seized. Wash front case to remove any sealant that adheres to screws because oil pump bolts (7 locations shown in figure) are seal bolts.
(0 Center drive shaft

Clutch drum ASSY and speedometer drive gear removal
Set center drive shaft in press as shown in figure and separate clutch drum ASSY and speedometer drive gear.
Pressure flange removal

Position spring compressor (special service tool), press in release bearing retainer and use screwdriver to remove snap ring.
Release bearing
Pressure flange
?
Qi :A replace after every disassembly.'
1204-0481B
Remove pressure flange and return spring from clutch drum.
Release bearing removal

0
Set bearing replacer on release bearing retainer and use drift with 50 to 60 mm (1.97 to 2,36 in) outer diameter to press out bearing.
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROLTORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Set bearing replacer (special service tool) on bearing retainer as shown in figure and use drift with outer diarneter 65 to 70 mm (2.56 to 2.76 in) to remove bearing.
Clutch hub removal

Use screwdriver to remove thrust washer ring.
Thrust washer
C04-04858
Use screwdriver to remove thrust washer.
Use screwdriver as shown in figure to separate needle bearing assemblies into two parts and remove them. CAUTION: (1) Press clutch hub down to separate needle bearings. (2) Be careful not to scratch needle bearings.
Remove clutch hub from center drive shaft.
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 4. Removal and Installation. Assemblv and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Clutch hub installation
Assemble clutch hub on center drive shaft. Press clutch hub down as shown in figure to increase center drive shaft clearance and install needle bearings. CAUTION: (1) First coat needle bearings with Nissan Multi-fluid D and then assemble. (2) When assembling needle bearings, be especially careful not to bend, twist or deform bearings. m Install thrust washer in center drive shaft groove.
Install thrust washer ring outside thrust washer.
While raising clutch hub, apply a drop of quick-drying sealant #I000 in clearance of thrust washer and thrust washer ring to secure assembly. At this time, be careful that thrust washer ring is not higher than thrust washer surface level. CAUTION: (1) If thrust washer is higher than thrust washer, the thrust washer ring may fall off when pressure is applied to clutch drum. (2) Be careful not to apply an excessive amount of quick-drying sealant to prevent needle bearings from seizing.
Release bearing ASSY installation

Set bearing retainer on release bearing. Position plate as shown in figure and press-fit to install.

a
Drift, inner diameter Smm(2.56 in), outer diameter
Place release bearing ASSY on pressure flange. Set drift, with inner diameter 65 mm (2.56 in), outer diameter 70 mm (2.76 in) on release bearing and press-fit to install.
Pressure flange installation

Install return spring and pressure flange on clutch drum as shown in figure.
a
KV311 01 100
Q Snap ring
Set spring compressor (special service tool) as shown in figure. Insert bearing retainer on press and use screwdriver to install snap ring. CAUTION: The eight protrusions on pressure flange must be aligned with the eight indentations on clutch drum.
Drift, inner diameter 45 mm (1.77 in) outer diameter 53 nun (209 in)
Clutch drum ASSY installation Set clutch drum ASSY on center drive shaft rear side. Use drift with 45 mm (1.77 in) inner diameter and 53 mm (2.09 in) outer diameter and press-fit assembly.
[an
I
Speedometer drive gear installation
Assemble steel balls in center drive shaft in positions shown in figure. Align notches (grooves) in speedometer drive gear with steel balls and assemble. CAUTION: The notches in speedometer drive gear should face up.
Set drift with 33 mm (1.30 in) inner diameter and 39 mm (1.54 in) outer diameter on drive gear and install on press.
Front bearing removal and installation Removal

Or ift outer diameter 3D mm (1.54 in)
Set drift with outer diameter 39 mm (1.54 in) on bearing and use puller to remove bearing. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch sliding surface of front oil seal.
a
(c) Front drive shaft

Installation
Set drift with inner diameter 35 mm (1.38 in) on bearing and press to install bearing.
Front
Rear bearing removal and installation Removal

0
Set drift with outer diameter 35 mm (1.38 in) and use puller to remove bearing.
Drill outer diameter 35 mm (1.38 in)
Installation
Set drift with inner diameter 40 mm (1.57 in) on bearing and use press to install.
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM fATTESSA E-TSI 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) @ Installation
Center shaft rear bearing installation
a
Drift, outer diameter
66 mm (2.56 in1
Use drift with 65 mm (2.56 in) maximum outer diameter anc press-fit bearing.
C04-05021
Use snap ring pliers to install snap ring. CAUTION: Replace snap ring after every disassembly.
Companion flange oil seal installation a Use drift with 63 mm (2.48 in) inner diameter and 68 mrr (2.68 in) outer diameter and install seal flush with case.
CAUTION: Apply a thin coat of grease (Nissan MP special grease No. 2 to oil seal lip. Reference: Use drift KV401 04830.
Drift inner diameter 63 mm (2.48 in), outer diameter 68 mm (2.68 in)
C04-05041
Actuator installation Apply a thin coat of grease (Nissan MP special grease No

2) to actuator boot and install in rear case.
Tighten bolts to specified tightening torque. CAUTION: Do not scratch actuator boot.
Ball pin installation
Coat ball pin screw with sealant (Three Bond 1324 or equivalent). Use deep socket wrench for removal (refer to figure) and tighten to specified torque.
Baffle plate installation

Install baffle plate on rear case as shown in figure. Tighten two bolts to specified tightening torque.
affla plate
3,7 $0 N-m (0.38 0.51 kfl-rn, 27 3.7 tHb) (21
--
Cod-0465E
Withdrawal lever installation Use snap ring pliers to install retainer spring as shown in
figure. CAUTION: Align installation direction of spring retainer as shown in figure and install.
Install clutch release rod as shown in figure.

Clutch release rod
Insert clutch release rod below withdrawal lever in actuator piston. Press spring retainer in ball pin.
Center drive shaft installation

Release bearing
Align release bearing retainer protrusion in gap between withdrawal lever protrusions (2 locations) as shown in figure. Press in center drive shaft.
Install center drive shaft in rear case. Assemble companion flange in center drive shaft as shown in figure. Place suitable drift and set in press. Align bearing retainer protrusions of center drive shaft with withdrawal lever protrusions (2 locations) and gradually press-fit together. Rotate bearing retainer manually to left and right to check that it contacts withdrawal lever protrusions (2 locations). Press in center drive shaft. CAUTION: Press withdrawal lever in straight ahead, making sure it is not inclined. If lever is pressed in at inclined angle, the contact point of withdrawal lever will ride above outside of release bearing retainer and selection of clutch drum retaining plate will not be correct.
Place companion flange wrench in companion flange as shown in figure and tighten lock nut to specified tightening torque. CAUTION: ( ) Replace lock nut after every disassembly. 1 (2) Make sure sliding parts of companion flange oil seal are not scratched or worn.
Clutch plate installation 0 Make sure clutch plate is assembled correctly in sequence indicated in figure.
CAUTION: (1) Assemble clutch drum so lubrication holes are not aligned with gear teeth positions of driven plate and retainer plate. (2) After assembling one retainer plate that is 5 mm (0.20 in) thick, install driven plate with drive plate.
1
*:Selection pars
Driven plate and retainer plate
a Use screwdriver to install snap ring. CAUTION: Replace snap ring after every disassembly
everv disassernblv.
C04-0512B
Gap measurement and retainer plate selection

Use feeler gauge to measure gap between retainer plate and snap ring as shown in figure. If clearance is not within specification range in following chart, select thicker retainer plate to obtain correct clearance. Inspection standard values Standard value: 0.2 - 0.5 mm (0.008 0.020 in)
Thickness
mrn (in)
Part number
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
Drift outer diameter
70 mm (276 in).
51 mrn 12.01 in)
Spacer installation
a
Place drift with 70 m m (2.76 in) outer diameter and 51 mm (2.01 in) inner diameter on spacer and install on press.
Drift, outer diameter

inner diameter
: ,;: :
. . ,..
Front drive sprocket installation

Align installation direction as shown in figure and place drift with 73 mm (2.87 in) outer diameter and 60 mm (2.36 in) inner diameter and press-fit spacer to install.
...... .: . :
Installation direction
con51st
Clutch hub front bearing installation

Align installation direction as shown in figure. Use drift with 52 mm (2.05 in) outer diameter and 45 mm (1.77 in) inner diameter and press-fit bearing.
Front drive shaft and drive chain installation

a
Attach drive chain on front drive shaft. Align front drive sprocket gears as shown in figure then assemble temporarily.
Front drive shaft
Align front drive shaft in rear case. Raise front drive shaft and tap with hammer to install. CAUTION: (1) Do not scratch front drive shaft (circumferential friction part) when tapping with wooden hammer. (2) Lubricate front propeller shaft engagement spline of front drive shaft with Nissan special grease No. 2.
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) Center drive shaft
Clutch hub end play adjustment Use depth gauge and V-block to measure T, dimension (adjustment shim thickness) shown in figure. Adjust end play to standard value indicated below. Inspection standard value
End play standard value: 0.2 0.35 mm (0.0079 0.0138 in)
Driw chain
C040519B
Adimension Fr
In
A dimension measurement
Place V-block and depth gauge in front case as shown in figure. Measure dimension A to clutch hub front bearing surface.
Clutch
measurement
Place V-block and depth gauge in rear case as shown in figure. Measure dimension B to clutch hub front bearing surface-
Clutch hub front
Use following equation to calculate adjustment shim thickness. Unit: mm
I T,
7
(shim thickness) = A - B (0.2 to 0.35) (end play standard value)

.
Adjustment shims
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
\-^?
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM fATTESSA E-TSl 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Oil strainer
Oil strainer installation

Install oil strainer in front case as shown in figure. Tighten bolts to specified tightening torque. CAUTION: Tighten bolt A first to prevent incorrect installation due to strainer deformation.
Oil gutter installation

Align two pawls and tube in front case as shown in figure and assemble securely. CAUTION: Do not damage pawls.
Front case installation

Coat selected adjustment shim with Nissan MP special grease No. 2 and install it on clutch hub front bearing mating surface.
\ coat with :
* : Selection part
Nissan special g r e a s e ~ o 2 .
~04-05221
RCoat with seating fl
Coat entire circumference of rear case installation surface as shown in figure on left with sealant (sealing fluid 518 [part number C1335 31x251 or equivalent).
C04-0523E
Align front case with drive shaft and center drive shaft in rear case and tap with wooden hammer to install. CAUTION: Do not damage front case or transmission installation surface.
a

Disassembly (Cont'd)
Install front cover bolts as shown in figure and tighten to specified tightening torque.
Description
Bolt
A (11 bolts)
Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, tt-lb)
~ e n ~from head th mm (in)

45 (1.77)
6 (1 bolt)
C (1 bolt) D (1 bolt) E (1 bolt)
16 21 (1.6 2.1, 12 15)
165 (6.50)
120 (4.72)
100 (3.94)
45 (1.77)
Cross section R-R
C04-04491
Center drive shaft front bearing installation Use suitable drift with 40 mm (1.57 in) inner diameter and 47 rnm (1.85 in) outer diameter and press bearing retainer
flush with end of case. CAUTION: The retainer must be pressed straight into case without binding.
cOA-0526t
Oil pump installation

Use screwdriver and install seal ring in groove of oil pump cover. CAUTION: (1) Position seal ring alignment ends as shown in figure. (2) Replace seal ring after every disassembly.
5: Always replace attar every disassembly.
~04-05261
Coat O-ring with Nissan special grease No. 2 and install in oil strainer of oil pump cover. CAUTION: Always replace O-ring after every disassembly.
Q :Always replace after every disassembly.
cod-04471
C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM (ATTESSA E-TS) 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) Ri Sealing fluid 618
Coat entire circumference of cover mating surface with sealant (sealing fluid 518 <Part number C1335 31X25>).
CO4-0527F
Coat center drive shaft with Vaseline in position shown in figure. Install oil pump cover in front case. CAUTION: Do not scratch center drive shaft with oil pump cover seal ring.
a
Wan oil seal with caseend

lurfaca and press-fit to install.
surface
Use drift with 60 mm (2.36 in) outer diameter and insert oil seal. CAUTION: Coat oil seal lip with grease (Nissan MP special grease No. 2).
cuer darnmar 60 mm 1236 in)
Install two pivot pins in center drive shaft then install inner gear.
a Install outer gear in oil pump housing. CAUTION: Inner gear must be aligned with inner gear installation direction. Coat O-ring with grease (Nissan MP special, grease No. 2) and install in oil pump housing. CAUTION: Replace O-ring after every disassembly. a Assemble housing temporarily. Rotate companion flange as shown in figure, align inner and outer gear position and install housing. Tighten six bolts and one torx bolt to specified tightening torque, CAUTION: (1) There are two knock pins in cover. Align housing side pin holes and then assemble. (2) Use tap to coat the bolt holes on case side with sealant. (3) Replace bolts and screws after every disassembly.
'f :Always replace after every disassembly. I Coat wiltl Nissan MP spcial grease No. 2. :
I
\
tlorx boll)
C04.0S31 -. ...
0 Sea1 toll (11
Tighten seven bolts (including 1 torx bolt) to specified torque. CAUTION: Do not reuse installation bolts because these are seal bolts.
C4 PROPELLER SHAFT
OPERATiON PRECAUTIONS
Use torque wrench to tighten nuts and bolts to specified torque. When model 3F8OA-VLlO7 propeller shaft removal and installation or shipping is performed, be sure boot of constant velocity joint is not folded or bent. Protect the boot completely since it may be damaged (scratched or cracked).

Part name Part number
Flange wrench ST3154 0000 a = 63 mm (2.48 in)
Rear propeller shaft 1st and 2nd propeller shaft separation
Cam sprocket wrench KVlOl 09900 a = I00 mm (3.94 in) b = 54 mm (2.13 in)
Companion flange removal
Center bearing removal
1. Summary
The journal cannot be disassembled from the 2S56 model propeller shaft. The journal and constant velocity joint cannot be disassembled from the 3F8OA-VL107 model propeller shaft. This section describes the removal and installation of 3F8OA-VLlO7 from the vehicle and center bearing removal and installation.
Specifications
Front
Engine Transmission Description Model number Length Outer diameter Journal bearing form
mm (in)
RB26DETT
MIT
2S56A
629 (24.76)
mm (in)
31.8
40 (1.252
+ 1.575)
Shell type (cannot be disassembled)
CH-I I 4
C4 PROPELLER SHAFT 1. Summary (Cont'd)
Model
1st tube
3FSOA-VLlO7
392 (15.43)
597 (23.50) 75.2 (2.961) 75.2 (2.9611 Shell type (cannot be disassembled)
Length
mm (in)
2nd tube 1st tube 2nd tube
Outer diameter
-
rnm (in)
Journal bearing type
Ins~edion standard values

Description Journal bearing axial play Play distance Front propeller shaft front final drive Transfer unit rear propeller shaft (1st tube) Tightening torque N.m (kg-"% ft-lb) Rear prope!ler shaft (1st tube) center ftange
-
Model
2S56A
0 (0)
3F8OA-VLlO7
m m (in)
rnm (in)
0.6 (0.024) max. 24 32 (2.4 3.3, 17 24)
Rear propeller shaft (2nd tube) - rear final drive
88 - 98 (9.0 - 10, 65 - 72) 64 - 74 (6.5 - 7.5, 47 - 54) 64 - 74 (6.5 - 7.5, 47 - 54)
2. On-vehicle Inspection
Rear final drive
2-1 PROPELLER SHAFT PLAY INSPECTION Perform the following procedures for propeller shaft play ins~ection and repair. ' Remove undircoatirq and dirt from propeller shaft. Per7 form driving test to check for propeller play. If propeller shaft play is detected, separate propeller shaft and final drive. Move companion flange to offset position of 90e, 180D,7 ' (rear final drive is 609, 20 120e,, 180 240e, 30) 0' and install again. Check propeller shaft play in each position by driving test. If propeller shaft play is detected after performing these procedures, replace propeller shaft ASSY.
CH-I 15
C4 PROPELLER SHAFT 2. On-vehicle Inspection (Cont7d)

2-2 PROPELLER SHAFT VISUAL INSPECTION AND CENTER BEARING INSPECTION Inspect propeller shaft surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace propeller shaft assembly, If center bearing is noisy or damaged, replace center bearing. 2-3 CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT INSPECTION Check constant velocity joint boot for wear, damage or grease leaks and replace if necessary.
3. Propeller Shaft Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly

3-1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
m4 32 (2.4 -.3.3, 17 24) 2
W i m a l w k requred (frcmt propeller shaft) R e m and imiall: CIU& ~ r a l i n g qli&i :h (kg-m &-Ib) :Awais redace after every disassembl~.
nter bearing I w r
rn
C4 PROPELLER SHAFT 3. Propeller Shaft Removal and Installation, ~ s s e r n b and Disassembly (Cont9d) l~
Front p r q \ i e r shaft orit final drive side
[Point 11 Propeller shaft removal

a
Make alignment marks on companion flange before separating connection parts of propeller shaft and final drive and transfer unit as shown in figure. CAUTION: Use paint lo indicate alignmen1 marks. Do not scratch parts.
Rear kopaller shaft, transfer unit tide
R M ~mamller shaft,-rear final &ive side
1
[Point 21 Rear propeller shafl ASSY removal and installation precautions a When propeller shaft removal and instal!atictn or shipping
is performed, be sure constant velocity joint is not folded or bent. Protect the boot completely since it may be damaged (scratched or cracked).
1
g ]
and .parts from interfering.
[Point 31 Journal bearing axial play inspection

a
Secure the yoke in positions indicated in figure on left and check direction of journal axial play. If play exceeds standard value, replace propeller shaft ASSY. Axial direction play limit: 0 mm (0 in)
C4 PROPELLER SHAFT 3. Propeller Shaft Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
3-2 ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
This describes the assembly and disassembly of 3F8OA-VL107 propeller shaft center bearing removal and installation.
Center hearing cushim
,Center b a r i n g ASSY
rn -74
1 1
0 :A J w s replace after every disassembty.

: App4y a cotat d multi-purpose littiurn grease comairing mdybdenum disulfide t ttm end face d the center bearo
ing a d k t h sides d Um washer.
[Point 11 Center bearing removal and installation Removal

Make alignment marks on flange and separate 1st and 2nd tubes, CAUTION: (I) assembly, position alignment marks and lhen connect At
parts.
(2) Paint alignment marks. Do not scratch parts.
Make alignment marks on flange and shaft. CAUTION: (1) At assembly, position alignment marks and then connect parts. (2) Paint alignment marks. Do not scratch parts.
C4 PROPELLER SHAFT 3. Propeller Shaft Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Use special service tool for propeller shaft bolts and remove lock nuts.
1 a
Use puller to remove companion flange.
Hydraulic press
Use special service tool and hydraulic press to remove center bearing.
Installation
Install center bearing with side marked "F" facing front of vehicle. CAUTION: Apply a coat of multi-purpose lithium grease (KRI06-00010) containing molybdenum disulfide to the end face of the center bearing and both sides of the washer.
Tighten lock nut to specified tightening torque and then caulk securely. CAUTION: Replace lock nuts after every disassembly.
C5 FINAL DRIVE
The transmission must always be jacked from the bottom for removal and installation. Do not reuse gear oil. During removal, installation or disassembly, in final drive or front final drive, do not allow dust, debris or foreign matter to enter the oil pan. Use torque wrench to tighten bolts and nuts to specified tightening torque, SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLSTool name Tool number Flange wrench ST3153 0000 Description
a: 80* b: 100'
Companion flange removal
c: 70 m m (2.76 In)
b COO-0029
Oil seal puller ST3329 0001
Drift ST3340 0001 ompanion flange, side shaft oil seal installation
COO-0158
Drift KV381 00300
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia. b: 46 mm (1.81 In) dia. c: 32 mm (1.26 in) die.
Right side oil seal installation
COO-Olt6
Drift ST3672 3000
a: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia.

b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. c: 29 mm (1.14 in) dia.
Side retainer, side shaft installation
Drift ST3322 0000
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia. b: 31.5 mm (1.240 in) die. c: 21.5 mm (0.846 in) dia.
Side shaft bearing removal
COO-0156
C5 FINAL DRIVE
Tool name Tool number Drift ST3061 3000

I :
1:
72 mm (2.83 in) dia. 48 mm (1.89 in) dia.
Left side oil seal installation
C 00 0059
Drift bar ST3061 1000 Drive pinion bearing outer race installation Side oil seal installation Side bearing outer seal installation
Adapter setting plate ST2381 0001
Side shaft side retainer disassembly
COO-0246
Cam sprocket wrench KV101 09900
Companion flange nut removal and installation
ISQ
L. .=_:
;
cw-DIM
.
-
Preload gauge ST3127 SO00
Drive pinion rotation resistance measurement
Drift ST3072 0000
a: 77 mm (3.03 In) dia.
Oil seal installation
C5 FINAL DRIVE
Tool name Tool number Drift KV381 00500 ST302 0000
:77 rnm (3.03 in) dia.
Drive pinion oil seal installation
COO-0055 Outer race puller ST3329 0001

Side bearing outer race removal Side oil seal removal
Puller set ST3306 S001
Side bearing removal
Puller ST3003 1000
Drift bar ST35325000
Drive pinion bearing outer race installation Side oil seal installation
- -. .
COO-0058
Drift ST3061 2000
1 62 mm (2.44 in) dia. : 0: 40 mm (1.57 In) dia.
Drive pinion bearing outer race installation
COO-0059
Drift ST3323 2000
A: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia. B: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. C: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
Side bearing installation
CM-0156
Drift ST3532 1000
A: 49 rnm (1.93 in) dia. B: 41 mm (1.61 in) din.
Side bearing installation Side oil seal installation (gear case side)
--
Tool name Tool number Drift ST3062 1000

I 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. :
k 59 mm (2-32 in) dia.
Pin punch KV311 00300
Inner race adapter ST3003 2000
h: 80 mm (3.15 in) die.
3: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. 2: 31 mm (1.22 in) die.
C5 FINAL DRIVE
Side bearing outer race installation
Pinion mate shaft lock pin removal and installation
COO-0064
Drive pinion bearing installation Side shaft and retainer Installation
COO-m2

Tool name Tool number Drift ST3090 1000 lescription k 80 mm (3.15 In) die. 1 45 mm (1.77 In) die. : : 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. : Installing drive pinion rear bearing
Side flange dummy KV381 051SO
Checking side gear backlash
Drift ST337 10000
A: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia. 0: 23 mm (0.91 in) dia.
Removing drive pinion
Drift ST3306 1000
A: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. B: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia-
Removing drive pinion
C5 FINAL DRIVE
- -. -
Description
A: 51 mm (2.01 in) die. B: 41 mm (1.61 In) dia. C: 28 rnm (1.10 in) dia.
Installing side bearing
Drift ST3340 0001
A: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. 8: 47 mm (1.85 In) dia.
Installing side oil seal
Drift KV381 02200
A: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia. B: 55.3 mm (2.177 in) dia.
Installing drive pinion bearing outer
Differential flange tool HT7278 Torque wrench Puller Dial gauge test indicator Depth gauge
Companion flange nut removal and installation
Tightening nuts and bolts Companion flange removal Hypoid gear backlash measurement, drive gear rear face play measurement, companion flange play measurement Side shaft end play calculation
Name Locktite Preparation equipment Liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215) LSD GL-5 80W-90 (Rear)
Application Prevents drive gear bolts from loosening
a Side retainer installation hole

0 0
Carrier case cover Drain, filler plug
Oil
I
Nissan gear oil hypoid
GL5-85W-90 (Front)
1
Lubrication oil
CAUTION: Gear oil is used at high pressure. Use of non-recommended oils may result in abnormal wear or overheating of gear surfaces.
C5 FINAL DRIVE
1. Summary
This section describes the removal and installation, assembly and disassembly of parts from the side shaft in the front of vehicle. The engine and oil pan are removed and installed as a single unit. Refer to B. Engine, B-Oil Pan Removal and Installation. 1-1 SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Front final drive (F160)

Engine Transmission Item Model number Final gear ratio Differential model Number of gear teeth Drive gearldrive pinion Side gear/pinion mate gear
\
RB26DETT
MIT
F160 4.111 2-pinion 3719 16/10 Solid
Drive pinion adjustment spacer Oil and volume
e (Imp qt)
Engine Transmission
Nissan gear oil hypoid GL-5 85W-90 [approx. 1.0 (71811
(2) Rear final drive [R200 (mechanical LSD)]

RB26DETT
MIT
Item Model number Final gear ratio Differential type Number of gear teeth Drive gearldrive pinion Side gearlpinion mate gear
*
R200 (mechanical LSD) 4.111 4-pinion 3719 16/10 Solid
Drive pinion adjustment spacer Oil and quantity
(Imp qt)
Nissan gear oil hypoid LSD GL-5 80W-90 [approx. 1.5 (1-3/8)]
C5 FINAL DRIVE 1. Summary (Cont'd)

1-2 INSPECTION STANDARD VALUES

Item Ring gear rear surface runout Companion flange deflection
I
I
Standard value mrn (in) Oil seal installation Side shaft installation Deflection limit 0.05 (0.0020) max.
0.8- 1.1 (0.08-0.11, 0.6-0.8) 1.6 2.2 (0.16 0.22, 1.2 1.6) [P + 0.8 1.1 (0.08 0.11, 0.6 - 0.8)]
Drive pinion total Drive pinion preload (P) ~reload N'm (kg-m, ft-lb) Total preload Drive pinion nut Tightening torque N'm (kg-m, ft-lb) Side retainer Side shaft Side gear rear surface clearance Side gear thrust washer Thickness mm (in)
0.68 0.71 0.74 0.77 0.80 0.83
-
167 196 (17 20, 123 145) 93
Ring Sear
- 113 (9.5 - 11.5, 69 - 83) 16 - 19 (1.6 - 1.9, 12 - 14) 16 - 21 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) - 0.15 (0.0020 - 0.0059)
mrn (in)
0.05
Part number
38424 W1010 38424 W1011 38424 W1012 38424 W1013 38424 W1014 38424 W1015 0.86 0.89 0.92 0.95 0.98 1.01
Thickness rnm (in)
- 0.71 (0.0268 - 0.0280) - 0.74 (0.0280 - 0.0291) - 0.77 (0.0291 - 0.0303) - 0.80 (0.0303 - 0.0315) - 0.83 (0.0315 - 0.0327) - 0.86 (0.0327 - 0.0339)
- 0.92 (0.0350 - 0.0362) - 0.95 (0.0362 - 0.0374) - 0.98 (0.0374 - 0.0386) - 1.01 (0.0386 - 0.0398) - 1.04 (0.0398 - 0.0409)
- 0.89 (0.0339 - 0.0350)
Part number
38424 W1016 38424 W1017 38424 W1018 38424 W1019 38424 W1020 38424 W1021
TI: Side bearing adjusting shim (side retainer side) Thickness mrn (in) Part number Thickness rnm (in) Part number
38453 03V69 38453 03WO 38453 03W 1 36453 03W2 38453 03W3 38453 03W4 38453 03V75 38453 03V76
T,: Side bearing adjusting twasher (carrier case side)

Thickness mm (in)
1.93 1.98 2.03 2.08 2.13 2.18 2.23 2.28
- 1.97
- 2.02 (0.0780 - 0.0795) - 2.07 (0.0799 - 0.0815) - 2.12 (0.0819 - 0.0835) - 2.17 (0.0839 - 0.0854)
*
(0.0760
- 0.0776)
Part number
38453 03VOO 38453 03V01 38453 03V02 38453 03V03 38453 03V04 38453 03V05 38453 03V06 3845303V07 2.33 2.38 2.43 2.48 2.53
Thickness mm (in)
- 2.37 (0.0917 - 0.0933) - 2.42 (0.0937 - 0.0953)
- 2.47 (0.0957 - 0.0972)

- 2.52
- 2.57
- 2.27 (0.0878 - 0.0894)
2.22 (0.0858 - 0.0874)
- 2.32 (0.0898 - 0.09131
(0.0976 (0.0996 2 5 2.62 (0.1016 .8 2.63 2.67 (0.1 035
- 0.0992) - 0.1012) - 0.1031) - 0.1051)
C5 FINAL DRIVE I . Summary (Cont'ci)

L
- --
Item
- --
1
0.13
Backlash drive gear-drive pinion gear Pinion height adjusting washer Thickness mm (in)
mm (in)
- 0.18 (0.0051 - 0.0071)

Part number
Standard value
Part number
Thickness rnm (in)
Pinion bearing preload Pinion bearina adiustment sDacer (solid1 Thickness mm (in) 56.2 (2.213) 56.4 (2.220) 56.6 (2.228)
l4.m (kg-m, ft-lb)
0.8 - 1.1 (0.08 0.11,0.6

Thickness rnm (in) 56.8 (2.236) 57.0 (2.244) 57.2 (2.252)
- 0.8)
Part number 38130 21000 38131 21000 38132 21000
Part number 38133 21000 38134 21WO 3813521000
Pinion bearing adjusting washer
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
Thickness rnm (in)
Part number
Side shaft axial end play

Side retainer adjusting shim Thickness mm {in) 0.08 0.12 (0.0031 0.0047) 0.18 0.22 (0.0071 0.0087) 0-27 0.33 (0.0106 0.0130)
mm (in)
0 - 0.1 (0 0.004)
Part number 38233 03VOl 38233 03V02 38233 03V03
Thickness mm (in) 0.37 0.43 (0.0146 0.0169) 0.46 0.54 (0.0181 - 0.0213)
Part number 38233 03V04
38233 03V05
C5 FINAL DRIVE 1. Summary (Cont'd)

R200 (mechanical LSD) Engine Item Ring gear rear runout Companion flange runout Drive pinion total preload Side bearina preload Pinion nut tightening torque Ring gear bolt tightening torque
R626DETT
m m (in)
N.m (kg-rn, ft-lb) N.m (ko-m. ft-lbl N.m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Runout limit 0.05 (0.020) max.

-
N a r n (kg-*, fi-lb)
- 0.32, 1.0 - 2.3) 0.3 - 1.5 (0.03 - 0.15. 0.2 - 1.1) 186 - 294 (19 - 30, $37- 217)
1.4 - 3.1 (0.14
Item Side gear rear surface clearance mm (in)
Standard value R200 (mechanical LSD) Non-adjustable
Side bearing preload adjusting washer selection calculation equation T7: Left side (drive gear rear side) washer thickness T, = (A - C + D + E G) x 0.01 2.07 T2: Right side (drive gear, gear tooth side) washer thickness T2 = (B - D + F) x 0.01 2.07 A: Housing mark [Standard value: 117 mrn (4.61 in)] Note 1 B: Housing mark [Standard value: 65.mm (2-56 in)] Note 1 C: Differential case mark [Standard value: 128 mm (5.04 in)] Note t D: Differential case mark [Standard value: 97 mm (3.82in)] Note 1 E: Bearing mark [Standard,value: 21 mm (0.83 in)] Note 2 F: Bearing mark [Standard vaiue:.21 mm (0.83in)] Note 2 G: Spacer mark [Standard value: 8.1 mm (0.319 in)] Note 2 Note 1: Printed mark indicated following value marked by alphabet is based on standard value of 0. It is added to actual measured value in 0.Oj increments. For example: A2 mark indicates 117.02 mm (4.61 in). Note 2: Printed indicates following value marked by alphabet is based on standard value of 0. It is subtracted from actual measured value in 0.01 increments. For example: The E3 mark indicates 20.97 mm (0.8256 in).
C5 FINAL DRIVE I . Summary (Cont'd)

T,, T2: Side bearing preload adjusting washer R200 (mechanical LSD)
Thickness mrn (in) 2.00 2.05 2.10 2.15 2.20 2.25 2.30 (0.0787) (0.0807) (0.0827) (0.0846) [0.0866) (0.0886) (0.0906)
Part number
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
Backlash drive aear - drive ini ion aear
mm [in)
1
3.39 3.42 3.45 3.48 3.51
0.13 - 0.18 [0.0051 - 0.0071)
Pinion height adjusting washer R200 (mechanical LSD) Thickness mm (in) 3.09 (0.1217) 3.12 (0.1228) 3.15 (0.1240) 3.18 (0.1252) 3.21 (0.1264) 3.24 (0.1276) 3.27 (0.1287) 3.30 (0.1299) 3,33 (0.1311) 3-36 (0.1323)
-
Part number 38154 P6017 38154 P6018 38354 P6019 381!54 P6020 38154 P6021 38154 P6022 38154 P6023 38154 P6024 38154 P6025 38154 P6026
- -
mm (in) Th~ckness
(0.1335) (0.1346) (0.1358) (0.1370) (0.1382) 3.54 (0.1394) 3.57 (0.1406) 3.60 (0.1417) 3,63 (0.1429) 3,66 (0.1441)
Part number
Drive pinion bearing preload
N.m (kg-rn, ft-lb)
1.1 1.7 (0.11 -0.17, 0.8- 1.2)
Drive pinion preload adjusting washer spacer R200 (mechanical LSD)
Thickness mm (in)
Par1 number
Thickness rnm (in)
Part number
Drive pinion preload adjusting washer R O (mechanical LSD) ZO
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
LSD friction plate
Thickness mm (in)
t .75 (0.0689) 1.85 (0.0728)
. . -
Part number 38432 N9000 38432 N9001

- -
NOTE: Pinion bearing preload and total preload refer to values measured when oil seals are install.
C5 FINAL DRIVE
2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation

(1) Front final drive (F160) [Point 1] Oil leak inspection
Replace oil seal with unit in vehicle if oil leaks from seal.
[Point 21 Oil level inspection

Check oil level from filler plug hole. Use recommended Nissan gear oil hypoid GL-5 85W-90. CAUTION: When installing filler plug and drain plug, apply silicon bond T61215 (KP210 00200) to thread surface. Tighten to following tightening torque. Tightening torque: 25 34 N-m (2.5 3.5 kg-m, 18 25 fi-lb)
0
[Point 33 Rear oil seal replacement

Use flange wrench (special tool) to remove drive pinion nut. CAUTION: Replace drive pinion nut after every disassembly.
Remove companion flange using puller. Check companion flange seal surface for wear and replace if worn. CAUTION: Do not repair companion flange with sandpaper or use again.
Use screwdriver to remove oil seal. CAUTION: Never reuse oil sea!.
C5 FINAL DRIVE 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation (Cont'd)

Use suitable drift (special service tool) and install seal in position shown in figure. CAUTION: (1) Do no1 Install the oil seal at an angle. (2) Coat the sliding surface of the oii seal lip with MP special grease No. 2.
a
A: 2.0 & 0.2 mm (0.079 & 0.008 in)
Use flange wrench {special service tool) to tighten drive pinion nut to specified torque. Tightening lorque: 167 196 N-m (17 20 kg-m, 123 145 fl-lb) CAUTION: Always use new drive pinion nut. Coat nut screws and seal with Nissan gear oil hypoid GL-5 85W-90.
[Point 41 Side oil seal replacement

@I Right oii seal . Remove oil seal using oil seal puller (special service tool). CAUTION: Never reuse lhe oil seal.
Insert drift (special service tool) on pipe with 25 mm (0.98 in) inner diameter on lip and press seal flush with case. CAUTION: (1) Do not install seal at angle. (2) Coat sliding lip surface of oil seal wlth MP special grease No. 2.

(j) Left oil seal
Use oil seal puller (special service tool) to remove drive shaft (refer to C6 DRIVE SHAFT, 3 Drive Shaft Removal and Installation) and side shaft. CAUTION: Never reuse oil seal.
Use drift (special service tool) and install oil seal flush with case. CAUTION: (1) Do not install seal at angle. (2) Coat sliding lip surface of oil seal with MP special grease No. 2.
[Point 51 Side shaft end play inspection a Turn side shaft two or three times. Check for abnormal noise or improper rotation and then measure end play.
Set dial gauge on side shaft and move in axial direction to measure end play. If end play exceeds standard value adjust with shims. Refer to 3-2 (2) Front final drive side shaft assembly and disassembly. End play standard value: 0 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
(2) Rear final drive [R200 (Mechanical LSD)]

[Point 11 Oil leak inspection a When there is leak from oil seal, replace without removing
a
final drive from vehicle. When there is leak from gasket, remove differential assembly from vehicle and replace gasket.
[Point 21 Oil level inspection

Check oil level from filler plug hole.
Standard oil Iwel
C06-0280

[Point 31 Front oil seal replacement
Before oil seal replacement, measure drive pinion total preload. Use cam sprocket wrench (special service tool) to remove drive pinion nut.
Rear wheel
Use oil seal puller (special service tool) to remove oil seal from gear carrier housing. CAUTION: Remove rear wheel speed sensor before removing oil seal.
Install oil seal using drift (special service tool). CAUTION: (1) Do not install seal at angle. (2) Coat sliding surface of oil seal lip with MP special grease No. 2.
Tighten drive pinion to torque indicated below. Drive pinion tightening torque: 186 294 N-rn (19 30 kg-m, 137 217 ft-lb) Adjust drive pinion total preload to same value before oil seal replacement.

[Point 41 Side flange oil seal replacement
a Remove drive shaft (refer to C6 DRIVE SHAFT. 3 Drive Shaft Removal and Installation). Insert lug nut wrench into notch as lever and remove circlip. Circlip removal value
R200 (right & left)
Final drive side
Use oil seal puller (special service tool) to remove oil seal.
Drift
Use drift (inner diameter 42.5 mm (1.673 in) , outer diameter 70 mm (2.76 in) to install oil seal. CAUTION: (1) Do not install seal at angle. (2) Coat sliding surface of oil seal lip with MP special grease
0
No. 2 .
C5 FINAL DRIVE
3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly

3-1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FROM VEHICLE
( ) F160 final drive removal and installation 1
Remove and install front final drive (F160), engine and oil pan as a single unit (refer to section B oil pan removal and installation). @ Side shaft removal and installation
: Selection parts Q '. Always replace after every disassembly.
[Point 11 Spacer installation

a
Install spacer so packing side faces final drive housing side. CAUTION: Never reuse spacer.
Side retainer
Side shaft
1 [Point 21 Side shaft bearing end play measurement a Measure dimensions A and B shown in figure to calculate
side shaft bearing end play.
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Measure dimension A as shown in figure. CAUTION: Measure bearing on outer race side.
0
Measure dimension 8 as shown in figure.
Side shaft bearing adjusting shim selection

Use the following equation to calculate shim size required to obtain standard end play value. End play: 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 in) T (shim thickness) = A - B Adjustment Shims
. .
Thickness mrn (in)
Part number
38233 03V01 38233 03V02 38233 03V03 38233 03V04 38233 03V05
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
(0.004) (0.008) (0.012) (0.016) (0.020)
Side shaft end play inspection

Install side shaft in vehicle and check end play. Refer to 2-1 SIDE SHAFT END PLAY INSPECTION for procedures.
ETS hydraulic unit
(2.1 2.7. 15 20)
9 6 - 118 (10 1Z72 87)
96-118{10-12.7~*87)'.
n:N-m
(kg-rn ft-lb)
C06-04
[Point 11 Propeller shaft and drive shaft separation

a
Paint mating mark on companion flange before separating propeller shaft and final drive. Remove bolt from drive shaft and side flange and separate 0 them. CAUTION: Use paint lo make mating marks. Do not scratch the parts.
[Point 21 Dust shield removal and installation
Removal
a
Use screwdriver to remove dust shield as shown in figure.
Installation
Install dust shield with drift [inner diameter 85 mm (3.35in), outer diameter 67 mm (2.64 in)]. CAUTION: Align notch with sensor before installation.
[Point 31 Differential mount insulator removal and installation Removal

Remove insulator with drift [outer diameter 32 mm (1.26 in), inner diameter 26 mm (1.02 in)] as shown in figure.
Installation
m
Install insulator with drift [outer diameter 50 mm (1.97 in), inner diameter 25 mm (0.98 in)] as shown in figure.
[Point 41 Final drive removal and installation 0 In vehicles equipped with SUPER HICAS, perform the folon I lowing procedures because the the nut @ rear side of final drive interferes with power cylinder air bleeder.
Removal
Remove final drive and member nuts @ then remove (3), I HICAS piping member bolts @ (2) and nut @ (1). Next, remove power cylinder bolts (6) (2). CAUTION: Do not remove power cylinder piping. m Lower power cylinder piping, remove remaining final drive nut (0 and detach final drive. CAUTION: Always support final drive with transmission jack during removal and installation.
Installation
Assembly is the reverse of disassembly. CAUTION: Pay attention to following points when installing power cylinder. (1) Part (F) on the left side of power cylinder determines position. Install part (F) first and then install power cylinder. Power cylinder bolt tightening torque: 84 108 N-m (8.6 11 kg-m, 62 80 fl-lb) (2) Install nut (5) for piping first. (3) After installing nut, make sure rear suspension toe-in distance conforms to specification range indicated below. If toe-in distance does not conform, make adjustment. Refer to C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE, 2-4 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT for adjustment procedures. Standard distance: 2.0% mm (0.079 + 0 079 in)
Power cylinder
COR-02961
3-2 FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY

[Point I ] Inspection before disassembly 0 Drain oil. Remove carrier cover.
CAUTION: If carrier case is worn or cracked, replace unit assembly.
Remove side shaft assembly nut. While tapping with plastic hammer, remove side shaft assembly from carrier case.
(a) Total preload inspection a Turn companion flange a few times. Use preload gauge to
measure total preload. Total preload standard: 1.6 2.2 N-m (0.16 0.22 kg-m, 1.2 1.6 ft-lb) If torque preload is not within the specification range, adjust pinion bearing preload and side bearing preload.
Excess preload:
Use lower drive pinion spacer and thinner washer. Use thicker side bearing retainer shim.
insufficient preload:
Use longer drive pinion spacer and thicker washer. Use thinner side bearing retainer shim.
@ Hypoid gear and backlash inspection I Position dial gauge on drive gear surface and measure
backlash. Backlash standard value: 0.13 0.18 mm (0.0051 0.0071 in) If backlash is not within the specification range, adjust by increasing or decreasing side bearing washer (carrier case side) thickness.
I
Excess backlash:
Use thinner side bearing washer (carrier case side).

Use thicker side bearing washer (carrier case side).
Insufficient backlash:
Drive gear runout inspection Position dial gauge on drive gear rear surface. Turn drive gear a few times and measure runout. Runout limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) max. If runout is not within the specification range, check drive gear contact condition (foreign matter between drive gear and differential case, differential case or drive gear deformation, etc.). If drive gear is worn or deformed, replace hypoid gear assembly. If there is differentia! case deformation, replace case.
runout inspection a Position dial gauge on companion flange surface (inside propeller shaft surface bolt holes) and measure runout. Runoul limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in ) max. Set test indicator inside companion flange (inner lower surface) and measure runout. Runout limit: 0.05 mm {0.0020 in ) max. CAUTION: If surface is rusted, remove rust before measuring surface. If runout is not within the specification range, rotate positions of both companion flange and drive pinion 90' to minimize runout. If runout is still not within the specification range even after rotating relative positions of flange and drive pinion, replace companion flange. If runout is still not within the specification range even after replacing companion flange, the pinion bearing and drive pinion gear tooth contact pattern may be incorrect or the pinion bearing may be faulty.
@ Companion flange I
rBack side
Drive side
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) (e) Hypoid gear mesh inspection
0
Toe side
Heel side
Apply a light coat of powdered titanium oxide and oil or equivalent to drive gear teeth. Rotate gear slowly in both directions a few times and check gear tooth contact pattern. Check gear contact pattern on both drive side (acceleration) and back side (deceleration). CAUTION: Refer to h. Hypoid gear tooth contact inspection for details on applying powdered titanium oxide and gear tooth contact inspection. If gear tooth contact is faulty, increase or decrease height washer thickness to adjust position.
[Point 21 Drive gear and differential case assembly

removal ~emove side retainer bolts.
Insert screwdriver in side retainer notch and raise retainer. While removing side retainer, tap gear case with plastic hammer and remove retainer.
Remove differential case assembly from carrier case. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch carrier cover during removal.
Use puller (special service tool) and remove side bearing and outer race. CAUTION: Remove side bearing and adjusting washer together in carrier case side. Make an identification mark on outer race to prevent incorrect assembly of left and right sides.
Retainer side
Carrier case side
Use puller (special service tool) to remove oil seal.
[Point 3 Drive pinion assembly removal 1

Use flange wrench and remove pinion lock nut.
Install pinion lock nut on drive pinion. CAUTION: Set pinion lock nut even on drive pinion to prevent damage to pinion threads. Using copper hammer, remove drive pinion from carrier case.
Use a brass shaft and tap bearing outer race evenly to
remove race from carrier case. Remove bearing and oil seal together in companion flange side.
Use bearing replacer (special service tool) and remove drive pinion and differential case side bearings.
[Point 41 Differential case disassembly

ST3306 SOOI
Notches
(a) Side bearing removal

Set differentia! case assembly in vise. Using puller set (special service tool), remove side bearing. CAUTION: (1) When placing unit in vise, always use copper plates to prevent side bearing and drive gear from being scratched. (2) Do not remove side bearing except for replacement.
Notches
.rf
(5) Drive gear removal

a
0
Remove differential case bolts, Tap side of drive gear with plastic hammer and remove drive gear.
Feeler gauge
insertion
position
fw-
Differential center. line
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) (s) Side gear surface clearance inspection
a a
Clean thoroughly to prevent side gear, side gear thrust washer and differential case from being coated with gear oil. Position differential case upright to enable side gear measurement.
Feeler gauges of same thickness
Insert feeler gauges of same thickness from both sides in rear surface of side gear to prevent side gear from falling and then measure clearance. Rotate side gear, measure clearance in three locations and calculate average value. Side gear rear clearance: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) max. (Gear must rotate without resistance.)
Turn differential case upside down and measure side gear clearance on opposite side in same manner. Side gear rear clearance: 0.15 mm (0.0059 In) max. (Gear must rotate without resistance.) If side gear clearance is not within specification, select proper thrust washer thickness to adjust clearance.
Excess rear clearance:
same thickness
Use thicker thrust washer.
Insufficient rear clearance:
Use thinner thrust washer.
(3) Disassembly Use pin punch (special service tool) to remove pinion mate 0
shaft lock pin.
Remove pinion mate shaft.
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, - Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Rotate pinion mate gear. Remove pinion mate gear and pinion mate thrust washer, side gear and side gear thrust washer from differential case.
C06-04726
Refer to [Point 6 (described later) for inspection proce1 dures of side gear, side gear thrust washer, pinion mate shaft, pinion mate gear, pinion mate thrust washer and differential case.
(at?
42
(of
?S
C06-04731
[Point 51 Side shaft assembly disassembly Use hydraulic press and remove side shaft from retainer
Use hydraulic puller (special service tool) and remove oil seal from retainer.
Use drift (special service tool) and remove bearing from retainer.
Bearing
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation. Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Clean disassembled parts in suitable solvent and blow dry with compressed air. Repair or replace worn or scratched parts as follows.
Side retainer
Item Side shaft Retainer Bearing
Processing Replace oil seal if seal lip contact surface is worn [approx. 0.1 mm (0-004 in)] or exhibits heat deformation.
rn Replace if worn, scratched or.cracked.
Q :Always replace after every disassembly.
Rotate bearing by hand and check for wear, scratches, pitting or flaking. Replace bearing if noisy or damaged or rotation is not smooth. Always replace with new seal after removal. Replace if there is lip wear, fatigue, damage or other problem.
Oil seal
[Point 61 Part inspection

Clean disassembled parts in suitable solvent and blow dry with compressed air. Check for wear, scratches or other damage and replace as indicated below.
Item Hypoid gear Processing Check cause of abnormal gear tooth contact and correct during assembly.
rn If wear is excessive, replace gears which cannot be adjusted as sets.
If gears are cracked, scratched or damaged replace as set.
Bearing
Check for wear, scratches, pitting, rust or flaking. Rotate bearing by hand and replace as necessary. Check for wear, scratches, or other damage on gear surface and replace as necessary. Check for wear, seizing of thrust washer and replace as necessary.
Side gear and pinion mate gear Side gear and pinion mate gear thrust washer Oil seal Differential case Companion flange
Check for wear, seizing, scratches, or other damage and replace as necessary,
rn Always replace with new seal after removal. Replace if there is lip wear,
fatigue or other problem. Replace case if sliding parts are cracked or worn. Replace seal if seal lip contact surface is worn [approx. 0.1 mm (0.004 in)] or exhibits fatigue.
Side retainer
Circlip
[Point 71 Differential case assembly Assemble thrust washer in side gear.

Note: Make sure thrust washer used in assembly is same washer or thickness as disassembled washer. Coat sliding parts of differential case, gears and thrust washer with gear oil. a Assemble side gear and thrust washer, pinion mate gear and thrust washer in differential case.
Side gear (side retainer

side)
Carrier case
C06-04756
CAUTION: Assemble side gear with circlip in side retainer side. Align two pinion mate gears in diagonal position. Rotate 0 gears and install in differential case.
Align differential case lock pin hole and shaft lock pin hole and assemble pinion mate shaft.
ential center line
Place differential case so side gear to be measured faces

UP.
Feeler ga
insertion position
Feeler gauges of same thickness
I
0
Insert feeler gauges of same thickness from both sides in rear surface of side gear to prevent side gear from falling and then measure clearance. Rotate side gear, measure clearance in three locations and calculate average value. Select side gear thrust washer so clearance is within specification shown below. Side gear rear clearance: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) max. (Gear must rotate without resistance.) Turn differential case upside down and measure side gear clearance on opposite side in same manner. If rear clearance is not within specification, select proper thrust washer thickness to adjust clearance.
Excess rear clearance: Insufficient rear clearance:
same thickness
Use thicker thrust washer.

Use thinner thrust washer-
Side gear thrust washers
Thickness mm (in) 0.68 0.71 (0.0268 0.0280) 0.71 0.74 (0.0280 0.0291) 0.74 0.77 (0.0291 0.0303) 0.77 - 0.80 (0.0303 0.0315)
Part number
rhickness mm (in) 0.80 - 0.83 (0.0315 0.0327) 0.83 0.86 (0.0327 - 0.0339) 0.86 - 0.89 (0.0339 0.0350) 0.89 0.92 (0.0350 - 0.0362)
Part number
Thickness rnm (in)
Part number
38424 W1010 38424 W1011 38424 W1012 38424 W1013
38424 W1014 38424 W1015 38424 W1016 38424 W1017
0.92 0.95 (0.0362 - 0.0374) 0.95 0.98 (0.0374 0.0386) 0.98 - 1.01 (0.0386 0.0398) 1.01 1.04 (0.0398 0.0409)
Use pin punch (special service tool) to insert lock pin in pinion mate shaft. CAUTION: Always replace lock pin with new part after every disassembly.
a
Coat drive gear threads with one or two drops of Locktite.
a a
Install drive gear in differential case. Coat bolt seat with rust preventative oil and tighten bolts evenly in criss-cross sequence. Tightening torque: 93 113 N-rn (9.5 11.5 kg-m, 69 83 ft-lb)
Use drift (special service tool) and press-fit side bearing in differential case. CAUTION: Use hammer to start bearing installation. Set differential case and bearing i n vertical position and press-fit bearing.
[Point 81 Hypoid gear contact and backlash inspection (D Pinion bearing outer race installation
Use drift (special service tool) to install pinion bearing outer race in carrier case. CAUTION: Press-fit outer race straight into carrier case and not at an angle.
(B) Pinion height adjusting washer installation

(temporary installation)
a Assemble height adjusting washer on drive pinion. CAUTION:
Make sure height adjusting washer used for assembly is same washer or same thickness as washer that was removed.
Pinion height adjusting washer
1
(c) Gear set replacement washer selection
When replacing hypoid gear set, calculate processing error correction value for new and former drive pinion and select suitable washer. Processing error correction T = To (ti - t , ) T: Thickness of washer to be installed To: Thickness of removed washer t,: Former drive pinion head number (Processing error is expressed in unit of 1/100 mm) : New drive pinion head number , t (Processing error is expressed in unit of 1/100 mm) Calculation example: If To = 3.21 t, = +2 t2 = -1 Then: T = 3.21 [(2x 0.01) - (-1 x 0.01)] = 3.24 Install washer temporarily on drive pinion.
Pinion heighl adjusting washers Thickness mrn (in1
3.08 10.1217)
3.12 (0.12281 3.15 10.1240> 3.18 10.1252) 3.21 (0.12641 3.24 (0.1 2761 3.27 (0.12871 3.30 (0.12991 3.33 10.1311) 3.36 (0.13231
({D Pinion bearing installation
Use drift (special service tool) and install bearing. CAUTION: Make sure washer is facing correct direction.
0
@ Drive pinion and bearing installation
Coat bearing with gear oil. Assemble drive pinion and bearing in carrier case without spacer and adjusting washer.
Install companion flange without oil seal. Coat drive pinion threads and pinion nut seat with rustpreventative oil and install nut temporarily.
Tighten pinion lock nut to specified preload torque. Pinion bearing preload standard value , (without oil seal installed): 0.7 1.0 N-m (0.07 0.10 kg-m, 0.5 0.7 ft-lb) CAUTION: Tighten pinion lock nut in 5' to 10' increments while preload is measured because spacer is not inserted. Do not tighten excessively.
Differential case installation
0
Install side bearing adjusting washer (carrier case side) in carrier case. CAUTION: Make sure adjusting washer used for assembly is same washer or same thickness as washer that was removed. Otherwise, use washer indicated below.
Thickness rnm (in)
Part number
38453 03V01
2.00 (0.0787)
Use drift (special service tool) and install side bearing outer race (carrier side) in differential case. CAUTION: Do not tap with excessive force.
Use drift (special service tool) and install side bearing outer race in side retainer.
Coat bearing with gear oil. Install differential case assembly in carrier case. CAUTION: Do not scratch carrier cover surface.
Assemble side bearing adjusting shim in side retainer. CAUTION: Make sure adjusting shim used for assembly is same shim or same thickness as shim that was removed.
Notch (adustirm shim)
Install side bearing adjusting shims so they face the two notches on top and rear of carrier case. a Install side retainer in direction of arrow facing front of carrier case. Tightening torque: 16 19 N-rn (1.6 1.9 kg-m, 12 14 ft-Ib) CAUTION: Do not install O-ring.
(g) Total preload measurement

Rotate companion flange more than 20 times. Measure preload with preload gauge. Total preload standard value (without oil seal installed): 1.5 2.1 N-m (0.15 0.21 kg-rn, 1.1 1.5 ft-lb) If preload torque is not within specification range, adjust by selecting suitable shim thickness for side retainer.
Excessive preload: Insufficient preload:
Use thicker shim.
Use thinner shim.
Side bearing adjusting shim (side retainer side)

Thickness mm (in)
Part number
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
'
38453 03V72 38453 03V73 38453 03V74 38453 03V75
(h) Gear tooth contact inspection

Coat both sides of drive gear tooth surface with titanium oxide. Rotate drive gear and drive pinion and check gear tooth contact pattern.
Drive side
0
Check drive gear tooth contact in four locations, on the drive side (acceleration side) and back side (deceleration).
C06-00756
Gear tooth contact pattern standard

Contact pattern
1-
Back side
~&ctmtact
Heelcontact
Heel contact
u
Toe contact
Heel Contact
/--3?ri
Heel contact
Toe contact
Drive side
Pinion height adjusting . . washer selection value mm (in)

4-0.15 (+0.0059)
Adjustment
I^
Necessary
Toe contact
1_________1
Heel contact
Toe contact
1 1
I
Unnecessary
Toe contact
Heel contact
Heel contact
I
Toe contact
I
Toe contact
Heel contact
- contact Heel
-.-
Toe contact
I 1
I
Toe contact
Heal contact
Heel contact
Toe contact
I________I
Toe contact
Heel contact
Heel contact
Tee contact
Toe contact
Heel contact
Heel contact
Toe contact
.> ........... . -
I_________1
.-;.:.::.:.. .. ....& ....... .
1 1
1
-0.09 (-0.0035)
Necessary
Toe contact
Heel contact
Heel contact
Toe contact
I 1
Toe Contact
Heel contact
Heel contact
Toe contact
d) Tooth contact adjustment

a
If tooth contact is not correct, change pinion height adjusting washer thickness to adjust pinion height [X mm (in) in figure].
t
-
C06-0355B

-
Thickness mm (in) 3.09 (0.1217)
Part number 38154 U1500 38154 U1501 38154 U1502 38154 U1503 38154 U1504 38154 U1505 38154 U1506
Part number 38154U1507
1 Thickness mm (in) 1 1 3.51(0.1382) 1
Part number 38154U1514
If face contact or heel contact occur, increase pinion height adjusting washer thickness to move drive pinion closer to drive gear.
If flank contact or toe contact occur, decrease pinion height adjusting washer thickness to move drive pinion away from drive gear.
c
0
Place dial gauge on drive gear face and measure backlash. Backlash standard value: 0.13 1.18 mm (0.0051 0.0465 In) If backlash is not within specification range, change thickness of carrier case side side bearing adjusting washer to adjust.
Excess backlash: Insufficient backlash:
Use thicker washer. Use thinner washer.
Side bearing adjusting washer (Carrier case side)

Thickness mm (in) Part number Thickness mm (in) Thickness rnm (in)
(J) Total preload measurement

a
a
-
Rotate companion flange more than 20 times. Use preload gauge to measure preload. Total preload standard value (without oil seal): 1.5 2.1 N-m (0.15 0.21 kg-m, 1.1 1.5 ft-lb) If preload is not within specification range, adjust by selecting suitable adjusting shim thickness.
- -
Excess preload: Insufficient preload:
Use thicker shim.

Use thinner shim.
Side bearing adjusting washer (Carrier case side)

Thickness mrn (in) Part number Thickness mm (in) Part number Thickness mm (in)
Part number
38453 03V72 38453 03V73 38453 03V74 3845303V75 38453 03V76
0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60
(0.0138) (0.0157) (0.0177) (0.0197) (0-0217) (0.0236)
38453 03V60 38453 03V61 38453 OW62 38453 03V63 3845303V64 38453 03V65
0.65 (0.0256) 0.70 (0.0276) 0.75 (0.0295) 0.80 (0.0315) 0.85 (0.0335) 0.90 (0.0354)
3845303V66 38453 03V67 38453 03V68 38453 03V69 38453 03V70 38453 03W1
0.95 (0.0374) 1.OO (0.0394) 1.05 (0-0413) l.lO(0.0433) 1.I 5 (0.0453)
[Point 91 Drive pinion and preload adjustment
(a) Differential case assembly removal

a
Insert screwdriver in side retainer notch and raise retainer. While pulling side retainer, tap gear lightly with plastic hammer and remove retainer.
Remove differential case assembly. CAUTION: Do not scratch carrier case surface.
(5) Drive pinion assembly removal

a
Use flange wrench and remove pinion lock nut.
Use puller (special service tool) and remove companion flange.
Install pinion lock nut in drive pinion. CAUTION: Set drive pinion and pinion lock nut even to avoid damaging drive pinion threads. Use copper hammer and remove drive pinion from carrier case.
0
Assemble adjusting spacer and washer on drive pinion and install in carrier case. Note: Spacer and washer must be same length and thickness as parts removed at disassembly.
Coat bearing with gear oil. Assemble drive pinion and bearing in carrier case.
Install companion flange without oil seal. Coat drive pinion threads and pinion nut seat with rustpreventative oil and tighten nut temporarily.
Rotate companion flange and fit bearing. Use preload gauge, measure preload and tighten nut. When tightening to specified torque, select spacer and washer to set standard preload. k i t use a long spacer and thick washer. Gradually, exchange for shorter spacer and thinner washer.
Drive pinion tightening torque: 167 196 N-m (17 20 kg-m, 123 145 ft-lb) Pinion bearing preload standard value: 0.7 10.8 N-m (0.07 1.10 kg-m, 0.5 8.0 ft-lb)
1 longer spacer and thicker washer are used: 1 If shorter spacer and thinner washer are used:
the preload increases.
the preload decreases.
CAUTION: Do not,increase preload excessively.
Pinion bearing adjusting spacer (solid)
I
I I
Thickness rnrn (in)
Part number
Thickness mrn (in) 56.6 (2.228) 56.8 (2.236)
Part number
Thickness mrn (in)
Part number
56.2 (2.213) 56.4 (2.220)
38130 21000 38131 21000
38132 21000 38133 21000
57.0 (2.244) 57.2 (2.252)
38134 21000 38135 21000
Pinion bearing adjusting washer

Thickness rnrn (in)
Part number
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
38133 09400 38134 09400 38135 09400 38136 09400 38137 09400 38138 09400
Thickness rnm (in)
Part number
2.59 2.57 2.55 2.53 2.51 2.49
(0.1020) (0.1012) (0.1004) (0.0996) (0.0988) (0.0980)
38127 09400 38128 09400 38129 09400 38130 09400 38131 09400 38132 09400
2.47 (0.0972) 2.45 (0.0965) 2.43 (0.0957) 2.41 (0.0949) 2.39 (0.0941) 2.37 (0.0933)
2.35 (0.0925) 2.33 (0.0917) 2.31 (0.0909)
38139 09400 38 140 09400 38141 09400
If the specified preload (by adjusting spacer, adjusting washer selection) is set at specified torque, remove drive pinion one time. Use puller (special service tool ) and remove companion flange.
Install pinion lock nut in drive pinion. CAUTION: Set drive pinion and pinion lock nut even to avoid damaging drive pinion threads. Use copper hammer and remove drive pinion from carrier case.
Coat bearing with gear oil. Assemble drive pinion and selected adjusting spacer and washer in carrier case. Install bearing in case.
Coat oil seal lip with Nissan MP special grease No. 2. Use drift (special service tool) and install oil seal to position of dimension A shown in figure on left. Dimension A: 1.8 2.2 mm (0.071 0.087 in)
Install companion flange. Coat drive pinion threads and pinion nut seat with rustpreventative oil and install new nut. CAUTION: Replace pinion nut with new part after every disassembly.
Turn companion flange more than 20 times to fit bearing. Tighten drive pinion to specified torque. Drive pinion tightening torque: 167 196 N-m (17 20 kg-m, 123 145 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not over-tighten.
Use preload gauge and measure preload. Pinion bearing preload standard value (with oil seal installed): 0.8 1.1 N-m (0.08 0.11 kg-m, 0.6 0.8 ft-lb)
[Point 101 Differential case assembly installation Coat side bearing with gear oil. Install differential case assembly in carrier case.
CAUTION: Do not scratch carrier case surface.
Coat oil seal lip with Nissan MP special grease No. 2. Set drift (special service tool) in side retainer and install oil seal. CAUTION: After tightening bolt, wipe off extra liquid gasket inside case.
Coat carrier case side retainer hole (through holes) with liquid gasket (silicon bond 1215 or equivalent).
install selected side bearing adjusting shim and O-rings in side retainer. Assemble and install them in carrier case. CAUTION: Coat O-ring with gear oil and assemble after adjusting shim in carrier case side.
Protrusion (adjusting shim)
Position adjusting shim so that the two protrusions face upper and rear side of carrier case and then install shim, Position side retainer facing front of carrier case (direction of arrow in figure) and install. Tightening torque: 16 - 1 9 N-m (1.6 -1.9 kg-m, 12 14ft-lb)
[Point 111 Inspection after assembly Rotate drive pinion and drive gear a number of times. Set
dial gauge on drive gear surface and measure backlash. Backlash standard value: 0.13 0.18 mm (0.0051 0.0071 in) If backlash is not within specification range, select suitable side bearing washer thickness (carrier case side) to adjust.
Excessive backlash: Insufficient backlash:
Use thinner side bearing carrier case side washer. Use thicker side bearing carrier case side washer.
Inspect drive gear runout. Runout standard value: 0.05 mrn (0.0020 in) max. Set dial gauge on drive gear rear surface. Rotate drive gear and measure runout. If runout is not within specification limit, inspect drive gear contact pattern (foreign matter between drive gear and differential case, deformation, etc.). If drive gear is deformed, replace hypoid assembly. If differential case is deformed, replace case. Inspect companion flange runout. Runout limit value: 0.05 rnm (0.0020 in) max. Set dial gauge on companion flange surface (inside propetler shaft installation surface bolt hole) and measure runout. Set test indicator on inside of companion flange (inside lower surface) and measure runout. If runout exceeds specification limit, rotate relative positions of companion flange and drive pinion 90' and check if runout decreases. If runout still is not within specification range even if the relative position is changed, replace companion flange. If companion flange is replaced and runout is still not within specification range, the problem may be due to poor contact between pinion bearing and drive pinion or faulty pinion bearing.
Rotate companion flange more than 20 times. Use preload gauge to measure total preload. Total preload standard value (with oil seal installed): 1.6 2.2 N-m (0.16 0.22 kg-m, 1.2 1.6 -lb If the preload is not within specification range, adjust pinion bearing preload and side bearing preload.
Excessive preload:
Use shorter drive pinion spacer and thinner washer. Use thicker side bearing retainer shim.
-
a Use longer drive pinion spacer and thicker

Insufficient preload: washer. Use thinner side bearing retainer shim.
[Point 121 Side shaft assembly installation

a Use drift (special service tool) to install bearing in retainer. CAUTION: Do not install bearing on inclined angle.
Coat oil seal lip with Nissan MP special grease No. 2. Use drift (special service tool) and install oil seal in retainer.
Use drift (special service tool) and install side shaft in

retainer.
Height gauge
0
Measure dimension A in side shaft to calculate side shaft

end play.
Measure dimension 8 in carrier case.
Side retainer
sj^g shaft
Select adjusting shim so axial end play is within specification range indicated below. Axial end play standard value (A B): 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 In)
Side retainer adjusting shim

Thickness
Part number
38233 03V01 38233 03V02 38233 03V03
mm (in)
0.1 (0.004) 0.2(0.008) 0.3 (0.012)
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
0.4 (0.016) 0.5 (0.020)
38233 03V04 38233 OW05
Assemble selected adjusting shim and spacer in side shaft. CAUTION: Assemble adjusting shim in retainer and spacer in carrier case with lip (projection) facing carrier case side before installation.
Coat oil seal lip with Nissan MP special grease No, 2. Use drift (special service tool) and install oil seal in carrier case.
Install side shaft assembly in carrier case. Tightening torque: 16 21 N-m (1.6 2.1 kg-m, 12 15 ft-lb)
Measure axial end play. Axial end play standard value: 0 0.1 mm (0 0.004 in)
[Point 131 Carrier cover installation

Apply a thin coat of liquid gasket (silicone bond 1215 or equivalent) to installation surface bolt holes of carrier cover and carrier case. CAUTION: Remove all traces of old liquid gasket from mating surfaces with a scraper. Wipe off any other oil, dust or foreign matter from mating surfaces.
Install carrier cover i n carrier case. Tightening torque: 29 37 N-m ( . 3.8 kg-m, 22 27 ft-lb) 30 Apply a thin coat of liquid gasket (silicon bond 1215 or equivalent) to drain plug and filler plug and install in carrier case cover.
Drain plug tightening torque Filler plug tightening torque
25 - 34 N . (2.5 - 3.5 kg+,,, ~

ft-Ib)
18 25
Note: Final drive must be filled with gear oil after installation in vehicle. Refer to the 1-1. SPECIFICATION for the oil volume.
/ Pinion mate gear
Side gear
Drive pinion gear

C 0 6 - ~ ~ /
Model R200 (with LSD)
[Point 11 inspection before disassembly
Secure attachment on unit assembly.
0
0
Drain oil from gears.
Remove gear case cover.
CAUTION: If carrier case is faulty, replace unit assembly.
(a) Total preload inspection

e
Rotate companion flange more than 20 times. Measure total preload with preload gauge. Total preload standard value: (With oil seal) 1.4 3.1 N'm (0.14 0.32 kg-m, 1.0 2.3fl-lb) a If preload is not within specification range, adjust pinion bearing preload and side bearing preload. Collapsible spacer
Excessive preload:
Use longer drive pinion spacer and thicker washer. e Use thinner side bearing washer. Use shorter drive pinion spacer and thinner washer. a Use thicker side bearing washer.
insufficient preload:
(5) Hypoid gear and backlash inspection

Set dial gauge on drive gear face and measure backlash. Backlash standard value: 0.13 0.18 mm (0.0051 0.0071 in) If the backlash is not within specification range, adjust side washer thickness by moving equally in both directions.
Excessive backlash:
Use thicker drive gear rear washer. Use thinner drive gear tooth surface side washer.
Insufficient backlash:
Use thinner thickness drive gear rear side washer. Use thicker drive gear tooth surface side washer.
(fi) Drive gear rear surface runout inspection
Place dial gauge on rear surface of drive gear. Turn drive gear and measure runout. Runout limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) max. If runout exceeds limit, check drive gear assembly condition (foreign matter jammed between drive gear and differential case, deformation of differentia! case or drive gear, etc.). If drive gear is faulty, replace hypoid gear assembly. If differential case is faulty, replace case.
Companion flange runout inspection
Place dial gauge on companion flange (propeller shaft installation surface) and measure runout. Runout limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) max. a Set test indicator inside companion flange (inner lower surface) and measure runout. Runout limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) max. CAUTION: If measurement surface is rusted, remove rust before measurement. If runout exceeds specification limit, rotate relative positions of companion flange and drive pinion 90' and find minimum value. a If runout still is not within specification range even if the relative position is changed, replace companion flange. a If companion flange is replaced and runout is still not within specification range, the problem may be due to poor contact between pinion bearing and drive pinion or faulty pinion bearing.
Back side
Drive side
@ Hypoid gear tooth contact inspection

H side
Heel side
Toe side
To.sida
Clean drive gear and hypoid gear teeth. Apply a light mixture of powdered titanium oxide and oil (or equivalent compound) to 4 locations on drive gear. Rotate hypoid gear and check gear tooth contact pattern. Check gear tooth contact pattern on drive side faccelera0 tion) and back side (deceleration) of gears. CAUTION: Refer to (fl) Hypoid drive gear tooth contact pattern tor details on using powdered titanium mixture. If gear tooth contact pattern is incorrect, select suitable 0 washer to adjust gear height.
a
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) [Point 21 Drive gear and differentialcase assembly
removal
Check for painted mark used to align side bearing cap and carrier case. If there is no mark, paint mark in correct location. CAUTION: The bearing cap and carrier case are assembled as a single unit. Be especially careful not to assemble incorrectly. Paint mating marks and do not scratch surfaces. Remove bearing cap bolts. Tap bearing caps lightly with
carrier case
Using slide hammer (commercial service tool) separate differential case assembly and carrier case.
Remove differential case assembly together with side bearing outer race,
Separate side bearing outer race, adjusting washers and bearing spacers by front surface and gear tooth surface when they are stored. The bearing spacer installation position varies by hypoid gear and gear ratio.
t
Gear ratio 3.916 min.
Drive gear rear side
Use brass shaft to remove oil seal from carrier case.
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) [Point 3 Drive pinion assembly removal 1
a
Using cam sprocket wrench (special service tool), remove pinion lock nut.
Use drift (special service tool) to remove drive pinion
assembly.
CAUTION: Do not allow drive pinion to fall.
a
0
Use brass shaft and tap evenly to remove outer bearing race. Remove bearing and oil seal together from front side.
Front side
Rear side
Using bearing replacer (special service tool), remove rear pinion bearing from drive pinion.
ST3306 SOOI
Nothes
[Point 41 Differential case disassembly
(a) Side bearing removal

Secure differential case assembly in vice. Using side puller set (special service tool), remove side bearing from differential case. CAUTION: (1) Place copper plates on sides of bearing and drive to prevent scratches when securing case assembly in vise. (2) Do not remove any other parts except when replacing side bearings.
Nothes
(D Drive gear removal

a
Remove bolts from drive gear, Tap side of drive gear with plastic hammer to remove drive gear. Clean disassembled parts thoroughly and inspect for wear, damage and other abnormalities. Perform the following operations for non-standard conditions,
(c) Part inspection

0
Item Hypoid gear Bearing Oil seal Companion flange
Operation
If gear tooth contact is incorrect, determine cause and adjust so contact is correct. a If gear tooth surface is worn, cracked or seized, replace gear set.
Rotate by hand to check for seizing, separation, wear and rust. Replace bearings as a matched set of inner or outer races if there is abnormal noise or other damage.
a Always replace after every disassembly.
Replace if lip is worn, sealing power is reduced or there is other damage. Replace it oil seal lip contact surface is worn [approx. 0.1 mrn (0.004 in)] or damaged.
[Point 51 LSD (Limited Slip Differential) assembly and disassembly
Pressure ring
shed friction data
Pinion mate shaft
Pinion mate gear
Part Impction LSD assembly Inspection
Pressure ring
C06-0429B
(a) Inspection before disassembly

Using Side Flange Dummy (special service tool), measure sliding torque.
Sliding torque
25 - 34 N m (2.5
- 3.5 kg-m, 18 - 25 ft-lb)
If sliding torque is outside specifications, disassemble and
check parts.
(0 Differential case removal and installation

Removal
Loosen screws in diagonal sequence and remove.
Installation
0
Align marks on differential case (A) and (B) as shown in figure. Tighten bolts diagonally in several stages.
@ Friction disk selection I
a
Before assembling differential case, select friction disk to adjust axial direction clearance of mechanical parts in case. Use the following method to select parts. Measure differential case depth as shown in figure. Use the following equation to calculate dimension "A". A = C + E - 0 A: Differential case depth
Dished friction date
Measure the total layered thickness of the two dished friction plates as shown in figure on left. Right side: Li Left side: La
Measure the total layered thickness of the two friction plates and one spacer as shown in figure on left. Right side: K, Left side: K ,
K, (Left side)
Compare the left and right total thickness of the dished friction plates, friction plate, friction disk and spacer. Change assembly alignment if difference of left and right thicknesses is not within specification. Difference of left and right: B = (L, + K,) - (L, Ka) Left-right difference limit: 0.05 m m (0.0020 in)
+.
Assemble pinion mate shaft, pressure ring, friction disk, friction plate and spacer. Measure total width of assembled parts. Assembly dimension: F CAUTION: Do not include the thickness of dished friction plates in these measurements. Use the following equation to determine axial clearance from the dimension of differential case depth and friction plate assembly. Axial clearance: S = A - (F L, + L,} Axial clearance specification: 0.05 0.20 m m (0.0020 0.0079 in) a Select suitable friction disk to adjust axial clearance within specification.
Friction plate types

Thickness mm (in)
1.75 (0.0689)
Part number
38432 N9000
Check the left-right difference of the friction plate types. Change the assembly alignment if the difference of left and right thicknesses is not within specificationCAUTION: Be careful not to mix the left and right sides of the friction plates after selection.
(9) Plate assembly

a
Be careful not to mistake the assembly direction and sequence of any plate. @ Pressure ring I @ Side gear (3) Friction disk @ Friction plate @ Dish friction plate @ Spacer CAUTtON: Coat each part with recommended Nissan gear oil hypoid GL-5
80W-90LS.
C5 FINAL DRIVE
3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)

(e) Part inspection
a
Clean disassembled parts with proper solvent, dry with compressed air and check as follows.
Dished friction plate

Make sure there is no seizing or discoloration on friction Replace if necessary because damsurface (left figure 0 ) . age may cause abnormal lock performance. Make sure there are no bumps or damage on outer protrusion (left figure (2)). Correct with oil stone or replace if necessary. Check friction distance with micrometer. Replace plate if wear exceeds limit. Friction distance = outer protrusion (2) thickness outer friction surface (D thickness
CAUTION: Measure at four opposite angles. Wear limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in) CAUTION: The inside section of friction sliding surface does not wear abnormally due to strong contact force applied to spring force of the dished friction plate.
Friction plate and friction disk

Check for seizing or discoloration on friction surface (left figure (3)) and replace if necessary. Make sure there are no bumps or damage on outer protrusion (left figure (5)). Correct with oil stone or replace if necessary. Check friction distance with micrometer. Replace plate if wear exceeds limit. Inspection items are the same as for dished friction plate. Wear limit: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Use dial gauge and check for distortion.

Distortion limit: Total runout 0.08 mm (0.0031 in)
Pressure ring
Check the contact surface of the friction disk (left figure (3)) for dents, damage, or heat discoloration color. Replace if heat discoloration is evident. Use an oil stone to correct small dents or damage. Replace if correction is not possible-
(D @
@
(3) @
Check for wear or damage to contact sliding part of the mechanism (described below). Differential case connection part Side gear contact part Outer protrusion Pinion mate gear contact part V-shaped groove
,
Pinion mate shaft

0
Check cams (left figure for wear or damage. Check shaft (left figure (2)) for abnormal wear or heat discoloration and replace if necessary.
a)
Side gear and pinion mate gear

Inspect following parts and correct light damage with oil stone. Replace if there is abnormal wear or heat discoloration. (T) Pressure ring sliding contact surface (left figure 0 )for abnormal wear or heat discoloration. @ Groove part (left figure d )for damage or abnormal wear. ) @ Rear side (left figure (3)) for abnormal wear.
Differential case
Inspect parts described below for damage, abnormal wear and heat discoloration. Replace as necessary. (D Spacer contact surface (left figure 0 )for abnormal wear or heat discoloration. (g) Groove part (left figure (2)) for damage or abnormal wear. (S) Pressure ring contact surface (left figure (3)) for damage, abnormal wear or heat discoloration.
Spacer a Check pressure ring and differential case contact surfaces for damage, heat discoloration or abnormal wear.
(D LSD assembly inspection

a
After LSD assembly is assembled, check rotary motion torque and make sure transmitted torque is correct. Using dummy rear acceleration shaft (special service tool) and measure rotational torque with torque wrench. Rotational torque standard value: 25 34 N-m (2.5 3.5 kg-m, 18 25 ft-tb) Note: After measurement rotation is smooth, lubricate each sliding part with recommended Nissan gear oil hypoid GL-5 SOW-90LS to ensure proper smoothness. Measure rotational torque again at Initial rotation after lubrication. a If rotational torque is not within specification range, inspect friction plate and friction disk and assemble again.
[Point 61 Differential case assembly

-
Apply 1 - 2 drops of Locktite to drive gear threads.
Assemble drive gear and differential case. Coat gear oil to bolt seat and tighten bolts in criss-cross sequence. Tightening torque: 177 196 N-m (18.0 20.0 kg-m, 130 145 ft-lb)
Use drift (special service tool) and press-fit side bearing i n differential case. CAUTION: Tap bearing lightly with hammer to start press-fit operation. Make sure bearing is perpendicular to differential case and press-fit bearing.
--.Differential case side
1 Companion flange side
[Point 71 Hypoid gear tooth contact inspection and backlash inspection
(a) Pinion bearing outer race installation

Using drift (special service tool), install pinion bearing outer race in carrier case. CAUTION: Tap outer race lightly with hammer to start press-fit operation. Making sure outer race Is perpendicular to carrier case and press-fit bearing.
@ Pinion height adjusting washer installation I

(temporary assembly)
Assemble height washer in drive pinion. CAUTION: Assemble height washer that was removed. When using new part, make sure It is the same thickness as when it was disassembled.
@ Gear set replacement washer selection

When hypoid gear set is replaced, perform processing error correction using measurement of old and new drive pinions and select suitable washer. Processing error correction T = To +-(t,-1,) T = Washer thickness that must be assembled To = Thickness of removed washer t,: Head number of old drive pinion [The processing error is indicated in units of 100 x 1/100rnm.] ty: Head number of new drive pinion [The processing error is indicated in units of 100 x 1/100
Processing'error
C06-0051B
mm.]
Calculation example: If: To = 3.21, t, = + 2 and , = -1 t T = 3.21 [(2 x 0.01) - (-1 x 0.01)J= 3.24 mm Assemble temporary adjusting washer (3.24 mm) in drive pinion.
(3) Pinion bearing installation
Using drift (special service tool), install pinion bearing. CAUTION: Make sure not to change washer direction.
(e) Drive pinion and pinion bearing installation

a
Coat bearing with gear oil. Assemble drive pinion and pinion bearing (front side) in carrier case. CAUTION: Do not assemble solid spacer and pinion bearing adjusting washer.
~
Install companion flange. CAUTION: Do not install oil seal. Coat drive pinion threads and pinion nut seat with oil. Tem0 porarily install pinion nut. Tighten pinion nut to standard preload. Pinion bearing preload standard value: 1.0 1.6 N-m (0.10 0.16 kg-m, 0.7 1.2 fl-lb) CAUTION: Tighten pinion nut in 50 100 increments during measurement because it does not enter spacer. Do not tighten nut with excessive force.
@
a
Differential case installation Coat bearing with gear oil. Assemble differential case assembly and side bearing outer race together in carrier case.
Drive gear rear surface side
'
Drive gear tooth
a Install drive gear rear surface side and tooth side washer. CAUTION: If washer that was removed is assembled again it must be the same thickness as it was before unit was disassembled. Do not confuse the rear side and gear side of washer.
Install bearing between bearing outer race and adjusting washer. CAUTION: Use plastic hammer to tap rounded spacer surfaces lightly during assembly.
Spacer
Thickness mm (in)
. 8.1 (0.319)
Part number
38454 40POO
Spacer installation position: Drive gear rear side

8
Align mating marks, assemble bearing cap and tighten bolts. Tightening torque: 88 98 N-m (9 10 kg-m, 65 72 ft-lb)
(a) Gear tooth contact inspection

Clean drive gear teeth. Apply a light mixture of powdered titanium oxide and oil or equivalent to both sides of drive gear. Rotate drive pinion gear and drive pinion and check gear tooth contact pattern.
C06-0545B
Drive side
Check gear tooth contact pattern in four locations on both surfaces of drive side (acceleration) and back side (deceleration) gears.
Gear tooth contact pattern chart
Contact pattern Drive side Pinion height adjusting washer selection value mm (in) Adjustment Resulting problem
Back side
If gear tooth contact pattern is incorrect, select pinion height adjusting washer of suitable thickness to adjust pinion height [X mm (in) figure.]
Drive side
Back side
Thickness mm (in)
Part number
tea
0
Thickness
mrn (in)
Part number
Set dial gauge on drive gear surface and measure backlash. Backlash standard value: 0.13 0.18 mm (0.0051 0.0071 in) If backlash is not within specification range, move side bearing adjusting washers of same thickness (carrier case side) to adjust.
Excessive backlash: Insufficient backlash:
Use thicker drive gear rear side washer. Use thinner drive gear tooth side washer. Use thinner drive gear rear side washer. Use thicker drive gear tooth side washer.
C5 FINAL DRIVE 3. Final Drive Removal and Installation, 1 Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) - Rotate companion flange more than 20 times. Measure total preload with preload gauge. Side bearing preload standard value: 0.3 1.5 N-m (0.03 0.15 kg-m, 0.2 1.1 ft-lb) Pinion bearing preload standard value: 1.8 2.6 N-rn (0.18 0.27 kg-m, 1.3 2.0 ft-lb) Total preload standard value (Without oil seal): 1.3 3.0 N-m (0.13 0.31, 0.9 2.2 ft-lb) If preload is not within specification range, move adjusting washers of same thickness on both sides to adjust preload.
Excessive preload:
Insufficient preload:
--
I
--
Use thinner adjusting washer.

Use thicker adjusting washer.
-
Side bearing adjusting washers

Thickness mm (in) 2.00 (0.0787) 2.05 (0.0807) 2.10 (0.0827) 2.15 (0.0846) 2.20 (0.0866)
Part number
38453 N3100 38453 N3101 38453 N3102 38453 N3103 38453 N3104
Thickness rnm (in)
Part number
38453 N3105 38453 N3106 38453 N3107 38453 N3108 38453 N3109
Thickness mm (in) 2.50 2.55 2.60 2.65 (0.0984) (0.1004) (0.1024) (0.1043)
Part number
38453 N3110 38453 N3111 38453 N3112 38453 N 3 l l 3
2.25 (0.0886) 2.30 (0.0906) 2.35 (0.0925)

2.40 (0.0945) 2.45 (0.0965)
[Point 81 Drive pinion preload adjustment
@ Differential case assembly removal I

a
Remove bearing cap bolts. Tap bearing caps lightly with plastic hammer and remove.
marks inside bear!
Using sliding hammer (commercial service tool), separate differential case assembly and carrier case.
Remove differential case assembly together with side bearing outer race.
,
Carefully arrange bearing outer race, adjusting washers and spacers into separate groups of rear side and gear tooth side parts.
I
Gear ratio
Installation position Drive gear rear side
Drive gear tooth b* i
4.000 min.
(5) Drive pinion assembly removal

a
Using cam sprocket wrench (special service tool), remove pinion lock nut.
Using drift (special service tool), remove drive pinion assembly. CAUTION: Do not let drive pinion fall.
Drive pinion assembly installation

pinion bearing
Install solid spacer and adjusting washer (which were used before disassembly) on drive pinion or spacer of same length and washer of same thickness that were originally used.
C06-05786
Apply a light coat of oil to front bearing and install in carrier case.
a
Install drive pinion assembly with companion flange in carrier case.
CAUTION: Do not assemble oil seal.
Apply a light coat of oil to pinion nut seat and drive pinion threads and install nut. Rotate companion flange more than 20 times and make sure bearing spins smoothly. Tighten drive pinion nut while measuring preload using preload gauge. When specified torque is reached, select suitable spacer and washer to ensure specified pinion bearing preload is obtained.
Use longer spacer and thicker washer first, then change to shorter and thinner ones until specified preload is obtained.
1
Drive pinion tightening torque: 186 294 N-m (19 30 kg-m, 137 217 ft-lb) Specified pinion bearing preload (wio oil seal): 1.0 1.6 N-m (0.10 0.16 kg-m, 0.7 1.2 ft-lb)
1 Excessive preload:
Insufficient preload:
preload gauge
1 Use longer spacer and thicker washer

Use shorter spacer and thinner washer
1
i
I
CAUTION: Do not apply excess preload to pinion bearing.
Pinion bearing ad isting spacers

Thickness mrn (in)
-
Part number 38165 1 V O OO 38165 10V01
Thickness mm (in) 45.6 (1.795) 45.9 (1.807)
Part number
Part number
38165 1OV07
46.5 (1.831) 46.8 (1.843)
38165 10V05 38165 10V06
Pinion bearing adjusting washers

Part number
Part number 38130 61001
Part number 38135 61001
38125 61001
When specified bearing preload is obtained at specified drive pinion torque (using solid spacer and adjusting washer), extract drive pinion. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop drive pinion.
a
Coat oil seal lip with Nissan MP special grease No. 2. Using drift (special service tool), install oil seal in carrier case.
Apply gear oil to pinion bearing. Install drive pinion assembly (with suitable spacer and adjusting washer installed) and companion flange in carrier case as a unit.
KVIOI 09900
Apply a coat of rust-preventive oil to drive pinion threads and pinion nut seat. CAUTION: Discard old pinion nut; replace with new one. a Rotate companion flange more than 20 times until it wears in. Tighten drive pinion to specifications. Drive pinion tightening torque: 186 294 N-m (19 30 kg-m, 137 217 ft-lb) CAUTION: Do not tighten drive pinion excessively.
a Measure preload with preload gauge. Pinion bearing standard preload (wloil seal) : 1.1 1.7 N-m (0.11 0.17 kg-m, 0.8 1.2 ft-lb)
[Point 91 Differential case assembly installation
Coat bearing with gear oil. Install differential case assembly together with bearing outer race in carrier case.
i r surface
rear
Drive gear tocth surface
Install drive gear rear side and tooth side selected washers. CAUTION: Do not interchange rear and tooth side washers by mistake.
Install spacer between bearing outer race and adjusting washer. CAUTION: Use plastic hammer and tap outside of spacer evenly to install.
Spacer
Thickness rnm (in)
8.1 (0.319)
Part number
38454 N3100
Bearing acfustingwasher
Spacer installation position: Drive gear rear side
Align mating marks, install bearing cap and tighten bolts. Tightening torque: 88 98 N-rn (9 10 kg-m, 65 72 ff-lb)
[Point 101 Inspection after assembly
(D Total preload inspection

Turn companion flange more than 20 times. Use preload gauge and measure total preload. Side bearing preload standard value: 0.3 1.5 N-m (0.03 0.15 kg-m, 0.2 1.1 fl-lb) Pinion bearing preload standard value (without oil seal): 1.1 1.7 N-m (0.11 0.17 kg-m, 0.8 1.2 fl-lb)
Cm0512B
If torque preload is not within the specification range, move side bearing adjusting washers of same thickness on both sides to adjust preload.
Excess oreload: Insufficient preload:
Total preload standard value: 1.4 - 3.1 N-m (0.14 - 0.32 kg-m, 1.0 - 2.3 ft-lb)
1 .1
Use thinner side bearing washer. Use thicker side bearing washer.
(b) Hypoid gear and backlash inspection

0
Position dial gauge on drive gear surface and measure backlash. Backlash standard value: 0.13 0.18 rnrn (0.0051 0.0071 in) If backlash is not within the specification range, adjust by increasing or decreasing side bearing washer thickness the same amount on both sides.
Excess backlash: Insufficient backlash:
Use thicker drive gear rear side washer and thinner drive gear tooth side washer.
Use thinner drive gear rear side washer and thicker drive gear tooth side washer.
<c) Drive gear rear surface runout inspection a Place dial gauge on rear surface of drive gear. Turn drive gear and measure runout. Runout limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) rnax. a If runout exceeds limit, check drive gear assembly condition (foreign matter jammed between drive gear and differ0
ential case, deformation of differential case, etc.). If drive gear is faulty, replace hypoid gear assembly. If differential case is deformed, replace case.
0) Companion flange runout inspection
Place dial gauge on companion flange (propeller shaft installation surface) and measure runout. Runout limit: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) max. Set test indicator inside companion flange (inner lower surface) and measure runout. Place paint mark on maximum outward runout of companion flange. Runout limit: 0.05 mrn (0.0020 in) max. CAUTION: (1) If measurement surface is rusted, remove rust before measurement. (2) Make sure old paint is cleaned away before placing new mark. If runout exceeds specification limit, rotate relative positions of companion flange and drive pinion 90"and check if runout decreases. If runout still is not within specification range even if the relative position is changed, replace companion flange. If companion flange is replaced and runout is still not within specification range, the problem may be due to poor contact between pinion bearing and drive pinion or faulty pinion bearing.
[Point 1I]Side oil seal installation

Coat oil seal lip with Nissan MP special grease No. 2. Using drift (special service tool), install oil seal in carrier case.
[Point 121 Installation of carrier case cover, drain plug and filler plug
Install carrier case cover with gasket in place. Tightening torque: 39 49 N-rn (4 5 kg-m, 29 36 ft-lb) Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond 1215 or equivalent) to drain and filler plugs and install plugs. Drain plug tightening torque: 59 98 N-m (6 10 kg-m, 43 72 ft-lb) Filler plug tightening torque: 59 98 N-m (6 10 kg-m, 43 72 ft-lb)
CH-191
(2) Front final drive side shaft assembly and disassembly
0
Side retainer
Oil seal [Pant 1 1
Side shaft
0 :Always replace after wary disassembly.
C06-0419E
[Point 11 Side shaft bearing and oil seal removal and installation Removal
Using two adapter setting plates and hydraulic press as shown in left figure, separate side retainer and side shaft.
Using oil seal puller (special service tool), remove oil seal. CAUTION: Always replace oil seal after every disassembly.
Place drift [outer diameter 98 mm (3.86 in), inner diameter 69 mm (2.72 in)] on bottom side and remove bearing with drift (special service tool) [outer diameter 32 mm (1.26 in)].
[outer diameter mm (3.86 in),
inner diameter m mm (2.72 in11

C06-0422E
Installation
Use drift (special service tool) as shown in figure, and press-fit bearing until it is even with lower surface of side retainer. CAUTION: Do not install bearing at angle.
Drii [outer diameter 86 13.351, ,inner diameter 67 (2.641.
Place drift [outer diameter 98 mm (3.86 in), inner diameter 69 mrn (2.72 in)] on bottom and use drift [outer diameter 85 mm (3.35 in), inner diameter 67 mrn (2.64 in)] to press-fit oil seal even with side retainer. CAUTION: (1) Do not install oil seal at an inclined angle. (2) Apply MP special grease No. 2 to oil seal lip sliding surface.
inner diameter
Unit: mm (in)
C06-0424B
Hydraulic press
Place suitable drift (special service tool) against side shaft and press-fit shaft on retainer.
C6 DRIVE SHAFT
Use torque wrench to tighten nuts and bolts.

Tools required
Description Special service tool Application Remarks
^lange wrench W401 04000
Wheel hub lock nut removal and installation
Already described
Pitman arm puller HT7256 0000 Side rod removal
Regular tools
Drive shaft joint puller KT7255 Attachment HI7255 1000 @ x 1.0 M20 I @ M20 x 1.5 @ M22 x 1.0 @ M22 x 1.5 @ M24 x 1.5
Note: The sliding hammer gear puller HT7240 that was previously described can be used for the drive shaft joint puller slide ham-
Fixed joint removal
mer.
1. Summary
Specifications
Location Final drive type Item Model number Middle tube diameter
rnrn (in)
Front
F160
Rear R200 mechanical LSD (RB26DETT) B100D100
Dimension between joint L Maximum length M
mrn (in)
mm (in) Differential insertion mm (in) 1 length E
Right Left Right Left Right Left Riaht Left
!
1
Z80T70C (right) Z80T82F (left) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 323 (12.72) 408 (16.06) 448.1 (17.64) 513.7 (20.22) 90 (3.541
30 ( .18) 1 30 (1 .18) 440 (17.32)

398 (15.67)
5 1 1 (22.09) 6. 519.1 (20.44)
93 (13.661 101 (3.98)
C6 DRIVE SHAFT 1. Summary (Cont'd)

Insoection specifications
Location Description Grease quantity CI ( 0 4 Boot installation length . mm (in) Wheel hub joint joint Wheel hub joint Final drive joint Front Rear
280T70C (right)
Z80T82F (left)
B100D100
Approx. 180 (6.35) Approx. 190 (6.70) 102 (4.02)
103.5 (4.07)
Drive shaft installation bolt tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) rnm (in) Axial play (wheel hub joint)
Approx. 120 (4.23) Approx. 190 (6.70) Approx. 155 (5.47) 90.5 - 92,5 (3.563- 3.642) 95.5 97.5 95 97 (3.74 3.62) (3.760 3.8391 27 37 (2.8 3.8, 20 27) 1 (0.04) max.
83 93 (8.5 9.5, 61 69)
Check boot and drive shaft for damage, wear and grease leaks.
Check boot and drive shaft for damage, wear and grease leaks. Replace parts as necessary.
C6 DRIVE SHAFT
3. Drive Shaft Removal and Installation,

Assembly and Disassembly
3-1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (1) Front drive shaft
, shaft Side
Additional work required : Remove and install

Brake calipers separation [Pant 1 1 Hub lock nuts [Point 21 Side rod, lower ball joint and lower link separation [Point 3)
Rigtt drive shaft [Point 41
: b h ( kg-rn ft-1b) , .. . .-, _-. .-..-,Q :Always replace after every disassembly.
[Point I]Brake caliper assembly separation

Remove brake hose bracket lock plate and separate brake hose. Remove caliper assembly from disk rotor and attach to strut. CAUTION: Do not damage brake hose.
[Point 21 Hub lock nut removal and installation Removal

0
Using hub lock nut wrench (special service tool), lock hub and loosen front hub lock nut. Install drive shaft and hub assembly in vehicle. Tighten lock nut to torque indicated below. Tightening torque: 235 314 N-m (24 32 kg-m, 174 231 ft-lb)
Installation
KVIOI 09900
C08-0697B
C6 DRIVE SHAFT 3. Drive shaft Removal and Installation. Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
[Point 3 Tie-rod, suspension lower ball joint and lower 1 link separation
Using Pitman arm puller (commercial service tool), separate tie-rod and suspension lower ball joint. CAUTION: Be careful when removing ball joint because the knuckle is made of aluminum and scratches easily. Use Pitman arm puller and do not tap knuckle. Using Pitman arm puller (commercial service tool), separate suspension lower ball joint and lower fink.
[Point 41 Right drive shaft removal and installation

Removal Drain oil from front final drive and remove rear cover. Use wheel wrench as lever and remove shaft,
Installation
Insert drive shaft in final drive. Apply silicon bond sealant TB1215 (KP210 00200) to rear cover sealing surfaces.
Tighten differential cover to specified torque. Differential cover tightening torque: 29 37 N m (3.0 3.8 kg-m, 22 27 ft-lb) Fill oil from filler plug hole. Use Nissan gear oil hypoid GL-5 85W90.
C6 DRIVE SHAFT 3. Drive shaft Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
(2) Rear drive shaft
Side flange [Point 21
pin
PI -28 Adjusting cap

152.203)
[Point 11 Drive shaft removal and installation

Removal
Remove side flange bolts and separate drive shaft. Tap drive shaft with copper hammer as shown in figure and 0 remove. CAUTION: Attach nut to prevent drive shaft threads from being damaged.
Installation
Insert drive shaft in wheel hub side and temporarily tighten hub lock nuts. Tighten side flange bolts to specified torque. Tighten hub lock nut to specified torque.
[Point 21 Side flange removal
Use screwdriver as lever as shown in figure and remove circlip. Circlip installation position
Right
F160 model
Final drive side

,
Left
Right
Final drive side Final drive side
R200 (mechanical LSD)
3-2 ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY

Front drive shaft (Models Z80T70C, Z80T82F)
Rear drive shaft (Model B100D100)
[Point 11 Securing drive shaft assembly a Protect drive shaft with copper or aluminum plates and
secure in vise. CAUTION: Tighten vise lightly because boots tightened excessively.
may be deformed if vise is
Mating m r k
[Point 21 Slide joint assembly and disassembly (Models Z80T70C and Z80T82F)
Disassembly
Remove boot and pull out shaft. CAUTION: Always replace boot after every disassembly. a Inscribe mating marks on drive shaft and spider assembly
Remove snap ring and detach spider assembly from drive

shaft.
Remove boot assembly from drive shaft. CAUTION: Spider assembly cannot be disassembled.
Part inspection
Part name Shaft Inspection and operation Check drive shaft for runout, cracks and damage. Replace if necessary. If housing roller surface is scratched or worn, check entire spider assembly. Replace housing and spider assembly as set if necessary. If rollers are pitted or scored in rotation direction, replace spider assembly, If serrated parts are deformed or scored, also inspect drive shaft. If worn or damaged, replace both spider assembly and drive shaft. If rollers are scratched or worn, inspect housing. If worn or damaged, replace both spider assembly and housing.
Housing
Spider assembly
Boot and band
Replace if cracked. CAUTION: After removing boot band, always replace with new part. Replace if deformed or damaged.
Other
Assembly
When replacing only spider assembly, select part with same identification number inscribed on slide joint as indicated in following charts. After selecting correct part, assemble unit. CAUTION: When replacing housing, replace as set with spider assembly. Z80T70C (Riaht side)
Identification mark
Part number
Z80T82F (Left side)

I
Identification mark 10
Part number 39720 10V10
Spider
When installing spider assembly, align mating marks and install shaft. Secure spider assembly with snap ring. CAUTION: (1) Before installing spider assembly, mount boot on shaft. (2) Position insertion direction as shown in figure. Apply repair kit grease to spider and sliding parts. Insert parts in housing and apply remaining grease in quantities indicated below.
Model Grease quantity g
(02)
'
Drive shaft
C07-0011C
Z80T70C
Z80T82F
Approx. 190 (6.70) Approx. 155 (5.47)
Must not be pressed in.
Install boot securely in grooves (parts indicated by *) as shown in figure. Set boot length (L) as indicated below. Insert screwdriver in small diameter side, adjust inner and outer pressure of boot to avoid deformation. CAUTION: (1) If boot installation length is shorter than indicated below it may cause boot to break or split. (2) Be careful not to touch the inside surface of boot with end of screwdriver.
Model
Installation length L rnm (in)
Lmr
<7
^
B&
Secure boot band on large and small diameter side of boot. CAUTION: Rotate joint and make sure boot installation position does not change. Ifposition moves, install new boot band.
band
c07-0021 c
[Point 3 Slide joint assembly and disassembly (Model 1 B100D100)
CAUTION: Replace joint assembly if parts are worn or damaged.
Disassembly
0
Remove boot band. CAUTION: Always replace boot band with new part after disassembly. a Remove stopper ring and remove slide joint housing. CAUTION: (1) Always replace stopper ring with new part after disassembly. (2) Stopper ring is used for slide stopper. Remove ring before removing slide joint housing.
Remove snap ring and detach bail cage and steel ball assembly. Remove boot. CAUTION: If boot is cracked and foreign matter is mixed with grease inside, disassemble and inspect ball cage and steel ball assembly.
The ball cage and steel ball assembly should only be disassembied to clean the grease. If the steel bads or other parts are worn or damaged, replace joint assembly. Use screwdriver to remove steel balls one at a time. m Remove inner race from large side of ball cage. CAUTION: When removing steelballs, do not scratch surface of steel balls and inner race contact surface.
0
Clean parts and inspect following items.

Part name Shaft inspection and operation
a Check shaft for runout, cracks and damage. Check threads for damage.
~ p
Check joint rotation and abnormal play in
Joint assembly
axial direction. a Check foreign matter inside joint.

a Check ball contact surface damage or abnor-
Outer race
mal wear.
a Check for deformation of boot installation. a Check for damage or abnormal wear in slidI
Bail cage Steel ball
ing parts. - .
Check for damaae or abnormal wear. Check ball contact surface for scratches or abnormal wear. Check for damage in serration holes. (Check shaft serration holes at same time.)
Inner race
Assembly
a
Using drift [outer diameter 78 mrn (3.07 in), inner diameter 72 mrn (2.83 in)], press-fit plug. Insert inner race in large diameter side of ball cage. 0 Apply grease to cage pocket and assemble 6 bails in cage. A t this time, rotate inserted cage one-half pitch (one-half the width of one drive shaft spline) to position inner race on axis correctly and then install. CAUTION: The inner race can be instatled in either direction.
Install new boot on shaft. Install ball cage and steel ball assembly. CAUTION: (1) Install boot on shaft before assembling steel ball assembly. (2) The ball cage installation direction is shown in figure. Be careful to position cage in correct direction. Secure ball cage and steel ball assembly with snap ring.
. -
/Ball
cage
Shaft
Snap ring
C07-00631
Apply repair kit grease to slide joint housing (* part) in quantity indicated below. Grease quantity: 190 g (6.70 02)
C6 DRWE SHAFT 3. Drive shaft Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
ring
Install stopper ring in slide joint housing. CAUTION: After installation, pull shafl out and make sure slide joint assembly and stopper rlng engage correctly.
Install boot securely in grooves (parts indicated by *) as shown in figure. CAUTION: Remove grease altached to boot installation surface (parts indicated by in figure). Grease on surface may cause boot to slip
off.
Set boot length (L) as indicated below. Insert screwdriver in small diameter side, adjust inner and outer pressure of boot to avoid deformation. CAUTION: { ) IIf boot installation length is shorter than dimension indicated below it may cause boot to break or split. (2) Be careful not to touch the inside surface of boot with end of screwdriver. Installation length L: 103.5 mm (4.07 in)
Secure large and small side of boot with new boot band. CAUTION: Rotate joint and make sure boot installation position does not change. If position moves, install boot band one more time.
[Point 41 Fixed joint assembly and disassembly (Models Z80T7OC9Z8OT82F, B1 OODIOO)

CAUTION: Replace joint assembly if pads are worn or damaged.
Disassembly
Remove boot band and remove boot from housing. Using drive shaft joint puller, remove housing assembly from shaft.
C6 DRIVE SHAFT 3. Drive shaft Removal and lnstal~ation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
CAUTION: (1) Screw drive shaft joint puller more than 30 mm (1-18 in) into housing threads. (2) If removal of housing assembly has been attempted more than five times and assembly cannot be detached, replace drive shafi assembly.
Remove circlip and snap ring from shaft. Secure fixed joint assembly in vise. CAUTION: Place copper or aluminum plates on side of assembly to prevent damage before tightening vise. 0 Clean off old grease. Using brass shaft, rotate ball cage and remove steel balls from small holes in cage.
After steel balls in four small holes have been removed, then remove steel balls from two large holes. CAUTION: The ball cage may break if steel balls are removed from large holes first.
Align outer race protrusion in large hole of ball cage. Remove ball cage and inner race from outer race at same time.
Align inner race protrusion in large hole of ball cage and remove inner race from chamfered side of ball cage.
Clean parts and check following items.
-
Part
0
Description Joint rotational condition, abnormal play in axial direction Foreign matter inside joint
Fixed joint assembly
1
Outer race Ball cage Steel balls
Damage or abnormal wear in ball contact su dace, 0 Damage to drive shaft threads rn Boot installation deformation Damage or abnormal wear in sliding surfaces
1a
Damaae or abnormal wear Damage or abnormal wear to bat1 contact surface Damage to serration holes (Check drive shaH serration holes at same time.)
1
Inner race
Assembly Coat outer race ball contact surface, ball cage sliding parts, inner race ball contact surface with repair kit grease. Install inner race in ball cage. CAUTION: Check that the installation direction of the inner race and ball cage (refer to figure) is correct. Install ball cage and inner race in outer race. Install steel balls in ball cage. CAUTION: Install steel balls in reverse sequence of disassembly. First install steel balls in the two large holes and then install remaining balls one at a time in the four small holes. Insert repair kit grease from inner race serration holes.
r
Part Outer race ball contact surface (A) Ball cage sliding parts (6) Inner race ball contact surface (C) inner race serration holes (D)
1 1 1
I
Grease quantity g (02) Approx. I 0 (0.35) each, total 30 [1.061 .
Install boot with new boot band on drive shaft. Install snap ring and circlip on drive shaft. Install nut on fixed joint assembly and tap with wooden hammer to press-fit on drive shaft. CAUTION: Circlip must be inserted in shaft groove securely.
Must wt b pressed in.
Apply remaining repair kit grease to inside of housing from large opening of boot.
Model Z80l70C Z80T82F BlOODlOO Grease quantity g
(02)
Approx. 120 (4.23)

Approx. 120 (4.23)
Approx. I80 (6.35)
CAUTION: Remove grease from fixed joint boot installation surface (locations indicated by * in figure). The boot may come off if there is grease on the boot installation surface. Install boot securely ~n grooves (locations indicated in figure). Set boot length (L) as indicated below and secure with boot band. CAUTION: (1) If boot installation lenglh is shorter lhan dimenision indicated below it may cause boot to break or split. (2) Be careful not to touch the inside surface of boot with end of screwdriver.
Model
Z80T70C
Installation length mm (in)

90.5
- 92.5 (3.563 - 3.642)
Check boot installation. Rotate joint as shown in figure and check that boot installation position does not move. If position moves, install boot band one more time.
M t w inwe.
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS When installing each rubber bushing, final tightening must be carried out with vehicle on ground in
unladen condition. C l e a n off all oil from rubber parts thoroughly because it may lower durability. Use flare wrench to remove brake piping. Use flare torque wrench (special service tool: GG9431 0000) to remove brake piping. Use flare nut wrench for removal and installation of steering piping flare nuts. Check wheel alignment when servicing suspension parts.
Rei -quired tools
Name
Remark
Brake tube torque wrench GG9431 0000
Tightening brake tube flare nuts
Strut attachment ST3565 2000
Removing coil springs
Slide hammer
Removing hub outer bearings
SpeciaLI Attachment servic~ e KV401 04100 tools
Same as above
Already lescribed
Same as above
Bearing puller ST3305 1001
Same as above
--
Drift ST3070 1000 Drift bar ST3532 5000 a: 61.5 mm (2.421 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1-61 In) dia.
Removing wheel (unit) bearing outer race
Drift KV401 51 10 a: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia. b: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. Drift ST3340 0001 a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 47 mm (1.85 In) dia. Drift KV401 04710 a: 76.2 mm (3.000 in) dia. b: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. CCK gauge attachment KV991 040SO Specie @ KV991 04010 Plate assembly servic~ @ KV991 04020 Adapter A tool [outer diameter 72 mm (2.83 in)] @ KV991 04030 Adapter B [outer diameter 65 mm (2.56 in)] (g) KV991 04040 Adapter C [outer diameter 57 m m (2.24 in)] @ KV991 04050 Adapter D [outer diameter 53.4 mm (2.102 in)] Drift KV401 05220 a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia. b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia. Flange wrench KV101 09900 a: 100 mm (3.94 in) b: 54 mm (2.13 in) Description Remark Vheel hub and outer >caring installation
Installing knuckle spindle and wheel hub Removing,and installing tension rod bushings
removing and installing ension rod bushings nstalling wheel (unit) nearing outer race
Already lescribed Inspecting and measuring wheel alignment
Installing wheel (unit) bearing outer race
Tightening wheel bearing lock nut
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND A X L ~

Name
1
1
Description
Remark
!
Removing and installing coil springs
Spring compressor HT7178 0000

COO-0007
CommerPitman arm puller cia1 serHT7256 0000 vice tools
Removing side rod and lower ball joint

COO-0231
Already escribed
Ball joint remover HT7275 0000
Removing suspension lower ball joint bolts
Toe-in gauge
L
Side slip tester
1. Summary
Specifications
Engine Description Suspension type Multi-link independent suspension 1 1 (0.04*0.04) Camber Wheel alignment (unladen vehicle) Caster
I
-Orn55' 45'
3O40' 2~45' 15"25'z t 45'
1 King pin inclination angle

Side slip (reference)
mm (in)
Extension side
N (kg, jb) Compression side
-5 to 5 (-0.20 to 0-20)
Shock absorber
Damping force [at 0.3 m (1.0 ft)/s] Spring constant Free length rightlleft
1,746 (178, 392) 500 (51, 112) 23.5 (2,4, 134) 405 (15.94)
Nlmm (kglmm, Iblin)
mm (in)
Coil spring
1 Coil average diameter

Line diameter Number of active coils
mm (in) 110 (4.33) [low side 80 (3.1511 mm (in) 12.3 (0.484) 7.92
mm (in)
Tension rod diameter Stabilizer outer diameter (non-solid)
mrn (in)
Inspection specifications
Description Wheel alignment Steering angle Standard Value Refer to "Specifications". 380 + 1'
-3'
inner wheel Outer wheel N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
31"
Wheel bearing lock nut tightening torque Wheel bearing axial end play
235 314 (24 32,174
- 231)
mrn (in)
mm (in) Description Swing torque (spring balance conversion value) 8.6 N (kd. Ib) . -- . Sliding torque N-m (kg-rn, fi-lb) Axial end play mm (in)
0.05 (0.0020) max. 126.5 (4.98) Lower link ball joint Suspension lower ball joint
Toe ore-adjustment side rod length
- 63.7
(0.9 6.5, 2.0
- 14.3)
I
6.9
- 50.0 (0.7 - 5.1, 1.5 - 11.2)
Lower link ball joint and suspension lower ball joint
0.5
- 3.4 (0.05 - 0.35, 0.4 - 2.5)

0 (0)

2-1 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE INSPECTION
Shake left and right front tires. Check tires, wheel bearing and king pin bearings for looseness. Rotate tire by hand and check for abnormal noise. a Replace if there is looseness or damage. CAUTION: There may be a small amount of play in the upper link but this is not abnormal. If there is axial play in locations other than upper link, check axle end play. End play standard value: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) max. The normal preload adjustment is not necessary because a unit bearing is usedIf problem is found in inspection, disassemble and analyze problem to determine cause.
Check suspension parts (-<) for looseness and make sure cotter pins (@) are inserted.
Check ball joints for grease leaks and dust cover for damage.
2-2 SHOCK ABSORBER OIL LEAK INSPECTION a Check shock absorber for oil leakage. Check for fatigue, damage or deformation. 0 The front shock absorber cannot be disassembled. Replace entire shock absorber assembly if necessary.
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation (Cont'd)

2-3 WHEEL ALIGNMENT INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Operation inspection
a
a
a
Is tire wear and inflation pressure normal? (Refer to C9 WHEELS AND TIRES.) I wheel bearing axial end play normal? s Is there deformation in load wheel? Is there looseness in suspension ball joint and tower link ball joint? Is shock absorber operation normal? Are axle and suspension parts loose or damaged? Is vehicle posture normal? Is there damage, cracks or deformation in suspension link? Is vehicle unladen*? * Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Operation procedures
I
1
(1) Side slip
Wheel alignment
pin inclination angle
(1) Side slip distance inspection . o Check side slip distance. If it is within standard specification, wheel alignment can be considered to be normal. CAUTION: This can only be considered only when operational vertical stability is incorrect and there are no abnormalities in pre-operaiional inspection. Front side slip distance standard value: -5 to 5 mm (-0.20 to 0.20 in)
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation
(Cont'd)
(2) Camber, caster, king pin angle inspection and measurement
If vehicles equipped with aluminum road wheels or if the alignment gauge installation surface (hub end) is more concave than road wheels, then use the CCK gauge attachment (special service tool: KV991 040SO) to perform the operations described below.
Set turning radius gauge on front wheels with vehicle on level ground.
1
Set rear wheels on stand that is same height as turning radius gauge.
Remove the wheel nuts and center caps. Screw the guide bolts on hub bolts as shown in figure.
I
4
Install adapter B on attachment. Note 1: Screw nuts until adapter is mounted securely on attachment. Tighten guide nuts uniformly until adapter is seated securely on aluminum wheel end surface. Note 2: Do not tighten nuts until springs are pressed completely down.
Set alignment gauge on CCK gauge attachment and perform measurement.
Description Camber
Specification
055' 45'
Caster
King pin angle
1 RB26DETT: 3'40'2 45'

1525' 45'
Measure toe-in.
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation (Cont'd)

(3) Toe-in inspection and adjustment
Jack up front of vehicle and set on stands. Draw a base line on tread surface of tires with chalk.
- --
After lowering front of vehicle, move it up and down to eliminate friction.
Set steering wheel in straight-ahead position.
Adjust toe-in gauge to wheel center height and measure distance from standard line.
Measure dimensions A and B at same height as hub center as shown in figure and calculate toe-in. Toe-in = A B mm (in)
Toe-in
(A-B) rnm (in)
Toe-in standard value: 11 mm (0.04 0.04 in)
When toe-in is out of specification

coa-0009
Loosen lock nut as shown in figure. Adjust toe-in by varying the length of steering tie-rods. CAUTION: (1) When adjusting steering tierods, turn the tie-rods the same distance forwards or backwards.
(2) When replacing tie-rods, set the

length to the specification indicated below and adjust toe-in. (3) When tightening lock nuts, secure tie rod with another wrench. (4) After adjustment, the tie-rod outer ball socket must face straight ahead.
Tie-rod standard length "L" dimension: 126.5 mm (4.98 in)
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation
(Cont'd)
(4) Front wheel turning angle Set wheels in straight-ahead position and then move vehicle forward until front wheels rest on turning radius gauge properly. Rotate steering wheels all the way right and left and measure turning angleStandard value Inner wheel Outer wheel
3 ' Ti.8 32"
CAUTION: Turning angle is set by the stroke length of steering gear, and cannot be adjusted.
(5) Trouble diagnosis

Camber angle, caster angle and king pin inclination angles are not within specification range.
4
Adjust toe-in and measure again. Within specification
Outside specification
i
End Within specification
1
Replace lower link and measure again.
I
I
I ^
Adjust toe-in.
Outside specification
1 +
Replace side link and measure again.
T End
T
Adjust toe-in.
I
Item Camber
Caster
Specification
-ffS6' 45'
RB26DEm 340' 45'
1525' 45'
King pin angle
3. Part Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly

3-1 FRONT SUSPENSION
CAUTION: (1) When tightening links, first tighten temporarily and then tighten again under unladen condition*. * Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand 601s and mats in designated posftions. (2) Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper assembly is removed.
[Point 11 Stabilizer Installation

The stabilizer uses a pillow-ball type connecting rod system. Observe following precautions when setting ball joint position during assembly. CAUTION: The distance "A" must be set so pillow-ball and connecting rod are perpendicular to stabilizer bar as shown in figure.
@ Always replace
after every dieassemuy.
0
RI:N-m (kg-",
ft-IM
\/fewfrom atme.
Apply torque to inner nut on third link side and then tighten. insert seating nut in lock hole on stabilizer side and tighten.
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE 3. Part Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) [Point 21 Shock absorber assembly removal and
installation
Removal
Remove shock absorber fixing nuts from body when shock is extended. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut. Remove nuts from lower part of shock absorber (installed in third link).
Installation
Position smal t diameter side of shock absorber lower bushing so it faces front of vehicle. Assembly is reverse of disassembly sequence. (The figure is cross-section of left shock absorber viewed from above.)
la'
H
Alquiasses!p pue Alquiassy (2)
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE 3. Part Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
[Point 11 Coil spring removal and installation
Inscribe marks.
Removal Before removal, inscribe mating marks on shock absorber and coil spring as shown in figure.
COa-0611B
Secure attachment (special service tool) to shock absorber assembly and place in vise. Use a spring compressor (commercial service tool) and compress coil spring. a Do not damage piston rod. Remove piston rod lock nut as shown in figure. CAUTION: Compress coil spring. Check that coil spring is free between upper sheet and lower sheet and remove piston rod lock nut.
Installation
Pay attention to vertical direction and assemble spring. CAUTION: Make sure the small diameter spring end faces down and large diameter end is on top.
Check that spring is seated securely in spring seat, Position spring so upper side (body side) and lower side (third link side) are at 6 ' angle as shown in figure. 0 CAUTION: If the angle is not correct the shock absorber cannot be Installed in vehicle.
[Point 21 Upper link installation

Part identification: R = right side L = left side
Check that directional marks are positioned correctly for upper link installation. Always install upper link with 'A' side facing axle and unmarked side facing body. CAUTION: Upper link bushing cannot be disassembled.
Install on axle s i b .
[Point 31 Lower link and tension rod removal and installation and assembly sequence Removal
0
Loosen nuts at positions indicated by arrow marks in figure. When suspension is not compressed (rebound): sion member connection.
Installation
rn
(T) Temporarily tighten lower link and tension rod. (2) Temporarily tighten tension rod bushing and front suspen(D Temporarily tighten lower link and suspension member
lower ball joint connection.
@ Temporarily tighten lower link and suspension lower ball

joint connection. When vehicle is unladen, tighten nuts to specified torque in sequence @ , 0 , (T), 0 .
Press
[Point 41 Tension rod bushing replacement
rn
rn
COS-061dB
To replace tension rod bushing, place drift [inner diameter 66 mm (2.60 in), outer diameter 75 mrn (2.95 in)] below rod and drift [inner diameter 25 to 55 mm (0.98 to 2.17 in), outer diameter 62 mm (2.44 in)] on top and remove or install in press. Align bushing arrow mark in opposite direction from rod and then assemble. Reference: Use the following special service tools. Upper drift: KV401 01600 Lower drift: KV401 04710
[Point 51 Third link inspection and removal and installation Inspection

The kingpin bearing installed in third link usually does not require maintenance. Do not disassemble bearing unless there is a problem.
Removal
Remove shock absorber. Remove brake hoses. Remove speed sensor piping in vehicles equipped with anti-skid system. Loosen kingpin lower nut. Loosen third link and upper link connections and remove.
C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE 3 Part Removal and Installation, Assembly and . Disassembly (Cont'd)
Installation
Insert third link and kingpin assembly in knuckle spindle and tighten lower nuts to specified torque. Connect third link and upper link. Install brake hoses. Install speed sensor piping in vehicles equipped with anti-skid system. Install shock absorber. King pin lower nut tightening torque: 147 186 N-m (15 19 kg-m, 108 137 81 - Ib) [Point 61 Inspection <3) Coil spring Replace if cracked or deformed. (5) Front suspension member Replace if cracked or deformed. (3) Third link If third link is cracked or deformed, replace kingpin bearing assembly. @ Lower link Replace if cracked or deformed.
(S) Suspension tower and lower link ball joints

Use Pitman arm puller (commercial service tool) to separate suspension lower ball joint and lower the lower link ball joint from lower link as shown in figure.
Swing torque inspection

Specification (spring balance reading): N (kg, Ib) Suspension lower ball joint 6.9 50.0 (0.7 5.1, 1.5 11.2) Lower link lower ball joint 8.8 63.7 (0.9 6.5, 2.0 14.3) CAUTION: Swing more than 10 times by hand before measurement. Measure the spring balance at height of ball stud cotter pin ball.
Sliding torque inspection

Specification: N-rn (kg-m, ft-lb) Suspension lower ball joint 0.5 3.4 (0.05 0.35, 0.4 2.5) Lower link lower ball joint 0.5 3.4 (0.05 0.35, 0.4 2.5) CAUTION: Swing more than 10 times by hand before measurement.
Axial end play inspection Specification: r m (in) n
Suspension lower ball joint 0 (0) Lower link lower ball Joint 0 (0) If measurement value is outside standard specification range, replace ball joints.
3-2 FRONT AXLE
(1) Removal and installation, assembly and disassembly
Baffle plate
Baffle plate
Knuckle spindle
Snap ring Wieal bearing
Wheel hub Cotter pin

Adjusting cap
VMheel bearing lock nut

Lock washer
Grease seal
O n
/ /
ISJ
Additional work required Renwe and install: Brake caliper assembly

Side rod, lower ball joint and lower link separation [Point
0 : Always replace after every disassembly.

:Apply Nissan MP special grease No. 2.
' Replace as set ;
fr w
Third link separation
"
Inspect each part [Pant 4 1
CH-225
[Point I]Separation of side rod, lower ball joint and lower link
Place Pitman arm puller (commercial service tool) as shown in figure and separate side rod and suspension lower bait joint, CAUTION: The knuckle spindle is made of aluminum and scratches easily. Pay attention not lo tap when using Pitman arm puller for removal.
0
Use Pitman arm puller (commercial service tool) to separate suspension lower ball joint and lower link.
[Point 21 Wheel bearing removal and installation a The wheel bearing usually does not require measurement.
If any of the following problems are noted, replace wheel bearing assembly (including grease seal and snap ring), (T) Wheel bearing makes growling noise during vehicle operation. (2) When bearing lock nut is tightened to specified torque, wheel bearing drags or turns roughly when hub is turned by hand. (5) When bearing is removed from hub.
Removal a Protect knuckle hub with copper plates and rags and secure
it in vise. Place attachment (special service tool) on knuckle hub bolts. Use sliding hammer (special service tool) to separate knuckle spindle.
(D Place bearing puller (special service tool), @ bearing replacer (special service tool) as shown in figure. Tighten on wheel hub and remove outer bearing.
Hydraulic press
Remove inner grease sea! with screwdriver. CAUTION: Do not scratch knuckle spindle. Remove snap ring with snap ring pliers. Place drift (special service tool 61.5 mm dia.) against drift bar (special service tool) as shown in figure. Press out inner bearing and remove bearing outer race.
Hydraulic press
Installation
Install new snap ring securely in groove on outside of knuckle spindle. Place wheel bearing outer race horizontally on knuckle spindle and press-fit with drift (special service tool). Stop insertion when bearing contacts snap ring on outer side. Install new snap ring securely in groove on inside of knuckle spindle. Install inner and outer bearings and inner and outer grease seals inside wheel.
Hydraulic press
fl
Place wheel hub horizontally on block. Place drift [special service tool: inner diameter 46 mm (1.81 in), outer diameter 60 rnm (2.36 in)] on knuckle spindle as shown in figure and press-fit assembly.
COB
Assemble drive shaft and install in vehicle, Tighten lock nuts to specified torque. Lock nut standard torque: 235 314 N-m (24 32 kg-m, 174 231 ft-lb) Insert cotter pins and bend to secure.
[Point 3 Suspension lower ball joint bolt removal and 1 installation
Removal
The length below bolt head is serrated just like hub bolts. Use ball joint remover (commercial service tool) and remove bolts. CAUTION: Do not scratch knuckle spindle when pounding out bolts with hammer.
Installation
a
Align serration of bolt below head with knuckle spindle serration hole and tap in with brass shaft.
a
Inspect all parts and replace if the following problems are noted. @ Wheel bearing is damaged, seized, rusted or does not turn easily. @ Front hub is cracked. (Check with dyeing test damage detection method.) d) Knuckle spindle is deformed, dented, cracked (check with dyeing test damage detection method) or threads are damaged.
C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE
Tools required
Name Drift KV401 04710 a: 76.2 mm (3.000 in) dia. b: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. Application Remark
Axle housing dust seal removal and installation

COO-0195
Special service tool
Already described Drift ST2786 1000 a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia. b: 52 rnrn (2.05 in) dia. Axle housing bushing (shock absorber) removal and installation
1. Summary
Specifications
Description Suspension type Toe-in Wheel alignment (unladen vehicle)
. .. .-
Camber Side slip distance (reference) Damping force [at 0.3 rn (1.0 ft)/s] Spring constant Free length Expansion side Compression side
Engine
RB26DETT
1
mm (in) rnm (in) rnm (in)
Multi-link independent suspension
2 2 (0.08 0.08)
-1 '05' 30'
-5 to 5 (-0.20 to 0.20)
Shock absorber
1,108 (113, 249) 402 (41. 90) 26.5 (2.7, 151)
N/mm (kglmrn, Iblin)
mm (in)
mrn (in) mm (in)
Coil spring
Coil center diameter Wire diameter Number of active coils
3.58) 345 (1 100 (3.94) [lower side 90 (3.54)l

1 -
9 -
11.8 (0.465) 7.29
Stabilizer outer diameter (non-solid)
mm (in)
25.4 (1.000)
Item Wheel alignment Wheel bearing lock nut tightening torque Wheel bearing axial end play N-m (kpm, ft-lb) mm (in) Swing torque (spring balance converN (. k- ~ Ib) ,. sion) Suspension ball joint Sliding torque Axial end play Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) rnm (in)
N-rn (kg-rn, ft-lb)
Specification Refer to "Specifications".
206 275 (21 - 28, 152 - 203) 0 (0)

7.8 54.9 (0.8 5.6, 1.8 12.3)
0.5-3.4 (0.05- 0.35, 0.4-2.5) 0 (0)

-
78 - 93 (8.0 - 9.5, 58 - 69)
0 8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE

2-1 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Inspection
0
Check axle and suspension parts for looseness, wear or damage. Shake each rear wheel and check for noise and excessive play. If loose, retighten to specified torque. Replace all damaged parts.
Adjustment
0
Tighten rear suspension parts (4 and check if cotter pins (+)are inserted.
Check ball joints for grease leakage and dust cover for cracks or other damage.
2-2 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION

0
If there is any axial end play, tighten wheel nuts to specified torque and check axle end play again. End play standard value: 0 mm (0 in) A unit bearing is used so no preload adjustment is normally required. If any problem is noted, check axle.
C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation

2-3 SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION
Check shock absorber for grease leakage. Check for fatigue, cracks, deformation o other damage. r The shock absorber cannot be disassembled. Replace entire unit if necessary.

Inspection before operation
Check tires for wear or improper inflation. Refer to C9 ROAD WHEEL AND TIRES. Check if wheel bearing axial end play is within specification. a Check wheels for deformation. Check suspension ball joint for play. Check i f shock absorbers operate properly. Check axle and suspension for looseness or deformation. a Check if vehicle posture is normal. Check suspension link for damage, cracks or deformation. Check that vehicle is unladen*. * (Unladen: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Operation sequence
Rear wheel alignment
(1) Camber
(1) Camber inspection and adjustment

Move vehicle so rear wheels rest on turning radius gauge correctly and check that vehicle is horizontal.
1 Raise front wheels on stand so they are the same height as rear
wheels.
1 Attach alignment gauge to wheel and measure camber. (Note)

--
Note: The same attachment can be used for both the front and rear wheels. Specification: If camber is not within specification: Camber: -0'55'*301 Adjust camber.
I
Jr
i
Turn adjusting bolt on upper link (rear side) suspension member to adjust camber. Adjustment must always be made after camber and toe-in adjustment.
C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Preparation (Cont'd)

(2) Toe-in inspection and adjustment
Jack up rear of vehicle and draw a base line on the tread.
4
After lowering rear of vehicle, move it up and down to eliminate friction.
'f )
^
Frm Set toe-in gauge at same height as wheel center and measure reference line distance.
Toe-in = A
- B mm (in)
Toe-in standard value: 2 i2 rnrn (0.08 0.08 in)

If not within specification:
1 Turn lower link (rear side) suspension member (adjusting bolt) to

adjust toe-in.
4
For models equipped with SUPER HICAS system, loosen lock nut and turn power cylinder lower link toe adjustment rod as shown in figure to adjust toe-in. CAUTION: (1) When adjusting lower link, turn left and right rods same distance. (2) When replacing lower link rod, Set rod length as Indicated below to adjust toe-in.
For models equipped with SUPER H1CAS system, set power cylinder lower link length to following specification before toe-in adjustment. Lower link standard dimension (L) : 309.4 rnm (12.18 in)
C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE
3. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly

3-1 REAR SUSPENSION
(1) Removal and installation from vehicle
98-118t10-a72-87)
with SUPER-HICAS system
[01 :N*m (kg-(n. ft-lb)
CAUTION: (1) Tighten links temporarily on vehicle and then tighten again with vehicle in unladen condition. (2) Do not press on brake pedal when brake caliper assembly and brake drum are removed.
[Point 11 Stabilizer installation

a
Assemble stabilizer on connecting rods as shown in figure.
C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE 3. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
[Point 21 Rear shock absorber installation
Install shock absorber with large inner diameter lower bushing side facing outside of vehicle. (The figure on left is a cross-section of left side shock absorber viewed from above.)
[Point 31 Upper link (front) removal and installation Removal

To remove upper link (front), first remove bolts from upper link (rear) rear housing then remove bolts from upper link (front) rear housing. Remove suspension member. CAUTION: Do not remove link bushing from link.
Installation
Assembly is reverse sequence from disassembly.
[Point 41 Upper link (rear) removal and installation Removal

Remove lower side of rear shock absorber. Remove bolts from upper link (rear) (on both rear housing and suspension member). Press shock absorber towards inside of vehicle and lower it without touching rear housing. CAUTION: Place cloth on drive shaft boot to protect it from damage during removal and installation.
Installation
0
Assembly is the reverse sequence from disassembly.
[Point 51 Lower arm (A arm) removal and installation
Removal
Remove lower side of stabilizer connecting rod and bracket. Remove drive shaft. a Remove suspension member bolts. 0 Use ball joint remover (commercial service tool) to for rear housing separation. CAUTION: (1) Do not damage ball joint boot. (2) Do not remove link bushing from link.
Installation
Assembly is the reverse sequence from disassembly. CAUTION: Check wheel alignment after link removal and installation.
(2) Rear suspension disassembly
w*.
, . h
.Ball joint cap
fl
Power cylinder assembly
kr . 12
---
After installing each suspension part, check and adjust

wheel alignment
0 0
Make sure bushing and washer are installed in correct

direction. Do not let great38 or oil cartact bushing. When stabilizer and link are installed, tighten parts with vehicle on level ground in unladen condition. Do not replace suspension side bushing of upper link and lower arms {link). Only replace axle bushing when neces-
sary. The suspension member insulator cannot be disassembled
rq
Additional work required Install: Exhaust tube assembly Propeller shaft Parking brake cable Brake calipers Inspect each part [Point 2 1 :Always replace after every cisassembly. :h (kg-m ft-l b)
[Point I ] Coil spring removal and installation Removal
0
Install attachment (special service tool) to strut assembly and secure in vice. Using spring compressor (commercial service tool), compress coil spring.
a Remove piston rod lock nut without damaging piston rod. CAUTION: Compress coil spring. Make sure it is free between the upper sheet and lower sheet and then remove piston rod lock nut.
Installation
0
Check that spring is set securely in spring sheets and gradually loosen spring compressor (commercial service tool).
coil
[Point 21
inspection
(D Coil spring
Check for cracks and deformation and replace if necessary.
(2) Rear suspension member

If suspension member is cracked or deformed or member insulator is damaged, replace member assembly.
(3) Upper and lower links

0
If upper and lower links are deformed or cracked or bushing is damaged, replace each link. Measure ball joint swing torque, sliding torque and axial end play. The measurements are the same as for the front suspension lower.
<3) Suspension lower ball joint

a
3-2 REAR AXLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
Vehicles equipped with SUPERHICAS I
Vttwel bearing lock nut [01 206 275 (21 28,152 203) Lock washer
Insunc.
Cotter pin
Axle housing
Baffle plate
I * Q flange wheel
--.
\.J
I Wwal hub [Point 3 1
bearing [Point 31
Dust seal,
d : : A
,.~y^\ fl
. :
Brake disk Wieel hub
Adjusting cap
Cotter pin
-Meel
bearing lock nut
la+ wheel bearing

Additional work required Remove and install: -..Brake calipers [Point I ] Axle housing ball joint separation (vehicles e@ SUPER HICAS system) [Point 21 Shock atember unit Inspect all installed parts [Point 8]
Baffle plate
:N-m (kg-ra it-lb)
I Nissan MP specie! grease No. 2 :Apply

*Replace as set
CAUTION: (1) Tiflhton boto in c r i n - c r o ~ pctkrn 2-3-par tlimos. (4 Condition* are ~ m ae*for WS sbndcrd bote. Pay Itentio not la mk* m t e f t b bou trengt v a r h . C09-03556
[Point 11 Brake caliper separation
Remove caliper from axle housing. Set it where it will not cause interference. (It is not necessary to remove brake cable.) CAUTION: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper assembly is removed.
[Point 21 Lower link and ball joint separation

Use Pitman arm puller (commercial service tool) to separate axle housing ball joint and lower link.
[Point 3 Wheel bearing removal and installation 1

a
Wheel bearing with flange does not require maintenance. If any of the following symptoms are noted, replace wheel bearing assembly (including inner and outer grease seals.) (3) Wheel bearing makes growling noise during operation. @ Wheel bearing drags or turns roughly when hub is turned by hand after bearing lock nut is tightened to specified torque. @ After wheel bearing is removed from hub.
Removal
Separate wheel bearing with flange and wheel hub from axle housing and wheel hub assembly. Set wheel bearing in press as shown in figure. Use drift (special service tool) to remove bearing. Replace bearing assembly with new unit. Do not reuse old bearing.
Set bearing replacer (special service tool) on inner race remaining on hub as shown in figure. Using puller (commercial service tool), remove inner race. CAUTION: (1) Never use the inner race remaining on hub again. (2) Discard old wheel bearing assembly. Replace with new part. (The grease seal is not available as an individual part).
C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE 3. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) a Hydraulic press
Installation
Leave hub on block, and position drift (special service tool) and wheel bearing on flange as shown in figure. Use hydraulic press to press-tit bearing.
[Point 41 Axle housing dust seal removal and installation Removal

Using drift (special service tool) and hammer, press out dust sea!.
Installation
Using drift (special service. tool), press-fit dust seat with hydraulic press. CAUTION: Coat dust seal lip with Nissan MP special grease No. 2.
[Point 51
Hub bolt replacement
Removal
0
To replace hub bolts, first remove brake caliper assembly, disk rotor and brake shoes. Operation can then be performed on vehicle. CAUTION: Do not remove hub and wheel bearing. a Use ball joint remover (commercial service tool) as shown in figure. CAUTION: Do not hit hub bolts with hammer. (This will apply impact to wheel bearings.)
-Washer
Hub bolt
Installation
To press-fit hub bolts, insert washers as shown in figure and tighten bolts. When replacing a single hub bolt, use new bolt with same identification number.
Hub bolt identification number
a
Wieel hub
(R, D,
etc.)
43222 06R61
CAUTION: After replacing hub bolt, check that disk runout is 0.07 mm (0.0028 in) maximum.
[Point 61 Axle housing bushing removal and installation Bushing removal and installation precautions
a Do not secure axle housing mechanical unit directly in vise. Protect housing with wood panels or rags before tightening vise. Install attachment described in previous operation.
Unit: mn (in)
Removal
a Attach drift and socket (21 mm) on outer shell of as shown in figure and use arm bushing remover (special service tool) to remove bushing.
Installation
Make sure that axle housing bore is free from scratches or deformities before pressing bushing into it. Lubricate bushing with detergent. Set arm bushing remover (special service tool), insert from direction of axle housing bore chamfering and press-fit bushing flush with end surface.
a
cuing attachment
Axle housing bushing (shock absorber) removal and installation
Removal
Set drift (special service tool) on lower side of axle housing as shown in figure. Set drift [inner diameter 37 mm (1.46 in), outer diameter 45 mm (1.77 in)] on upper side and press out bushing. CAUTION: Check bushing position before removal.
Installation
Install bushing using same tools as for removal. Assembly is reverse sequence from disassembly.
L Hydraulic press
-Q Front
[Point 71 Axle housing and lower link ball joint separation Removal
0
Axle
Remove ball joint seal cover. Set drift [inner diameter 37 mm (1.46 in), outer diameter 40 mm (1.57 in)] on rear side of axle housing as shown in figure. Set drift [inner diameter 23 rnm (0.91 in), outer diameter 27 rnm (1.06 in)] on front side of axle housing as shown in figure and press out ball joint.
0 & Hydraulic press aaa,
Installation
a
Ball
housing Front
C15-00370
Set drift [inner diameter 29 mm (1.14 in), outer diameter 35 rnm (1.38 in)] on rear side of axle housing as in removal. Set drift [inner diameter 31 mm (1.22 in), outer diameter 41 mm (1.61 in)] on front side of axle housing and press-fit ball joint . Install seal cover.
[Point 81 Inspection a Inspect all parts and replace if following items are noticed. (D Check ball bearings for damage, seizing, rust and rotation. (2) Check wheel hub for cracks. (Use dyeing damage analysis
method.)
@ Check axle housing for dents, deformities and cracks. (Use )

dyeing damage analysis method.)
C9 WHEELS AND TIRES,

L
1. Summary
Soecifications
- ---
Wheels Rim size

16 x 8 JJ 16 x 6 1/2JJ (tor snow)
Material (color)
Offset mm (in)
Hub bolts P.C.D. rnm (in) x number of bolts
Hub hole diameter
Suitable tire size

225150R16 92V 205/55R16 88V (for snow)
Remarks
mm (in)
Models equipped with RB26DETT Models equipped with RB26DETT
Aluminum (silver)
30 (1.18)
114.3 (4.50) x 5
66 (2.60)
16 x 4T (spare tire for emergency use)
Steel (yellow)
20 (0.79)
T125/90D16
2. Wheels
2-1 INSTALLATION ON VEHICLE
An arrow mark on tire as shown in figure indicates that a directional tread is used. The tire must be mounted so it turns in the indicated direction.
Place holes in middle of wheel (hub holes) on bolts and tighten to install.
This surface is
Tighten lug nuts by hand. CAUTION: The tapered side of the lug nut must face the wheel. Rotate tire by hand and tighten again by hand.
C9 WHEELS AND TIRES 2. Wheels (Cont'd)

a
While rotating tire and changing position, tighten with tool (If wheel is loose, tighten slightly less than specified torque until wheel does not move.)
Lower vehicle to ground and tighten to specified torque. (Tighten wheel evenly in criss-cross pattern 2 - 3 times.) Wheel tightening torque: 98 118 N-m (10 12 kg-m, 72 87 ft-lb) CAUTION: When using straight cone to balance wheels, check that vertl cal installation position on vehicle is the same when set 01 balancer.
1 !I
fr
"
"
Check wheel runout.
1
h
Lateral runout limit 0.8 mm (0.031 in) rnax.
Vertical runout limit 0.5 mm (0.020 in) max.
Steel wheel
Front side
Aluminum wheel
0.3 mm (0.012 in) max.
-c^
Disk
Press in to set approx. gap
2-2 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT

Use straight cone type attachment to adjust the wheel ba ance. a Be sure to attach cone to rear side of aluminium and stet wheels at this time with wheel balancer. a When using regular taper cone to adjust steel wheel, sue port wheel from front. CAUTION: (1) Always use genuine Nissan balance weights. (2) Always use plastic coated balance weights for aluminui wheels. . (3) Do not reuse balance weights. (4) Always use plastic hammer to hit weights.
a
Unit g ~ltowable remaining unbalance amount
(0:
'..-Balance weight
Wheel
r-ift-fltssi
~Ynamic (on ear) Static (on ear) steel wheel Aluminum wheel
10 (0.35) max. (one side)
20 (0.71) max.
60 (2.12)
Balance weight maximum correction amount
60 (2.12)
C9 WHEELS AND TIRES 2. Wheels (Cont'd)

2-3 ALUMINUM ROAD WHEEL INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS
0
a
Sheet Nut
a
a a
Nissan aluminum wheels are specifically designed for a particular vehicle and should not be used other vehicles. Use genuine Nissan taper nuts because the steel sheet is press-fitted in the wheel disk holes. Always balance wheels before use. Only use genuine Nissan plastic coated weights for wheel balancing. Be careful during balancing because aluminum wheels scratch easily. Do not use abrasive cleanser or wire brush to clean off dirt. Only use neutral detergent for cleaning. Avoid using high-speed car washing equipment. After driving on roads which have salt deposits to prevent icing and roads close to the ocean, wash off accumulated dirt with water. Wash off back side of wheel when tires are exchanged or washing bottom of vehicle. Wipe off dirt and foreign matter from hub surface before installing wheels. Never coat wheels, nut threads or nut seats with oil. Do not drive on sharp objects, curbs or sidewalks.
3. Tires
3-1 TIRE INFLATIONPRESSURE AND WEAR LIMITS The tire inflation pressure are indicated for cold tire condi0
lions [after parking for more than three hours or driving less than 1.6 km (1 mile)]. a Check tire pressure once a month or before driving long distances. CAUTION: The tire pressure rises to 29 kPa (0.3 kg/cm2, 4 psi) during driving. Do not remove air to lower tire pressure immediately after driving.
Tire size
Inflation pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)

Front wheels
216 (2.2, 31)
Rear wheels
205f55R16 88V 225150R 16 92V

T125/90D16
216 (2.2, 31)

226 (2.3, 33) 412 (4.2, 60)
226 (2.3, 33) 412 (4.2, 60)
CAUTION: The tire inflation pressure is the same for high-speed driving as it is for normal driving. Tread wear limit: Remaining groove depth 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
PRECAUTIONS
Recommended brake fluid is brake fluid NR-3 (No. 2500). Never reuse drained brake fluid. Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas because it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wipe it off immediately. For safety reasons, if any brake fluid leak is discovered, disassemble parts and replace as necessary. a Use brake tube torque wrench (special service tool) to loosen or tighten brake pipe flare nuts. SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool name Tool number Brake tube torque wrench GG9431 0000 Description
b
Removing and installing brake tube piping
Booster tester set KV991 019SO KV991 01910 KV991 01920 KV991 01930 KV991 01940 KV991 01950 EG1521
Measuring booster pressure Measuring brake fluid pressure
Brake fluid pressure gauge KV991 V0010
Measuring brake fluid pressure
Pedal pressure gauge IM2182
Measuring brake pedal pressure force
C10 BRAKES
1. Summary
Engine Anti-lock braking system RB26DETT Equipped
Specifications
Description
1Model number
- -
1
mm (in)
OPZ25VR 296132 (11.6511.26)
Disc outer diameterlthickness
Pad dimension (length x width x thickness) 116 x 50 >: 10 (4.57 x 1.97 x 0.39) mm (in)
1 1
Cylinder inner diameter Pad material Pad wear warning equipment Main brake Brake model Disc outer diameter thickness
mm (in)
40.4 x 2 (1.591 x 2)
AP50H Equipped OPZ11VB mm fin) 297118 (11.6910.711 71.8 x 36.5 x 11.5 (2.827 x 1.437 X 0.4531 38.1(1.500)
AP50
Pad dimension (length x width x thickness) mm (in) Cylinder inner diameter

Pad material
mm(in)l
Pad wear warnina eauioment Model number

.
- -
Eaui~oed
1
mm (in)
0817HD
172 (6.77)
Drum inner diameter Parking brake
154.1 x 25.0 x 3.0 Lining dimension (length x width x thickness) (6.07 x 0.984 x 0-118) mm (in)
-
Lining material Lining gap adjustment dimension

- -
AKD201
Manual adjustment mm (in)

25.40 (1)
Master cylinder Power booster Booster
Cylinder inner diameter Model number
M215T (JKC)
205
I
Rear control equipment
Diaphragm diameter mm (in)

I
+ 230 (6.07 +
9.06)
Model number Split point Reducina ratio

kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Proportioning valve (one-piece, contained
in master cylinder)
1,961 (20, 284) 0.4
Recommended brake fluid
Nissan brake fluid NR-3 (No. 2500)
C10 BRAKES 1. Summary (Cont'd)

Inspection and adjustment
Description Spec ification
mm (in)
- -
1 Free height (above floor)

Brake pedal Clevis pin play (measured at pedal upper surface) Play
Depressed [under force of 490N (50 kg, 110 tb)] with engine running (measured from top of dash panel) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
85 (3.35) max.
Stop lamp switch screw end and pedal stopper clearance mm (in) Brake application conditions [Depressed force 883 N (90 kg, 198 Ib)] OPZ25VR model + OPZ11VB Note: (1) The indicated values are Intended for reference to determining control force after inspection preparation. (2) The term "after preparation" means Ihe condition of braking ten times [speed 40 to 50 kmlh -> 0 kmlh (25 to 31 MPH -* 0 MPH)] with a deceleration force of 0.2 to 03 G for . break-in after replacing lining and pad replacement, or after cleaning and sandpaper lapping of drums and shoes. (0.2 to 0.3 G indicates a control force stronger than normal braking.) Booster vacuum leak [at force of 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.69 inHg)] Check valve vacuum leak [at force of 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.69 inHg)]
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
3.3 (33.25, 0.98) in 15 sec

- - -
1.3 (13.10, 0.39) in 15 sec
1 Pad wear limit minimum thickness

Disc brake
Brake disk wear limit mini0 ~ 2 2 5 ~ ~ mum thickness mm (in) OPZ11VB Brake disk runout limit Brake drum Lining wear limit minimum thickness Drum wear limit (inner diameter)
mm 0
mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) DS17HD
Parking brake
Pedal stroke [under force of Center lever type 196 N (20 kg, 44 Ib)] (notches) Number of notches when brake warning lamp lights Center lever type (notches) 1 max.
'
C10 BRAKES
2-1 CHECKING BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
0
Check fluid level in reservoir tank. It should be between Max. and Min. lines on reservoir tank. If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
2-2 CHECKING BRAKE SYSTEM

0
Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for leaks, damage, twisting, deterioration or other damage. Check if connections and clamps are loose. Flare nut tightening torque: 15 18 N-m (1.5 1.8 kg-m, 11 13 fl-lb) Fully depress brake pedal with force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 Ib) for approximately 5 seconds with engine running and check for leaks.
2-3 CHANGING BRAKE FLUID AND AIR BLEEDING

(1) Standard vehicles Change brake fluid and air bleeding in the following order. 0 (D Clean inside reservoir tank and fill with new brake fluid. (2) Open left rear air bleeder valve. (3) Fully depress brake pedal. Allow pedal to return and depress again after 2 3 seconds and repeat this operation. ( Close rear left wheel air bleeder valve. ( Bleed air from calipers in following order. front left wheel -> front right wheel Rear right wheel CAUTION: (1) Connect a transparent vinyl tube to air bleeder and be careful fluid does not spill on body. (2) Make sure reservoir is filled with brake fluid at all times during air bleeding operation. Tighten air bleeder value to specified torque. Tightening torque: 7 9 N-m (0.7 0.9 kg-m, 5.1 6.5 ft-lb)
(2) Vehicles equipped with anti-lock braking systems (A=)

0
In vehicles equipped with ABS, bleed air from the following locations in the indicated sequence after performing the procedures described for vehicles with standard brake systems. Front side actuator bleeder valve - Rear side air bleeder. CAUTION: (1) Air bleeding must be performed after the battery terminal is removed in vehicles equipped with ABS.
C10 BRAKES 2. On-vehicle Inspection (Cont'd)

(2) Carefully monitor reservoir brake fluid level during bleedIng. Make sure it Is more than half-full at all times because air entering brake system may cause operation failure in vehicles equipped with ABS. Tighten air bleeder valve to specified torque. Tightening torque: 7 9 N-rn (0.7 0.9 kg-m, 5.1 6.5 ft-lb)
11
2-4 BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Inspection

Unit: mm (in) Free pedal height
"H"
M/T: 172.5 182.5 (6.79 - 7.19 in)
Floor carpet
Clevis play "F" (from upper pedal surface) Depressed pedal height "L" Under force or 490 N (50 kg, 110 Ib) with engine running
1 - 3 (0.04 - 0.12)
85 (3.35)lmin.
Dash insulator
C11-0004B
When brake pedal is operated, make sure it does not scrap or move abnormally.
Adjust pedal height as necessary.
Adjustment (T) Loosen stop lamp switch lock nut @. (2) Loosen push rod lock nut @ , push rod, adjust pedal rotate I
to specified height and tighten lock nut.
(S) Rotate switch so clearance ( between stopper rubber and stop lamp switch thread end is 0.3 to 1.0 mrn (0.012 to 0.039
in) and tighten lock nut. Lock nut tightening torque: (A) 12 15 N-m (1.2 1.5 kg-m, 9 11 ft-Ib) (8) 16 22 N-rn (1.6 2.2 kg-m, 12 16 it-lb)
--
2-5 VACUUM PIPING INSPECTION

Apply vacuum to hoses, tubes and connections and make sure there are no scratches, damage or deformation. Check that all clamps are tight. Check the arrow on check valve E-mark faces engine side.

2-6 BOOSTER OPERATING CHECK
Operation procedure (T) Idle engine for approximately one minute. Apply vacuum to booster and turn ignition switch OFF. @ Depress brake several times with normal pressure and check for any change in pedal stroke. (A slight change is normal.) (D Depress brake pedal and check that there is no change in pedal height. Turn on engine in this condition and check that pedal goes down. (Moving down is normal.)
2-7 BOOSTER FUNCTION INSPECTION

Operation procedures (D Install special service tools (booster tester set: KV991 019S0,pedal pressure gauge: IM2182) in vehicle. (2) Start engine and measure vacuum. Stop engine when vacuum reaches 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.69JnHg). (3) Measure lowest vacuum pressure when brake does not operate, <S) Measure lowest vacuum pressure when brake is under full load [pedal pressure 245 N (25 kg, 55 lb)L Specification value ( 0 , (3)): Lowest vacuum level for 15 sec at maximum force of 13.3 kPa (25 mmHg, 0.98 inHg) <D Set load in booster to 0 kPa (0 rnrnHg, 0 inHg) and measure generated hydraulic pressure. ( Start engine and measure generated hydraulic pressure when idling (at force of 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 69 in Hg)] CAUTION: (1) Measure hydraulic pressure on front side. (2) Always bleed air from system after measure Is completed.
C11-04778
-. -.
Specification [(D : Vacuum 0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg)]

Pedal pressure N (kg, tb)
Hydraulic pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Specification [@ : Vacuum 66.7 kPa (500
mmHg, 19.69 inHg)]

Pedal pressure N (kg, Ib)
49 (5, 11) 98 (10, 22)
147 (15, 33)
Hydraulic pressure kPa (kg/cm2 psi)
M21S T
M215T
686 (7, 100)
2,158 (22, 313)

3,825 (39,555)

2-8 BOOSTER AIRTIGHTNESS Attach hand vacuum pump (special service tool) as shown in figure. Specification: When -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) vacuum towers for 15 sec at maximum of 3.3 kPa (25 mmHg, 0.98 inHg)
2-9 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION

Check vacuum with a vacuum pump.
Connect to booster side (T) Vacuum should exist when -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) vacuum towers for 15 sec at maximum of 3.3 kPa (25 mmHg, 0.98 inHg). Vacuum should not exist.
Connect to engine side (S
2-10 REAR CONTROL EQUIPMENT FUNCTION INSPECTION
Use brake fluid pressure gauge (special service tool) to measure front and rear brake fluid pressure. CAUTION: Bleed air after measurement is completed. a The front and rear brake fluid pressure is set to a 1 : 1 ratio at the split point (S). Check that the rear brake fluid pressure is reduced according to the following specifications. Dn indicates the rear brake pressure hydraulic pressure when the front brake pressure is added to D,.
- -
Front brake
Specifications
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Engine
RB26DETT
1,765 2,550 (18 26, 256
S (split point)
- 370)
0,(front brake pressure)

--
5,394 (55, 782)

3,138
D, (rear brake pressure)
- 3,923 (32 - 40, 455 - 569)
Front brake pressure kPa (kg/crn2, psi) , Reference: Rear brake fluid pressure D is determined as follows. D* = LP s L (reducing ratio) = 0.4 S (split point) = 1,961+5% kPa (20.>g/cm2, 284 ?gpsi) P (additional pressure from split point) = 3,432kPa (35 kg/crn2,498 psi) D2 = 0.4 x 35 20-s6=3,138 - 3.923 kPa (32 - 40 kg/cm2, 455 569 psi)

2-11 DISK PAD THICKNESS INSPECTION
OPZ25VR models a check pad thickness at middle hole in cylinder body as shown in figure.
Model Wear limit thickness Reference: new part thickness
OPZ25VR
2 mm (0.08 in) 10 mrn (0.39 in)
OPZ11VB models a Check pad thickness at middle hole in cylinder body as shown in figure.
Model
OPZ11VB
2 rnm (0.08 in)
Wear limit thickness Reference: new part thickness
11.5 mm (0.453 in)
2-12 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION

Micrometer
(1) Disc thickness inspection After removing caliper assembly, check following items, 0 Check disc rotor for wear or damage. Measure disk thickness. Front
Model OPZ25VR 30 rnrn (1-18 in) 32 mm (1.26 in)
Wear limit thickness

Reference: New part thickness
Rear
Model Wear limit thickness Reference: New art thickness OPZ11VB
16 rnm (0.63 in)
18 mm (0.71 in)
(2) Disk rotor runout inspection a Make sure that front axial end play is less than 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) before measuring disk surface runout. secure rotor on axle and measure runout.
CAUTION: Secure rotor to wheel hub with two nuts in criss-cross direction.
b
Check within 10 mm (0.39 in) from outside edge.of rotor. 0.07 rnrn (0.0028 in)
Runout limit

-Drum
inner diameter
2-13 BRAKE DRUM INSPECTION

Check following items. Check for cracks or damage. 0 Check for scoring, partial wear or stepped wear inside of drum. a Measure inside of drum.
Model DS17HD
173 mm (6.81 in) diameter
Wear limit Reference: new part inner diameter
172 mrn (6.77 in) diameter
2-14 BRAKE SHOE INSPECTION

Check following items when installing brake drum. a Check lining for abnormal wear, damage or separation. Check that assembly for loose conditions. Measure lining thickness.
Model
DS17HD
-
Wear thickness limit Reference: New part thickness
1.5 m m (0.059 in)
3.0 rnrn (0.118 in)
Check wheel cylinder for leakage.
196 N (20 kg, 44 Ib)
2-15 PARKING BRAKE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Check and adjust following items. 0 Make sure that parking brake lever operates smoothly. 0 Check rods and cables for cracks, wear, deformation and rust. a Check clamps and connections for looseness. a Check that brake warning lamp lights within one notch. The catch operates within a specified number of notches when an operating force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 Ib) is applied. Adjust rear shoe clearance if brake does not engage with specified number of notches. Adjust cable so brake engages at specified number of notches. Specified number of notches:
6 8 notches CAUTION: If the cable and notch adjustment is made without adjusting shoe clearance, the rear brake may not engage.

(1) Shoe clearance adjustment Return lever completely. When cable is adequately loose (Refer to (2) Cable adjustment), adjust rear shoe clearance. Model DS17HD . a Install wheel. 0 Use suitable nuts (MI2 x 1.25) so disk is installed securely as shown in figure and attach disk rotor to hub. a Remove disc adjustment hole plug from disc. Use screwdriver and turn adjuster in direction ( shown in figure until disc locks. After disc locks turn adjuster five or six notches in opposite direction. Turn rotor and make sure brakes do not engage. Install stroke adjustment hole plug.
,
DS17HD model
CAUTION: After adjusting shoe clearance, always adjust lever by cable so brake engages at specified number of notches.
djuster
Adjustment hole plug
(2) Cable adjustment After adjusting rear shoe clearance, adjust cable when rear brake is not engaged. Raise lever 4 - 5 notches. Insert ratchet wrench (use taped socket) in lever opening and turn self-locking adjustment nut to adjust lever stroke. m Operate lever 3 - 4 times and adjust stroke so lever engages within specified number of notches. Return lever completely and make sure there is no drag between shoes and brake drum when rotating disc rotor.
(3) Breaking-in parking brake DS17HD model shoes

Perform following procedures if braking is inadequate after replacing DS17HD parking brake, shoes and disc rotor. Operation @ Adjust parking brake control lever to specified number of notches. [Refer to (1) Shoe clearance adjustment and (2) Cable adjustment.] @ Break-in parking brake by driving vehicle as follows. Drive forward at approximately 35 kmlh (22 MPH). 0 Depress parking brake pedal with a force of approx. 88 N (9 kg, 20 Ib). While depressing the pedal, continue to drive the vehicle forward 100 m (328 ft). Repeat this procedure three more times. [Total distance is approximately 300 m (984 ft).] <S) Perform parking brake stroke inspection. Adjust if brake engagement has changed from specified number of notches.

CAUTION: (1) Perform break-in operation In a location with good visibility and at a distance from other vehicles. (2) Allow unit to cool off 5 min after each break-in procedure to prevent linings from overheating. (3) Do not perform the break-in procedure too many times because it may cause uneven or premature wear.
3-1 TROUBLESHOOTING
I/ There is pedal Play or noise.
C10 BRAKES
3. Trouble Diagnosis (Anti-Lock Braking System)
Does A 6 S operate?
'Nm
Normal When engine starts Troubleshoot system with self-diagnosis function.
[Check with quick control stop.]
In which cases?
(Actuator operation sound) (T> Actuator motor operation noise (whine) @ Noise with brake pedal play (da-da-da) @ While ABS operates repeating control and stop control Suspension noise Tire noise
rcontrolled
Speedchange
ABS may operate in driving
conditions when wheel speed changes.
clutch pedal operation Driving over bumps [50 mm (1.97 in) min.]
'-ElOther Go to Operation
@.
A 6 5 may operates without sudden braking under
Low friction road High-speed speed cornering Passing protrusions
Other
Go to
@.
--
Occurs at high engine speeds (over 5,000 rpm)

1
Condition occurs when vehicle stops.
Other
Occurs if electrical operation switch is operated.

L
Replace ETS control unit.
(B
Speed sensor is faulty.
Clearance inspection Sensor installation inspection Sensor rotor tooth inspection Faulty connector connection
unit is faulty.
C10 BRAKES 3. Trouble Diagnosis (Anti-Lock Braking System) (Cont 'd)

Perform self-diagnosis
Is road condition slippery with snow or gravel?
Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles which are not equipped with ABS. Bleed air from system. Check brake system. - G o t o 0)
'
Remove actuator relay and check if slopping distance is still long.
Pedal stroke is long.
Vehicles equipped with ABS may have a tendency for large pedal stroke. Does brake function correctly?
Pedal is hard.
Normal
1 ,
r^
>
ABS doesn't work
operate. Checkbrake system.
Remove actuator relay connector and check after ABS function stops.
system are faulty.
Checkspeedsensor clearance. -Check Check brake system. sensor installation.
Check sensor rotor gear teeth. harness connection is faulty.
L sensor
C10 BRAKES 3. Trouble Diagnosis (Anti-Lock Braking System) (Cont'd)

3-2 INSPECTION PREPARATION
(1) Circuit diagram
ETS control unit terminal
ETS control unit
/-i ABS warning lamp
ECCS control unit
Oil level sensor
@! -
Front torque meter

(2) Trouble diagnosis by self-diagnosis ( ) When CONSULT is not used 1
(a) Self-diagnosis description

If ABS is normal, the ABS warning lamp lights when ignition switch is ON and goes off within one second after engine starts. When the warning lamp does not go out, abnormal conditions are indicated by the number of times the LED flashes in the ETS control unit below the rear parcel shelf. Warning lamp lights or LED flashes to indicate connection condition after damage repair when ignition switch is not turned OFF. Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF one time after repair for this reason and then perform self-diagnosis again. If two or more systems malfunction, all faulty systems are displayed sequentially and displayed by number of LED flashes.
Example 1: One system malfunctions. Front right speed sensor or circuit is damaged.
1 cycle
LED lightsoff
^-fLnn&m --- -- -- - 1 SBC
< r - 4
3-4sec
Repeat
Example 2 Two or more systems malfunction. 4 Front left wheel speed sensor or circuit and led rear wheel speed sensor or circuit mallunclion.
ofl
1 see 3 4 sec
1 sec
I-+
3 4 sec
n---
Repeats
C10 BRAKES 3. Trouble Diagnosis (Anti-Lock Braking System)
(Cont'd)
Problems are classified by the following code numbers.
Number of LED flashes Malfunction location Front right wheel speed sensor circuit Front left wheel speed sensor circuit Rear right wheel speed sensor circuit Rear left wheel speed sensor circuit ABS front right side actuator solenoid valve circuit ABS front left side actuator solenoid valve circuit ABS rear actuator solenoid valve circuit ABS actuator motor and motor relay circuit ABS actuator relay and circuit ETS control unit power supply circuit Fore-and-aft G sensor 1 circu it Fore-and-aft G sensor 2 circuit Fore-and-aft rear G sensor 1 and G sensor 2 circuit G sensor power supply 1 circuit G sensor power supply 2 circuit Lateral G sensor circuit Air bleeding connector circuit ETS pressure switch circuit ETS motor, motor relay circu it ETS solenoid circuit Throttle sensor circuit ETS reservoir tank oil level sensor circuit Detection cycle During Engine driving starts 0 (Note 1) Warning lamp
ABS
ETS 0
Flow chart (Note 3)
0 0
0
0
0 (Note 1)
0 (Note 1)
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0 (Note 1)
0
A
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
c
D
E
0
0
0
0
0
0 .
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0 (Note 2) 0 0
4-
0
0
0
0 0 0
0
0 0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
20 2 1 22
0
0 0
-
0 0
0
-
23
24 Or stays ON or stays OFF
ETS control unit, ground circuit
Note: 1) Detection may not be possible if there is sensor short-circuit malfunction. 2) During driving, 4W0 warning lamp tights during normal control. 3) Refer to C3 Electrical control torque split 4WD system, 3. Troubleshooting for items marked *.
GI0 BRAKES
3. Trouble Diagnosis (Anti-Lock Braking System)
. .
(Cont'd)
(3) Diagnostic procedure
@ ABS warning lamp does not Iight when ignition switch is in ON position (before engine starts).
IS ABS warning lamp fuse IOA #21 disconnected?
Remove control unit connector and turn ignition switch ON. Does ABS warning tamp light when connector terminal @ is grounded?
Remove connector harness and turn ignition switch OFF. Is there continuity between connector @, @, @, @ ground? and I
Control unit is faulty.
ETS control unit terminal [vehicle harness side)
faulty. Ground harness is faulty.
Replace fuse.
. .. .
@ Malfunction indicated by self-diagnosis
A. Front right acluator solenoid valve circuit malfunction (LED flashes 5 times) B. Front left actuator solenoid valve circuit malfunction (LED flashes 6 times) C. Rear actuator solenoid circul! solenoid valve malfunction (LED flashes 7 times)
Remove control unit harness. Is there continuity between vehicle harness connector terminals @ and @ (front (rear I right actuator solenoid). @J and @ actuator solenoid), @J and @ (front lefl actuator solenoid)?
ETS control unit terminal (vehicle harness side] Yes
I
between: Actuator connector terminats @ and @ [front right actuator solenoid) @ and @ (rear right actuator solenoid)
malfunction
ABS actuator terminal (viewed from ABS actuator side)
Actuator is faulty.
C10 BRAKES 3. Trouble Diagnosis (Anti-Lock Braking System)
(Cont'd)
Dm ABS molor, motor relay and circuit malfunction (LED flashes 8 limes)
Is ABS motor fusible link 30A disconnected7 'No

t
Does motor tum when engine starts (cranking)? Yes
a
Yes
1
Actuator terminal (actuator side)
Replace fuse.
malfunction.
Remove actuator connector. Is voltage between vehicle connector terminal @ and ground approximately 12v? J
Yes
Remove actuator connector. Is resistance between actuator side terminals @ @ 200Q max? and I
2000 max.
I
Remove actuator connector. Is there conthuity between actuator connector terminal @ and motor ground? Yes
No
Remove actuator connector and motor relay. Is there continuity between actuator terminals yes
No
+
I
No
u
Harness is faulty.
OQ ormfl
Motor relay malfunction,
Motor - . .terminal relay - .. . (actbator side terminal)
- -
Actuator is faulty.
Nn
0
Motor relay is faulty.
Actuator is faulty.

E. Actuator relay circuit malfunction (LED flashes 9 times)
Actuator terminal [actuator side) Is actuator fuse 20A #13 disconnected?
Remove actuator connector. Is resistance between terminals @ and 200n max?
Repiace fuse. Actuator relay terminal (Relay side terminal)
rn
,
1
NO
Remove actuator connector. Is vottage between vehicle connector @ d ground m I approximatety 12V?
Remove actuator relay, Is resistance between terminals @ @ 80 to 90I2' and I
A y m ~ . l Z v { ~
01
Actuator is faulty.
c
Actuator terminal [vehicle harness side)
=
Actuator relay is faulty.
Is harness t9isconnected between actuator and control unit?
Power supply harness circuit i8 faulty.
Yes
Actuator is faulty.
F. ETS control unit power supply circuit malfunction (LED fIashes.10 times)
Remove control unit connector and start engine. Is voltage between ground and vehicle harness connector termha1 @ @ approximately 10 lev?
Yes
I
No
1
No
is faulty.
Start mngine. Is voltage between battery @ terminal and ground approximately 10 - 16V? Yes
1
ETS control unit terminal

(vehicle harness side) Battery or battery charging is faulty.
Cll-0716E
CIO BRAKES 3. Trouble Diagnosis (Anti-lock Braking System) (Cont'd)

3-3 DAMAGE INSPECTION For items @ and I refer to "C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPLIT 4WD SYSTEM, 3-3 DAMAGE INSPECTION". @ Check speed sensor installation. @ Check speed sensor clearance. @ Check sensor rotor or G sensor. Refer to "C3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL TORQUE SPILT 4WD SYSTEM, 3-3 DAMAGE INSPECTION" @ Check front suspension and axle (wheel hub play). a Check that there is no wheel hub play. If there is hub play, refer to "C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE, 2-1 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE INSPECTION". @ Rear suspension and axle inspection I Check that there is no wheel hub play. If there is hub play, refer to "C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE, 2-1 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE INSPECTION".
a,
a,
@ Control split inspection

Use brake fluid pressure gauge (special service tool) as shown in figure and measure front brake and rear brake pressure. Refer to 2-2 CHECKING BRAKE SYSTEM. The inspection procedures are the same.
@J Brake system inspection

Check that the brake system is not leaking or clogged. Replace parts as necessary.
@ Air bleeding
0
Refer to 2-3 CHANGING BRAKE FLUID AND AIR BLEEDING.

3-4 COMPONENT PARTS LOCATION
ETS control unit
Actuator
Front left speed sensor
Front right speed sensor
Fuse box lead
Module ~ o w e fuse #2 (lo&) r
ABS fuses
..
Rear speed sensor
ABS iusib!e link
C10 BRAKES
Disassembly
4-1 BRAKE PIPING
Vehicles equipped with ABS Remove brake fluid before removal and installation. After removal and installation always bleed air from system. Brake hose installation [Point 21 0 Flare nut 15 18 Mrn (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 13 it-lb) [Point 11 Union bolt 17 - 20 N-m (1.7 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 M-lb) (3 Connector 17 20 N-rn (1.7 2.0 kg-m, 12 - 14 ft-lb)
: Brake tube : Brake hose
OPZ25VR models
[Point 11 Flare nut removal and installation Use a flare nut wrench to remove flare nuts. Use a flare nut 0 torque wrench (special service tool) to tighten flare nuts. B e careful not to scratch or damage brake pipes or flare nuts.
[Point 21 Brake hose installation The left and right front brake hoses are the same for all 0 models. a Assemble hose from cylinder body. Align lock plate direction as shown in figure and secure. CAUTION: (1) Align protrusions on each hose with the hose bracket. (2) After installation check that hose Is not twisted or bent and
does not interfere with other parts.
C10 BRAKES 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)

4-2 BRAKE PEDAL BRACKET REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION, ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY
Additional work required Remove and install: Instrument lower panel
--
-. . .
Pedal bracket
I Clevis pin-
N-m (kg-m, it-lb) Nissan MP special grease No. 2
[Point 11 Clevis pin removal and installation

a
a
Check that plastic stopper on end of clevis pin is not darnaged or deformed. Replace if necessary. Insert clevis pin from right side as shown in figure. Install securely with snap pin.
Plastic stopper

4-3 VACUUM PIPE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (vehicles equipped with RB26DETT engine)
Check vatve [Point 11
4
Intake manifold
[01: N-m (kg-rn, ft-lb)
[Point 11 Vacuum hose installation Insert hose at least 24 mm (0.94 in). Do not use lubrication oil to install hose.
24 mm (0.94 in) min.

C11-0575B
[Point 21 Check valve installation

Assemble check valve with arrow mark facing engine side (intake manifold side).
Intake manifold or vacuum PU"'
Booster side
4
11-05831

4-4 MASTER CYLINDER AND BOOSTER
Bracket
I
I
1 Clevis pin
Brake master cylinder
I"
I i
v^
a\
\\ \ 11 \
.snap pin
12 16) (point 21
L
Booster [Point 11 Additional work required Remove and install: Accelerator wire Bleed air from system.
re nut
1: Apply Nissan MP special grease No. 2.
,.." - ...#,
,,
[Point 11 Booster removal and installation Removal

a Separate master cylinder and brake tube. Remove snap pin and clevis pin. Remove pedal bracket and nuts (4) and remove from engine compartment.
Installation
a Assembly is the reverse of disassembly. After installing booster, temporarily tighten master cylinder. Install brake tubes and then tighten master cylinder bolts to specified torque. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch reservoir tank or body during removal and installation.
[Point 21 Operating rod standard dimension adjustment

a Loosen lock nut and adjust operating rod so dimension B is standard length. B dimension specification length: 142 149 rnm (5.59 5.87 in) After adjustment, temporarily tighten lock nut. After installation in vehicle, adjust pedal height and play. Tighten lock nut to specified torque.

(2) Master cylinder assembly and disassembly
Reservoir cap Vehicles equipped with ABS system (manufactured by Nabuko)
Oil strainer-. Float
Reservoir tank -.
Valve stopper [Point 2)
m:
0 : Always replace after every disassembly.

N-m (kg-rn, ft-tb)
Stopper cap [Point 11
C11-0602E
I : Apply Nissan brake fluid NR-3.
[Point 11 Stopper cap installation If notches are bent or deformed replace stopper cap. a Fold notches in and insert cap.
Fold notches in.

C11-00308

[Point 21 Inner kit assembly installation Always replace assembly with inner k i t 0 Check cup direction and install. a While pressing primary piston with Phillips screwdriver, install valve stopper.
CAUTION: Do not wash with mineral oil because it may deform o damr age rubber parts.
Manufactured
Secondary piston
Primary
piston
4-5 FRONT BRAKE

OPZ25VR models)

(1) Caliper assembly removal and installation, assembly and disassembly (OPZ25VR model)
Pad retainer 6 (lor inner pa
[Ol: N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Always replace after every disassembly. 1 1 : Nissan brake grease (KRF16-00005) m : 2 Nissan rubber lubricant (KRE12-00030) m 3 : Nissan brake fluid NR-3
0:
Additional work required Remove and install: Calipers assembly [Point 21 Bleed air from system. Check brake stroke.
[Point I]Pad removal and installation Removal

Remove clip from pad pins. a While pressing cross spring, remove pad pinsCAUTION: Check pad pins and clips for fatigue, deformation, damage and rust. Replace with new parts if necessary.
0

a Use pliers to remove pads when attached to shims. CAUTION: Check calipers and piston boot for damage, rust and deformation. Replace parts as necessary. Remove shim and pad retainer from pads.. CAUTION: If the shim or shim cover are rusted or rubber coat is peeled, replace with new part.
Pad replacement
If pad thickness does not exceed wear limit indicated below, compress inner and outer pistons to install new pads.
Wear limit
mm (in) mrn (in)
2 (0.08)
(Reference) New pad thickness

Air bleeder 7 9 N-m (0.7 -0.9 kg-m, 5.1 6.5 ft-lb) \ Used inner ad
Channel-Lock pliers (water pliers)
air bleeder ...
(Oj 7
Install old inner pad as shown in figure to prevent piston from popping out. a Release air bleeder and use pliers to compress two outer pistons simultaneously- Place wood on outside to prevent scratching calipers. CAUTION: (1) Connect vinyl tube to air bleeder and be careful not to get brake fluid on body. (2) When pressing piston into calipers, change pressure position of outer pliers so piston does not jam in cylinder. (3) Temporarily tighten wheel nuts so disc does not Incline.
a
9 N-m (0.7 0.9 kg-m,
Nw
Remove old inner pad and install new outer pad as shown in figure so outside piston does not pop out. Place wood on outer side as described above. Use pliers to compress two inner pistons simultaneously. Tighten air bleeder. a Remove new outer pad to compress inner and outer pistons and complete operation. CAUTION: (1) After replacing brake pads, bleed air from system. (2) Replace pads as a set on both left and right wheels at the same time.
Installation
ADDIV uniform coat of Nissan brake grease [approx. 0.7 a to l i g (0.025 to 0.353 oz)] to rear metal surface of inner and outer pads and to both sides of shim A. CAUTION: (1) Wipe off excess brake grease so it does not adhere to pad friction surface or caliper installation surface. (2) Install shims A and B in sequence shown in figure.
Pad retainer

Assemble inner and outer pad so pad retainer faces opposite side of forward driving disc rotation direction (upper side of installed calipers). CAUTION: Omission or incorrect assembly of pad retainer may cause abnormal brake noise.
Lining surface side
surface side
C11^172481
Inside of vehicle
Assemble pad so sensor faces inside of vehicle.
t
inner pad
Outer pad
C-tl-06091
Clip
CII-07256
Insert lower pad pin securely from outer cylinder side through lower pad hole to inner cylinder side. Set part A of cross spring on lower pad pin as shown in figure. Press part B in and insert upper pad pin from outer cylinder side to inner cylinder side and secure with cross spring. CAUTION: If the cross spring installation direction and position are incorrect it may cause squeaking or abnormal noise. Insert clip securely in small hole in the end of upper pad pin. Rotate pad pin and insert clip in the small hole in the end of pad pin. Next, insert curved projection in middle of clip into hole in middle of inner cylinder. CAUTION: (1) If clip assembly is incorrect, the pad pin or pad itself may fall out during driving causing braking malfunction. (2) When replacing pads with new parts, bleed air from system.
[Point 21 Caliper removal and installation

CAUTION: (1) Do not remove four caliper inner and outer sides. Do not tighten these bolts. (2) The caliper and knuckle housing are manufactured of aluminum alloy and are softer than steel. Be sure to use a half-seat washer for the caliper washer to prevent scratching the installation surface.

Removal
a Remove brake tube and tube bracket. a Remove mounting bolts and remove calipers. CAUTION: Suspend caliper assembly with wire to prevent brake hose fro1 stretching.
Installation
a
tnstati special shims on both sides of caliper as shown i figure. Next, install knuckle housing. CAUTION: (1) The caliper and knuckle housing are manufactured of all minum alloy and are softer than steel. Be especially cart ful not to damage the seating surface during installatio because this may cause bolt looseness or abnormal ope1 alion noise. (2) Make sure there is no water or oil on knuckle housing an caliper installation surface or threads, bolts and washers
a
/ I
install calipers as shown in figure and tighten mountin bolts to specified torque. a Install brake tube and tube bracket and tighten to specific torque. CAUTION: Check that brake tubes are not twisted or bent.
Retaining clip
[Point 31 Piston removal and installation

Screwdriver
Removal
Remove retaining ring with screwdriver.
,
C11-0612E
Insert wood block as shown in figure, blow compressed a into brake tube installation hole and to push out piston an boot. Adjust air so four pistons all extend the same distanc from calipers. CAUTION: (1) Be careful so brake fluid does not spray out. (2) When pressing out piston with compressed air, be carefi so fingers are not pinched between wood and piston.

a
Remove piston boot from piston.
boot
Always replace after every disassembly. /
C11-0614E
,o Piston seal
Remove piston seal with screwdriver. CAUTION: (1) Be careful not to scratch or score inside of cylinder with screwdriver. (2) Do not remove the four mounting bolts on the inner and outer side of caliper. Do not tighten bolts either.
Check inside surface of cylinder and piston for damage, wear or rust. If any of these conditions are observed replace parts as necessary. If there is leakage from aligned surface of cylinder body or other problem, replace caliper assembly. Check pad pin, cross spring, clip and shim for damage, deformation or rust. Replace if any of these conditions are noted.
om:
Piston seal
\ -
Installation
a
Apply Nissan rubber lubricant to piston seal and install cylinder body.
Q : ~ l w a replace after k ~ e r ~ d ~ s a s s e m b l y . ~ s :I Apply Nissan rubber lubricant

(KRE12-00030)
'
C11-0617

Attach piston boot to rear of piston and install correctly in piston groove. (Apply rubber lubricant to boot before installing piston.) Insert piston in cylinder body by hand. Install cylinder lip correctly in piston boot groove. CAUTION: When pressing piston, change pressure position on piston to prevent insertion at incorrect angle.
Piston
/
iston boot .
Piston seal
Q : Always replace after every disassembly.
1: Apply Nissan rubber lubricant (KRE12-00030; : Nissan brake fluid NR-3 C11-06181
Secure piston boot with retaining ring.
[Point 41 Misalignment inspection

a
Assemble pad and bleed air from brakes. Press on brake pedal with approximately 196 N (20 kg, 44 Ib) of force for 5 seconds. Release brake pedal, turn disc 10 times and check for misalignment or binding. CAUTION: (1) The pad and disc must be dry. (2) The wheel bearing must be normal.

4-6 REAR BRAKE
(1) Disc brake caliper assembly removal and installation, assembly and disassembly (model OPZ11 VB)
(OPZ11VB)
Piston [Point 3 1 1 2 Q Piston seal
, 1 2 0 Piston boot
Lock plate
Inner pad
Outer shim A Outer shim B
0 : Always replace alter every

disassembly. : Apply Nissan brake grease (KRF16-00005). MZ : Apply Nissan rubber grease (KRE12-0030). E : Nissan brake fluid NR-3 R : N-m (kg-m, M b )
I
Cross spring side) Additional work required Remove and install: Caliper assembly [Point 21 Bleed air from brakes. Check for misalignment. [Point 3 1
[Point 11 Pad removal and installation

Removal Remove clip from pad pin. 0 While pressing cross spring by hand, remove pad pin. CAUTION: Check pad pin and clip for fatigue, damage and rust. If any of these conditions are observed, replace with new part.
C10 BRAKES 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and - Disassembly (Cont'd)

Remove pad from calipers with shims attached. CAUTION: Check calipers and piston for fatigue, damage and rust. If any of these conditions are observed, replace with new part. Remove shims and shim cover from pad. CAUTION: If there is rust or a rubber peeling coat on shim and shim cover, replace with new parts.
a
Pad replacement
0
inspection specifications'
Model
If pad thickness exceeds wear limit indicated below, compress inner and outer pistons to install new pads.
OPZ11VB
Wear limit
m m (in) m m (in)
2 (0.08)
(Reference) New pad thickness
B -
Install old inner pad as shown in figure to prevent piston from popping out. Release air bleeder and use pliers to compress two outer pistons simultaneously. Place wood block on outside to prevent scratching calipers. CAUTION: (1) Connect vinyl tube to air bleeder and be careful not to gel brake fluid on body. (2) When pressing piston into calipers, change pressure position of outer pliers so piston does not jam in cylinder. (3) Temporarily tighten wheel nuts In criss-cross pattern so disc does not incline.
a
Remove old inner pad and install new outer pad as shown in figure so outside piston does not pop out. Place wood on outer side as described above. Use pliers to compress two inner pistons simultaneously. a Tighten air bleeder. Remove new outer pad to compress inner and outer pistons and complete operation. CAUTION: (1) After replacing brake pads, bleed air from system. (2) Replace pads as a set on both left and right wheels at the same time.
a
Remove pad retainer from caliper
Pad retai
Inner shim B

Installation Apply a uniform coat of Nissan brake grease to cylinder body side surface of pad retainer. CAUTION: (1) Wipe off excess brake grease so it does not adhere to pad wear surface or caliper installation surface. (2) Install shims A and 6 in sequence shown in figure. (3) Apply grease to contact area between pad retainer and cylinder body because it may rust.
padretainer
n: Grease application lo
(KRP16-00005)
Inside vehicle
Inner
Install pad retainer in caliper. Assemble pad so sensor faces inside of vehicle. CAUTION: Omission or incorrect assembly of pad retainer may cause abnormal brake noise.
Outer pad
011-06258
Insert lower pad pin securely from outer cylinder side through lower pad hole to inner cylinder side. a Set cross spring on lower pad pin as shown in figure. Insert upper pad pin from outer cylinder side to inner cylinder side and secure with cross spring. CAUTION: If the cross spring installation direction and position are incorrect it may cause squeaking or abnormal noise. Using Phillips screwdriver (+), rotate pad pin and insert clip in the small hole in the end of pad pin. CAUTION: (1) If clip assembly is incorrect, the pad pin or pad itself may fall out during driving causing braking malfunction. (2) When replacing pads with new parts, bleed air from system.
[Point 21 Caliper removal and installation CAUTION: (1) Do not remove the four caliper inner nuts. Do not tighten these nuts. (2) The caliper and knuckle housing are manufactured of aluminum alloy and are softer than steel. Be sure to use a half-seat washer for the caliper washer to prevent scratching the installation surface.

Remove piston boot from piston,
a Remove piston seal with screwdriver. CAUTION: (1) Do not scratch or score inside of cylinder with screwdriver. (2) Do not loosen four mounting bolts on inner and outer side of caliper. Do not lighten these bolts either.
0 : Always replace after every

disassembly.
Check inner surface of cylinder for damage, wear or rust. If any of these conditions are noted, replace parts as necessary. If there is leakage from cylinder body mating surface or any other problem, replace caliper assembly. Check pad pin, pad retainer, cross spring, clip and shims for damage, deformation or rust. If any of these conditions are noted, replace parts as necessary.
Installation
Apply a coat of Nissan rubber lubricant to piston seal and instal! in cylinder.
@ : Always replace after every disassembly., m 1 Apply Nissan rubber lubricant

(KREl2-00030)
Cll-0633B

a
Attach piston boot to rear of piston and install correctly ir piston groove. (Apply Nissan rubber lubricant to boo before installing piston.) a Insert piston in cylinder body by hand. Install cylinder l i ~ correctly in piston boot groove. CAUTION: When pressing piston, change pressure position on piston lc prevent insertion at incorrect angle. Secure piston boot with retaining ring.
Piston
0 : Always replace after every disassembly. B:Apply Nissan rubber lubricant ( ~ R E 1 2 ~ 0 ~ ) :Use Nissan brake fluid NR-3.
Cll-OWE
[Point 41 Misalignment inspection

Install pad and bleed air from brakes. Press on pedal witk 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb) for force of 5 sec, Release brake pedal and turn disc rotor I times. Check fot 0 misalignment at this time. CAUTION: (I) Pad and disc must be dry. (2) Wheel bearings must be in normal condition.

(2) Drum brake removal and installation, assembly and disassembly
Model DS17HD
Conical washer
Adjusting screw Anti-rattle spring
~nti-rattle spring
Retainer
Additional work required: Remove: Brake drum [Point I] Inspect: Brake
Ctl-f%53l
m:
Anti-rattle pin
N m (kg-m, ft-lb) : Nissan brake special grease (KRFOO-00005)
[Point I] Brake drum removal

a Remove caliper assembly. Make sure parking brake lever and pedal are released completely. If drum is hard to remove, tighten two bolts gradually to free drum. CAUTION: Drum and bafile plate dust is collected in dust collector. Do not blow off with compressed air.
CIO BRAKES 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)

0
Use screwdriver and remove retainer ring and toggle lever.
Retainer
Installation
0
Apply Nissan brake special grease to areas indicated by ) in figure and then assemble. (
lever
Apply a coat of Nissan brake special grease to sliding part of toggle lever and install shoe as shown in figure. CAUTION: Caulk retaimer ring opening unit connection.
l1-0650E
Adjuster return direction
Turn screws of adjuster to rear side because left and right installation direction is different. Assemble adjuster so the screws widen if turned in direction of arrow. CAUTION: (1) When adjuster is disassembled, coat screw with Nissan brake special grease. (2) Assemble adjuster i n compressed condition.
Cll-06596
Return spring
After assembly, check that each part is installed correctly. CAUTION: Return spring is assembled from leading shoe side. Measure inside diameter of drum. Widen adjuster so outer 8 diameter from middle of shoe to inner side of drum is less than 0.35 to 0.55 mm (0.0138 to 0.0217 in). Adjust disc rotor with wheel nut to adjust shoe clearance. 0 Refer to "2, On-vehicle Inspection, 2-15 PARKING BRAKE INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT'' for adjustment procedures.
C10 BRAKES 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembiy (Cont'd)

4-7 PARKING BRAKE
(1) Control lever and cable removal and installation, assembly and disassembly
Lever and front cable assembly [Point 11
8-71 (0.8 1.1. 5.8 8.0) flight rear cable [Point 21
h
Additional work required: Remove and instalt'; Calipers and lining Floor cover (toot rest type) . Inspect: Lever stroke [Point 31
Left rear cable [Point 2 1
m:N m
(kg-m, ft-lb) grease No. 2.
: Appiy Nissan MP s-ial
[Point 11 Lever and front cable assembly

.a Knock off caulking from control lever with hammer as shown in figure and replace with new part.
co"tr01 lever
[Point 2J Rear cable removal and installation Removal

a Remove caliper and disc. Rt?m~ve cable nuts as shown in figure, and separate brake lining.

Remove rear cable bolt. Pry off guide boot in middle of suspension member so it is free and then remove guide.
Installation
a
Assembly is the reverse of disassembly.
4-8 ELECTRICAL CONTROL 4WD ABS MODULE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

(1) ABS module removal and installation The module is installed in the bottom of rear parcel shelf in trunk. The ground is installed in the top of the rear parcel shelf.
in:
Mrn (kg-m, ft-lb)
(2) Actuator removal and installation

CAUTION: Alwavs remove battery terminal before actuator removal and installation.
Air bleeder
Additional work required: Bleed air from brakes.

[Point 11 Brake tube removal and installation
Removal
Use brake ftare nut wrench and remove brake tube flare nuts. Installation a Using brake tube torque wrench (special service tool) as shown in figure, install brake pipes. Be careful not to damage pipes or flare nuts. CAUTION: Refer to 2-3 CHANGING BRAKE FLUID AND AIR BLEEDING for air bleeding procedures.
C11 STEERING
PRECAUTIONS The disassembly and repair of power steering gear and pump is performed for oil leakage, noise and abnormal steering power. (1) Part replacement Oil leak repair is not only the replacement of leak location oil seals and O-rings. The parts specified in this manual are always replaced as kit or entire assembly. Never reuse parts as this may cause fluid leaks. (2) Protection against foreign matter Power steering gear and oil pump are precision hydraulic mechanisms and all disassembly should be performed in a clean work area. it is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. (T) Perform assembly and disassembly operations in a vise with copper plates to protect the secured parts. Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts. Do not use common shop rags because they can leave lint, dust or metallic powder on gears or in the pump housing. Do not wear gloves and perform all operations with clean, bare hands. @ Wash disassembled parts (except rubber parts) with white gasoline and dry off with compressed air or paper towels to remove all oil.
CAUTION: Never use cloth rags. Do not wash rubber parts with white gasoline. Clean off with compressed air or paper towels. ( Store disassembled parts (including new rubber parts) on a work bench where they will not be scratched or damaged. ( Before assembly, wash mating surfaces of each part again (except rubber parts) with white gasoline. Dry with compressed air (or paper towels) and store in a parts rack so they can be reinstalled in their proper positions and sequence. When an operation must be interrupted, indicate "disassembly" and cover parts with a clean cover. CAUTION: A special dust-proof area is not required but all assembly and disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from being contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
'

Tool name Tool number
Steering wheel puller ST271B 0001
Description Removing steering wheel
Torque adapter KV481 3400
Measuring steering gear pinion rotating torque
Preload gauge ST3127 SO00
Measuring steering gear pinion rotation torque and ball joint sliding torque.
C11 STEERING
Tool name Tool number Oil pressure gauge KV481 03500 (former ST2909 1000) Description
leasuring oil pump pressure
Pressure gauge adapter KV481 02500 (D KV481 02500-01 ((-joint) @ KV481 02500-02 (f tare joint) (D KV481 02500-03 (bolt) @ KV481 02500-04 (was her) Pressure gauge adapter KV481 00410 @ KV481 00400-1 (2) KV481 00400-2
lame as above
iame as above
.-
Oit seal puller ST3329 0001
removing oil seals
Teflon ring correction tool KV481 04400
Assembling steering gear
Wrench KV481 04300
Removing electronic control oil pump solenoid
C11 STEERING

.
Description
Pitman arm puller HT7256 0000
Removing tie-rod
Dial gauge
Measurement tools Spring balance
Gear housing transfer quantity inspection
Checking ball joint swing torque
011 STEERING 1. Summary

Specifications
Engine Steering control system Description Steering wheel
\
RB26DETT Twin orifice power steering system
1 Outer diameter
mm (in)
1 Number of turns (lock to lock)

Model Tilt distance mrn (in) mrn (in)
1 1 1 1
370 (14.57) 2.6

-
Collapsible (steel ball type) 30 (1.18)

35 (1.38) Rack and pinion
Steering column
1 Telescope distance
Model Steering gear Model number
PR26SE (Rotarv valve twin-orifice )

05UOO
1 Part number (49001)

Pump Model Part number (49110)
Fixed injection type

05UOO (RB26DETT)
Maximum steering angle (') Operation oil
1 Inner wheel 1 Outer wheel

I
1
I
31'
Nissan power' steering fluid
I
Description
1
mm (in) N-m (ko-m, ft-lb) mm (in)
Standard value 0 - 35 (0 1.38)

10 (1.0, 7) max.
Steering wheel play Steering wheel standard torque Gear housing movement
,
Slack dis-
( 0.08) max.
Power steering belt tension adjustment value [when 98 N (10 mm (in) kg, 22 Ib) of force is applied]
value
RB26DElT
10 * 11
I
limit
models
16 (0.63)
I
Nissan power steering fluid Steering gear Fluid capacity PR26SE
Operation oil
(Imp qt)
Approx. 0.9 (3/4)
C11 STEERING 1. Summary (Cont'd)

.-
Description
Standard value
Description
PR26SE
0.8 - 1.3 (0.08 0.13, 0.6
Pinion rotational Steering gear pinion rotation torque and rack sliding force
torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
turn from neutral position Maximum value Other than above
- 0.9)
(0.04, 0.3 max.)
(0.19. 1.4 max.)
(0.06. 0.4 max.) Rack sliding force
Note: Numeric values indicate performance when unit is not filled with specified fluid.
Steering column length
mrn (in
Tie-rod length
mm (ir
PR26SE model L = 126.5 (4.98)
Rack neutral position
PR26SE model L = 66.5 (2.618)
Description Sliding torque Tie-rod ball joint Swinging torque

Axial end play (axial load 490
Ball joint
Inner socket
Outer socket
0.3 2.9 (0.03 - 0.3, 0.2
N-m (kg-m. ft-lb)
N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
(0,1 - 0.8.0.7
- 6.5) 1
- 2.2)
N (50 kg. 110 tb)]

mm (in)
0 (0)
0.5 (0.020) max.
C11 STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment

2-1 MAXIMUM STEERING WHEEL PLAY INSPECTION (Inspect with wheels at turning angle.)
Refer to C7 Front Suspension and Axle.
2-2 STEERING WHEEL NEUTRAL POSITION INSPECTION Set wheels straight-ahead and visually check that steering wheel play from neutral position. If it is not within specification, remove steering wheel and reinstall it correctly so it is in neutral position. If the neutral position is between two serrated teeth loosen tie-rod lock nut and move tie-rod in the opposite direction by the same amount on both left and right sides to compensate for error in the neutral position.
2-3 STEERING WHEEL PLAY INSPECTION

Set tires in straight-ahead position. Start engine and turn steering. wheel lightly. Measure distance until wheels start to move and check if it is within specified range. Play distance specification value: 0 35 mm (0 1.38 in) CAUTION: Measure outside of steering wheel to determine play distance.
2-4 STEERING WHEEL STANDARD TORQUE INSPECTION

0
Set vehicle on flat, dry paved road when power steering unit is warm (engine is warmed up). Measure steering wheel rotational torque with preload gauge (special service tool) when engine is running. Measure left and right turns. Standard torque (dry, paved road): 10 N-rn (1.0 kg-m, 7 ft-lb) max.
2-5 FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION

The fluid level should be within the marks in level gauge. Do not overfill because fluid will drip from cap. Check that level gauge has HOT and COLD ranges as shown in figure.
HOT
50 - 80 (122 176OF)
COLD
0 - 3 (32 86'P) 0
C l l STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

CAUTION: (I) Never reuse steering fluid which has been removed. (2) Do not mix Nissan Steering Fluid and Nissan Special Steering Fluid. (3) Never use Nissan matic C or D fluid.
2-6 OIL PUMP RELIEF PRESSURE INSPECTION

Attach power steering pressure gauge {special service tool) between oil pump outlet connector and high-pressure
Special service tool: KV481 03500 KV481 02500 KV481 00410 Raise front end vehicle until wheels clear ground.
I
Blaed air lrom hydraulic system.
NOW
2: Refer to "SteerinQ Gear and Linkage" removal and instal-
Open power steering pressure gauge valve and then statl engine. Operate steering wheel a few minutes until oil warms up. Caullon 1: If the valve Is fully open when the engine starls, the pressure of the 0 1 In the pump rl8es to the 1 pressure of m e rellei value. Do not leave the valve closed all the way because 011 temperature rlses abnormaily. Measure relief pressure when valve is closed, Check that relief pressure is within the specified range.
onds. (Leaving valve open for extended periods of time may damage lhe 011 pump.) Replace oi! pump as~embiy,
Remove power steerin0 oil pressure gauge and allach high pressure hose l o oil pump outlet connector,
Bleed air lrom hydraulic system.
2.7 ADJUSTING SCREW INSPECTION

a
Perform operation test described below on level road, If any abnormality is noted, check adjusting screw and return it to normal position.
@ Linearity
a) Place wheels in straight-ahead position and remove hands from wheel, Check i f wheel can maintain straight-ahead position, b) If wheel cannot be placed in straight-ahead position, loosen adjusting screw.
C11 STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cant'c @ Restoration

a) Turn the steering wheel slightly (approx. 2' 0 30 ar release wheel. Check that steering wheel returns to neutri position. b) If return motion is poor, loosen adjusting screw slightly. CAUTION:, The adjusting screw range is *90 After adjustment, remov lock nut again and remove dust and debris from seal materia Coat ihe lock nut with sealant (silicon bond TB1111B or equi\ aleni) and tighten lock nut to specified.torque.
2-8 GEAR HQUSfNG MOVEMENT INSPECTION

The steering gear housing operation during stationar turns varies according to the elastic deformation of insuls tor. The movement limit is indicated below. Gear housing movement limit: k 2 mrn ( & 0.08 in) (on dry, paved road) Note: This movement is lhe distance the gear housing move: when 49 N (5 kg, 11 lb) of force is applied to the end a steerlng wheel with wheeis set in straighl-ahead posi tion. (Ignition switch is OFF at this time.) 0 If movement is not within specification range, check gea assembly mount bracket and replace mount insulator i necessary.
0
water pump
Power sieerinQ pump pulley
2-9 BELT TENSfON INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Belt tension inspection

Inspect belt tension when engine is cold. Apply 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) of force at positions indicated by arrow marks ( A ) in figure and measure belt slack distance.
Specification
Unit: mm (in)
New part
c12-WSB
Adjusted
10 - >I (0.39
Tension limit
RB26DETT models
- 10 (0.31 0-39)
0.43)
16 (0.63)
Belt tension adjustment

a
Adjust belt stack if it is less than specification (too tight) or greater than specification (too loose).
. .
C11 STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

2-1 0 LEAKAGE INSPECTION
Precautions @ Check type of oil at leakage location. (Power steering fluid is red.)
@ When leakage location is not clear, wash area with white gasoline or other solvent- (In vehicles
equipped with electrically controlled power steering, do not wash harnesses or connectors directly with white gasoline or solvent. Wipe fluid off with rags immediately if fluid is attached.) Check leak positions again. @ When repairing parts, check related parts thoroughly and replace defective parts as necessary. (1) Leakage position inspection
PR26SE model power steering

I
Part A
?
Part f 3 El: Pump
A: Reservoir tank pipe
C: Power steering
C l 1 STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

(2) Leaks from part
-
Leak position
@ (Reservoir tank or pipes) 1. Low-~ressure ~ -- Reservoir tank c a ~

7
ia~ e clam^
Other
a Tube
Repair description (replacement parts)

--
Reservoir tank cap
Low-pressure hose a a clamp

Tube Reservoir tank
a High pressure hose Reservoir tank
Related parts requiring inspection
aI Reservoir tank
- A
Check the seals of related parts for scratches. dents
or other damage. (Note) It these conditions existqrepiace other parts at same time.
Check oil level. 11 quantity is excessive. reduce it to adequate level. It oil level is cOrfC replace parts as necessary.
:
It there are no cracks or other damage to low-pressure hose and a clamp positions have shifted and can be retightened, reposition a clamps and tighten aoain. Otherwise. replace parts as necessary. Replace appropriate parts in leak locations.
Preparation procedures
Bleed air from system, inspect oil level and operational force.
Note: The standard for replacing related parts
fingernail scrapes
catches
scratch.
(3) Oil leak from part (pump) Oil pump leak repair is separated into four types of repair
depending on the leak location. Perform the suitable repair procedure for the leak location.
C l l STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

Leak location
@ Drive shaft oil seal
@ Housing
@ Inlet connector
I
@ Outlet connector
[Kit] a Oil seal a Snap ring Inner O-ring Preparation description Outer O-ring (repiacement parts) Gasket O-ring (inlet connec: tor) Related parts requiring inspection Drive shaft
O-ring (inlet connector)
O-ring (inlet connector)
O-ring (2) (flow control valve)
Front housing Rear housing
Inlet connector Front housing
a Outlet connector Front housing 0 Rear h o u s i n ~
Check seals, O-rings and mating surfaces of gaskets for scratches or indentations (Note). Replace any other parts with scratches or indentations at the same time.
F
Remove pump from vehicle.
I
I
T
Install pump in vehicle.
I
G'
Replace parts.
Bleed air, replenish oil, inspect relief pressure and operation force.
I Note: The standard for replacing related parts is if a fingernail scrapes or catches in a scratch.
C X k J
Check for oil leaks.
C11 STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd] (4) Oil leak from part @ (steering gear) Model PR26SE power steering
(Model PR26SE)
.2'
Note: Adjusting screw is included in @.
lion. Part (boots)
I 7
I
Boot has bulging.
Check boot lor bulging.
1
: '
Boots are not (Retain form.) cut.
No bulging
Check boots tor slipping or cuts.
1
Check if boots make slipping, crunching sound. No sound.
Boots are cut.

There is an oil leak. Check for leaks in parts
Make sound.
,.*.,....*.....,.....*--..
,
Oil leak

Oil leak location
3) Dust boot
Upper rear housing
(S> Rear housing

and gear housing mating surfaces
(?) Power steering

high- and low-pressure and HICAS low-pressure side connections. .. Pipe tightening torque Power steering side PR26SE High-pressure side: 30 35 N-m (3.1 - 3.6 kg-m, 22 26 ft-lb) Low-pressure side: 36 - 40 N-m (3.7 4.1 kg-m, 27 - 30 ft-lb) HICAS High-pressure side: 29 - 39 N-rn (3.0 4.0 kg-m, 22 29 ft-lb) Low-pressure side: 29 39 N-m (3.0 4.0 kg-m, 22 29 ft-lb)
(5) Cylinder tube connections (rear housing side and gear housing side)
@ Dust
boot
installation check items on vehicle
Bolt tightening torque 20 - 24 N-m (2.0 2.4 kg-m, 14 17 ft-lb)
Cylinder tube tightening torque: 29 - 39 N-m (3.0 4.0 kg-m, 22 - 29 ft-lb) Cylinder tube union bolt tightening torque: 20 29 N-rn (2.0 3-0 kg-m, 14 - 22 ft-lb)
Rack oil
Preparation description (replacement parts) Related parts requiring replacement
(Note 1) O-ring Gear housing assembly (cylinder end assembly)
Pipes (tube sheet in port)
sear housng assemI~Y
Sear housng assem)IY
Gear housing assembly
Remove pump from
Check seals, O-rings, gaskets and mating surfaces of related parts lor scratches or indentations (Note). Replace any parts with scratches or indentations at same time.
7
Replace parts.
Note: (1) Make sure there is no peeling around rack oil seal. If there is peeling, also replace gear housing. (2) The standard for replacing related parts is if a fingernail scrapes or catches in a scratch.

2-11 STEERING FORCE INSPECTION (1) Precautions before inspection
@ (5) @ (3) (2)
Are the tire air pressure and size correct? Is the steering wheel a genuine part? Is the wheel offset correct? (Check if wheel spacers are present.) Is wheel alignment correct? Has the suspension been modified? Has the vehicle weight been increased?
Problem classification
Heavy alter starting engine in cold weather. (Normal after warming up.)
Stationary turning Is heavy.
Low-speed, normal turning feels heavier than usual.
Quick turns and turns as medium and low speeds are heavy (pulling).
Steering wheel is abnormally heavy.
Feels heavier than usual, almost full turn is heavy.
Go to flowchart A.
Go to flowchart B.
Go to flowchart C.
GO
to flowchart D.
(3) Damage diagnosis flowchart (entire vehicle)
(D Flowchart A
Check power steering belt for slipping
I
Not Slipping Adjust
bi
Note: If engine speed is raised correct condition can be obtained. In cold weather, press accelerator pedal one time to raise engine speed before turning steering wheel. This will also raise pump speed. this operation does not cause any functional problems.
Start engine, raise engine speed to 2,000 3,000 rpm and check operating steering
Becomes light.
Heavy Replace pump.

@ Flowchart B
Wheel is abnormally heavy.
+
Check power steering-
Normal
-
I
Abnormal ish fluid.
Normal
t
djust or replace. (Not
4
Heavy
1
Inspect steering force.
+
I
1 Becomes lighter.
Check steering force.

1
Check Pump operating oil pressure. (Pressure gauge valve fully open.)
Becomes lighter.
Abnormal
(outside specification)
Normal (within specification)
i
Check ifpipe is twisted or crushed. Abnormal
Abnormal (outside specification ) Do not continue this Normal operation more 1 W r to 2-6 Pump than 15 seconds, Replace pump flow relief pressure control valve. inspection)
Check pump relief pressure.. It (Pressure gauge valve lully closed.)
9
Repair or replace.
1
*
Becomes lighter
End
i
1 Becomes lighter.
Steering gear is faulty. 0 Replace gear control valve. Gear pipe connector is clogged.

@ Flowchart C
Verification items Is the tire air pressure and size correct? Is the steering wheel a genuine part? Is the wheel offset correct? (Check if wheel spacers are present.) Is wheel alignment correct? Has the suspension been modified? Has the vehicle weight been increased? Steering column wheel cover and rubber coupling do not grip.
*
t
normal.
Abnormal
t
Check power steering belt lor slipping. Normal
Adjust
Heavy
I
1 Becomes lighter.
Abnormal (outside specification)
No change.
Compare steering force with that of another vehicle (same model).]
1
Replace pump flow
' Check pump relief pressure. (Pressure gauge valve fully closed.)
Operation torque
4 N.m (0.4 kg-m. 2.9
4 Heavy. -Normal (Refer toinspection.) 2-6 Pump - relief pressure ' Do not continue this operation
lor more than 15 seconds.
r
ft-lb) max. I
I
Operation torque Heavy
ch&
friction of
steering system.
1 Operation torque
Separate tie-rod and check steering gear and column friction.
4 N-m (0.4 kg-m,
2 N-m (0.2 k p m . 1.4 1 ~ b max. )
2.9 ft-lb) max.
1 Operation torque
2 N-m (0.2 kg-m, 1 d 11-lb) max. .
Steering gear Is faulty. b Replace gear control valve. a Gear pipe connector is clogged.
Chack rack sliding movement force. (Tank must contain (Refer to 2-6 Pump relief pressure inspection. )
Suspension system is damaged. Abnormal (outside specification)
1
screw. (Single part adjustment)
torque rack sliding
, I
Replace Yueavy steering column.
1Normal [check s k i n g
INCO
Replace steering gear assembly.
Heavy Check steering force-
1 Becomes lighter.

-
(3) Flowchart D
II
No major difference.
Steering is heavy at medium and low speeds.
Compare steering force with that of another vehicle (same modell.1

I
Heavy Raise vehicle with turn engine OFF. Steer quickly and compare smoothness with another vehicle of same model. No major difference
t
Check piping for twisting or crushing.
1
I
Steering is not smooth.
Normal
Heavy or smoothness.
+
Replace steering gear assembly.
Becomes lighter.
1
1Becomes lighter,
I
Heavy or
it
Replace pump flow control
C12-0578
4) Flowchart (Electrical control power steering)

Steering wheel operating force is abnormal.
+
Steering wheel is lighter. heavier during high speed. lighter during
GO to
flowchart P.
Go to flowchart Q
C11 STEERING 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd,

(3) Flowchart P
1 Lheavy during driving. ]1 Steering becomes

I
Feels heavier than normal.

l
1 1
!I
Turn ignition switch OFF, Start vehicle again from Stop.
Becomes lighter.
Test at 40 km/h (25 MPH) (within 3 min.)
Normal
If problem does not reoccur, vehicle speed sensor signal or harness connection is faulty.
Steering remains heavy.
Steering becomes heavy again. Abnormal

T Speed sensor system is faulty.
0
Power steering solenoid terminal
'
Is power steering solenoid resistance between terrninals (3) and @ 4 60?
Normal
Check control unit "No vehicle speed
valve assembly. Start engine and POWER STEERING turn solenoid valve.
trouble diagnosis"
-Ivalve assembly.
I
I
directly. Check operating steering force. (Note)
I
Note: Do not connect battery directly for more than one minute continuously.
Changes
1
Perform control unit trouble diagnosis. (Refer to control unit trouble diagnosis.)
Normal
G
Check power steering system. Go to flowchart C.
C11 STEERING
3. Control Unit Trouble Diagnosis

3-1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (Refer to Super HICAS system circuit diagram.)
Parking brake lamp
TO ECCS control unit
To ECCS control
ir
ik
Inhibitor switch
Vehicle
(M/T)
I
(A/T)
speed sensor
Neutral
switch
3-2 DAMAGE DIAGNOSIS

Precautions
Before starting to diagnose the power steering system ensure that: <Vehicle stopped > 1. Power steering components (gears, oil pump, pipes, etc.) are free from leakage and that oil level is correct. 2. Tires are inflated to specified pressure and are of specified size, and that steering wheel is a genuine part. 3. Wheel size is adjusted properly. 4. Suspension utilizes the original design and is free of modifications which increase vehicle weight. <Vehicle in operation > 1. Understand the trouble symptoms. (5W1 H) 2. Engine is operating properly.
C11 STEERING 3. Control Unit Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)

L
(1) Steering is heavy during stationary turning.

Steering force during force during fail-safe control
d) Preliminary knowledge helpful in conducting

diagnoses The power steering system is a twin-orifice type, which uses a vehicle-speed sensing, electronic control design. Valve sensitivity is controlled in response to vehicle speed to achieve optimum steering effort. When a vehicle-speed signal is not input to the power steering control unit for more than approximately 10 seconds, a fail-safe system activates to maintain the steering effort at a level similar to that experienced during operation at a vehicle speed of 30 to 60 km/h (19 to 37 MPH). Consequently, if a foot-brake signal, parking brake or transrnission position signal, or neutral in signal a vehicle equipped with manual transmission are not input to the POWER STEERING control unit, the steering system is maintained in a "fail-safe" control state. When this happens, a symptom referred to a 'hhevy steering during stationary turns" sometimes occurs. Note: Normal operation refers to a driving condition in which the foot brake pedal and parking brake lever are
released, and the shift lever is any position other than neutral or clutch pedal is released in a vehicle equipped with manual transmission.
30 (19) 60 (37) Vehicle speed kmlh (MPH)
90 (56)
C12-0547G
C11 STEERING 3 Control Unit Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd) .

(D Flow chart ("Heavy steering during stationary turns")
release foot brake pedal. Set shift lever to anyposition b t u neutral in vehicle equipped with manual transmission and release clutch pedal. Diagnostic connector Stop lamp switch normal Stop lamp switch abnormal
Turn ignition switch ON (with engine OFF),
- 6.6V
t
Press foot brake and measure voltage between diagnostic connector and solenoid valve terminals
Parking brake OFF Position switch OFF
$1 1
f
a o)
Ignition switth ON
&
Canstant 4.4
4
Is voltage constant 4.4
F o r brake ON
- 6.6V?
Approx. 4.4 - 6.6 (V) No HICAS
s
Time (sec.) HICAS e,.,uioed Releasefootbrake and press clutch in M/T vehicles. Measure voltage solenoid valve terminal and diagnostic connector.
control unit? (Voltage between terminals @ @ and @ Q in vehicles equipped with H1CAS). when Check that power steering control unit connector is connested securely.
1I
Turn ignition switch ON and depress brake pedal. Measure voltaae between solenoid -valve terminals at .. ---. -. diagnostic connector. Is voltage 4.4 - 6.6V (constant)?
4.4
Parking brake OFF Position switch OFF Ignition S t o p lamp switch normal switch ON Stop lamp switch abnormal
- 6.6V (constant)
Go to (3
--
Foot brake ON
0)
Becomes lighter.
I
Approx. 4.4
a
0
- 6.6 (V)
Go to @ .
I
Time (sec.)
I No HICAS
Check if approx, 10
1Outside 4.4 - 6.6V range or fluctuate; Outside 4.4 - 6.6V ran terminal voltage drops to approx. - 1.5V range
Is voltage 4.4 6.6V (constant)?
1
seconds after ignition switch is turned ON,
f'uctuation.
1 Voltage drops.
I
Go to
+C
m 1
-
HICAS equipped
Is clutch switch signal input to POWER STEERING control unit? (Voltage between HICAS terminals @ @ and @Q)
4-
4Voltage not input (Approx. 12V)

Clutch switch system is faulty.
t\ l
I
Voltage is inpi (QV when ON)
Check that POWER STEERING control unit connector is connected securely.
Diagnostic connector
@iiEEEl
Turn ignition switch ON and press clutch Measure voltage between solenoid valve terminal and diagnostic connector. Is voltage 4.4 6.6V (constant)? I
(POWER')
^t-
voltage fluctuates.
4.4
I - 6.6V (constant)
control unit is faulty. I-
Is steering heavy during stationary turns? Becomes lighter.

C12-087C
C11 STEERING 3. Control Unit Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd)

l
I
1
I
Release clutch and place shift lever in neutral position. Measure voltage between diagnostic connector and solenoid valve terminals.
Diaonostic connector
r e voltage between diagnostic connector and solenoid valve terminals.
4.4 6.6V (constant)
Is voltage 4.4
- 6.6V (constant)?
Outside 4.4 6.6V range or fluctuates.
A
I
Outside 4.4
- 6.6V range or fluctuates.

T
Go to
+ a. 4.4
6.6V (constant)
Check i f terminal voltage drops to 1 1.5V range approx. 10 seconds attar ignition switch is turned ON. (Refer to following figure.) Voltage drops
Is Dosition switch signal input to power Geering control unit? (Voltage between terminals @ @ and @ @/
,]
Outside 4.4 6.6V range without fluctuation
Got0 (3).
HICAS equipped 112131 0 14151617 8 1 9 11O~ll~Xl13~l4~15116
Position switch Ignition Position switch abnormal nected securely.
Approx. 4.4
- 6.6
[V)
Diagnostic connector connector and solenoid valve terminals. Is voltage 4.4 6.6V
Time (sec.)
Heavy
Go to
a.
Disconnect solenoid valve connector. Check if plunger clicks when voltage is applied between connector terminals. HICAS equipped. Abnormal
112131 0 14151617 8 19 ~ 1 0 l 1 1 l ~ ~ 3 ~ 1 4 l 1 5 l 1 6
Check if power voltage is present at
resistance 4 60? Yes 4 - BQ Ensure that power steering control unit connector is connected securely. Adjust steering gear adjusting screw. a Steering gear is faulty. 0 Oil pump is faulty.
0
Solenoid valve system is faulty Power steering control unit is faulty.
C11 STEERING 3. Control Unit Trouble Diagnosis (Cont'd) (2) Light steering operation during high-speed driving
0) Flowchart
Raise rear wheels of ground and start engine.
1
1
Diagnostic connector
1
'Onstant
~easure voltage between diagnostic connector and solenoid valve terminals while driving vehicle from 0 to 100 kmlh (0 to 62 MPH).
"Itage (NG)
Voltage:
0 krnh (0 MPH) : Approx. 4.4 66V 100 krnlh (62MPH) : Approx. 1.5 2.2V
Normal
No (Doesn't move)
Speed sensor or speedometer is faulty.
- \ 1
Is speed signal input to power
Disconnect solenoid valve connector. Check if plunger clicks when voltage is applied between connector terminals (on solenoid valve side).
1
I
steering control unit? Measure voltage between HICAS terminals @ and @.
Not input.
Check voltage from speedometer HICAS equipped terminals @ and @. Is voltage output? 5 Y e s (less than I V or
Ensure that power steering control unit connector is connected securelv.
1 No
(voltage
..
Harness between epeedo~eter =nd power steering control unit is faulty.
\ f Speedometer'
,-
Diagnostic connector vehicle from 0 to 100 km/h (0 to 62 MPH). Is voltage 4.4 6.6V at 0 kmth (0 MPH) and 1.5 2.2V at 100 hm/h (62 MPH)?
1 No change
~emove power steering control unit connector and measure resistance between vehicle connector terminals and solenoid valve.
Abnormal operation normal? Normal
4
Disconnect solenoid valve connector. Check if plunger clicks when voltage is applied between connector terminals (on solenoid valve side).
~ G S ~ Z4 K C ~ ~ 6~?
Solenoid terminal
Adjust steering gear adjusting screw. Steering gear is faulty. Oil pump is faulty.
operation normal?
Power steering control unit is faulty. Normal
1
Adjust steering gear adjusting screw. Steering gear is faulty. Oil pump is faulty.
/ Solenoid valve system is faulty.
C11 STEERING
4. Removal and Installation, Assembly Disassembly
and
4-1 STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
^c\
Steering column cover
Steering wheel [Point 2 1
', I.
Column assembly [Point 31
Pinch bolt
Additional work required Remove and install: Instrument lower G v &
[CT: N
m (kg-m, ft-lb)
[Point I]Horn button removal a Press horn button notch from hole under steering wheel with screwdriver and remove horn button as shown in figure. CAUTION: (1) Pay attention not to scratch steering wheel and horn pad. (2) Remove horn without placing unnecessary tension on wiring.
[Point 21 Steering wheel removal and installation
Removal
Always use steering wheel puller (special service tool) to remove steering wheel. CAUTtON: Do not tap steering wheel or apply undue stress to steering column shaft (especially In axial direction).
C11 STEERING 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)

Slip
i
Installation
0
When installing steering wheel, apply multi-purpose bod grease (spray type: KRH05-00030) to entire surface of tur~ signal cancel pin and horn contact slip ring.
[Point 31 Column standard dimension measurement

Measure dimension L, (standard value). Replace columi assembly if measurement is outside specification range. Refer to the following specification values for vehicle: equipped with telescopic wheels.
--
Description
Telescopic wheel
mm (in)
LI
L ;
685.5 720.5 (26.99 28.37)
m m (in)
423.4 - 458.4 (16.67 18.05)
[Point 41 Lower joint assembly

Column end
(2.4 .3.0 ko-m,
Partial serration
Lower joint
Align position where serration is incomplete (Note) in lowe joint and steering column and install shaft. Note: Lower joint has a projecting portion in serration. Steer ing column fits into serration indentation. Align pinch bolt to shaft notch part on gear side and columr side correctly and insert securely. After fingertightening tighten to specified torque.
C12-0139C
[Point 51 Installation inspection

After installing steering column, turn steering wheel t( make sure it moves smoothly, without any noise or exces; force. Also check that the number of turns from the straight ahead position to left and right locking points are equal. Bt sure that the steering wheel is in a neutral position wher driving straight ahead.
GI1 STEERING
L
(2) Assembly and disassembly

Steering lock [Point 2 1
Column assembly
Tilt bver 6-11 (0.8 1.1, 5.8 8.0)
: N.m (kg-rn, W b ) E U :Nissan MP special grease No. 2 E 0 :Always replace after every disassembly8
Cl2-0815
Combination switch
[Point I]Combinalion switch removal

To remove combination switch from jacket tube, first loosen screw. While prying notch on inside of switch with screwdriver, remove switch.
/Jacket
tube
c12-OW(
[Point 21 Steering lock installation Align positioning boss on steering lock with hole in jacket
a tube and tap bracket with self-shear screw to secure. Tighten self-shear screw and then cut off screw heads.
Self-shear screw
C11 STEERING 4. Removal and Installation, Assern bly .and Disassembly (Cont'd)
[Point 3 Upper bracket inspection 3
Upper bracket and sliding block are set in plastic molding as shown in figure. If sliding block is falling off, replace upper bracket assembly.
Upper bracket
Cl2-0816C
4-2 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE

(1) Removal and Installation
Front sus~ension member
@,
/nut
Cotter pin [Point 31 [Point I ]
7 -
-w s e - ahr
Knuckle arm [Point 7. 41
Left mouit bracket
Mount insulator
fr'
Right mount bracket [Point 21
Additional work required Tube Installation position [Point 51 Bleed air from hydraulic circuit IPoint 61 Inspect: Gear housing movement distance [Point 71 Steering wheel standard torque [Point 81 0:Always replace after every d~sassembly.
Use Pitman arm puller (commercial service tool) to remove knuckle arm.
Do not scratch dust boot of tie-rod ball joint.
C11 STEERING 4. Removal and lnstallati~n~ Assembly and Disassembiy (Cont'd) [Point 21 Gear mount bracket and mount insulator
installation
Perform alignment securely since right side bracket and insulator have projection as shown in figure. Coat mount bolt with machine oil or equivalent. To install bracket, initially tighten nuts to 78,N-m (8.0 kg-m, 58 ft-lb) and then tighten to specified torque.
Projection
0 0
Cross-section A-A
Tighten to -lo 39nutm 29 N m
Cl2-04438
1
[Point 31 Hexagonal slotted nut tightening a Tighten nut to specified torque [29 to 39 N-rn (3.0 to 4.0
kg-m, 22 to 29 ft-lb)], Then tighten further to align nut groove with first pin hole so cotter pin can be installed. Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N m (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft-lb). m After tightening, check that knuckle arm and ball joint socket are paralle!.
. .
(3.0 to 4.0 kg-m, 22 to S ft-lb)
Tighten nut to first pin hole.
rn
Cotter pin Hexagonal A sloited nut ~Ta1 washer n
--
[Point 41 Knuckle arm installation

, When assembling. tie-rod ball joint in knuckle arm, insert
n u c k l e
2~
flat washer before hexagonal slotted nut because knuckle arm is made of aluminum. CAUTION: Do not tap knuckle arm to assemble because it is made of aluminum. Be careful not to scratch knuckle arm during assembly.
[Point 51 Tube installation position

m
Assemble tubes carefully in correct installation positions shown in figure. @ Cylinder pipe (rear housing to gear housing) I @ Power steering low-pressure pipe (rear housing to reserI voir tank) @ Power steering high-pressure pipe (power steering to rear housing)
Raise vehicle.
C l 1 STEERING 4- Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)

[Point 61 Hydraulic circuit air bleeding
Perform the procedures described on the left to bleed th air from the hydraulic system. The presence of any of the following conditions indicate that air bleeding is not completed. Bleed the system agair @ Air bubbles are formed in the reservoir tank. @ The pump makes a sound like bouncing gravel. @ The pump makes loud growling noises.
I
Turn steering wheel all the way to the right and left reveatedly until air bubbles are no longer formed at bottom of oil surface an6 in reservoir tank. CAUTtON; Ftll reservoir tank durlng alr bleedtng operation so 011 level is mot lowered lo Inlet IRV~~. Start engine.
When engine is idling, repeat operations described above.
I
Check oil level and fill lo specified level.
t
Air bleeding is completed.
Noie: The sound of fluid flow from gear valve and pump can b heard during heavy steering during stationary turns o slow steering, This sound does no1 aflect steering pet form or durability. CAUTION: Perform air bleeding of power steering system before startin! engine. [Point 71 Gear housing movement inspection a Refer to "2. On-vehicle lnspection and Adjustment".
[Point 81 Steering wheel standard torque inspection rn Refer to "2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment.''
(2) Assembly and disassembly precaution rn Secure mounting flange in vice (use copper plates) 81
Mount flange
I
assemble and disassemble steering gear. Wash dirt on steering gear off with white gasoline or sol vent. Be careful not to get the white gasoline or solvent 01 the ports, harness or connectors for outlet and return. Do not reuse O-ring, oil seal (universal joint packing) o copper washer. Always replace with new parts after everq disassemb ty. If inner surface of rear housing assembly or gear huusin! assembly and rack is scratched or damaged, replace gea housing assembly.
(3) PR26SE power steerina aear cross-section
Part A details
&4-.4mI
DDQCCE
cylinder
End cover
Dust boot
Model PR26SE
16-2l (1.6 2.1,
Rear housing cover
Pipe clip 2 locations
Cotter pin
assembly [Point 31
( . 4.0,22 30
- 29)
-0Pinion Teflon ring

7 Pinion assembly
14 20)
Lock nut m 3 9 59 (4.9 6.0, 29 431 djusling screw [Point 171
z
id
Rack oil seat (in Additional work required Secure steer in^ gear unit [Point I] hspect: Rack sliding force [Point 371 Pinion rotational torque [Point 171 Rack oil seal and Teflon ring O-ring sealing [Point 201 Adjust: Side rod length [Point 191 1: Silicon bond T B l l l l B a 2Silicon bond 1324 : : 3: Sealant No. 242 1: Nissan MP special grease No. 2 2: Moly-hexus No. 2 : N m (kg-m, ft-lb) 9 @ : Always replace after every disassembly.
[Point 6)
5 n

[Point 11 Securing steering gear main unit Secure gear housing mount in vise for steering gear
assembly and disassembly. CAUTION: Insert copper plates in sides of vise to avoid scratching housing.
Spring scale
[Point 21 Tie-rod ball joint inspection Swinging force inspection Place spring scale on measurement points indicated in fig-
pring scale measuring poin
(0.39 in)
Inner socket
Outer socket
c,2-0609F
lo
ure. Check that value when ball stand starts moving is within specification indicated below. If value is outside specification range, replace outer socket and inner socket. Make sure dust boot of inner and outer socket is not twisted. Specification values at measurement points shown in figure: Inner socket 16.7 147.1 N (1.7 15 kg, 3.7 33.1 Ib) Outer socket 4.9 46.1 N (0.5 4.7 kg, 1.1 10.4 Ib)
1
Adapter Socket
Sliding torque inspection

Using preload gauge (special service tool), check that torque is within specification limit indicated below. If torque is outside specification, replace outer socket. Outer socket sliding torque: 0 3 2.9 N-rn (0.03 0.3 kg-rn, 0.2 2.2 ft-tb) .
Load I
Axial end play inspection

Apply load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 Ib) to axis of ball stud and measure stud play with dial gauge. If play is outside specification indicated below, replace inner and outer socket. Inner socket: 0 mm (0 in) Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 in) max.
POWER STEERING solenoid valve assembly
7 - 12 N._ (0.7 1.2 kg-rn,

[Point 31 Power steering solenoid valve replacement The power steering solenoid valve is an integral unit and cannot be disassembled. If replacement is necessary. replace entire assembly. Replace O-rings (3) at assembly. (Non-reusable part) CAUTION: (1) Do not remove the power steering solenoid valve screw because it cannot be disassembled. (It does not adjust the steering force.) (2) When replacing assembly, be careful not to allow dirt, debris or foreign matter to adhere to assembly.
[Point 41 Rear housing pipe installation position Assemble pipes carefully in correct installation positions shown in figure. CAUTION: Pay close attention because certain parts vary in the 2WD model. ( Cylinder pipe (rear housing to gear housing) (B) Power steering low-pressure pipe (rear housing to reservoir tank) < Power steering high-pressure pipe (power steering to rear housing) [Point 51 Inner socket assembly and disassembly Disassembly a Move the caulking (@I 4 locations) of the lock plate @ , loosen socket and separate from rack (3). Remove lock plate @ .
Caulking
Assembly .Set lock plate (5) on tie-rod inner socket 0 . Apply sealant (Three Bond 1324) to threads of inner socket (D . Screw into socket <3) into rack @ and tighten to specified torque. Caulk lock plate at two locations on groove side of rack. 8 CAUTION: Wipe off any debris on lock plate so it will not adhere to the boot.

[Point 61 End cover removal and installation Removal
Drill staked position of gear housing end with 3-0mm drill until the staking is eliminated.
Remove end cover assembly with 42 m m open-end wrench.
Installation
8
Tighten end cover. Fasten end cover assembly to gear housing with staking to prevent looseness as shown in figure.
(0.08 0.12 in)

C12-0412l
Rack oil seal
[Point 7] Center bushing and rack oil seal removal and installation
Center bushing
Removal
Turn pinion housing side and remove center bushing and rack oil seal at same time using 29-mm tape-wrapped socket and extension bar [length of 2 pieces is approx. 500 rnm (19.69 in)]. CAUTION: Do not scratch pinion housing or cylinder inner surface.
Inner side Installation 0 Use rack to install.

Install center bushing and rack oil seal (inner) separatelyCAUTION: (1) Do not scratch rack end surface. (2) To prevent scratching rack oil seal (inner), wrap the gear teeth of rack with protective plastic film, size: 70 x 100 m m (2.76 x 3.94 in) and insert oil seal above the wrapped sheet. Pull rack gears together with protective sheet until it passes.
.-
1
Plastic film

Rack
Rack oil seal
Outer side installation

Use end cover assembly to install outer side. CAUTION: To prevent scratching oil seal, wrap end of rack in a protective plastic film, size: 70 x 100 mrn (2.76 x 3.94 in) and insert oil seal. Pull plastic film out together with oil seal.
Rack end
End cover assembly
Rack oil seal direction

Rack oil seal (inner) Rack oil seal (outer)
Make sure inner and outer side lips of rack oil seal are facing correct direction and install seal.
center bushing
End cover assembly
[Point 81 Rack Teflon ring removal and installation Removal a Using a heat gun, heat rack seal ring (made of Teflon) to
approximately 40 (104F) Remove Teflon rack seal ring. Be careful not to scratch rack. Replace O-ring and Teflon ring with new parts at same time.
Installation Using a heat gun, heat rack seal ring (made of Teflon) to approximately 40aC (104-F) and install on rack by hand.
C11 STEERING 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd) Use seal ring correction tool (special service tool), compress periphery of rack seal ring (made of Teflon) to position and secure it on rack. CAUTION: Always insert the 'tool from the rack gear side.
[Point 91 Pinion oil seal removal and installation

Removal Using oil seal puller (special service tool), remove oil seal from gear housing.
Installation
Assemble oil seal with spring facing up as shown in figure.
Use appropriate sized drift and press in oil seal in gear housing. Reference: A 26-mm socket can also be used.
26 mm socket
[Point 101 Shim selection

a
Assemble unit with the same number of shims that were disassembled, whether replacement of pinion assembly gear housing and rear housing is necessary or n o t
C11 STEERING 4 Removal and Installation, Assembly and . Disassembly (Cont'd)

[Point 111 Pinion Teflon ring removal and installation Removal
Install Teflon ring on pinion assembly. Be careful not to damage pinion oil seal. Do not reuse Teflon ring.
Installation
a
0
Using a heat gun, heat pinion seal ring to approximately 40 (104'F) before installing it onto pinion gear assembly. Make sure pinion seal ring is properly settled in valve groove.
lnskll by hand.
Pinion assembly
C12-0545E
^ .
seal
[Point 121 Needle bearing grease coating 0 When assembling pinion assembly in gear housing, apply a coat of Nissan MP special grease No. 2 to needle bearing roller and pinion oil seal lip.
[Point 131 Rear oil seal grease coating

0
Apply coat of Nissan MP special grease No. 2 to rear oil seal lip before assembling rear housing as shown in figure.
[Point 141 Rear housing assembly installation

Protect rear oil seal from damage by serration part of pinion assembly by wrapping it assembly serration in a protective plastic film, 50 x 70 mm (1.97 x 2.76 in)]. CAUTION: If protective film is wrapped on bearing insertion surface the housing cannot be assembled.
0
ft

Install rear housing assembly straight ahead.
Insert rear housing assembly in pinion assembly and then remove protective plastic film.
[Point 151 Rear housing cover installation

a
Position rack as shown in figure, and determine neutral position. L dimension: 66.5 mm (2.618 in)
Rear cover can
f l
20 26 0 . 0 2.7.
Install rear cover cap so that protrusion of rear housing cover is positioned as shown in figure.
l[Dl: N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
12 15)
[Point 161 Spring (diaphragm spring) installation
m
a
Always install retainer, spring washer, washer and diaphragm spring in this order. Make sure convex end (painted white) of diaphragm spring faces outward when installing.
Lock nut

~pply sealant
[Point 171 Adjusting screw adjustment
(a) Steering gear assembly adjustment (without fluid in gears)

1
Set gears to neutral.
Coat the adjusting screw with locking sealant (Silicon Bond TB1111B) and screw i t in place.
Tighten lock nut lightly,
1
Tighten adjusting screw to a torque of 5 to 6 N-m (0.5 to 0.6 kg-m, 3.6 to 4.3 ft-lb).
Measure pinion rotating torque within the range of 180. from the neutral position. Stop the gear at the point of maximum torque.
Loosen the adjusting screw and then retighten it to 5 to 6 N-m (0.5 to 0.6 kg-m, 3.6 to 4.3 fMb). Next loosen adjusting 0 screw by 6' to loo*.
Tighten loch nut to 39 to 59 N-m (4 to 6 kg-m, 29 to 43 ft-Ib). while securing adjusting screw so they do not turn together.
rack average sliding force. Make sure value is within specification.
N (kg, Ibl
AH other cues
(12.5 - 10. 27.6 41.9)
(-2.618 in) stroke (4.217) (0.217)
stroke (2.618 in)

C1Z-0844F
Neutral
Note 1: If the sliding force is still out of specification even after readjustment, the steering gear is damaged and should be replaced.
Cl1 STEERING 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
Measure pinion rotation torque with preload gauge. Make sure value is within specification.
Average vaiue A Deviation maximum vnlue 8 value C 0.8 - 1.3 (0.08 0.13, 0.6 0.9)
Neutral
,ange (within
* lorl
5 N-m (0.5 kg-m, 3 6 .
ad gauge
n
Specificalion
N m (kg-m,
0.4 (0.04. 0,3)
Dial gauge Insert inner socket in end cover.
maxlmum value D
0 6 (0.06, . 0.41
Adjusting
N.G. (Note 2)
screw
C12-0!546l
O.K.
Note 2: If pinion rotating torque is not within specification after readjustment, replace gear assembly.
Rotate pinion all the way to left with gear assembly
Set dial gauge as shown in figure. Rotate pinion to left by applying force of 5 N+m(0.5 kg-m, 3,6ft-lb) and measure the rack force in vertical direction on dial gauge. Check if force is within specification. Specification
rnm (in)
0.08(0.0037) max.
;L-
Note 3: If rack sliding force is still out of specification after readjustment, gear assembly must be replaced.

@ Steering gear assembly, on-vehicle inspection (filled I
with gear oil) After adjusting steering gear as described in previous section, assemble in vehicle and perform following inspection.
steering column 1 Separateknuckle arm. lower joint, steering Qear, tie- I and
rod
in) range from the neutral position, make sure rack sliding force (Note 4) is within specification. Average rack sliding force A
284 N
(29 kg, 64 lb] max,
1
I
02-0041 F
Right turn
Average
sliding force A
Note 4: Measure rack sliding force under following conditions, @ Engine speed: ~ p p r o x 1,000 rprn . @ Temperature: Approx. 55% (122'F) @ Rack speed: Approx, 3.5 mmfsec Determination (0.138 inlsec)
-11.5 (4.453)
x.?
g rEz
11.5
(0.453)
+
Clz-0431E
1 N.G.
If rack sliding force is still out of specification afte readjustment, gear assembly must be replaced.
Rack stroke
[Point 181 Dust boot and clamp installation

Before installing boot, coat the contact surfaces between boot and tie-rod. with grease.
The boot clamps are only located on large diameter side in two positions. The housing side and cylinder end side both have a length ( t )of 396 rnm (15.59 in)To install, wrap boot clamp around boot groove twice. Tighten clamp by twisting rings at both ends 4 to 4-112 turns with screwdriver while pulling with a force of approx. 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb).

Twist boot clamp in the direction shown in the figure at left.
Install boot clamp so that clamped portion will be behind the gear when gear housing is attached to the vehicle. (This will prevent interference with other parts.) After twisting clamp 4 to 4-112 times, bend it diagonally so it does not contact boot. Angle A: -80" to -looO
Pinion housinQ side
Cylinder housing side
[Point 191
Set tie-rod length (dimension L) to following specificatior and tighten lock nutSpecification: 126.5 mm (4.98 in) CAUTION: Always adjust toe-in after completing this operation. Thi! dimension may change after toe-in adjustment,
[Point 201 Rack oil seal, Teflon seal and ring seal inspection
After assembling steering rack, check sealing as shown i~ figure. Connect vacuum hand pump (special service tool) to tub1 as shown in figure. Apply vacuum pressure of 53.3 kPa (401 mmHg, 15.75 inHg) for approx. 30 sec and check that then is no needle deflection.
C l 1 STEERING 4. Fieinoval and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)

a
To check rack seal ring (Teflon) and O-ring sealing, connect gauge to pinion side port as shown in figure. Apply vacuum pressure of 53.3 kPa (400 mmHg, 15.75 inHg) for approx. 30 sec and check that there is no needle deflection.
4-3 OIL PUMP, OIL TANK AND HYDRAULIC TUBES Refer to C12 SUPER HICAS for power steering pump procedures.
C12 SUPER HICAS
PRECAUTIONS a The final tightening of rubber bushings should be performed when vehicle is empty and on thf ground. Wipe off any oil adhering to part surfaces because it reduces durability. Check wheel alignment when preparing suspension parts. Use flare nut wrench for removal and installation of steering pipe and power system flare nuts, Always adjust front and rear toe-in after power cylinder assembly removal and installation. SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
Tool name Tool number Description
-
Pin punch KV321 01300
Removing fail-safe valve tube seat
Attachment ST2770 0001
Assembling and disassembling power steering pump

Tool name Tool number Description
qefnoving power cylinder outer link
CONSULT EGI I80 0000
rrogra card
2ontrol unit inputloutput (VO) signal inspection

CLW-023Q
C12 SUPER HICAS

1. Summary
This section describes SUPER HICAS trouble diagnosis procedures. Refer to C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE. C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE and C11 STEERING for further descriptions of other suspension and steering preparation operations. System diagram
---
Power steering hydraulic system

ClS-0089i
C12 SUPER HICAS 1. Summary (Cont'd)

RB26DETT Suspension Description Suspension type Toe-in Camber Wheel alignment (empty vehicle) mrn (in) Front Rear
1
(7
Multi-link independent suspension 1& 1 (0.04& 0.04)
2 (0.08~k0.08)
-1 O05' 30'
4-55' 45' -fc
1 Caster
King pin inclination angle Side slip (reference)
(7 1
(*I
rnm (in)
Y40' -1- 45' 15'25' i 45'
-5 to 5 (-0.20 to 0.20)
1 Damping force
Shock absorber [0.3 m (1.0 ft)fs) N . (g,, k-,, ~
1 Expansion
ft-lb) Compression Nfmrn (kgfmm, Ib/in) mm (in) 500 (51, 112) 402 (41, 90)
1 Spring constant
Free length Coil spring Coil center diameter Wire diameter Number of active coifs Inner diameter Power cylinder Stroke
. .
23.5 (2.4, 134)
26.5 (2.7, 151) 345 (13.58)
405 (15.94)
mm (in)
1
1
110 (4.33) [low side 80 (3.15)] 12.3 (0.484)

7.92
100 (3.94) [low side 90 (3.54)] 11.8 (0.465) 7-29
mrn (in)
mm (in) mm (in) kg-slmm
60 (2.36)
30 (0.1180.00 450 22.5 05U10 (RB26DETT) Fixed injection volume 05UOO (RB26DETTI
Spring rigidity (Static) Part number (55710)
Pump
Type Part number f49110) mm (in) mm (in)
Tension rod outer diameter Stabilizer outer diameter
20 (0.79)
20 (0.79)
---A*.
25.4 (1.000)
l o [Stroke: 3 mm (0.12
lo [Stroke: 3 rnm (0.12
Maximum steering angle
'
Description
Outer wheel
in11
Specification Description Sliding torque N-rn (kg-m, ft-lb) Ball joint
0.3 29 (0.03 0.3, 0.2
Rear housing ball joint
Swinging torque (spring scale conversion value) N (kg, lb) Axial end play Tightening torque
mm (in)
6.9 68.6 (0.7 7.0, 1.5 - 15.4)
- 2.2)
0 (0)
N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) 45 60 (4.6 - 6.1, 33 44) Nissan power steering fluid
Operation oil
C12 SUPER HICAS

2-1 INSTALLATION INSPECTION
(1) Engine compartment 0 Check the installation of each part and piping and wiring conditions.
,,
1,
,,
(2) Rear undercarriage Check installation of each part and pipe condition. 0 Check that rubber parts (boots, insulators, etc.) are not cracked or damaged. Check installation condition of suspension parts.
C12 SUPER H1CAS 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

Rear parcel (trunk)
Check wiring harness connector condition of HICAS control unit in'the middle of rear parcel in trunk.

Refer to C7 FRONT SUSPENSION AND AXLE, C8 REAR SUSPENSION AND AXLE for wheel alignment inspection and adjustment procedures.
2-3 FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION

Maintain the fluid level so that the lower surface of the float is maintained between the "L" and "H" marks on the gauge rod. The fluid level should be checked when the engine is stopped and the fluid temperature is normal. CAUTION: (1) Never reuse fluid that has been removed. (2) Never use any other oil except the recommended type of power steering fluid.
2-4 SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION

(1) When CONSULT is used: Perform the following procedures. (2-man operation) d) Have a helper sit in the driver's seat and raise vehicle. (Use a two-pole lift or a center pole lift so that all four wheels are free to rotate.) (2) Connect CONSULT unit to diagnostic connector and start engine. ( Touch "START" on CONSULT display.
@ "HICAS". Touch I
CH-3548
C12 SUPER HICAS 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
(g) Touch "SIMULATED DRIVE",

SIMULATED DRIVE
I
<T) Touch "START" when MAIN SIGNALS display is reversed.
1
I-
SELECTIW FROM MENU
1
1
ACTIVE TEST
E
HIGH SPEED
(g) Touch "START1'- (high-speed mode set) CAUTION: After simulated drive condition has continued for 5 minutes, it will automatically cancel and CONSULT unit will then show "TEST IS INTERRUPTED TO AVOID OIL TEMP RISE" display. To cancel this mode during selfdiagnosis, simply touch "CANCEL".
@ Operate engine at speeds greater than 2,000 rpm, and turn

steering wheel 180' in one direction from the neutral position. Measure extension value of one power cylinder rod and retraction value of the other. Then, turn steering wheel 180in the other direction from the neutral position and measure extension value of one cylinder rod and retraction value of the other. Determine strokes of respective power cylinders b y adding (measured) extension and retraction values. CAUTION: Measure rod strokes in as short a period of time as possible.
CH-339
C12 SUPER HICAS 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)

When turned to the right: 3 mm (0.12 in)
. .
Left rod: extended, Right rod: retracted

Left rod: retracted, Riaht rod: extended
Specifications mrn (in)
turned to the left 3 mm (0.12 in) Total stroke: 6 mrn (0.24 in)
(2) When CONSULT is not used:

Perform the following operations. (2-man operation) (T) Have a helper sit in the driver's seat, and raise vehicle. (Use a 2-pole lift or a center pole lift so that the four wheels are free to rotate.) Q Turn ignition switch OFF. (3) Start engine. Turn steering wheel from left to right (at least 20' from the neutral position) 5 times or more, then depress foot brake pedal at least 5 times all within 10 seconds after ignition switch has been turned "ON". @ steering wheel to a point approximately 10' from the neutral position and check to ensure thai Set I rear wheels turn to the left and right alternately.
@ Stroke position
la
I .. ..
.-
... "..., .--.
ti
C15-00400
(S) Operate engine at speed greater than 2,000 rpm, and turn steering wheel 1 0 in one direction from the neutral posi8 tion. Measure extension value of one power cylinder roc and retraction value of the other. Then, turn steering whee 180 in the other direction from the neutral position anc measure extension value of one cylinder rod and retractior value of the other. Determine strokes of respective powei cylinders by adding (measured) extension and contractior strokes. CAUTION: Measure rod strokes In as short a period of lime as possible Turn ignition switch OFF and cancel selfdiagnosis.
When turned to the right: 3 mm (0.12 in) Specifications mm (in) Left rod: extended, Right rod: retracted Left rod: retracted, Right rod: extended
When turned to the left : 3 mm (0.12 in) Total stroke: 6 mrn (0.24 in)
2-5 FLUID LEAK INSPECTION LOCATIONS

w
Refer to C11 STEERING, 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment for descriptions of SUPER HICA: power steering fluid leak inspection locations. This section describes the leak inspection locations for the SUPER HICAS power cylinder.
C-12 SUPER HICAS 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'd)
Vote: If leakage locations are not clearly visible, wash area with white gasoline or equivalent solvent and check for leaks again.
Other than locations
Cft
(except b o d )
Verily leak location (Note) Location @ (boots)
1
NO
Are boots bulging or swollen?
1 No (No swelling)
cuts or cracks Check boot by holding by hand. Are boots cut or
(air leaks in boot)
Y e s -fluid leaks
Are there fluid teaks in location @ ?
Check again tor boot slipping
Abnormal sound
No abnormal sound
Fluid leak
i'
areas
C12 SUPER HICAS 2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment (Cont'c

Fluid leak location
<D
Dust boot
(2) Power cylinder tube connections
(3) Power cylinder air bleeder
On-vehicle inspection locations
Power steering lube tightenAir bleeder tightening torque ing torque m Right side: a Right port side: 6 8 N-m (0.6 - 0.8 kg-m, 39 4 N-m (4.0 5.0 kg-m, 9 4.3 5.8 ft-lb) 29 36 ft-lb) m Left side: a Lett port side: 6 8 N-m (0.6- 0.8 kg-m, 39 49 N-rn (4.0 - 5.0 kg-m, 4.3 5.8 fl-lb) 29 36 ft-lb)
Preparation description (part! requiring replacement) Related parts requiring inspection
Power cylinder assembly
Tubes
(Air bleeder) Power cylinder assembly
Remove power cylinder from vehicle.
1
Check contact surfaces inside the power cylinder assembly port and air bleeder for scratches, indentations or damage.
1
Replace parts as necessary.
1
-
1
Install power cylinder in vehicle.
1
Bleed air and inspect oil level.
I
2-6 AIR BLEEDING
a
Inspect for fluid leakage.
Refer to "4-1 POWER CYLINDER AND LOWER LINK", (T) Removal and installation for description HICAS system air bleeding procedures,
C12 SUPER HICAS

-
3. Trouble Diagnoses
3-1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSPECTION PREPARATION
(1) Circuit diagram and control unit installation position
T
r
warning
@ Sensor 1 signal
> Sensor 2 signal
HIGASfail-safe valve
@ Neutral position switch

Stop lamp switch Oil level sensor
(3b
ECCS control init
-0
1 HICAS control unit

HICAS
Highspeed sensor
Stop lamp (
II
ECCS control unit
1 l^m I I1
POWER STEERING 11 l"7 I solenoid
HICAS control unit installation position The unit is located below the rear parcel shelf. 0
1 connector
~15-0111~1
C12 SUPER HICAS 3 Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd) .

(2) Trouble diagnosis when CONSULT is used
@ Self-diagnostic items
Diagnostic item CAR SPEED SENSOR [No signal] (- a) CAR SPEED SENSOR [SIG-SUDDEN TURN] (. b) STEERING ANGLE SEN [NO ANG SIGNAL] (. a) STEERING ANGLE SEN [NO NEUT SIGNAL] {. b) STEERING ANGLE SEN [NEUT SIG-360" OFF] {. C)
B
Description No vehicle speed signal is entered after vehicle has been operated above a certain speed. Vehicle speed signal changes abru~ttv durina operation. Steering angle has not changed while driving at a speed of at least 60 kmlh (37 MPH). Neutral (ON) signal is not entered after vehicle has been driven. Neutral (ON) signal is not entered even after steering wheel has been turned at least 30. 6' Neutral (OFF) signal is not entered even after steering wheel has been turned at least 50'. Neutral (ON) signal is continuously shown at steering angle of at least
Remarks
1
1
1 1 1
STEERING ANGLE SEN [NEUT SIG-30a ON] (. d)
3 0
FAILSAFE VALVE [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] HICAS SOLENOID-R [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] HICAS SOLENOID-L [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] POWER STEERING SOL [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] Output terminal voltage is abnormal due to broken or shorted HICAS fail-safe valve circuit. Output terminal voltage is abnormal due to broken or shorted HICAS solenoid (RH) circuit. Output terminal voltage is abnormat due to broken or shorted HICAS solenoid (LH) circuit. Output terminal voltage is abnormal due to broken or shorted power steering solenoid circuit.
C12 SUPER HICAS 3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd)

@ Data monitoring items
0: Standard
Monitor item selection Diagnostic item CAR SPEED (krnlh or MPH) All signals Selection from menu
A: Optional selection
Remarks
A
Abnormal value is shown before straight-ahead position ("0") is set and afler battery is disconnected and reconnected-
STEERING ANG
(RILe)
NEUTRAL SIG STOP LAMP SW
(ONIOFF) (ONIOFF)
0 0
A
Clutch switch signal in M / l vehkles, parking brake switch signal in A/T vehi-
(ONIOFF)
cles.
NEUTRAL S W (ONIOFF) Neutral switch signal in M I l vehicles, inhibitor relay (ff or P position) in A K vehicles. Engine speed greater than/ less than 1,500 rpm is shown. Controlled current flow from control unit to HICAS solenoid and direction of current control are shown,
POWER STR SOL
ENG REV (OVER 1.500) or (UNDER 1,500)
(A)
Controlled current flow from control unit to power steering is shown.

ON (when connected) or OFF (when disconnected) is shown.
-
FAILSAFEIV
(ONIOFF)
NON (fail-safe valve ON)

FAILSAFE (CUTINON)
refers to "normal" condition. CUT (fail-safe valve OFF) when "fail-safe" condition is shown. Illumination control of control unit HICAS warning lamp is shown. Voltage measured with voltage probes is shown. Value measured with pulse probes is shown, If pulse cannot be measured, "#" is shown. "#" is also shown at left of final data until measurement results are determined.
WARNING LAMP
(ONIOFF)
A
A
VOLTAGE
('4
PULSE

Trouble diagnosis by self-diagnosis Self-diagnosis (When CONSULT is used)
Turn ignition switch OFF. conneit CONSULT unit to diagnostic connectors. (Diagnostic connectors are located in fuse block,)
Start engine. Touch "START" on CONSULT display.
Touch "HICAS".
SELECT D I M NUDE
ml
Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
Self-diagnostic results are shown on display.
1 FRILURE DETECTED

For reference: Recording input/output signals using data monitor function. 0 Start enaine. 0 Touch "$TART" (on CONSULT display).
Touch "HICAS".
&I
SELECT DIhG IIODE
nl
Touch "DATA MONITOR".
hCTIUE TEST
ECIU PART I.I~Jfil3ER
Check to ensure that the ALL SIGNALS display is reversed. Touch "START".
Touch "RECORD" to record data. Make sure that ON-OFF signal is produced when signal is entered from each sensor while monitoring. CAUTION: To cancel data recording during operation, touch "CANCEL".
C12 SUPER H C A S 3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd)

@ Self-diagnosis (When CONSULT is not used)
Self-diagnosis procedures
@ Input starting conditions for self-diagnosis.

1) Turn ignition switch "OFF". 2) MtT vehicles: Set shift lever in neutral. AIT vehicles: Set shift lever to "P" or "N". 3) Immediately start engine. 4) Turn steering wheel from left to. right (at least 2' from the neutral position) 5 times or more, then 0 depress foot brake pedal at least 5 times, all within I0 seconds after ignition switch has been turned "ON". @ Input selfdiagnosis item. I 1) Depress and release foot brake pedal. 2) Turn steering wheel from left to right (at least 207 from the neutral position. 3) MIT v ~ i c l e s Depress clutch and move shift lever to any gear other than neutral and then return : clutch and shift lever to original position. A/T vehicles: Disengage and engage parking brake lever. Move shift lever to any position other than Neutral or Parking and return it to Parking. 4) Move car at least 2 to 3 meters (7 to 10 ft) forward and proceed at an indicated speed of at least 2 kmth (1 MPH) in self-diagnosis mode.
@ Self-diagnosis items
(1) RH solenoid output (2) Lti solenoid output (3) Fail-safe valve output (4) Power steering solenoid output (5) Vehicle speed signal. (6) Steering angle signal. (7) Steering angle neutral signal (8) (AIT) parking brake signal, (MIT) clutch signal (9) (AtT) inhibitor signal, (M/T) neutral signal
@ Self-diagnosis display pattern

1) When all systems are normal: HICAS flashes at 0.25 sec (4 Hz) intervals. 2) If fail-safe system was operated (fail-safe valve is operating) when ignition switch was OFF for the last time, fail-safe items will be displayed in numerical order in modes indicated. After all items are displayed, display is repeated again. Example: The warning lamp displays abnormal mode (I sec. ON) in following sequence: (2) HICAS solenoid LH, (4) power steering solenoid and (5) vehicle speed sensor. CAUTION: After this display is shown, when ignition key is turned OFF the next display I @ . s I
Diagnosis starts Approx. 10 times ON HlCAS warning lamp OFF
1 sec (Abnormal mode displays.)
0.1 sec. (Normal mode displays.)
nosis starts for (1) through (9)

3) If fail-safe system was not operated when ignition switch was OFF for the last time, display will show self-diagnosis results in numerical sequence in modes indicated below. After all self-diagnosis, results are shown and display is repeated again. Example: The warning lamp displays abnormal mode (I sec. ON) in following sequence: (2) HICAS solenoid LH, (4) power steering solenoid and (7) Steering angle neutral signal.
Diaanosis starts
1 sec. (Abnormal mode displays.) 0.1 sec. (Normal mode displays.)
ON
nl-r
(2)
(3)
HICAS warning
lamp
OFF
111
(4)
2nd self-diagnosis siafis
(5)
(6) ' (7)
through (9)
@ Canceling the self-diagnosis function I

The three methods for canceling the self-diagnosis are described below. The self-diagnosis system is canceled by turning ignition switch "OFF" The self-diagnosis system is canceled by a vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 MPH) or over. After the self-diagnosis has been operated for approximately 5 minutes, the self-diagnosis system will be automatically canceled.

(4) Diagnostic procedures
A. When self-diagnosis function is not used:
Abnormal and reconnect them firmly. Conduct self-diagnosis. Normal (self-diagnosis does not start) Turn ignition switch "ON". 1 Stop h m p switch signal s input to control unit? Measure voltage across terminals @ @ and @ Q. Normal (Brake ON: l z v ] (Brake OFF: OV)
Connector is faulty.
control unit terminal
is faulty. Normal (Neutral position: ap,,rox. (More than 20': OV)
+
@ a.
Turn ignition switch ON and turn steering wheel from left to right (at least 20e) from the neutral position. Is steering angle neutral position signal input to control unit? Measure voltage across terminals @ @ and
i
5 ~ )
Abnormal (no voltage change)
+
steering
sensor
terminal
Turn ignition switch ON and turn steering wheel from left to right (at least 20') from the neutral position. Is steering angle neutral position signal output from angle sensor? Measure voltage across terminals @ @ and @ @. I
I
Normal (Neutral position: approx. 5v) (More than 20a:OV)
Control unit steering angle sensor wiring is faulty.
+
Check steering angle $ensor for IGN power supply and grounding. (Measure voltage between IGN power terminal @ 0 and body ground. Check for continuity @ I between IGN power supply terminal @ and body ground.) Normal (IGN power: Approx. 72V) (Ground: Continuity exists)
I
1
Abnormal (IGN power: OV) (Ground: No continuity)
4
Steering angle sensor is faulty.
ION power supply system or ground circuit is faulty.
C12 SUPER HICAS 3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd) 8. HICAS solenoid (right and left) output is not present. [@ Self-diagnosis items (1) and (213
Disconnect HICAS solenoid connector and control unit connector, and reconnect them firmly. Perform selfdiagnosis.
I
Abnormal (no right or left side solenoid output)
Connectar is faulty.
1
Measure resistance between HICAS solenoid connector terminals @ , @ and @ . I resistance 4 6Q? s
Abnormal
HICAS solenoid terminal
1
4
Solenoid is faulty.
Normal
Control unit terminal
Remove control unit wnnectors. Measure resistance @ I between vehicle connector terminals @I, and @. Is resistance between 4 6Q?
Normal
(
Abnormai
Controt unit is faulty.
4
Harness between control unit and solenoid is faulty.
C. Fail:safe output is no! present.
[aSelf-diagnosis items (311
Disconnect fail-safe valve connector, control unit connector and reconnect them firmly. Perform self-diagnosis again.
Normal
Connector is faulty. Abnormal
Fail-safe terminal
Measure .resistance between fail-safe valve connector terminals @ and @ . Is resistance 13 l?n?
Normal
c
Normal
Fail-safe valve is faulty.
Disconnect control unit connectors. Measure resistance between connector terminals @ , @ . Is resistance between 13 17Q?
1
r
4
Abnormal
+
(Harnessbetween control unit and fail-safe valve is 'faulty.
-.
C12 SUPER HICAS 3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd) 0. Power steering solenoid output is not present. [ @ Self-diagnosis items (4)]
Disconnect power steering solenoid connector and control unit connector, and reconnect them firmly. Perform self-diagnosis. Notmal
4
Abnormal Connector is faulty,
Power steer~nq solenoid terminal
Measure resistance between power steering solenoid and @ . Is resistance 4 6a? terminals
b
Power steering solenoid is faulty. Normal
1Control unit terminal
+
I
Normal
Remove conlrol unit connactors. Measwe resistance between vehicle connector terminals and @. Is resistance between 4 - 6Q?
Abnormal
Control unit i s faulty.
EmVehicle speed signal is not present. [Self-diagnosis procedure (511
Disconnect control unit conn firmly. Perform self-diagnosis. Abnormal (vehicle speed sensor malfunction is output)
Normal
4
1
Turn ignition switch ON and raise rear of vehicbe so between control unit connector terminals @ @ and @ @ while slowly rotating rear wheels by hand. (Note) Note: Sel CONSULT in data monitor mode. Abnormal (no voltage change) Harness between vehicle speed sensor is faulty or harness between conlrol unit and speedometer is faulty.
Normal
C12 SUPER HICAS 3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd) F. Steering angle signal is not present. [ @ Self-diagnosis items (6) and (711
Disconnect control unit, steering sensor connectors and reconnect them firmly. Conduct self-diagnosis. Normal
I
Abnormal (steering angle sensor malfunction is output)
+
Connector is faulty. Normal (voltage must change between 0 and 5V.)
1
Turn ignition switch ON and turn steering wheel from left to right (at least 20') from the neutral position. Is steering angle signal input to control unit? Measure voltage across terminals @, @ @ and @ @I , I (Note)
1
I
1
Steering angle sensor terminal
Note: Set CONSULT in data monitor mode.
b
)-- ' (
Abnormal (no voltage change) Normal (voltage must change between 0 and 5v.)
Turn ignition switch ON and turn steering wheel from left to right (at least 20') from the neutral position. Is steering angle sensor signal input to control unit? Measure voltage across terminals @, @ , @ and @ I
(3e.

I
Wiring between control unit and steering angle is faulty. Normal
Check steering a n ~ l e sensor for IGN power supply and grounding. (Measure voltage between IGN power terminal @ body ground. Check for continuity between tGN @ and I power supply terminal @ and body ground,) I
Abnormal (IGN Dower: QVl
( Steering angle sensor
is faulty?
IGN power system or ground circuit is faulty.
C12 SUPER HICAS 3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd) G. Parking brake (AIT) or clutch switch (MIT) input is not present. [ @ Self-diagnosis items
(811
Disconnect control unit firmly. Perform self-diagnosis.

I
Normal
'
1 2 3 0
4 5 6 7
+
1
{
Abnormal barking brake or clutch switch signal is not inpul.)
+
Engage parking brake or depress clutch pedal. Measure voltage variations between control unit terminals @ @ and @ 6.
Normal (voltage must change between 0 and 5V.I
I1
Note: Set CONSULT in monitor mode.
dais
)
4
Control unit is faulty,
Parking brake switch or clutch switch is faulty.
H. Inhibitor switch (AIT) or neutral switch (WIT) input is not present. [@ Self-diagnosis items
lo l1
l3I4l5'
Disconnect control unit c firmly. Perform self-diagnosis. Abnormal (inhibitor switch or neutral switch signal input is not present. )
+
1 +
Set gear in neutral or shift lever from P to any other position. Measure v o l t a ~ e variations between control unit terminals @ @ and @ @. (Note)
Normal. (voltage must change between 0 and 5V.)

,
Note: Set CONSULT in data monitor mode. Abnormal (no voltage change)
f
/-
"N
Inhibitor switch or neutral switch is faulty. .

(5) Control unit inspection table
The standard value (voltage) measured with an analog tester in contact with the control unit terminal are shown below.
Terminal No. Standard Value Application Service s u ~ ~ o r l inout CLK Service support RX output Ignition switch ON: Approx. 12V Ignition switch in other position: O V Approx. 12V
IGN power supply
Battery power supply
Rear wheel rotating 0V greater than 5V (approx.) intermittent
Number of ECCS revolution signals Vehicle speed signal Steering neutral position sensor Resistance of power steering solenoid Service support TX output Stop lamp switch signal
(A/T) Parking brake signal (MIT) Clutch signal
4pprox. 5V (neutral position ) Solenoid resistance value 4 6Q
Brake ON: Approx. 12V Brake OFF: 0V Parking brake engaged or clutch pedal depressed: Approx. 5V Gear in N, or shift lever in any position other than parking: Approx. 5V Steering wheel turned 0 approx. 5V, intermittent
(A/T) Inhibitor signal (M/T) Neutral signal Steering angle sensor 1 signal Steering angle sensor 2 signal (Reserved for future switch input function.)
Solenoid resistance 13 17f2 Ignition switch ON: Appro~. 12V Ignition switch in other position: O V
Fail-safe valve resistance
IGN power supply
HICAS warning lamp Solenoid resistance 4 6Q Solenoid resistance 4 6Q
HICAS solenoid (R.H.) HICAS solenoid (L.H.)

3-2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
(1) Diagnosis flowchart
Trouble symptom
I
noise occurs. Go to Flowchart A. Go to Flowchart B.
abnormal.
I
Static characteristic performance check, 0 0 to Flowchart D.
Dynamic characteristic performance check
Go to Flowchart E.
(2) Damage symptom flowchart

A. Warning lamp lights during operation
Lamp lights.
Warning lamp lights immediately after ignition switch is turned "ON".

I
t
Check oil level. (Check that lower level of level sensor float is between L and H.)
E f I
Start self-diagnosis. Warning remains on. Abnormal
4
Sell-diagnosis inspection Refer to 3-1, (3) Trouble diagnosis by sell-diagnosis for description of dia~nostic procedures.
\ Normal
signal is no! input.
I
Rear wheels do not move if steering is turned 180" to left and
I
move if steering is turned 180' to left end
1
self-diagnosis.
abnormal locations.
Check connectors for improper contact.
Check steering neutral position. [Is steering neutral at vehicle speed of greater than 70 kmlh (43 MPH)].
11
Power is not input to control unit.

,
11
Insufficient oil le,vel.
If warning lamp lights when ignition switch is turned ON. replace level sensor in tank.
C15-0151B
B. Abnormal sound is present.
9
noise occurs. Disconnect HICAS solenoid valve connector and check noise for changes.
i
Is there change in comparison to before connector was disconnected? Abnormal occur in any system other than HICAS?
Note: Reler to
4 1 POWER CYLINDER AND LOWER
LINK
!or air bleeding proctclur-.
End
Repair or replace parts generating abnormal sound.
Abnormal
Replace HICAS solenoid valve.

C. Vehicle behavior is abnormal.
Check suspension alignment.

I
Check tightening torqUe. Normal
Driving verification.
1Abnormal
7 1 SUPER HICAS system is faulty. 1
Refej -- to ,3-I Perform self-diagnosis. (3) Trouble diagnosis by self-diagnosis.
Perform HICAS static inspection. Go to Flowchart D.
Perform HICAS dynamic inspection. Go to Flowchart E.
Check steering wheel neutrai position for misalignment and steering angle sensors for looseness. Steering fluctuates from neutral position [above 70 kmlh (43
Check dynamic HICAS characteristic performance.
Dm Static HICAS characteristic performance check
I
- i
Replace HICAS solenoid valve assembly.
Abnormal
Replace control unit.
- 4
I
t
Abnormal
Replace pump.
Abnormal
solenoid valve.
Abnormal Replace fail-safe
Note: (3) First replace HICAS control valve and mea. sure power cylinder stroke. Next, replace fail-safe valve.
-GI2 SUPER HICAS

3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd) Start engine and set self-diagnosis mode. (Note 1) Maintain engine speed above 2,000 rpm.
-
Note: (1) CONSULT "ACTIVE TEST" can be used Refer lo section 2-4 System Operation Inspection.
Turn steering wheel approximately 1 8 r to left or right.
+
I
IS power cylinder stroke 2,9 to 3.1 m m (0.114 to 0.122 in) from neutral position?
Normal
Abnormal
%engine and disconnect HIGAS solenoid valve. Measye ~ e % i e n cbetwee3JGAS solenoid e connector terminais @ , @ and @ . Is resistance 4 6il?
HICAS solenoid termins
Normal (4 6D)
Set self-diagnosis mode. Run engine at speeds more than 2,000 rpm. Turn steering wheel approximately MO*. Measure voltage across control unit connector I terminals @ (right), @ (left) and @Q. Is voltage more than 4.4V? (Note 2)
Confro(unit termlnal
Note: (2) When CONSULT is used, HICAS solenoid current is 1.I 1.2A. Norma,
Cancel self-diagnosis mode. Check HICAS oil relief pressure with engine running at a speed of more than 2,000 rpm. Is relief pressure more than 5,884 kPa (60 kg/cm2, 853 psi)?
'
Normal
Run engine at speed above 2,000 rpm and turn steering wheel approximately lev to the left and right. check oiic%&iure at fail- safe valve 0 port (right) ?n$C port (left). Is oil prejsure more 1 than 5,394 kPa (55 kg/cmp, 782 psi)? [Point 2
Normal
Replace power cylinder.

[Point I] HICAS pump relief hydraulic inspection
a Connect power steering pressure gauge adaptor (l-type
joint) and power steering pressure gauge (special service tool) to HICAS outlet nozzle connector of power steering pump (tandem type). a Set the power steering pressure gauge adaptor (flare joint) (special service tool) in HICAS high-pressure hose removed from power steering pump. (Note I)
+
I
+
I
Raise vehicle.
Bleed air from hydraulic circuit. Note 2: Refer to "Power steering gear and linkage removal and insta!Iation1'.
Open power steering pressure gauge valve fully and start engine. Move wheel to left and right to heat oil.
Note I: the valve is left fully closed while engine is If running, the pressure in oil pump rises to relief pressure iimit. Do not turn valve fully closed for extended periods because pressure rises to an abnormal level.
+
Relief pressure limit: 5,884 kPa (60 kglcm2, 853 psi)
Measure relief pressure when valve is fully closed and check that it does not exceed indicated specification limit, Note 2: Valve must be opened after a maximum of 15 seconds. (If oil temperature rises, i t may damage oil pump.) Replace oil pump assembly. Norma! Remove power steering oil pressure gauge. Install high-pressure hose in oil pump outlet connector.
4 +
I
Bleed air from hydraulic system.
Relief pressure inspection END
C12 SUPER HICAS 3. Trouble Diagnoses (Cont'd) [Point 21 HICAS solenoid valve and fail-safe valve
inspection (relief pressure inspection)
Raise vehicle.
l
a Connect power steering pressure gauge adaptor (I-joint) and power steering pressure gauge (special and (D) fail-safe valve. of service tool} to ports (C) Set the power steer in^ pressure gauge adaptor {flare joint] (special service tool] in high-pressure hose 1) removed from fail-safe valve. ( ~ o f e
Bleed air from hydraulic circuit. Note 2: Refer to "4-1 POWER CYLINDER AND LOWER LINK" removal and installation procedures. Open power steering pressure gauge valve fully and start engine. Move wheel to left and right to heat oil,
Relief pressure-limit: 5,394 kPa (55 kglcm2, 782 psi)
Measure relief pressure when valve is fully closed and check that it does not exceed indicated specification limit.
and measure power cylinder stroke.
Normal
?
Remove power steering oil pressure gauge. Install high-pressure hose in oil pump outlet connector.
+
Bleed air from hydraulic system.
Relief pressure inspection
- END

E. Dynamic characteristic inspection
Check pipe and connector joints for indentations or clogging. Replace with new parts as necessary, Bleed air thoroughly, (Note)
I
l t
Note: Refer to "4-1 POWER CYLINDER AND LOWER LINK" for air bleeding procedures.
--
and set self-diagnosis mode. Maintain engine at speed above 2,000 rpm.
4 sec.
: Right
Set steering wheel in neutral position and check that rear wheels move in pulse to left and right. (Refer to fiatire.1
Measure power cylinder stroke to one side for rear wheel pulsation. Is stroke distance greater than 2.0 mm (0.079 in)?
Normal
<
End
Replace HICAS solenoid valve.
Abnormal
J7 Measure power cylinder stroke to one s side for rear wheel pulsation. I stroke distance greater than 2.0 mm (0.079 in)? Abnormal
Nn,.mn, '--"''"'
<
End
C12 SUPER HICAS

4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly
4-1 POWER CYLINDER AND LOWER LINK
[Point 11 Outer link and ball joint separation

Using Pitman arm puller (commercia! service tool), sepe rate power cylinder outer arm link and axle housing ba joint.
,Right
outer link
CAUTION: (1) Install ball joint cap only in right outer link. (Refer to figure. (2) Replace non-reusable parts with new parts after disassem bly.
C12 SUPER HICAS 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassembly (Cont'd)
[Point 21 Power cylinder assembly removal and installation
Removal
Remove piping around power cylinder, outer link and rear suspension with assembly. CAUTION: When removing piping, cover openings so dust, debris and foreign matter cannot enter (especially In pipe connections).
a
Installation
a
When replacing any of the piping surrounding the power cylinder, outer link and rear suspension, attach disassembled parts to suspension members. The piping removal and installation sequence is (I), (3) (2), as shown in figure on the preceding page.
When the power cylinder is installed on suspension member, wipe off all oil, debris and foreign matter from power cylinder side bracket and suspension member contact surfaces. Install bracket left side as reference to determine position of long hole on right side.
Left side
Right side
<^
4
C 15-0059B
[Point 3 Fail-safe valve removal and installation 1

CAUTION: (1) Blow out pipes and ports with compressed air before installation to prevent entry of dirt, dust and foreign matter. (2) Perform operations in periphery of piping connections (especially in tube sheet removal and installation) with bare hands, being careful not to allow oil, dust or debris to adhere to the hands. (3) Always replace tube sheets that have been removed after every disassembly. After removing piping around rear suspension, always blow off piping and fail-safe valve with compressed air. Use pin punch (special service tool) to replace tube sheet as shown in figure on left, because scratches or cracks inside tube sheet in fail-safe valve can cause fluid leakage.
6.5 m m (0.256 in) diameter
7
Assemble tube sheet in port fail-safe valve as shown ir figure.
Part number 49528 52L10
[Point 41 Air bleeding hydraulic circuit
Air bleeding of HICAS system (power cylinder)
CAUTION: Air bleeding of HICAS system must be performed after the air bleeding of power steering has been completed.
(1) When using CONSULT

0
0
4
Connect CONSULT unit to vehicle diagnostic connector.
a Have a helper sit in driver's seat and raise vehicle.
Reference: Use a two-pole lift or a center pole lift so that the four wheels are free to rotate. Start engine and maintain idle. Loosen left and right . - air bleeder valves above power cylinder and release oil until there are no more air bubbles.
--
--
I
Tighten left and right air bleeder valves.
a Touch "START" on CONSULT display. (Screen will

change.) Touch "HICAS", "ACTIVE TEST", "SIMULATED DRIVE" and "START" in this order.
CAUTION: After touching "START", check that MAIN SIGNALS is displayed In reverse.
Touch "HIGH-SPEED SET".
+ +
* When engine is idling, turn steering wheel 180' from neu-
tral position to right. Open air bleeder on right side of power cylinder gradually, bleed air from circuit and tighten bleeder again. Then return steering wheel to neutral position.
When engine is idling, turn steering wheel 180' from neutral position to teft. Open air bleeder on left side of power cylinder gradually, bleed air from circuit and tighten bleeder again. Then return steering wheel to neutral position.
a Touch "CANCEL" on CONSULT screen and turn ignition

switch OFF. The procedures marked with an asterisk (*) should be repeated until air bubbles no longer occur. Fill reservoir during operation to prevent fluid level from lowering to suction inlet level.
C15-0410
(2) When CONSULT is not used
Have a helper sit in driver's seat and raise vehicle. Reference: Use a two-pole lilt or a center pole lift so that the four wheels
air bleeder valves above power cylinder and release oil until there are no more air bubbles.
Tighten left and right air bleeder valves.
Input self-diagnosis item. Turn ignition switch OFF. m Turn steering wheel from neutral to left and right (at least 20. in each direction) 5 times or more while depressing brake pedal at least 5 times, all within 10 seconds after ignition switch has been turned "ON".
Set steering wheel in neutral position (within 10' left and right), and check that both rear wheels are being steered respectively.
i
' When engine is idling, turn steering wheel 180' from neutral position to right. Open air bleeder on right side of power cylinder gradually, bleed air from circuit and tighten bleeder again. Then return steering wheel to neutral position.
when engine is Idling, turn steering wheel 180. from neutral position to left. Open air bleeder on left side of power cylinder gradually, bleed air from circuit and tighten bleeder again. Then return steering wheel to neutral oositlon.
Turn ignition switch OFF lo cancel self-diagnosis. The procedures marked with an asterisk (') should be repeated until air bubbles no longer occur. Fill reservoir during operation to prevent fluid level from lowering to suction inlet level.
[Point 51 Toe-in distance inspection and adjustment

After installing power cylinder and lower link assemble perform toe-in inspection and check that distance is withi specification. If value is outside specification, adjust toe-in.
@ Assembly and disassembly
Stroke stopper
78 98 (8.0
- 10,56 - 72)
I boot [Point 21 Oust
power cylinder assembly 1 [Point 1. 3
Shim
Locktile Nissan MP special grease No. 2 Always replace after every disassembly. N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Additional work required: Inspect stroke. [Point 41
[Point 11 Power cylinder disassembly

CAUTION: (1) Blow off piping and ports before operation to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering area. (2) Perform operations in periphery of piping connections (especially in tube sheet removal and installation) with bare hands, being careful not to allow oil, dust or debris to adhere to the hands. Do not disassemble any parts other than those shown in above figure (disassembly figure). Only disassemble pipes and inner sockets.
[Point 21 Dust boot installation a Coat contact surfaces and boot installation groove with
grease (Nissan MP special grease No. 2).
[Point 31 Power cylinder inner socket removal and installation

Remove and install inner socket with power cylinder assembly installed in vehicle.
Removal
Separate tie-rod from rear axle, Remove boot clamp from dust boot. Move left and right dust boots to outer link side. Attach tool to socket of left and right inner ball joints. Turn in direction that loosens both sides and remove loosened lower link assembly.
CH-369
Loosen and remove stroke stopper from removed lowet link assembly.
stopper
Attach wrench to the two flat areas on rod end from side stroke stopper that was removed from and turn to tighten Loosen lower link assembly on opposite side and remove
Installation
a
Install stroke stopper and shim on assembled side of lowei link assembly.
Apply a coat of Locktite to inner ball joint screw. Attach wrench to the two flat surfaces on piston rod opposite fronassembly side and turn to tighten. Install lower link assembly.
After installing stroke stopper and shim on opposite side. install lower link assembly. Attach wrench to inner ball join1 on opposite side and turn to tighten. Tighten to specified torque. Inner socket tightening torque: 78 98 N-m (8.0 10 kg-m, 58 72 ft-lb)
[Point 41 Stroke inspection
After assembling shim and stroke stopper, check clearance between inner socket and stroke stopper. Clearance: 3 0.1 mm (0.118 0.004 In)
4-2 POWER STEERING PUMP, OIL TANK AND HYDRAULIC PIPING
RB26DETT engine vehicle installation
[Point 11 HICAS solenoid valve piping removal and installation
CAUTION: (1) Handle pipes with bare hands and pay attention to prevent dust or foreign matter from adhering. (2) Be careful not to install pipes in incorrect location or sequence during assembly.
1 TO fail-safe valve
TO
fail-safe valve
Removal
Remove HICAS solenoid valve connector and pipe clamp bracket. Remove power steering fluid from vehicle side centralized pipe connection. Remove HICAS solenoid valve pump port, tank port and power cylinder port on right side and flare nuts and union bolts on left side. Remove bolts from HICAS solenoid valve mount. CAUTION: (1) Never disassemble HICAS solenoid valve or fail-safe valve. This part cannot be disassembled because if the lock nuts on the fixed part of the HICAS valve solenoid are loosened, the pressure adjustment distance will vary. (2) Cover caps of removed pipes and hoses with plugs to prevent dust and foreign matter from entering.
Installation
Temporarily tighten flare nuts and union bolts and tighten HICAS solenoid valve mount bolts. Secure tube clamp bracket and tighten port union bolts.
[Point 21 Fluid tank fluid level inspection

Refer to "2. On-vehicle Inspection and Adjustment" for inspection procedures.
[Point 31 Air bleeding fluid circuit

Refer to "4-1 POWER CYLINDER AND LOWER LINK (3) Removal and installation" for a description of air bleeding procedures for HICAS system.
(2) Power steering pump removal and installation, assembly and disassembly
Assembly and disassembly precautions

(T) If oil pump and tank assembly and disassembly is required, perform the following procedures for removal and installation from vehicle. Indicate oil leakage locations with a white marking pen. Remove oil and cap openings. Loosen pulley nut before loosening belts. Tighten tension 0 on all belts before installation. (2) Attachment preparation Prepare the following attachments.
Note: 1. Non-specified curve 2 Acute angle 0.5 C chamfering . 3. Welding curve torus described below
/
PU
F
Entire welding [4 5 fnm [0.16
0.20 in)]
Unit: mm (in)
c 20 0 c 1-06
Wash off grease on oil pump with white gasoline. Cover openings in outlet port, return ports to prevent white gasoline from entering. Be careful not to drop white gasoline on oil seal of drive shaft. Never reuse any O-ring, oil seal, snap ring, or washer (copper). Always replace with new part after every use. (New parts are contained in repair kits.) Replace entire assembly if front and rear housing, drive shafts, rotor, cam and flow control valve are scratched, dented or scored.
C12 SUPER HICAS 4. Removal and Installation, Assembly and Disassernbly (Cont'd)
(3) Power steering pump disassembly (Model 05UOO)
Additional work required: Remove and install: Attachmenis [Point 21 Inspact each part. (Point 111 Pulley (Point 11
$4
(5.5
--
68 6.9,
R] : N-m ma-m, lt-lb) Q : Always replace alter every disassembly. f\ ; Power fleering lluid
Note:
: Nissan MP special grease No. 2 r.-,-.- Repair hi1 parts .

L.
Parts replaced with pump assembly
-. -. -
Pin 21,7 mm (0.654 in)
'
Center housing
Oil seal (Point 8 1
Vane point 51
in 20.7 nun (0.615 in)
Rear housing (Point 101
[Point 11 Pulley removal and installation

a
Loosen in unit if pulley nut cannot be loosened when pump is installed in vehicle. Secure bracket in vise. Place Fillips head screwdriver in pulley hole and through front housing bolt hole to secure pulley and loosen pulley nut. Inscribe mating marks on front side of pulley to prevent incorrect pulley alignment and then remove pulley.
[Point 21 Attachment installation

a a
Secure attachment in vise. Install front housing in attachment.
Rear side
Front side (power steering)
[Point 3 Cam and gasket installation 1 a Install the thicker side of cam (t, > t,) facing front side.
Check gasket alignment, and install one each at front housing and center housing and center housing and rear housing.
Rear side (HICAS) hamferi
Front side
(power steering)
[Point 41 Rotor installation Install rotor so the chamfered side of spline is faces rear
housing side and side without chamfering faces front housing side. (Otherwise, install rotor so the punch mark side faces rear housing side and side without punch mark faces front housing side.)
=n o
Flat surface
[Point 51 Vane installation

,
Assemble so rounded end faces cam surface.
[Point 61 Drive shaft removal and installation

Pull shaft straight out slowly to remove. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch bushing inside front cover or oil seal. Coat drive shaft with power steering fluid and press in slowly to install. Press into bottom, pull out 15 mrn (0.59 in) and then slowly press in again.
(- rive shalt
C12-0037G
CAUTION: Replace oil pump assembly carefully to prevent scratching drive shaft and bushing.
Outlet connector and flow control valve

(sub-spool) cannot be disassembled.
1 [Point 71 Outlet connector removal 0 Outlet connector is installed inside front control valve (subspool). Be careful not to drop or deform during removal. Do not disassemble outlet connector and flow control valve. 0
Flow control valve (sub-~pool)
C124039G
[Point 81 Oil seal removal and installation

Screwdriver
. ...
,
..: .. ..; .
,
Pay attention not to scratch sliding surface of oil seal during removal and installation. Use a screwdriver wrapped in tape to remove seal. 0 CAUTION: (1) Insert screwdriver in position shown in figure. (2) Do not scratch surface A (oil seal installation mating surface) shown in figure. If this surface is scratched, replace entire oil pump assem-
biy.
0
Lip
Spring
Use a taped 22-mm box wrench for installation. CAUTION: Check that oil seal is positioned straight and lightly tap seal into end of front housing with hammer to install. 0 After installation, apply a thin coat of Nissan MP special grease No. 2 around oil seal lip. 0 Touch spring with finger to check that it is installed in correct position.
Housing
[Point 91 O-ring installation

Coat O-rings with power steering fluid. Install O-rings inside groove in housing.
[Point 101 Rear housing installation
Secure front housing in attachment. Position cam, roto center housing, cam, rotor and rear housing and install, Tighten bolts in diagonal sequence. First tighten each be to approximately half of specified torque and then tighte again to final torque. Rear housing installation bolt tightening torque: RB26DETT 31 42 N-m (3.2 4.3 kg-m, 23 31 fl-lb)
(T)
@
(D (S)
@
@
Do not reuse removed rubber parts (O-rings, oil seal an snap rings) or washers (copper). (Replace with parts i repair kit.) Replace pump assembly if the following parts ar scratched or damaged. Front housing and center housing mating surfaces Rear housing and cam center housing mating surfaces Front housing oil seal Flow control valve Drive shaft Rotor
BODY
I
SECTION
BF
!
CONTENTS
D BODY BF- 2 D l BODY .............................................................................................................................. 1 Body Construction ............................................................................................................. BF- 2 2. Sealing ............................................................................................................................... BF- 3 D2 BODY EXTERIOR ............................................................................................................ BF-10 1. Bumper .............................................................................................................................. BF-10 2. Grille .................................................................................................................................. 6F-15 3 Front Fender ...................................................................................................................... BF-16 4 Molding .............................................................................................................................. BF-17 5. Window Glass .................................................................................................................... BF-22 6 Outside Mirror ................................................................................................................... BF-24 7 Spoilers .............................................................................................................................. BF-28 8. Drafter .............................................................................................................................. ;. BF-29 9. Center Mudguard and Chipping Protector ....................................................................... BF-30 D3 OPEN-CLOSE MECHANISM ............................................................................................. BF-31 .......................................... BF-31 1. Hood ...................................................................................... 2 . Door ...................................................................................................................................BF-32 2-1 Fitting standard and adjustment ................................................................................... BF-32 2-2 Door assembly removal and installation ..................................................................... BF-33 2-3 Front door trim removal and installation ..................................................................... BF-34 2-4 Front door lock and remote control removal and installation .................................... BF-35 2-5 Front door window and regulator removal and installation ....................................... BF-37 2-6 Power door lock trouble diagnosis .............................................................................. BF-41 2-7 Power window trouble diagnosis ................................................................................. BF-44 3. Trunk Lid ........................................................................................................................... BF-51 D4 BODY INTERIOR .............................................................................................................. BF-53 1. Instrument Panel ................................................................................................................ BF-53 2. Interior Trim and Equipment ............................................................................................ BF-62 3. Seat .............................................~...................................................................................... BF-66 4 Seat Belts .......................................................................................................................... BF-69
. . . .
...
I
I
D l BODY
1. Body Construction
D l BODY
2. Sealing
2-1 WEATHERSTRIPS
2dow Sports Coupe
Dl BODY
2. Sealing (Cont'd)
Ji
D01-0075
001-0076
Section A-A
Section B-6
Section C
Section D
Section E-E
Section G-G
D l BODY 2. Sealing (Cont'd)
001-0078
Section 1-1
Section J
DO1-007S
Section K-K
Section L-L
Dl BODY
2. Sealing (Cont'd)
2-2 BODY SEALING
View A
View 0
View 0
View F
IODY g (Cont'd)
View +(2dm) I
Mew J (2dmr)
Mew K (240x1
View M
Mew S
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
1. Bumper
1-1 BUMPER FASCIA REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[Point I] Bumper fascia removal First remove bumper fascia separately because intercooler tube prevents removal of bumper assembly. [Point 21 Bumper fascia installation Install bumper fascia by fitting flange portion of bumper reinforcement into dent of bumper fascia.
D2 BODY EXTERIOR 1. Bumper (Cont'd)

1-2 BUMPER
REINFORCEMENT
Bumper reinforcement
Bolt (one on each side) Z5-32t2.6-3319-24)

[point
11
[Point 11 Bumper stay removal

Remove bumper stay securing bolt. Loosen bumper stay securing nut, and remove bumper stay from body by sliding forward. NOTE: Do not remove bumper stay securing nut. It should only be loosened but kept attached to stud bolt on body side.
[Point 21 Bumper stay installation

a
Attach grommet to bumper stay bracket as shown at left, and then fit grommet onto positioning pin located on the upper part of intercooler,

(2) Bumper reinforcement disassembly
Bumper stay bracket
1-3 REAR BUMPER

[Point 11 License plate bracket removal Remove bolt from rear side of license plate. Pull up bracket together with license plate. 0
[Point 21 License plate bracket installation

With 2-door type vehicle, install license plate bracket as shown after replacing bumper, because space is limited around license plate bracket securing bolt.
nut
Bolt
(Before replacement)
{After replacement)

(2) Disassembly
Bumoer fascia
i ,
[Point 11 Bumper center bracket removal

Pawl
Pull out two pawls located at the center of bumper center bracket in the direction of arrow (*) using standard screwdriver. Draw out bumper center bracket from bumper fascia by sliding it either rightward or leftward.
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
2. Grille
2-1 FRONT GRILLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[Point
11 Turn fastener removal
Rotate front grille upper side turn fastener 45' by fitting screwdriver tip into slot of turn fastener head, and remove turn fastener. Wrap vinyl tape or cloth around metal part of screwdriver to prevent grille and bumper from being scratched.
standard screwdriver
[Point 21 Securing clip removal

Remove clip by holding with pliers from rear side of hood lock stay.
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
3. Front Fender
3-1 FENDER AND FENDER PROTECTOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Resin washers (two)
Resin washers (two)
(0.52 0.60, 38 43) .
Resiwashers
*ftesin washers [three)
wa:
Fender
Resin washer
Fender protector
Section A-A
{GT-R vehicle)
Pushon clip (one)
Remove and install: Side combination light (Parts not shown) Remwe and install:front bumoer fascia (Parts not shown! Note 1: Tender securing resin washers are provided only for GT-R vehicle. Note 2: "Fender securing resin washers must be redaced with new ones each time fender is removed and installed.
: N-m (kg-mi%-lb)
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
4. Molding
4-1 WINDSHIELD MOLDING
Upper molding (Point 21
-Side molding
Section B
Clips (four on each side)
1/11I I
(oneon eachide)
[Point 11
Mark
indicates clip fitting position.
Section C-C
Standard
[Point 11 Side molding removal and installation Removal <3) Using standard screwdriver with its end portion bent as shown, disengage fastener from side molding by sliding
lower two side molding clips. NOTE: Be sure to apply cushioning cloth under screwdriver to prevent glass from being damaged.
-. Removing side molding clip
002-004:
(3) Remove side molding from fastener by pulling out lower end of molding.
D2 BODY EXTERIOR 4. Molding (Cont'd)

Installation (T) Fit clip into side molding as shown at left.
NOTE: Four different clips are used; Pay attention not to confuse clips.
Wndshield molding
Fitting clip into molding
Dg2-oo2,
@ Fit upper end of side molding into upper molding, and tap side molding clip portion with hand until clip fits in fastener with a snap. NOTE: Do not apply undue force when tapping. If difficult to fit, change clip position slightly.
~nstailin~ clip
1302-005
[Point 21 Upper molding removal and installation (T) After removing side molding, pull out upper molding by
lifting its end up.
@ Cut sealant at end of glass, and clean panel surface after

removing fastener.
Q Bond fastener to body using double-faced adhesive tape,
sealant l a m rubber
Apply primer.
then apply primer to panel and molding leg portions. ($) Pack sealant between glass and body so that molding leg can be bonded securely. @ Squeeze upper molding into position.
NOTE: Repair panel surface if scratched when cutting sealant.

4-2 REAR WINDOW MOLDING
h
I*
Upper molding left
[Point 11 Upper molding removal and installation (T) Remove lower molding securing screws, and remove molding from body. <S) Remove corner molding clips, and remove corner molding from fastener, (3) Remove upper molding by lifting its end up. (3) Cut sealant at glass end portion, remove faster and clean panel surface. (S) Bond fastener to body using double-faced adhesive tape, then apply primer to panel and molding leg portion. (6) Pack sealant between glass and body so that molding leg can be bonded securely. (7) Bond upper molding and joint molding using sealant to make up sub assembly. <S) Squeeze upper molding sub assembly into fastener. @ clip into corner molding, and fit corner molding to upper Fit I molding, then tap molding until it fits snugly into fastener. (@) Fix lower molding using screws.
NOTE: Repair panel surface by coating if scratched while cutting sealant.
Remwing upper molding
Molding
Apply priiner.
cut sealant
Fastener
A 711
Dam rubber
Sealant
'
N'ew sealant
Apply primer.

4-3 DRIP MOLDING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
2-door Sports Coupe
NOTE: Pay attention not to create clearance when installing.

4-4 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pull out and upward from molding end.
Section of portion A when installed
Section when installed
Front door outside molding
\
/
Clips (five)
Stabilizer
\
2-door Sports Coupe
Screw (one)
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
5. Window Glass
The windshield, rear window and rear side windows are bonded with urethane sealant. Refer to "Windshield removal and installation" in "Basic Servicing Procedure".
5-1 WINDSHIELD AND REAR WINDOW

Body side
Fastener a'nd spacer installation Primer application
Glass side
(1) Primer application and dam rubber installation Primer application range Rear
bstener installation section
a
Fastener
ashesive tape
adhesive tape
Rear 360 Rear 350 Spacer (13.78) (13.78) (Front: two places] (Rear: two places) Spacer installation section
4 Front 520 (20.47)
installation center
Front 520 (20.47)
Primer application range Front Rear
(2) Sealant application
Glass setting
1 A \
( Molding installation
Leak inspection
Wndshield (glass side)
-. ,
~02-0052
wm (glass sihl
Unit: mrn {in)
D2 BODY EXTERIOR 5. Window Glass (Cont'd)

5-2 REAR SIDE WINDOW GLASSES (24001- Sports Coupe)
Side window
\,
\,/
~nstallatik reference clip
Rear fender
Front
Section A-A
I
Section CC -
Rear side of side window
Section D
\\ u.
Section IF -
Section 6 6 -
Front end
Section E-E
Primr application range (all around)
NOTE: Do not apply primer to gradation area.

ealant application quality
Unit: mm (in)
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
6. Outside Mirror
6-1 STANDARD AND HEATER FITTED DOOR MIRROR
(1) Components
, '
"Mirror body
Unit bracket
Rim securing
NOTE: Mark indicates service partI addition to those shown in illustration, mirror n assembly is set as service part.
'Mirror glass (integral with holder)
DOZ-0056
(2) Mirror assembly removal and installation

@ Mirror assembly
Washers (three)
@Inner corner cover
\
\
Screws (three places)
~rommets (three)
37 5.0 .
(0.38 0.51
?1 11
b-m 27 3.7 ft-lb)

D02-0057
@!enwe
and install: Front door trim (Part not shown)
D2 BODY EXTERIOR 6. Outside Mirror (Cont'd)

(3) Mirror removal and installation
-
Electric foldable outside mirror
CDRemoving actuator securing screw
@ R e w i n g actuator hdder
Hook
forward
holder
+tor securing. screws

Section A-A
@.Removingharness connector
@ J
Separating mirror from actuator

Turn
Mirror
&Turn
Mirror holder fixing poi# (five ~laces)
NOTE; To install, proceed as (3)
->
gowe ( f a x places)
Standard screwdriver
1
I;
Details of B
<3)
->
(T) by reversing the removal sequence.
0 2 BODY EXTERIOR 6. Outside Mirror (Cont'd)

(4) Mirror rim removal and installation
Removal Remove and install: Mirror and actuator [operations (Parts not shown) (D, (5) and @ ] 0 Remove mirror rim securing screws (six) as shown at left. Pull out mirror rim from mirror body by detaching rim from
mirror body pawl.
Mirror body Unit bracket
(5) Mirror body removal and installation

Removal
Remove and install: Mirror, actuator [operations 0 , (2) and @] and mirror rim 0 Remove mirror fixing screws (two) as shown at left, Remove mirror body after setting it in storage position.
Folding direction
@
002-0059
6-2 FENDER MIRROR

(1) Fender mirror removal and installation
Section
NOTE: To ranwe and install fender mirror reinforcement and spring, first remwe front fender.
D2 BODY EXTERIOR 6. Outside Mirror (Cont'd)

6-3 CHANGE INTO DOOR MIRROR AND CHANGE INTO FENDER MIRROR
(1) Change from door mirror to fender mirror
(D Whether changeable or not and required items
Changeability
Yes
I
1 I
Harness connector in fender ort ti on No1 provided
I
I
Front door cover Provided
I
4
I
Electric fender mirror components Provided
I
1
See below
I
NOTE: Only patrol car specification has electrically operated mirror.
(2) Installation position
Details of front fender panel installation holes
1 Unit: mrn (in)

MOTE: Apply anti-rust coating to drilled holes.
(2) Change from fender mirror to door mirror

(T) Whether changeable or not and required items
Changeability
I
1
Harness up to door
,
Provided
Fender hole stopping patch (service part) Not provided
Door mirror Provided
Not provided
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
7. Spoilers
7-1 FRONT SPOILER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
'(=3
Section A-A
Fender protector
Spoiler
Section B-B
7-2 REAR SPOILER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
8. Drafter
,
Rear fender
,
\
One-way valve
Section
Drafter
Retrieve and install: Trwk sida finisher (Parts not shown)
D2 BODY EXTERIOR
9. Center Mudguard and Chipping Protector (GTR model)
/ Front center mudguard
Rear center mudguard
Reverse side Top side
a
Details of clip A
Mudguard side
Details of grommet B
D3 OPEN-CLOSE DEVICES
1. Hood
1-1 FITTING STANDARD AND ADJUSTMENT
\Bolts (twoon each side)
P]16 - 19 (1.6 - 1.9, 12
-1
Hood hinge adjustment
Y.
-^
Hood
\
Bumper rubber adjustment
Bolts (three)
4.0 (0.157)
(2.2
- 27,
Surface misalignment 0 ( 0 1
nit: rnm (in) Wrn (kg-in ft-tbj
1:
fc=^=JI Section A-A
Hood lock adjustment
1-2 HOOD ASSEMBLY AND HOOD INSULATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Hood front seal rubber (left)
Hood front seal
Clips (four on each side)

lips (16)
16-19~m
(D Washer
hose
D3 OPEN-CLOSE DEVICES 1. Hood (Cont'd)

1-3 HOOD LOCK CONTROL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
-Instrument
lower cwer
Hood lock control cable
opener handle
Bolts (two)
P]7 - 9
(0.7 0.9, 5.1 8.5)
out into compartment
\
Remove and install:
Fender protector {Parts not shown) Instrument lower cover P]:Prn (kg-ni it-~b)
1 Reverse side d hood lock 1I

I
Q) Cable remwal
D03-0384
2. Door
(1) 2-door Sports Coupe
Adjustable range Up and down: 3 ( 0-12) Right and left: 3 (0.12 I Striker adjustment Bolts (two each on top and bottom) 29 37 ( . 3 8 22 27) 3 0 .,
Front fender
Rear fender
Up and down: 2 ( 0.06) Fore and aft: 2 ( 20.08)

Section A-A
Door outer
Unit: rnm (in) NTn (kg-rn ft-lb)
Section B-B
n:
1 Fender protector (Parts not shown) 1
Ramwe and install:
Door hinge adjustment (upper and lower) [Point 11
003-0386
D3 OPEN-CLOSE DEVICES 2. Door (Cont'd)

.
--
Offset wrench
Remove and install: Fender protector (Parts not shown) 0 Remove fender rear end securing bolts (four), and adjust door hinge using offset wrench while lifting fender off vehicle body. NOTES: when lifting. upper part of fender while adjusting.
.. ..
D03-0136
2-2 DOOR ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

(1) Removal, installation and inspection To remove and install, remove check link pin and then remove door side hinge bolts (two each, upper and lower). When removing, pay attention not to damage coated surface.
NOTES: (1) When removing and installing, support door assembly using jack, cushioned with waste cloth to prevent damage to door. (2) Check door hinge for the following points: Abnormality or large resistance during opening or closing Apply grease Damage or wear on components Replace (3) Replace check link if damaged or worn abnormally. (4) Install check link with RH or LH identification mark facing UP(5) Apply "Nissan body grease" to rotating part of hinge and to check link pin.
...
D3 OPEN-CLOSE DEVICES 2. Door (Cont'd) 2-3 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Inside handle escutcheon [Point 1 1
Power window switch [Pdint 2 1 I
6 cap
^-
Screw (one)
Clips
Capped screws (two) [Point 3 1
Pawl slot
[Point I] Inside handle escutcheon removal

Using standard screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape, remove escutcheon by disengaging upper and lower pawls.
Rear side of escutcheon
D03-Ole!
[Point 21 Power window switch removal

Insert standard screwdriver tip to front end, and push screwdriver rearward to disengage metal clip, and then remove power window switch.

Standard
^P
[Point 3 Capped screw removal 1 Using standard screwdriver, open screw head cap, and
then remove screw. NOTE: Cap is made integral with screw. Pay attention not to tear off cap from cap base when removing screw.
II
'Screw
004-0064
I
2-4 FRONT DOOR LOCK AND REMOTE CONTROL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
,
Bell crank
[Point 11 Inside handle rod adjustment Fix door lock and inside handle, and adjust bell crank in direction of arrow shown at left to eliminate rod play. then
secure with screws.

[Point 21 Outside handle rod adjustment a Rotate bushing so that clearance between bushing and rod meets specification shown at left. NOTE: Clearance must be greater than 0 mm (0 in), or outside lever must be free when not being operated.
0.5 23 mm (0.020 0.09 in)
3 ~ 5 9
(rotatable in four steps)
[Point 31 Outside handle single part removal Removal Completely close window. Disconnect key cylinder rod and outside handle rod connections. Remove two nuts and remove outside handle.
[Point 41 Key cylinder removal and installation Removal Insert tip of small standard screwdriver into clearance between clip and key cylinder to disengage clip, and remove key cylinder. Installation Install clip to key cylinder case, and then insert key cylinder.
0
Door
[Point 51 Door lock switch removal Remove and install: Inside and outside handle rods, key cylinder rod (Part not shown) Remove rod, and remove door lock assembly screws (three) and door lock switch bolt (one), and then remove door lock assembly. Remove screws (two) to separate door lock assembly from door lock switch. NOTE: Door lock switch cannot be removed from door lock assembly if the assembly is installed on vehicle. Be sure to remove door lock switch together with door lock assembly.
2. Door (Cont'd)
2-5 FRONT DOOR WINDOW AND REGULATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(1) %door Sports Coupe
stoppers (two)
R e m e and install:
DO3
[Point 11 Door window adjustment

Otie usd d vehicle
(T) @ 0) @
Door window fitting can basically be adjusted by moving window in four directions as shown below. Window position (front-end down, rear-end down) Fore and aft adjustment of window Vertical adjustment of window (upper limit) Right and left adjustment of window (inward or outward inclination) Perform adjustment at the positions shown below.
003-0016
2. Door (Cont'd)
Adjustment work
0
To adjust door window position, proceed as follows:

Temporarily tighten regulator assembly securing nuts (four).
t
Correct window position (front-end down, rear-end down).
-.
t
Adjust fore-aft position.
t
Tighten regulator assembly securing nuts (four).
Remove body-side weatherstrip when performing these adjustments.
Adjust vertical position.
+
t
Adjust right-left position.

Unit: mm (in)
Retainer
iA
Parallelism error: within 2 (0.08)
(T) Window position adjustment

Remove and install: Body side weatherstrip (Part not shown) NOTE: Perform this position adjustment simultaneously with fore-afl adjustment in step @ . I a With window raised, loosen securing bolts C, D, E, and F, and adjust inclination of window using bolts C and D so that a uniform clearance will be obtained between window and retainer at positions A and B.
Window front end down:
Window rear end down: Raise adjustment bolt C using bolt D as supporting point.
error:
Raise adjustment bolt D using bolt C as supporting point.
Rear end down Front end d m Raise adjusting - adjusting Raise bolt C. Adjusta&Je range bolt 4 (0.16 in)
003439
@ Fore-aft adjustment of window

Loosen bolts [C, D, E, and F shown in step <3) above] and slide regulator in fore-aft direction so that clearance between rear end of window and retainer meet standard shown at left, then temporarily secure bolts by tightening nuts.
M<->
Retainer
Section A-A
Adiustable ranae:
in fore-aft direction
Section B-B
41
Unit: mrn (in)
-7= 1.0 side (0.276 W"^

0.039)
D03-OM
ear
r window stopper (door side)
NO clearance
clearance here.
When adjusting, slightly lower window to create clearance between door side stopper and window side stopper.
Do not lower window excessively.
A ! \\
Door whdow stopper (window side)

DO3-0398
BF-39

(D Vertical adjustment of window
With window fully closed, adjust height of door window stoppers (door side) (a) and ( so that retainer lower end and window top end positions meet specification shown at left, then secure stoppers with nuts.
(4) Right and left adjusting of window

Use lower two of four adjusting boltsNOTES: (1) Rotate adjusting bolt in CW direction, and end of window will move outward. Rotate adjusting bolt in CCW direction, and end of window will move inward. (2) Slightly lower window, like in the case of fore-aft adjustment, to create a clearance between door side stopper and window side stopper.
Clockwise (CW
direction
Unit: mm (in)
Adjusting range
Adjusting bolt
"X KT"
Loosen nuts (front and rear), and loosen adjusting bolt and tilt window fully inward until adjusting bolt flange contacts inner panel.
With door fully closed in the above-mentioned position, tighten adjusting bolts a few turns until inside of window lightly contacts retainer. NOTE: Evenly tighten front and rear adjusting bolts.

i ^
After completing adjustment, tighten lock nut securely. NOTE: When tightening lock nut, hold adjusting bolt using standard screwdriver to prevent rotation.
2-6 POWER DOOR LOCK TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

(1) Outline of trouble diagnosis (2-door Sports Coupe) Carry out trouble diagnosis according to flowchart.
Power door lock fails to operate Any door other than driver seat (front passenger seat) fails to operate.
Prepare the following tools and equipment for trouble diagnosis. Analog circuit tester Sub harness and battery (for checking door lock actuator operation) Tools for removing and installing parts (screwdriver, wrenches, etc.) Carry out the following inspection when diagnosing. *I: Door lock timer connector disconnected *2: Door lock actuator connector disconnected *3: Door lock knob and key cylinder interlocking switch disconnected, or rod disconnected, and bell crank installed.
(2) Components
2-door Sports Coupe
Front passenger seat
RH side of dash board

(3) System diagram
Lock: OFF
Unlock: ON Key cylinder and doof lock knob interlock switch
Door lock timer
Front passenger seat

(4) Diagnostic chart Front passenger seat door lock fails to operate.
- Short-circuit in harness
No
Repair harness, and then replace fusible link.
Disconnect door lock timer connector located in right side of dash Ve hicle-side harness connector ~arnessdoor lock timer is broken, or CIB is disconnected.
I
Repair harness and replace CIB.
side connector B power supply terminal @ and GND.

I
Approx. 12V Check circuit between vehicle-side connector terminal (T) and BUD for continuity. Continuity Lock and unlock door lock knob
Non continuity Door lock timer GND is faulty.
When locked: Continuity exists When unlocked: No continuity (a) When locked: Check circuit between vehicle-side connector terminal @ and GNO for continuity. (b) When unlocked: Check circuit between vehicle-side connector terminal @ and GND for continuity.
Disconnection of harness, or door lock knob & key cylinder interlock switch or switch connector,
When locked: No continuity When unlocked: Continuity exists and needle momentarily moves from infinity to zero ohms,
J
1
-3
Check switch, (Point 11
1
0
Connect door lock timer connector, and then disconnect door lock timer actuator of front passenger seat. Lock and unlock door lock knob (key cylinder) of driver seat.
1 -2
Vehicle-side harness connector
,
Ea
t
(a) When locked: Measure voltage
between vehicle-side connector terminal @ GND. and I (b) When unlocked: Measure voltage between vehicle-side connector terminal @ and GND.
Approx.
O v
Broken harness (between door lock timer and actuator) or faulty door lock timer Needle momentarily moves from approx. 0 V to approx. 12V

[Point 11 Continuity test on switch
Manually move rod and check for continuity between terminals. If continuity exists, tester needle will momentarily move from infinity side to zero ohm side.
2-7 POWER WINDOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

(1) Outline of trouble diagnosis (2-door Sports Coupe)
Troubles on vehicle are classified into four large catego'ries, and trouble diagnosis is performed according to flowchart for each category. Trouble diagnostic conditions are: ignition switch ON and power window lock switch in UNLOCK position.
--- -
Power window switch is operated, but door window d o e s not move.
f
I
Window moves by nearest switch operation.
Window moves by nearest switch operation, but tails to move by remote switch operation.
I
All door windows fail to move.
(8)
Only driver's door window fails to move.
Only front passenger's door window fails to move.
REMARKS: Nearest switch operation: Attempt to operate door window by operating its nearest power window switch. Remote switch operation: Attempt to operate front passenger door window by operating power window main switch by driver seat. Caution during Trouble Diagnosis Trouble diagnosis is performed with ignition switch set ON. When repairing trouble, be sure to disconnect battery negative terminal.
(C)

(2) System diagram
'
I '
window switch

(3) Diagnostic chart
(A) No door window moves using respective power window switch

~
Is fusible link burnt out? No Yes
Short-circuit in harness replace fusible link.
Power window main switch
Disconnect power window main switch connector (driver seat).
(Connector on vehicle)
I
Check circuit between vehicle-side connector terminal @ and GND for continuity.
I
-
No conti1 nuity Continuity exists

,
Faulty GND of power window main switch
Repair harness.
t
Disconnect power window amplifier connector located in driver seat door trim.
Power window amplifier
(Connector on vehicle)
1
W I
Set ignition switch to ON.
Measure voltage between vehicle-side connector terminal (S) (power window amplifier) and GND, and between terminal @ and GND-
- Broken harness, or faulty APP~OX. IGN relay 0V
I
1 window switch connector.
Approx. 12V
Disconnect front passenger seat power
Front passenger saat power window switch
{Connector on Ghicle)
E^
0 1
Measure voltage between vehicle-side connector terminal @ (front passenger seat) and GND.
- Broken harness, or faulty *PProx. IGN relay OV
- -
Check items (B) and (C).
D3 OPEN-CLOSE DEVICES 2. Door (Cont'd) (C) Unable to operate front passenger seat window using the switch on that door
Disconnect driver seat power window main switch connector.
1
Operate driver seat power window main switch to check lock switch for continuity. [Point 21
in ' both locked and unlocked positions When locked: No continuity When unlocked; Continuity exists
. Power window main switch is
Replace switch. faulty.
Connect power window main switch connector.
Front passenger seat pcwer window switch

Disconnect front passenger seat power window switch connector.
(Vehicle-side connector)
Set ignition switch to ON.
Measure voltage between vehicle-side connector terminal (2) and GND.
Repair harness.
Check circuit between vehicle-side connector terminal (D and GND and between terminal @ and GND for continuity. Continuity exists Operate front passenger seat power window . switch to check for continuity between terminais. [Point 31 Continuity exists Connect front passenger seat power window switch connector,
Repair harness.
continuity
--- Front passenger seat power window switch is faulty.
Replace switch.
Disconnect front passenger seat power window motor connector.
(Vehicle-side connector)
%
-
When set to vehicle-side GND When set to vehicle-side GND UP position: Circuit between connector terminal (3D and DOWN position: Circuit between connector terminal @ and
Approx. OV
,
Front passenger seat power window motor is faulty.
Replace motor.
I
Harness between motor and front passenger seat power window switch is broken.
Repair harness.

[Point 11 Power window main switch continuity inspection
0
Set power window lock switch in locked position (with lock button pressed), and operate driver seat and front passenger seat switches to check continuity between respective terminals using circuit tester.
[Point 21 Power window lock switch continuity inspection

Set lock switch in unlocked position (with lock button not depressed), and press DOWN end of driver seat manual switch. Check continuity between terminals @ and (7) using circuit tester.
[Point 3 Continuity inspection of front passenger seat 1 power window switch

a
Operate switch in each position, and check continuity between respective terminals using circuit tester.
~ " " I ~ r o n passenger seat t

NO.
Pu N N l p O 1 J
3. Trunk Lid
Unit; mm (in) NTn (kg-n+b
a:
3-2 TRUNK LID ASSEMBLY
D3 OPEN-CLOSE DEVICES 3. Trunk Lid (Cont'd)

3-3 TRUNK LID OPENER AND FUEL LID OPENER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RS (0.52 0.66,3.8
- 4.8)
Fore and aft: 4 { 0.16)
3.8 4.8) Trunk lid striker and opener cable adjustment
Pj:t+rn (kg-m, ft-~b)
Unit: mm (in)
Fuel filler lid opener removal and installation
D4 BODY INTERIOR
1. Instrument Panel
1-1 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND DISASSEMBLY
*@ Instrument panel mask (left)

/
*@ Instrument panel mask (right) I 1 @
/& Instrument panel assembly
6 /
t i (one on each side)

Nut (one on each side)
NOTE: Parts with mark *must be remwed using screwdriver wrapped with vinyl tape or cloth.
D4 BODY INTERIOR 1. Instrument Panel (Cont'd)

1-2 ACCESSORY PARTS REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION AFTER REMOVING AND INSTALLING INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
@ Side ventilator grille (left)

resin pawls (two places)
Center ventilator grille resin pawls (three places each, up and down)
[twoeach up aid down)
@ Screws (three)tint 3 )

Detailed operations
Lower instrument panel
I
Remove and install: Hood opener securing bolts (two) (Parts not shown)
I
Remove and install: Hood opener separation (Part not shown)
I
Remove and install: Right and left dash side lower finishers (Parts not shown) (two screws and one clip)
Remove and install: Steering column cover, front pillar garnish (Parts not shown)
1
(Single part)
1
@
I
Lower Instrument panel (right) securing screws (six) I Lower instrument panel (right)
I
Key timer securing screw (one)
I
Key timer
I Front ventilator grille (right) securing screws (two)
I
Front ventilator grille (right)
I
1
1 [Point 1
I
I 1
!
I
Cluster lid A securing screws (seven)
Cluster lid A
Automatic transmission indicator light securing screws (three)
I Automatic transmission indicator light

I Switch securing screws (three on each side)
I
i
I
I
Switch (Fog light. delogger, 4-way flasher, audio unit)
I
[Point 21
I
I
Combination switch securing screws (five on each side)
I
Combination switch (Light, wiper)
1
1
[Point 3 1
Switch cluster A securing screws (four)
I
Switch cluster A. cluster lid A separation
I
I
1
[Point 41 [Point 5)
@ @
@
@
1 1 1
Combination meter
I
Glove box securing screws (two) I Glove box damper resin clip (one place)
I
I
I
I
I
Glove box
I
Glove box damper securing screws (four)
[Point 61 (Single part)
I
Glove box damper
D4 BODY INTERIOR
I
I
Glove box lid securing screws (ten)
1. Instrument Panel (Cont'd)
I
Glove box lid cylinder lock securing screws (two)
1
1[point 7)
I
I
1
Glove box lid, cylinder lock
I
I
Outer and inner glove box lid separation
@ @
Lower instrument panel (left) securing screws (three)
I
Lower instrument panel (left)
I
Instrument panel reinforcement securing screws (four)
I
I
I Instrument panel reinforcement
@ @
Glove box cover securing screws (two)
I
Glove box cover [Point 81
1
Ash tray inner, cigarette lighter
I
!
1
t
1
[Point 91
I
Automatic transmission finisher resin pawls (6 places)
I
Cluster lid C securing screws (four)
I
Cluster lid C
1
I
[point 10)
I
Audio & pocket deck securing screws (six)
I I
I
I
Audio & pocket deck
i
1 I
I
I I
Audio unit securing screws (two on each side)

I
1
Audio unit and pocket deck separation

I
Healer control securing screws (two)
[Point 11)
I
Heater control
'
I I I
I
Console box securing screws (three)
I
I
I
I I
1
1
I
[Point 121
Consoie box
I
1 I
Lower instrument panel (middle) securing screws (eight)
I
Lower instrument panel (middle)
I
I
I 1
I I
@ @
[Point 131
Glove box light resin pawls (four places)

I
(Single part)
(Single part)
(Single pan)
I
I
Glove box lid striker
I
Right and left instrument panel masks
1
[Point 14) (Single part)
--
1
Instrument panel assembly securing bolts (two), screws (two),and nuts (two)
I
Instrument panel assembly
[Point 151
I
I
Side ventilator grille (left)
(Single part)
I
Side defroster grilles (right, left)
(Single part)
Center ventilator grille

I
[Point 161 [Single part)
Front defroster grille (right, left)
I
1
1
-
Heater duct and nozzle securing screws (14)
I
Heater duct and nozzle
D4 BODY INTERIOR 1. instrument Panel (Cont'd)

[Point 11 Side ventilator grille (right) removal
Remove and install: Lower instrument panel cover, hood opener Remove ventilator grille securing screws (two) from rear side of lower instrument cover, and remove ventilator grille (right).
[Point 21 Cluster switch A removal

Remove cluster lid A, and then remove screws (two on each side) from rear side, and separate cluster lid A and cluster switch A.
[Point 31 Control switch removal

Remove control switch securing screws from rear side of cluster lid A, and then remove switch while pressing it inward. NOTE: When installing switch, pay attention not to tighten screws excessively.
a
[Point 41 Combination switch removal and installation
Removal
Remove switch knob by pulling in direction of arrow, and remove combination switch by removing securing screws (five) from rear side of cluster lid A. NOTE: Control switch must be removed before removing combination switch. (This precaution applies to both right and left sides.)
Installation
Install switch, and then instail switch knob by aligning mark position. After installation, check for normal switch operation by operating switch.

[Point 51 Combination meter removal
Remove and install: Cluster lid A (Parts not shown) Remove screws (four), and pull out combination meter.
L i
, 1
[Point 61 Glove box removal and Installation Removal

0
Remove screws (two), and remove damper clip from bracket located inside of glove box.
Installation
Insert clip into bracket while pulling damper wire, then install glove box fully closed. NOTE: Pay attention not to cut off damper wire.
0
[Point 71 Glove box lid separation a Remove lid securing screws (eight), and pull off lid hinge
pin to disengage hinge, and then remove lower screws (two) to separate glove box lid into inner and outer portions.
[Point 81 Glove box cover installation

Install glove box light harness connector to cover, and fit cover clamp securely into steering member, and tighten screws (two).
[Point 91 Cluster lid C removal and installation Removal

0
Remove cluster lid securing screws (four), and remove rear end metal clip using standard screwdriver, then remove cluster lid by pulling resin pawls fitted upper end portion forward.
Installation
Fit resin pawls into respective position, and install cluster lid by pressing it in direction of arrow.

[Point 101 Heater control removal
a
After removing audio unit, remove heater control securing screws (two) and remove heater control by pulling it to the side.
Parking brake lever
[Point 111 Console box removal and installation Removal

Remove console box securing screws (two on each side), and then remove console box by disengaging parking brake lever while lifting console box.
/HC-
Installation
Install console box by inserting resin pawls securely into respective holes of lower instrument panel,
Lower instrume
[Point 121 Lower instrument panel (middle) removal

0
To prevent interference with parking brake lever, remove parking brake lever securing bolts (four) first, then-remove lower instrument panel (middle) by pulling it rearward.
[Point 131 Instrument panel mask removal

I mask
Remove instrument panel mask by inserting stubby standard screwdriver between mask and instrument panel pad.
,
Remwe
04 BODY INTERIOR
1. Instrument Panel (Cont'd)
(T) Locating pin
AX
[Point 141 Instrument panel installation

0
0
Set instrument panel by aligning locating pin, and then tighten screws in sequence shown at left. Make sure each duct is fitted correctly to grille. Secure speedometer cable by sliding it into cut-out portion of cable hole in instrument panel.
Q scr.
(c
@ Nuts (two)
^y
[Point 151 Ventilator grille removal (T) Insert thin standard screwdriver @ through clearance I
between grille fins.
(2) Pry up resin pawls by inserted screwdriver. (3) Insert another standard screwdriver (8) into clearance
between grille and instrument panel.
(3) Carefully pull out grille using screwdriver (g) white prying up resin pawls using screwdriver @ , and remove grille
\
1
from instrument panel assembly.

(two each, up and down)
//
Notes on removal
Because the grille pawls are positioned deep, do not attempt to pry up grille as shown at left; otherwise, grille main body and grille cover will be damaged. If unable to remove grille using method shown in steps @ thru 0 , first remove instrument panel assembly, then remove ventilator grille.
D4 BODY INTERIOR
2. Interior Trim and Equipment

2-1 BODY SIDE AND FLOOR TRIM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(1) 4-door Sports Sedan
@!
D4 BODY INTERIOR 2. Interior Trim and Equipment (Cont'd)

[Point 11 Body side welt installation

0
Install body side welt by aligning welt end with cut-out notch of outer panel indicated by arrows at left so that lip will face inside of compartment. NOTE: 2-door Coupe has notches at (a) and (6) only. (See illustration at left.)
[Point 21 Retainer installation

Retainer
a
Liter
Fit floor trim retainer onto sill flange completely.

2-2 HEAD LINING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(1) Standard model
Remove and install : {Part not shown) Body side welt Front, center and rear pillar garnishes Right and left sunvisors Inside mirror Room light Assist clips (two) Right and left front seat belts Rear seat cushion 6 seat back Right and left rear seat belts
Room light removal
2-3 CONSOLE BOX REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Section A-A

Standard
Cap
[Point 11 Capped screw removal a Open screw head cap using standard screwdriver, and then
remove screw. NOTE: Cap is made integral with screw. Pay attention not to tear off cap from base,
2-4 TRUNK TRIM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

2-door Coupe
(two) \
Push-on c l i p (two on each side)

C l i p (& (two)
Trunk rear uomr
D4 BODY INTERIOR
3. Seat (GT-R model)

3-1 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL & INSTALLATION, AND DISASSEMBLY
Disassembly
Remwal and installation
Finisher
C l i p @ (fmr)
Seat back assembly integral with seat back frame
Reclining device
Side cover Reclining knob
Screw (one)
~eclinik dial
: N-m (kg-m. ft-lb)

: Nissan MP special grease No. 2
D4 BODY INTERIOR 3 Seat (GT-R model) (Cont'd) .

/
Seat back assembly
[Point 11 Reclining device removal

Remove trim end fastener of seat back assembly, and remove two securing bolts by taking off trim.
[Point 21 Seat trim clip removal (outer side)

Using clip screwdriver, carefully remove three clips which secure seat trim to slide rail on side face of seat cushion.
[Point 31 Seat trim retainer removal and installation (inner side) Removal
Disengage seat trim retainer from seat frame by pushing down with finger.
Installation
a
Hook trim & pad assembly to seat frame, and inner side retainer to wire. Install trim & pad assembly while making sure trim and retainer are correctly engaged.
D4 BODY INTERIOR 3. Seat (GT-R model) (Cont'd)

3-2 REAR SEAT REMOVAL & INSTALLATION, AND DISASSEMBLY
(one on each side)
Rear seat center armrest
-Rear
seat cushion assembly @ Securing welt (40)
: Nmreusable part :N*m (kg-m ft-lb)
Resin holder details
D4 BODY INTERIOR
4 Seat Belts .
4-1
SEAT BELT ANCHORAGE
Shoulder anchorage for front passenger seat RH through anchor (lock pillar inner) E.L.R. anchorage for front passenger seat RH lap outer (Rear piltar inner)
-.Shoulder anchorage for rear seat RH through anchor (Rear pillar inner)
\
E.L .R. anchorage for rear seat fixing (Rear pillar inner)
Anchorage for front passenger seat RH lap outer (Sill inner)
borage for rear seat RH lap outer (Rear wheel house inner)
Anchorage for rear seat RH lap inner (Rear floor)
Anchorage for front passenger seat RH lap inner (Seat rail inner
Anchorage for rear seat center lap (Rear floor)
2-door Sports Coupe
NOTE: LH seat anchorages are symmetrical in shape to RH seat.
D4 BODY INTERIOR 4. Seat Belts (Cont'd)

4-2 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
2-door Sports Coupe
Shoulder anchor section
Slide bar
buckle
82;
Lti4.4 5.6,32
- 41)
Anchor bolt 43 56 (4.4 5.6, 32 411
11 mm 17/16 in)
R.H. lap inner section
RH lap outer section
(4.4 5.6, 32 41)
--
E.L.R. section
T3] : N-m (kg-m, ft-Ib)
D4 BODY INTERIOR 4. Seat Belts (Cont'd)

4-3 REAR SEAT BELT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Paper washer
Washers {three)
Shoulder anchor section
Center lap anchor
m..
Floor section
E.L.R. section
: N-m (kg-rn, ft-lb)
Inspection
Check whether seat belt can be handled normally. Check seat belt webbing for damage, wear, discoloration, and metal parts for deformation. NOTES: (1) Use neutral detergent to clean webbing. (2) Do not disassemble belt buckle and E.L.R. assembly.
HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER
L
-
SECTION
HA
CONTENTS
H HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER H I AIR CONDITIONER ....... ....... ......... ............................................................ ............... HA- 2 . . ... 1. Full Automatic Air Conditioner .........................................................................................HA- 2 1-1 Prior to trouble diagnosis ............................................................................... ....... HA- 2 ...... 1-2 System diagram ........................................................,................................................ HA- 3 1-3 Self-diagnosis ................................................................................................ . ,....,...... HA- 4 1-4 Sensor inspection ................................... .................................................................... HA-10 1-5 Actuator inspection ...............,.,.................................................................,..,,,........... HA-15 1-6 Actuator removal and installation .............................................................. . .............. HA-23
H1 AIR CONDITIONER
1. Full Automatic Air Conditioner

1-1 PRIOR TO TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS This fully automatic air conditioner has a self-diagnostic function for checking its major components. Using this self-diagnostic function, it is possible to check whether the signal issued from each sensor is within the effective range of the respective sensor characteristics, and whether each actuator can respond correctly to a control signal issued by force under a predetermined condition. It is also possible to check the function of the display section, mode signal, and each sensor. This means that, using the self-diagnostic function, most components of this fudy automatic air conditioner can be checked. After identifying a faulty section, however, each sensor or actuator must be examined using conventional method. If an error in the electrical system is determined as the cause of a fault, for example, it is also necessary to check fuses, connectors, and terminals, etc. in addition to self-diagnosis. Fuses that need inspection
Major load (Air conditioner)
4
15A
5
10
ACC
Blower fan motor, auto amplifier

Magnet clutch
Air conditioner relay, intake door actuator, H I relay, auto amplifier
23
BAT
Auto amplifier
The basic troubleshooting flow diagram is shown below:

Occurrence of a fault
I
1
Inspection of basic cooling and heating cycles
Repair.
OK
I1
Troubleshooting using self-diagnostic function
,,
Conventional inspection of fault OK
NG
Repair.
If results of all the above inspections are normal, replace auto amplifier.
"I
(*) NOTE: Self-diagnostic function is unable to check such phenomena that cannot be reproduced.
H I AIR CONDITIONER 1. Full Automatic Air Conditioner (Cont'd)

1-2 SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Auto amplifier
r-1"

1-3 SELF-DIAGNOSIS
(1) Self-diagnosis set To change from ordinary automatic air conditioner control mode into self-diagnosis mode, depress automatic air conditioner OFF switch for more than five seconds within 10 seconds after turning ignition switch to ON from OFF. Start engine to prevent discharging discharged battery when performing selfdiagnosis. To return to automatic air conditioner control mode from selfdiagnostic mode, turn ignition switch OFF,or depress air conditioner switch. Self-diagnostic program is designed to facilitate detection of a fault. It consists of the following five self-diagnostic steps and one customizing step. Steps 1-5 can be selected by depressing HOT switch or COLD switch. Steps 5 and 6 can be selected by depressing fan switch. NOTE: Step 6 is not used for trouble diagnosis.
Description of each step

Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Segment check (Display section and LED) Sensor check
Mode door position check
1 Actuator operation check

Sensor recognition temperature disa To set difference between display
Step 6:
temperature and sensed temperature To memorize intake port when ignition switch is OFF
(2) Step 1 (Display section and LED segment check) Normal: All display and LEDs are lit. Abnormal: Failed portion is not lit.

(3) Step 2 (Sensor check) Step 2 is selected by depressing HOT switch(~)while step 1 in status. Microcomputer detects whether each sensor input signal satisfies set conditions, and results are displayed on display section. is displayed in display section. Normal:
'a'
Abnormal: Failed sensor number is displayed. If sensor shortcircuit is detected, a minus sign (-) is also indicated. If error is detected in two or more sensors, each sensor number is displayed by flashing twice in turn. NOTE: If vehicle is positioned in dark place or if sunlight is exceptionally strong, then sunload sensor error may be indicated.
Display number and corresponding sensor, and judgment criteria

Display No.
I
Sensor
When disconnetted
When shorted
I
20
21
(Normal!
Outside air sensor
Inside air sensor Water temperature sensor Intake temperature sensor
Below -60 (-76'F)
---
22
Above 100'C (212'F) Above 10O0C (212'F) Above 15O0C (302T)
1 BeEzp 1
Below -50-C (-58'F)
Below -50%
Sunload sensor
(21TF) Above 1.323 kW 0'030 kw (1,138 kcalfh, (26 kcallh* '03 4,516 6~ulhlmz 6T~/h)/rn~ [0.1229 kW [0.0028 kw (2'42 (105.72 kcallh, '3 Bwl 419.5 BTUlh)/ h)/sq ft]
Sq
(5') -8F
Above 100mC
ftl
--
26
PBR (Note)
Refrigerant ternperaiure sensor
Above 4.9V Below -50-12 -58T)
Below 0.1V Above tOO0C (212'F)
27
NOTE: PBR is judged based on air mix door opening of 40%. (Full cold: 0%, full hot: 100%) If sensor is judged as faulty in step 2, check single sensor according to "1-4. SENSOR INSPECTION", and determine whether failure is in sensor or harness.

(4) Step 3 (Mode door position check) Depress HOT switch ( A ) while in step 2 status, and step 3 will be selected. In this step, mode door actuator operates, and whether input signal from position detection switch is normal is checked by microcomputer, and the results are indicated on display section,
NOTE: Approximately 16 seconds are required to complete inspection of all modes. NORMAL: will be displayed. ABNORMAL: Number of faulty modes are displayed. If two or more modes are faulty, each mode number is displayed by flashing twice in turn. NOTE: Connector disconnection is indicated by the following pattern: 31 -* 32 -* 34 -* 35 -+ 36.
'3G'
Display number and corresponding mode

Display No.
Mode
(Normal)
Display No. 34
Mode
FOOT
-
30
31
VENT
35
DlF
DEF
32
B/L
36
If any mode is judged as faulty in step 3, it indicates that harness or mode door actuator is faulty.
(5) Step 4 (Each actuator operation check)

If HOT switch ( A ) is depressed while in step 3, step 4 is selected, and '9 ," displayed. If AMB switch is depressed in this status, displayed number will change to 42, 43, ... upon each depression of switch, and return to 41 after 47 is displayed. Auto amplifier provides specified output to each actuator, blower motor and compressor corresponding to these displayed numbers. Check operation of these units visually, or by listening or feeling vibration.
(m)
H1 AIR CONDITIONER 1. Full Automatic Air Conditioner (Cont'd)

NOTE: Output to compressor is provided as magnet clutch ON-OFF signal and control valveoutput signal. Control valve output signal causes compressor swash plate inclination angle to change to control compressor delivery. This can be checked by measuring auto amplifier output voltage usinga circuit tester.
Auto amplifier (Harness connected)
Display number and operation status

I
I I
Compressor Display number

41
Intake door
Air mix door
Mode door
1
Blower motor to control valve

5V 5V 10.5V 8.5V 8.5V 8.5V
12V
,
Inside air Inside air Inside air Half-outside air Outside air Outside air Outside air
Full cold
VENT VENT
BfL BIL
Approx. 1V ON ON
ON ON
42
43
Full cold Full cold Full hot Full hot Full hot Full hot
Approx. 4.5V Aoorox. 2.5V .. Approx. 2.5V Approx. 4.5V

OV
44
45
46
47
FOOT
Df F
OFF ON
DEF
Approx. 2.5V
If abnormality of any portion is detected in step 4, be sure to perform inspection according to "1-5 ACTUATOR INSPECTION" flowchart.
I
Abnormal section
Flowchart
1-5 (1) Intake door system
1-5 (2) Air mix door system 1-5 (3) Blower motor system
Intake door Air mix door Blower motor Compressor
1-5 (4) Compressor system
(ml)depressed in this status, temperatures sensed by is outside air sensor, inside air sensor, suction temperature sensor and refrigerant temperature sensor are displayed in the following sequence.
(6) Step 5 (Sensor recognition temperature indication) If HOT switch ( A ) is depressed while in step 4, then step 5 is selected and '5 ' is indicated in display section. If AM6 switch
c -1
Outside air sensor temperature
Inside air sensor temperature
Suction temperature sensor temperatu re
[Refrigerant temperature sensor temperature

If temperature displayed in step 5 is excessively different from actual temperature, check suspected sensor according to " 1-4 SENSOR INSPECTION".
(7) Step 6 (Not used when troubleshooting)

Depress fan switch ( ) while in step 5, then step 6 is selected and display appears as shown at left. If fan switch is depressed again, step 5 is selected again.
<3) Setting difference between indicated temperature and sensed temperature

0
If passenger's bodily sensation differs from the temperature set on the display section, then the auto amplifier sensing temperature can be changed with respect to the displayed temperature.
In this case, depress HOT switch ( A ) or COLD switch in step 6. Each time the switch is depressed, displayed temperature will change by O.SQC.In this way, sensed temperature can be varied in the range from +3.0 to -3.0C (Example) If the sensed temperature is set -3.0 as shown at left with respect to the set display temperature of 25'C, the auto ampli(25.0 -3.0 = 22.0).Thus, fier sensing temperature will be 22.O8C the actual temperature is controlled at a level lower than the displayed temperature.
(S) Memorizing intake door position when turning

ignition switch OFF
The intake door position when turning the ignition switch OFF can be memorized, and the air conditioner can be started at the memorized intake door position. in step 6 This . To use this function, depress REC switch will cause the display to go out and the memory function the REG switch again will cause to be displayed and the memory function canceled.
IAOTq
NOTE: Even if condition (3) or (2) is set in step 6, the set condition will be canceled when the battery is disconnected. If step 6 is set at customer's request, it is necessary to explain this point to the customer.

(8) Self-diagnostic procedure flowchart
Start angina (Ignition switch OFF - ON)
Depress HOT switch [A)
I
No
(Wthin 10 seconds after setting i g ~ t i o switch to ON, keep n autometic air caditimer OFF switch depressed for five sac-
operation norrrel*
Faulty actuator, or related component, of hafnetS
Are display section and LEDs all linked?
Display, LED, or OFF
To next mode
1 YES
Depress A M B switch (Mode seiaclion)
m.
?l -
Depress HOT switch [A). Depress HOT switch (A)
? '5" i displayed on s tainparature tatting t e g m r t .
' d
Depress COLD swiuh (V).
the previous check
COLD switch is faulty.
temperature of each wneof normal?
Faulty tsmof ch~racteristics.
YES
--
Depress HOT switch [A],
Faulty sensor or harness D> ^: f pyd l
'
(Turn switch OFF or Air conditioner switch ON).
Corr~sponding wmor
Outside air sensor
2 ti
Intake temperature sensa
Depress HOT switch (A). Faulty mode door actuator or harmsa error

1-4 SENSOR INSPECTION
(1) Outside air sensor Disconnect outside air sensor connector, and measure resistance value between terminals on sensor side. NOTE: Perform this check with ignition switch set in OFF position. If the outside air sensor connector or auto amplifier connector is disconnected with the ignition switch ON, the outside air temperature is sensed as extremely low. If the connector is connected after turning the ignition switch OFF, and if the ignition switch is set again to ON, the outside air temperature correcting function prevents the sensing value from rising quickly to correct level. As a result, the compressor remains OFF, and heating function operates. In this case, disconnect the outside air sensor with the ignition switch ON, and then reconnect the sensor connector.
Outside air sensor characteristic curve
(2) Inside air sensor

Disconnect inside air sensor connector, and measure resistance between terminals on sensor side.
HI AIR CONDITIONER
1. Full Automatic Air Conditioner (Cont'd)
Inside air sensor characteristic curve
2.0
(3) Water temperature sensor

Disconnect water temperature sensor connector, and measure resistance value between terminals on sensor side.
Water temperature sensor characteristic curve

(4) Intake air temperature sensor Disconnect intake air temperature sensor connector, and measure resistance between terminals on sensor side.
Intake air temperature sensor characteristic curve
"-A
-1'0
o
(3;)
10
20'k
30 40
*C(eF)
14 ( 4 -1 1 )
(SO) 1 8 177KSS) (104) 6)
Heater unit intake air temperature
Sunload sensor With sunload sensor connector connecte(j, measure voltage between terminals.
Terminals Ignition switch
Positive @
Negative @
Standard value See characteristic curve.
NOTE: When performing this check indoors, move a 60 watt lamp toward or away from sensor while reading voltage. Reference: Sunload by direct sunlight during fine weather is equivalent to 0.768 kW (660 kcallh, 2 , 6 1 9 ~ ~ ~ 1 h [0.0713kW )lm~ (61.31 kcallh, 243.4 BTU/h)/sq ft].
H1 AIR CONDITIONER
1. Full Automatic Air Conditioner (Cont'd)
Sunload sensor voltage characteristic curve
CV)
10.0713
461.31. 243.311
:
0.830 1.163 (BOO, (l,MO, 3,174) 3,968) (0.0864 [0.1080 (74.32, (92.90. 294.9)l 388.6)]
0.233
0.485
0.688
1200,
794) i0.0216 (18.58, 73.811
1m 2.381) . ) 10.0432 [O 0648 (37.16. (55.74, 147.4)1 221.211
mo.
kW(kcal/h BTU/ h ) / d ikW IkcaVth B W hi/W ft]
Sunload
14-03
(6) PBR With air mix door actuator connector connected, measure voltage between terminals.
I
Ignition switch
Terminals
ON
Positive R3
Negative Q
Standard value
See characteristic curve.
PBR voltage characteristic curve

(V)5.
5.0
4-
0 10 COLD
20
30
4011.5 50
60
70
80 83
Air mix door opening

(7) Refrigerant temperature sensor
Disconnect refrigerant temperature sensor connector, and measure resistance between terminals on sensor side.
Refrigerant temperature sensor characteristic curve

16.0
-20
(-4)
-W
(14)
,
0
(3zj
10 (SO)
20 25 30 40 (681 1771(86) 11041

O C
Refrigeranttemperature
( ' F )
HI AIR CONDITIONER 1. Full Automatic Air Conditioner (Cont'd)

+
1-5 ACTUATOR INSPECTION
(2) Intake door system

Before inspection, check intake door actuator and automatic amolifier connectors.
Remwe glove box, and disconnect intake door actuator connector.
Intake door actuator (vehicle-tideconnector)
Check that voltage between vehicle-side connector terminal No.1 and GND is approx. 12V when ignition switch is ON. [Point 11 Approx, 12V
Approx.
ov
Faulty harness (Repair)
1
Connect intake door actuator connector.
-,-I
Automatic amplifier (Harms conmnedl
Remwe automatic amplifier,
Measure voltage between urrninals using step 4 of sell-diagnostic mode with connector connected. [Point 21
Other than standard Faulty automatic amplifier (Replace)
Standard value
Faulty intake daw actuator (Replace)
}
I
2) Air mix door system Before inspection, check air mix door actuator and automatic amplifier connectors.
Faulty PBR (Replace actuatiwl
Remwe eudio unit.
t
Air mix door
Msaeurb voltage between terminals using step 4 of sell-diaonoslic mode with air mix door actuator connector connecteci,[Point 3 1 Other than standard. Fautry harness (Repair), or faulty automatic arnplifiir (Replac*)
Standard value Faulty air mix-door actuator [Replace]

[Point 11 Intake door actuator power inspection
Remove intake door actuator, and measure voltage between vehicle-side connector and GND.
Measuring range Ignition switch Measuring terminals Positive @ Negative Standard
6
Approx. 12V
(S)
ON
(D
GND
[Point 21 Automatic amplifier output inspection

Remove automatic amplifier, and measure voltage by applying circuit tester probes to 16-terminal connector. Use step 4 of self-diagnostic mode and keep connector connected during measurement.
Measuring range
Ignition switch Measuring terminal Digital display value
41, 42, 43
T
oN (selfmode)
a 3
- e
Standard Remarks value Approx.
ov
Approx.
12V
Inside air
Others
44
Approx.
GND Others
45, 46, 47
ov
Approx. 12V Approx.
Half-outside air
I--
ov
Approx.
12V
Outside
air
Others
NOTE: If standard value of approx. 12V is not present, internal circuit of intake door actuator may be disconnected.

[Point 31 Automatic amplifier output Inspection With air mix door actuator connector connected, measure
voltage using step 4 of self-diagnostic mode.
I I
1
(3) Blower motor system
Approx.
Moves to
Moves to
f u l l cold
nosic
mode)
47
->
Approx.
41
Before inspection, check blower motor, fan control amplifier, HI relay and automatic amplifier connectors. d) Blower motor fails to run in HI position.
Remove dash side lower (left), and disconnect HI relay connector.
HI relay (Vehicle-side connector)
" T T Either ,below

I
I
I
one is
Check that voltage between vehicle-side connector terminal @ or (S) and GND is approx. 12V when ignition switch is ON. [Point 4 1
approx. 12V.
Faulty harness (Repair) or faulty blower motor (Replace).
Both are approx. 12V Faulty harness (Repair)
Check that resistance v nector terminal @ end GND i s approx. HI relay (Vehicle-side connector) Connect HI relay connector.
I
0(1
[Point 41
Measure voltage between terminal @ and GND using SteD 4 of self-diaanostic mode. [Point 51
HI relav
I
I
( b r mss connected)
Other than standard value
6%
I.
St~ndard value
aulty harness (Repair) or faulty automatic amplifier (Replace)
Faulty HI relay (Replace)

El 4-036"

@ Unable to change blower motor speed, or motor fails to run at any position other than HI.
I
Fan control amplifier (Vehicle-side connector)
Fan control amplifier
Remove glove box, and disconnect fan control amptifier connector.
'I
I
i
Check that voltage between vehicle-side connector terminal @ and GND is approx. 12V. (Point 5 1 Approx, 12V Faulty harness (Repair)
(Vehicle-sideconnector]
Check that resistance nenor terminal No. 2 and GND is approx. 00. [Point 6 1
mn
Faulty harness (Repair)
1
1
Connect fan control a f n p i i f i ~ connector.
Measure voltage between terminal @and GND using

step 4 of self-diagnostic mode.
Fan control amplifier (Harnessconnected)
1
Other than standard value
Faulty harness (Repair], or faulty automatic amplifier (Replac
Standardvalue
Faulty fan control amplifier (Replace)

E l 4-0360
[Point 41 HI relay power and GND circuit inspection Disconnect HI relay connector, and measure voltage and
check continuity between vehicle-side connector and GND.
I
Measuring range
Ignition
switch
Fan switch
Measuring terminals
Standard
value
(3
0)
OFF
( 3
GND
ACC
ON
Approx.
12V
OFF
@ @
o n
[Point 51 Automatic amplifier output inspection

With HI relay connector connected, measure voltage using step 4 of self-diagnostic mode.
I
I
I
Measuring range
Ignition switch ON (Self-
Measuring terminals
D i g i t a l dis-
Standard
value
@
<3)
play v a l u e
41
g)
diagnostic
- 46
Approx.
B e l o w 1.5V
mode)

[Point 61 Fan control amplifier power and GND circuit inspection
Disconnect fan control amplifier connector, and measure voltage and check continuity between vehicle-side connector and GND.
Measuring range Ignition switch Fan switch Measuring terminals @
Standard value
[Point 7] Automatic amplifier output inspection a With fan control amplifier connector connected, measure voltage using step 4 of self-diagnostic mode.
Measuring range Ignition switch Measuring terminals
Digital display value

41
Standard value
1 3V
ON (Self@ diagnostic I mode)
GND
- 46

(4) Compressor system Before inspection, check air conditioner relay, dual pressure switch, automatic amplifier magnet clutch connectors. (^) Magnet clutch system
Disconnect air conditioner relay connector.
I
Air conditioner
relay
(Vehicle-side
connectof)
I1
Check that voltage between vehicle-side connector terrninal@or@~nd GND is awprox. 12V when ignition .. switch i s ON. [Point 8 1
Approx. OV
Faulty harness i n power supply system
Check that resistance value between air conditioner relay vehicle-side connector terrninalaand GNO is approx. 3.50.[Point 81
Disconnect magnet clutch connector.
Magnet clutch
Abnormal Normal Check that magnet clutch terminalaand GND is approx. 3.50. [Point 9 1 Faulty magnel
Connect air conditioner relay connector.
(
Check that voltage between ECCS control unit 1erminal@and GND is approx. 12V when ignition switch is ON. [Point 101
Faulty harness
Disconnect dual pros$ur switch connector.
Dual prmssure switch
Check that resistance between dual pressure switch terminals @ and Q is approx. 00.[Point 111
Faulty dual pressure switch,
Sort
engine.
1
--/
or insufficient
Approx. OQ
Faulty harness between dual pressure switch and air conditioner relay, or between dual pressure switch and ECCS control unit, or faulty air conditioner relay
Check that air conditioner relay operates when ECCS control unit terminal @ i s shorted to GND, [Point 10)
No operation Faulty ECCS control unit
I
Operates
-.
Faulty harness or automatic amplifier
ECCS C/U (RB26DETT)

[Point 81 Air conditioner relay power supply and magnet clutch circuit inspection a Remove air conditioner relay, and measure voltage and
resistance between vehicle-side connector and GND.
Measuring range
Ignition switch
M ~ u r i n ;t e r y l
1
I
Standard value
1
I
Remarks
Magnet clutch coil resistance
[Point 91 Magnet clutch inspection

Disconnect magnet -clutch connector, and measure resistance between clutch-side connector and GND.
Measuring range
I
Measuring terminals
@
(D
Standard value
I
Q
GND
! 2
Approx. 3.50
[Point 101 Air conditioner control circuit inspection

With harness connected to ECCS control unit, measure voltage and check relay operation by applying tester probes as shown.
(3) Air conditioner control circuit inspection

Measuring range Ignition switch
Measuring terminals
0
GND
--
Standard value Approx. 12V

. -
ON
(2) Air conditioner relay operation inspection

Ignition switch
ON (Engine is running)
Terminal to be shorted ~OGND
Air conditioner relay o~eration Air conditioner relay must turn ON.

'
[Point 111 Dual pressure switch continuity inspection Disconnect dual pressure switch connector, and measure resistance by applying tester probes to switch side connector as shown.
Measuring range
Measuring terminals
Standard value
i.2
@-@
Approx.
of"
NOTE: If dual pressure switch is OFF, the cause may be a faulty air conditioner cycle.
(D Control valve system

.
-
I
Automatic amplifier (Harness connected)
Remove automatic amplifier
Wth connector connected, measure voltage between terminal @ and GND using step 4 of self-diagnosis mode. [Point 121
Other than Faulty automatic amplifier
Standard value
1
1
Control valve (Valve-side connector)
Disconnect eantrol valve eonne~tor.
i
Check that resistance between control valve-side connector terrninalsaand @ is standard (approx. 70). [Point 131
Other than standard vain
Faulty control valve (Compressor)
Standard value'
Faulty harness between automatic amplifier and control valve, or faulty compressor

[Point 121 Automatic amplifier output signal inspection a Remove automatic amplifier. With connector connected,
measure voltage by applying tester probes to the 20-terminat connector using step 4 of self-diagnostic mode.
I
43, 44,47
1 Approx. 2V
[Point 131 Coil resistance inspection in control valve Disconnect control valve connector, and measure resistance of coil by applying tester probes to valve-side connector.
Measuring range
Measuring terminals
Standard value
Approx. 7SI
GI-@
1-6 ACTUATOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

(1) Intake door actuator Removal
Remove and install: Glove box, glove box cover (Parts not shown) Remove harness and securing bolts (two), and remove intake door actuator. NOTE: Remove actuator in REC state.
Installation
Connect intake door actuator connector to vehicle harness. Set ignition switch to ACC, and set push control REC switch to ON. (Actuator is set in REC state.) Install intake door actuator while fixing actuator link in inside air position, Operate REC switch to see if actuator link is movable over full stroke range.

(2) Air mix door actuator Removal
Remove and install: Automatic transmission finisher, cluster lid C, audio unit, heater nozzle (left) 0 Remove connector and securing bolts (three), and remcwe rod from rod holder.
Installation
0
Connect air mix door actuator connector to vehicle-side harness. Set ignition switch to ON, and activate self-diagnostic mode step 4, then set full cold status (display value 41, 42, or 43). After this, turn OFF ignition switch. Install air mix door actuator. Fix air mix door actuator to rod holder while pressing door link toward full cold (driver seat). Activate step 4 of self-diagnostic mode. Make sure that air mix door moves over full stroke range when display value is changed from 43 to 44 or from 47 to 41.
(3) Mode door actuator removal and installation

Removal
Remove and install: Instrument panel lower cover Remove connector and securing bolts (three), and remove rod by rotating rod holder with standard screwdriver. NOTE: Remove rod holder in DEF state,
Installation
Connect mode door actuator connector to vehicle-side harness. Set ignition switch to ACC, and set push control DEF switch to ON. (Actuator is set in DEF state.) Install mode door actuator. Fix side link to rod holder while holding side link in DEF mode position (by rotating counterclockwise until it stops). Operate mode switch and make sure that side link is capable of moving over full stroke range,
a
0
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
SECTION
EL
CONTENTS
E BODY ELECTRICAL UNITS El LIGHTS ....................................................................................................................................... EL- 2 1. Headlight Assembly .................................................................................................................... EL- 2 2. Backup Light (2-door model) ...................................................................................................... EL- 3 E2 INSTRUMENTS .......................................................................................................................... EL- 4 1. Combination Meter ..................................................................................................................... EL- 4 2. Sub Meter ................................................................................................................................... EL- 5 E3 AUDIO UNITS ............................................................................................................................. 7 EL.. Antenna ..................................................................................................................................... 7 1 ; ELE4 WINDOW EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................. EL- 8 1. Windshield Wipers ...................................................................................................................... EL- 8 2. Window Washer .......................................................................................................................... EL-10 E5 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS Abbreviations and Cable Colours ............................................................................................... EL-11 EL-12 Relays and Fuses ....................................................................................................................... WIRING DIAGRAMS - C-1 4WD vehicles (RB20DET/RB26DETT) ................................................................. Fig. No. 1 - W-1 4WD vehicles (RB20DETlRB26DETT) ................................................................ Fig. No . 2 - RB26DETT Engine Harness ....................................................................................... Fig. No. 3 - E-TS System ............................................................................................................... Fig. No.5 - Door Harness .............................................................................................................. Fig. No. 6 . Hicas System .............................................................................................................. Fig. No. 7 . Conditioner ............................................................................................................. No. 8 Air Fig. .-.................. . . . . ....
E l LIGHTS
1. Headlight Assembly
1-1 HEADLIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
@ Head light J
Remove headlight while lifting bumper fascia with its three mounting clips removed.
Front combination light
Pull entire light assembly to front, and take it out by disen~aging boss.
AIMING HEADLIGHT
Refer to the Basic Service Manual <A801001 > for headlight aiming procedures.
Modified 4-bulb type projector headlight Dimmer beam
Main beam
E l LIGHTS
Backup light assembly
2. Backup Light (2-door model)

2-1 BACKUP LIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
0
Remove license ptate bracket securing bolt (one), and pull up license plate, then remove light securing screws (two), and then remove backup light. Replace bulb after removing light main body.
3. High-mount Stop Light (2-door model)

3-1 LIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
Remove light securing screws (four), and remove connector from light main body.
Screws (four)
Higbmount stop light
4. Rear Combination Light

4-1 LIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (1) 2-door model
Removal Remove and install: Trunk rear finisher

Heat sealing material fitted around rear combination light using drier and remove light assembly from trunk side.
Installation
Remove butyl seal from body surface and rear side of light, and apply repair butyl seal to rear surface of rear combination light assembly. Install light assembly after heating butyl seal using dryer.
E2 INSTRUMENTS
1. Combination Meter
1-1 COMPONENTS
Speedometer .
Fuel gauge, front "torque meter .- - .
O. . ^te;
.,
, .
-:
49,
.,* - --
.:.:
'&
Chime
water - ---.temperature gauge --
1. Combination Meter (GT-R model)

1-2 REAR SIDE SHAPE AND INTERNAL CIRCUIT
E2 INSTRUMENTS
2. Sub Meter
2-1 METER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Finisher
Cluster lid C
2-2 DISASSEMBLY
E2 INSTRUMENTS 2. Sub Meter (Cont'd)

2-3 REAR SIDE SHAPE AND INTERNAL CIRCUIT
AUDIO UNITS
1. Antenna
1-1 FULL AUTOMATIC ANTENNA ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove and install: Trunk side finisher (left) (Parts not shown)
Screws ( w ) to-
1-2 ANTENNA ROD REPLACEMENT

Removal a Remove antenna nut and antenna base. a Turn ON radio receiver power switch to raise antenna.
a
At this moment, antenna rod and antenna rope can be pulled out by another operator.
Installation (only when installing new part) a Extend antenna cable end so that it can be easily taken up
a a
with motor. Turn OFF radio receiver power switch to retract antenna. Operator standing outside vehicle: Insert antenna cable into rod hole with gear side facing antenna motor (rear side of vehicle). After confirming that antenna cable has wound around motor, set root portion of rod into pipe, and allow motor to completely retract antenna rod. NOTE: If motor stops during operation, turn radio receiver ON then OFF to rotate motor in retracting direction.
Replacement rod part No.
28215 89904
~ i r e c t z n antenna cable of (rear side of vehicle)
~12-om
E4 WINDOW EQUIPMENT 1. Windshield Wipers

1-1 FRONT WIPER (1) Wiper arm and link removal and installation
& Wper link I
Pull out link through panel note
NOTE: If wiper link comes off specified auto stop position, motor may start rotating even though wiper switch is OFF. To prevent this accident, be sure to keep wiper motor disconnected.
(2) Wiper arm adjustment

When adjusting wiper arm, operate wiper motor once and allow it to stop at auto stop position. When installing wiper arm, align wiper blade end at specified position (wiper arm stop position), and tighten arm white paying attention to avoid movement of wiper link. NOTE: If wiper arm stop position has moved due to weight of snow or other external force, first correct wiper pivot fitting portion, then re-install wiper arm in correct position.
a
end face
1 E13-00411
Wiper arm stop position
E4 WINDOW EQUIPMENT
. -
1. Windshield wipers (Cont'd)

Semi-concealed type (standard)
Unit: rnm (in)
Dimension A Dimension B
- 1.26) 23 - 37 (0.91 - 1.46)

17 32 (0.67
1-2 REAR WIPER
(1) Rear wiper arm and motor removal and installation
PI:N-rn (kg-rn, fi-lb)

NOTE: If wiper link comes off specified auto stop position, motor may start rotating even though wiper switch is OFF. To prevent this, be sure to keep wiper motor disconnected.
(2) Wiper arm adjustment a When adjusting wiper arm position, operate wiper motor once, and allow it to stop at auto stop position.
Dimension A
17
- 32 rnm (0.67 - 1.26 in)
~ o l d i n g face end
E13-0055
Wiper arm stop position
E4 WINDOW EQUIPMENT
2. Window Washers
2-1 WASHER NOZZLE INJECTION POINT
(1) Front washer
Ccwl top cover end face
(2) Rear washer
Unit: mrn (in)
I2.W
'2 ~ d d i end~face n
13-005
2-2 WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT

(1) Front washer a Paying attention not to deform injection nozzle opening, insert a needle into nozzle, and adjust nozzle direction.
Pipe: Approx. 3 mrn (0.12 in) I.D.
I I
(2) Rear washer

w
Adjust nozzle direction using a pipe with 1.D. 3 mm (0.12 in). Pay attention not to damage nozzle port.
~njectim nozzle
2-3 WASHER TANK (1) Washer tank removal and installation Remove and install: Air cleaner (Parts not shown)
Chassis Marking Start Number

E-8NR32 vehicle
.....BNR32-000001
Abbreviations
Abbreviation ACC A/C
A/P
Name Accessory Air conditioner Air purifiw

AUTO speed control device
Name AMP BUST FUEL OIL OIL TEMP TACH0 TEMP

VOLT
Ammeter Vacuum gauge Fuel gauge Oil pressure gauge Oil temperature gauge Tachometer Water temperature gauge voltmeter 4-wheel antiskid warning light Battery fluid level warning light Main beam pilot lamp Seat bell warning light Brake warning light Check engine light Charge warning light Clutch fluid ievel warning light Cruise display light Rear detogqer pilol lamp Open door warning light Exhaust gas temperature warning lamp Loose Ian bell warning light Fuel filter water level warning light
LOW
ASCD
A/T
Automatic transmission Circuit breaker Double solenoid vacuum valw Emergency locking retractor Electronically controlled power steering Fast idle control device Fusible link Ignition Illumination Control Illumination light Indicator light Manual transmission Potentiometer balance resistor Pilot lamp Power steering potentiometer temperature Control
C/B
o w
ELR EPS FICD F/L IGN IL.CON
ANTI LOCK BATT BEAM BELT BRAKE CHECK

CHG
ILL
1ND.L Mfl
CLUTCH CRUISE
PBR
P.L
DEF DOOR
EXH TEMP FAN BELT FILTER FUEL FUSE GLOW HICAS OIL RAD STOP TAIL
,
PtS
PTC
PITr P/W
ST
Power transistor
power wtndow Start Solenoid valve Switch Transistor Voltage regulator Warning light 2-wheel drive 4-wheel antiskid 4-wheel dnve
fuel level warning light
s/v
Fuse blown warning light
sw
Tr VIR W.L 2WD 4WAS
4WD
low pilot lamp

LOW
MICAS oil level warning ligm
Oil pressure warning light Low radiator fluid level warning light Stop light burnout warning light Tail lamp burnout warning light Turn signal pilot lamp Low washer fluid warning light
TURN WASH
rn Cable Colors
Relays
Fuses
The fun0 numbers indicated in the tollowtng table &FRO with lhosa shown in the circuit and wirlng diagrams.
w
25A
v
284
n
25A
r
304 30A 30A
75A
A/T I N 0
" pI S A k
MlkUMP
SAD
FAN CON1 WOW
ENS
POWER ANTI
IGN SKI0 S W
PTC
MAIN
BLOWER
RAD F N A
Pal M b w
2 2 -C M 2 D 5s
25230-CMil
P mmB" m
'5230-CMIS !WO-CHI5
'5230- C H I D
SERVICE DATA
SECTION
SD
CONTENTS
F SERVICE DATA F1 NEW VEHICLE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS ........ SD- 2 1. Engine .............................................................................................................................. SD- 2 2. Chassis ..:..................................................................................................................... SD- 4 SD- 8 F2 PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS .................................................................................. SD- 8 ................................................................................................................................ 1. Engine 2. Chassis ..................................................................... ............. .......SD- 8 ............. .-. ..... SD- 9 ............................................................................. F3 LUBRICANTS AND SERVICE POINTS 1. Engine .................................-..................... ;..................-................................................. SD- 9 2. Chassis .............................................................................................................................. SD- 9 F4 SERVICE DATA ................................................................................................................. SD-10 1.. Tightening Torque ............................................................................................................. SD-10 2. Engine Specifications and Major Data .................................... ............... .......................... SD-13
F1 NEW VEHICLE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS
1. Engine
" :Items marked with an asterisk in parenthesesdo not require periodic inspection. These items ae indicated for reference
onlv.
--
Item
Inspection New enaine Periodic RB26DETT
I
Cylinder head tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
0 (lor business use)
(D 29 (3, 22) (?) 108 (11, 80) (3) 0 (0, 0) @ 29 (3, 22) @ 108h5 (11+ 0.5, 79.6 & 3.6)
intake: 16 21 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 15) Exhaust: 18 24 (1.8 2.4, 13 17)
Intake and exhaust manifold tightening torque N-rn (kg-m, ft-lb) Engine Valve clearances (when hot)
- intake and exhaust

mm (in)
Intake: 0.51 (0.020) Exhaust: 0.44 (0.017) ' (when cold) 1,177 (12.0, 171)l 300
Standard compression pressure kPa (kg/crn2, psi)/rpm Limit Difference limit among cylinders kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm idle rpm COIHC concentration Dashpot "touch" rpm Emission control systems rpm %/rpm rPm kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm
Less than 0.11
TV valve operating temperature

Catalytic converter lightening torque
' (OF) C
N-m (kg-m, ft-lb]

--
Ignition timing Engine electrical system
'BTDCtrpm
Spark plug gap
mm (in]
1.0 1.1 (0.039 0.043) (Adjustment not required)
ISpecific gravity of battery electrolyte
20 (6SF
1.22-1.29
F1 NEW VEHICLE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION

AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS 1. Engine (Cont'd)
1 Coolant pressurization limit

Radiator cap relief pressure
kpa (kg/cm2, psi)

kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
1
-
0
0
98 (1.0, 14)
Cooling system
Coolant quantity
i1
Radiator Reservoir tank When new
1
1
1
--I
(0.6
59 - 98 - 1.0, 9 - 14)
Up to lower end 01 filler opening MAX
1 Between MIN and

0
0
3.0 5.0 (0.118 0.197)
(0.157 0.236) 7.5 10.295)
Fan belt tension [when pressed midpoint with a force of approx. 98 N (10 kg, 22 Ib)] When readmm (in) justed
Service limit
4.0 - 6.0
-
ITightening torque
Heat-shield plate Exhaust system Exhaust manifold--to-front tube
I
N-m (kg-rn, ft-lb)
1
(0.5 0.7, 3.6 5.1)
5-7
45 60
(4.6
- 6.1, 33 - 44)
Front tube-to-catalytic converter Catalytic converter-to-center tube
F1 NEW VEHICLE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

2. Chassis
I
I 1
item Pedal free play (at clevis) Pedat-to-floor (when released) Free pedal height Tightening torque of joints rnm (in) mm (in) rnm (in)
New vehicle inspection
Periodic inspection
Inspection standards
0
0
- 12 (0.20 - 0.47) [I- 3 (0.04 - 0.12))

81 (3.19) 171.7
Clutch
N-m (kg-rn, ft-l b) Front propeller shaft-to-front final drive Rear propeller shaft-to-rear final drive a Transfer-to-rear propeller shaft
Propeller (drive) shaft
- 181.7 (6.76 - 7.15)
a Center propeller shaft-to-bearing bracket

Center flange-to-propeller shaft Center flange lock nuts a Side shaft-to-front drive shaft a Side fiange-to-rear drive shaft Propeller shaft runout Wheel alignment Toe-in a Camber Caster
- 32 (2.4 - 3.3, 17 - 24) - 74 (6.5 - 7.5, 47 - 54) 88 - 98 (9.0 - 10, 65 - 72) Bolt: 32 - 38 (3.3 - 3.9, 24 - 28) Nut: 20 - 23 (2.0 - 2.3. 14 - 17) 64 - 74 (6.5 -7.5, 47 - 54) 245 - 294 (25 - 30, 181 - 217)
24
64
0 0
rnm (in) degree
16 21 (1.6 2.1, 12 - 15) 83 93 (8.5 - 9.5, 61 69) Less than 6 (0.6, 4.3)
Kingpin inclination Front wheel bearing play Tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) 0 Axial end play mm (in) Tightening torque of fasteners1 joints N-m (kg-m, ft-tb) a Suspension member securing nuts 0 Suspension member-to-lower link ball ioint> Front suspension and axle
rn Lower link ball joint-to-lower link
0
11 (0.04 0.04) 4'55' 45' RB26DETT: 3*40' 45' 15'25' 45'
235 314 (24 32. 174 231) Less than 0.05 (0.0020)
74 88 (7,5 9.0, 54 - 65)
Lower link-to-suspension lower ball joint Tension rod-to-suspension member Tension rod-to-lower link Ball joinl-to-knuckle spindle Kingpin-to-3rd link Knuckle spindle-to-king pin 3rd link-to-upper link Upper link-to-bracket
Upper link bracket-to-car body Spring upper seat lock nuts 1 0 Shock absorber-to-3rd link Shock absorber-to-car body 3rd l ink-to-connecting rod Connecting rod-to-stabilizer o Stabilizer bracket Wheel alignment Toe-in
10
108 127 (11 13, 80 - 94) 72 97 (7.3 - 9.9, 53 72) 98-118(10-12,72-87) 147 186 (15 19. 108 137) 88 108 (9.0 11. 65 - 80) 88 108 (9.0 - 11, 65 60) 88 108 (9.0 - 11, 65 80) 18 - 24 (1.8 2.4, 13 17) 108 127 (11 13. 80 - 94) 39 54 (4.0 - 5.5. 29 40)
96 - 120 (9.8 - 12.2, 71 - 88) 96 - 120 (9.8 - 12.2. 71 - 88) 88 - 108 (9.0 - 11, 65 - 80)
63 78 (6.4 8.0, 46 58)
41 - 47 (4.2 I I I
+1
4.3
--
mm fin\ 1 degree
I
(-7
1 I
1
- 4.6, 30 - 35) - 1 1 , - 8, 30 - 35) ~ 39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)

-+I
4 7 $4
,+
1 A.
. .
9-1-9 (nna4-nnni
Camber Rear wheel bearing play
RB26DETT: -105' 30'
I Tiohtenina toraue
Suspension member securing nuts a Final drive (on housing side) to suspension member
L ,
. - .-. .
1 - 1 1 8 ( 1 0 - 1 2 , 7. 2 - 8 7 ) . 98-118(10-12,72-87)
F1 NEW VEHICLE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS 2. Chassis (Cont'd)
Item
0 Final drive (on differential case side) to sus~ension member Suspension member-to-lower arm Suspension member-to-upper link (front end) Suspension member-to-upper link (rear end1 0 Sus~ension member-to-lower link U p p e r link (front end)-to-axle housing Upper link (rear end)-to-axle housing Lower link-to-axle housina Lower arm-to-connectino rod Connecting rod-to- stabilizer Stabilizer bracket Shock absorber-to- axle housina Shock absorber-to- car body Spring upper seat lock nuts Member stav-to-car bodv Air pressure Tire groove wear limit mm (in) Wheel nut tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-ib) Pedal ~ l a v mm fin\ Pedal-to-floor clearance (when depressed) mrn fin1
-
New vehicle inspection
Periodic inspection
Inspection standards
Rear suspension and axle

(See text) 1.6 (0.0631 3
Road wheels and tires
- 11 (0.12 - 0.43) - 182.5 (6.79- 7.19)
Greater than 85 (3.35)

M/T: 172.5
Pedal height (From upper surface of floor panel)
m m (in)
Pad wear Foot brake
mm (in)
Disk wear
m m (in)
SUndifdtfuCknUS
3i (1.
3011.1~1
Service limit
16 ((1.71) 16111.~
Brake hose and tube installation Flare nut tightening torque N+mfka-m. ft-Ib\
-
Brake drum wear
rnm (in)
S h r d t d 1.0.
I.D. u m w limit
173 (&@I)
Parking brake Brake lining wear mm (in)

Sundird micJina S m i a limit
1
1
4.6 10177)
1
I
3.0 (0.1l 1.6 ( a s e l
i.s(acw~
Lever pull. with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 Ib) Center lever type: (notch)
F1 NEW VEHICLE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS 2. Chassis (Cont'd)
Steering wheel tightening torque
Steering system
, = ., - - .-, Steering wheel play m m (in) Steering gear tightening torque N m (kg-m, It-lb) Steering gear securing bolts a Ball ioint-to-knuckle snindle 1 Rod and arm tightening torque N-rn fko-rn.. ft-lbl, 1, * -Lower joint securing bolts Steering gear-to-inner socket 0 Side rod lock nuts 1
0
r,
I I
F.
U
--
I
1
I
1
0
Power steering belt tension (deflection when pressed midpoint of belt)
0
I
Power steering system tightening torque N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) Oil pump securing bolts
0
u
16
31 - 42 (3.2 - 4.3, 23 - 31) - 21 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) (Adjustment side) 54 - 68 (5.5 - 6.9, 40 - 50)
I I
11
1
I
Oil pump pulley securing nuts Reservoir tank, securing boits

Low pressure oil tube-to-steering gear
Steering system
0
I
1
Hioh .pressure oil tube-to-steerina s - aear a High pressure oil tube-to-oil pump Right tube clamp bracket-to-car body Front, tube clamp bracket-to-car body Cylinder tube-to-aear housina Tightening torque of power cylinder
1
I
1
I
. ,
. -
* -
- - , I
Power cylinder securing bolts Outer link rod lock nuts Power cylinder outer rin9-to-axle housing Stroke stoDwer lock nuts Tightening torque of power steering system N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) fasteners/joints
0
I
1
Oil pump securing bolts Reservoir tank securing bolts HICAS solenoid valve union bolts (on reservoir tank side) HICAS solenoid valve union bolts (on oil pump side) HICAS solenoid valve (on high and low pressure sides) Solenoid valve-to-bracket Oil pump-to-steering gear (on high pressure side of power steering) Steering gear-to-reservoir tank
-
I I
,-.
w
16 21 (1.6 2.1, 12 15) (Adjustment side) 3 4 (0.3 0.4, 2.2 - 2.9)
SUPER HICAS
HICAS solenoid valve-to-oil pump HICAS solenoid valve-to-reservoir tank Power cylinder tube Cylinder tube clamp Hose clamp Cutoff valve bracket securing bolts Cutoff valve-to-oower cylinder union bolts
1
I
I
!
I
1
1
I
I
a Rear central piping-to-cutoff valve
13 - 16 (1.3 1.6. 9 12) (front) 4.4-5.8 (0.45-0.59, 3.3 -4.3) (rear) 49 - 69 (5.0 7.0, 36 51) 39 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 36)
F2 PERIODIC REPLACEMENT PARTS AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS -Periodic reolacement carts Air cleaner element
--
I.Engine
Reolacement interval
Every 60,000 km (36,000 miles) Every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) Everv 5.000 km (3,000 miles)
Timing belt Enaine oil Oil filter Fuel filter
I
1
Every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or yearly Every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) First time: After 5 years Thereafter: Every 4 years Every 2 years (inside engine compartment) Every 4 years (outside engine compartment) First time: After 3 years Thereafter: Every 2 years
Fuel hose (except for type D)
LLC
-
--
Every 2 years
- ---
Catalyst Spark plug
Yearly Every 100,000 km (60,000 miles)
2. Chassis
Periodic replacement parts Brake hose Replacement interval First time: After 5 years Thereafter: Every 4 years Every 4 years First time: After 3 years Thereafter: Every 2 years Yearly Brake system Master cylinder cup and dust seal First time: After 3 years Thereafter: Every 2 years Every 2 years Wheel cylinder (including caliper) cup and dust seal
4-
I
1
Brake fluid
First time: After 5 years Thereafter: Every 4 years Every 2 years Every 120,000 km (72,000 miles) or every 4 years Every 100,000 krn (60,000 miles) or every 2 years Every 100,000 krn (60,000 miles) or every 2 years
Suspension ball joint grease Manual transmission fluid Differential fluid
F3 LUBRICANTS AND SERVICE POINTS AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

1. Engine
Inspection and service points Throttle chamber linkage Accelerator linkage Lubricant type Nissan MP No. 2 Grease Remarks Apply during disassembly, Apply during disassembly.
NISSAN MP No. 2 Grease or Chassis Grease
2. Chassis
I
Inspection and service points Clutch disc spline Main drive shaft spline Clutch release mechanism Manual transmission Automatic transmission Transfer
ETS hydraulic unit
Lubricant type Nissan Clutch Grease (KRI06-00010) Nissan Clutch Sleeve Grease (KRI06-00010) Nissan Gear Oil MP-G Special GL-475W-90 Nissanmatic Fluid D
Nissanrnatic Fluid D
--
Remarks
I
Gear Oil GL-4 MP-G 80W-90 (for extremely cold areas)
Nissan Power Steering Fluid Special Nissan Clutch Molybdenum Grease Nissan MP Special Grease No. 2 F160 R200 (Mechanical LSD) Nissan Gear Oil Hypoid GL-5 85W-90 Nissan Gear Oil Hypoid LSD GL-5 %OW-90 6080 grease (Kyodo brand) Nissan MP Special Grease No. 2 Nissan Brake Fluid No. 2500 (NR-3) Nissan Rubber Lubricant (KREl2-OQO30)
Propeller shaft center bearing washer Propeller shaft universal joint Front final drive Rear final drive Drive shaft Front and rear wheel bearings Brake (Master cylinder) Cylinder rubber parts (Brake system) Disc brake Brake pedal fulcrum pin or shaft Parking brake cable Power steering
Nissan Disc Brake Grease iKRF16-00005) Nissan MP Special Grease No. 2 Nissan MP Special Grease No. 2 Nissan Power Steering Fluid
F4 SERVICE DATA AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

.--
1. Tightening Torque
1-1 ENGINE COMPONENTS
Components
N-m
kg-rn
4.7
ft-lh
dain bearing cap bolts Sonnecting bolts and nuts qywheel bolts [MfT models) >rive plate bolts (AIT models) Irank pulley bolts
3il strainer securing bolt
46 52
I
I
- 5.3
a14-16
1.4 1.6 @ (0" - 6) 5 ' 1 . 15.5 45
142 152
446 466
lear oil seal retainer securing bolts
6.3 - 8.3
16 21 10 - 12
Water pump securing bolts ; m pulley securing bolts a ;amshaft retainer securing bolts cocker cover screws Engine body
,
M8: 1 - 2 6 1
M I 0 3 0 - 40
14 - 19 9 0 - 11.8 .
2- 4
riming belt cover Self tensioner securing nut
3-5
43
- 58
Nater drain plug

31ow-by control valve
V\\ pan drain plug . -
34-44
3 1 pan securing bolts 1

Oil fitter stud: (cylinder block side)
29 - 39 M6:6.3 - 8.3
29 39
M-iO-31-42 . -
29 - 39 15 2 1 M12: (D 29
(oil filter side)
@ 0 (Lower)
Cylinder head bolts
J
[85- SO*) or
10.5 1 . 15
Intake manifold securing bolts Intake manifold securing nuts Collector bolts Exhaust manifold securing nuts 0 sensor securing nuts , Intake and exhaust systems Throttle chamber securing bolts Throttle valve switch
-
16 21 16 - 2 1
16 21
0.92 1.2
18 -24
18 -24 16 -21
Intake manifold support bracket securing bolts Turbocharger inlet nuts Turbocharger outlet nuts Water bypass tube
,
I
1
2.0- 2.4
23 29
23
- 29 15 - 20
F4 SERVICE DATA AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS 1. Tig,htening Torque (Cont'd)

Tightening torque Components N-m Turbocharger oil tube (turbo side) Turbocharger oil tube (cylinder block side) Turbocharger water tube (turbo side) Turbocharger water tube (cylinder block side) Crank angle sensor
RB260ETT
kg-m
1.7 2.1
ft-lb
17 21 15-20 20
Intake and exhaust systems
1.5 2.0 2 3.2
12
- 15
11-14
14 - 23
- 31
1
1 1
20-31
4-5
I
1
2 3.2
1
1
14-23 2.9
Crank angle sensor bracket

Spark ~ l u o s Engine temperature sensor Thermal transmitter Knock sensor
20 - 29
16 21
- 0.5 1.6 - 2.1 2.0 - 3.0

0.4 2.0-3.0
20 - 29
- 3.6 12 - 15 14 - 22 14 - 22
11 - 14 1 5 - 20
--
15 - 20
21 26
0 sensor ,
Exhaust temperature sensor Injector holder securing bolts Air regulator securing bolls IAA unit securing bolts Sensors and others Water outlet securing bolts Water inlet securing bolts Alternator securing-adjusting bolts Alternator securing nuts Starter motor securing bolts Compressor securing bolts Compressor bracket securing bolts Power steering bracket securing bolts Power steering adjustment bar securing bolts Ignition coil bracket securing bolts
18 - 24 25 - 34
4-5
2.1 - 2.7
1.5 2.0
1.8 - 2.4
2.5 - 3.5
0.4 0.86
- 0.5
8.4 10.8
16 - 21
45
1 1 I
I
9.1 - 11.8
1.6 - 2.1 0.93 - 1.2

4.6
- 1.1
- 17 18 - 25 2.9 - 3.6
13
6.2 - 8.0
1 1
- 60
30 40 37
- 6.1
- 5.1
3.1-4.1 3.8 - 5.1 3.8
- 50
12 - 15 6.7 - 8.7 33 - 44 22 - 30 27 - 37
27
37 - 50
- 37 - 37 - 8.7
37 - 50
14 19
3.8 - 5.1
1.4
27
- 1.9 - 1.2
10 - 14
9.1
- 11.8
0.93
6.7
F4 SERVICE DATA AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS 1. Tightening Torque (Cont'd)

1-2 MANUAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS
Unit: N-m (kg-m, ft-lb) Type Components Rear extension securing bolts Front cover securing bolts
FS5R30A
Check ball plug

Filler plug Drain plug
--
Reverse lamp switch Neutral switch Control housing-to-rear extension
M8 bolts
-
Select check plug Bearing retainer-to- adapter plate

5-R fork rod securing bolts
Reverse fork securing bolts

-
Rear guide plate securing bolts
F4 SERVICE DATA AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS 1. Tightening Torque (Cont'd)

1-3 F160 FINAL DRIVE
Unit: N-m (kg-rn, ft-lb) Components Drive gear securing bolts Tightening torque
93
113 (9.5
- 11.5, 69 - 83)
--
Drive pinion securing bolts

Side retainer securing bolts Side shaft securing bolts Carrier cover securing bolts
167 196 (17
- 20, 123 - 145) 16- 19 (1.6 - 1.9, 12 - 14) 16 - 21 (1.6 - 2.1, 12 - 15) 29 - 37 (3.0 - 3.8, 22 - 27)
-
1-4 R200 FINAL DRIVE

Unit: N-m (kg-m, ft-lb)
I
Components Drive gear securing bolts Bearing cap securing bolt Drive pinion securinq nut Carrier case cover securing nuts Drain plug Filler plug
177
Tightening torque
- 196 (18.0 - 20.0, 130 - 145)

88 98 (9 - 10, 65
- 72) 186 - 294 (19 - 30. 137 - 2171 39 - 49 (4 - 5.29 - 36) 59 - 98 (6 - 10,43 - 7 2 ) 59 - 98 (6 - 10.43 - 72)
-
--
F4 SERVICE DATA AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS
Bore diameter Wear limit Cylinder block Out-of-roundness Taper
2. Engine Specifications and Major Data

Item mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
RB26DETT
86.000 86.030 (3.3858 - 3.3870) 0.2 (0.008) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.010 (0.0004) 0.1 (0.004)
Waroaoe limit of cylinder block uooer surface
Ream limit of valve guide holes Intake
1
Cylinder head
Exhaust Ream limit of inside diameter Intake Exhaust Service limit of valve guide-tovalve stem clearance mm (in) ,
1
I
11.46
- 11.47 (0.4512 - 0.4516)

- 7.01B (0.2756 - 0.2763)
0.2 (0.008) Thermal flow
1 1
7.000
I
1 1 1
85.955
Warpage limit of lower surface
mm (in)
-
1 Cylinder head gasket thickness 1 Piston type

-
mrn (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mrn (in)
Standard outside diameter of piston skirt Piston skirt-to-cylinder clearance Standard piston pin outside diameter
1 Piston pin-to-piston pin bore clearance

Piston rings
- 85.985 (3.3840 - 3.3852) 20.989 - 21.001 (0.8263 - 0.8268)

0.035 0.055 (0.0014 0,0022) 0 to -0.004 (0 to -0.0002)
1
1
Piston ring end clearance

3-011
Second Oil Piston ring side clearance TOD Second

Oil
mm (in)
- 1
Center-to-center distance of large and small end bores mm (in) Large end bore diameter Connecting rod mm (in) Bend and twist limit [per 100 mm (3.94 in) in length] mm (in) Large end side clearance mm (in) mm (in)
121.45 - 121.55 (4.7815 - 4,7854) 47.989 - 48.007 (1.8893 - 1.8900)

0.065 0.135 (0.0026 0.0053) Bend 0.15 (0.0059) and Twist 0.3 (0.012) 0.2
0.20 - 0.60 (0.0079 - 0.0236) 0.040 - 0.075 (0.0016 - 0.0030) 0.030 - 0.065 (0.0012 - 0.0026)
0,42 0.57 (0.0165 - 0.0224)
1 Large end oil clearance
1
Crankshaft
0.020
- 0.3 (0.008 - 0.0121 - 0,040 (0.0008 - 0.0016)
Piston pin-to-connecting rod small end bore clearance mm (in\ Standard journal diameter Standard pin diameter
I
1
mm (in).l mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) 0.028
54.951 54.975 (2.1634 2.1644) 47,961 47.974 (1.8882

-
- 1.8867)
1 Out-of-roundness and taper of journal

Out-of-roundness and taper of pin Main bearing oil clearance Standard thrust clearance Cam nose height (oblong diameter) Intake Exhaust Bend limit Standard cam bracket inside diameter Standard cam journal outside diameter
Less than 0.005 (0.0002)
- 0.047 (0.0011 - 0.0019) (selective fit)

0.2 - 0.3 (0.008 - 0.012) 40.280
Less than 0.005 (0.0002)
1
1
I
- 40.283 (1.5858 - 1.5859)

0.05 (0.0020)
Camshaft
mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
27.935
- 27.955 (1.0998 - 1.1006)
No. 1 No. 7
F4 SERVICE DATA AND MAINTENANCE STANDARDS 2. Engine Specifications and Major Data (Cont'd)
Item Camshaft Standard bracket-to-journal clearance RB26DETT No. 1 - No. 7 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0,0034) 0.030 - 0.080 (0.0012 - 0.0031) 0.045
-
mm (in) mm (in)
1 Standard end play

Standard valve lifter outside diameter Lifter guide bore diameter Standard lifter-to-lifter guide clearance
I
mrn (in)
mm (in)
30.955
31.OOO
- 30.965 (1.2187 - 1.2191)

- 30.2
(1.181
mm (in) rnm (in)
Valve face outside diameter Valves and valve springs

1-
- 31.020 (1.2205 - 1.2213) 0.035 - 0.065 (0.0014 - 0.0026) 34.5 - 34.7 (1.356 - 1.366)
30.0 5.980 6.920
- 1.189)
Valve stem outside diameter
mm (in)
- 5.965 (0.2354 - 0.2348) - 6.905 (0.2724 - 0.2718)

-
1 Valve spring squareness limit

Standard valve spring tree length
mrn (in)
mm (in)
1.8 (0.071) (Single spring)

-
Standard as-installed load of valve spring 235.4 (24.0, 52.9) 135 mrn (1.38 in)] (Single spring) N (ka. \b\ , -. , I Flywheel Runout limit (on clutch disc mating surface) (MtT models) mm (in)
46.54 (1.8323) (Single spring)
1. (0.039) O
FIG. NO. 1 C-1 4WD vehicles ( R B ~ O D E T ~ R B ~ ~ Dequipped models) ETT
-_
kcrankangle sensor
Air flow meter
\Exhaust
gas sensor
Oil temperature sensor

I
7
I
Intaka air temporatura sensor
Cas?.ette deck
r .r-Radio
Tail liiht
& +A . +High-mounted stop light
Cont9d Fig. No. 1 C-4 4WO Vehicles (RB2ODETlRB26DETT equipped models)
wheel
sw
L-
Aulo spoiler equ~ppod vehacle
. . ..
[Front r~ght)
Door swWer (Front right]
m :
w=-~.ss -m--m
~ss-n.2,
M,, , .-Al
Donr $~eaeer (Front lettj
mrL
--1
Radio SW
Manual AIC
4
t motor w
Mode door actuator
Intake ar ten [sonsot
1
Moiol with active speaker
Diaqnosls connector
Rga No. 2 W-1 4WD VEHICLE (RBZODETiRB26DETT EQUIPPED MODELS)

Inhibitor SW
A l l IND. relay
Engine ~ o d y QND GND
1
Fladiator (an1 Horn motor relay
A/C relay
(Vehicl. WO / spoil;
3'
6; 3 ; i g ; i $^j ^ErS?^6w 33 8 ; g ; i $ .;;;!

mi.
Front
Engine harness No. 2 :
signal
(Projector headlight specification) Headlight [Right) (Standard specification)
Horn {HI)
m - ~ l 11
: z&I
clearance g 1
(Projector afwcMcdtion)
(Standard ipecmcatlon)
Engina compartment huneas
relay
Brake
fluid lhel
(1
M)
11
I ?
4
Sub meter
r o body harness
IQT-<*1
1 :1 version: T W-7 1ASCO) O *Z: To W-3 (E-TS) -3: W-3 (E-TSI To -4: To W-5 (HICAS)
-To W-3 IE-TS)
rnpartmenl harness
i between
3TS-4 modml:
nb
only an
ws tour kinds: wcifications irs and M/T cations oiler. wel does not ;uit.
Harness deaigns differ betwwn GT-R and GTS4 models. GT-R model uses only one kind of harness. GTS-4 model uses four kinds: M/T and A/T specifications with auto spoiler and M/T and A/T specifications without auto spoiler. Aulo spoiler equipped modal has ASCD circuit no1 In usa.
ACC relay 2
( 1 MI
To W-6 auto air wnditlonsr himeas (Auto A/C vehicle]
fuw o k k
Cont'd Fig. No. 2 W-1 4WD Vehicles
Diaanosis symbol
(4 1
Diagnosis connector
1 0
To W-4 door harness (front right)

/ ^ ? &
/Oh
1st version To W-5 (auto spoiler) 1st version To W-7 (ASCD) :To W-5 (HICAS) 1 1 :To W-5 [HICAS)
'8
'9
'
Radio SW
Joint connector terminal arrangement may vary within the dotted-line diagram area. Joint connector A Joint connector B
Lr
Flasher
deck terminal
To W-2ECCS harness
Fan control amplifier (Auto A/C) Fan resistor (heater, manual A/C)
Rear Radio
Antenna
Body GNO
Diode
Groun shield
This ha for GTand coi AIT mo
Door lock Rear wiper motor
timer
17--1
C/B
Rear wioer amolifier
GND
S E P B
:"!
(Sunroof equipped m a
r --
control modulator Fuel pump control modulator
l ;E
Sensor
gauge
Hiqh-mountet stop light
Reverse light (right) License plate light (right)
^3
License plate light (len)
body GND
Detonation
?9
Injector
-1'.
Grounded shield
. ,
81
n2
n3
$14
06
.i
Grounded shield
IGN coil
To W-1 main harness
main harness
5:
1 described, see
harness or W-3 E-TS
i ~ o wiring n o t 1 r
9
1 = s Z z T - p1
Exhaust gas sensor neater Heater
2 ~ * ~
Check connector
u
sw
Throttle valve Throttle sensor
Exhaust gas sensor (R)
Fig. No. 5 W-3 E-TS SYSTEM
Reverse light SW
4-way rotation sensor (front right) Inhibitor SW Key SW
-3
fi
( M I T vehicle)
C5FQ
fc^H^::
ABS actuatoi
1 .
' 2 . Front right
"3 :Front right
'4 : Rear
e
58
ECCS harness 4-way rotation sensor (front left)
IGN relay 2
11MI
ACC relay
(1Ml
g
F. -
Engine compartment harness
FIL & fuse
+I: Grounded shield
Fuse
E-TS oil pressure unit
@& I
connector
r-.
E-TS E.TS actuator relay motor relay "'I
-5
To rear combination light (reverse) To rear combination light (stop)
Body *..-
'lay 1 IGN relay 1
Body GND
-i
1 I Integral
Joint connector A
!(Integral)
Joint connector
Terminal arangement of joint connector section ma; vary within the dotted-line diagram area.
Fig. No. 6 W-4 DOOR HARNESS

Electric mirror (Door right) Mirror Electric mirror SW
\
Electric mirror SW (Foldable type)

1
'?
S W Selector S W - 3 : Folding S W
:
: Selector
-13 Unlock "14 : Front passenger
seat
.
Door harness (Front right),
Door speaker (Front right)'
Door lock
sw
s
ee
P I W motor (Front right)
Door speaker (Front left)
PIW motor (Front left)
Upper: HIT (Lower: Coupe)
PIW sw (Front left)
Mirror heater
L
/
Electric mirror (Door left)
Door lock actuator (Front left)
Fig. 7 W-5 HICAS SYSTEM

Power Neutral SW
I NOTES1.
MIT vehicle
FPq
Battery N.P relay
11M19)
For wiring not described, see W-1 2. HICAS circuit and connector are provided oniy c specification vehicles.L--------
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- -- ---
-------
- - -- --- -- -
ii
Brake fluicl level sensor
'U2
gine compartment harness
IGN relay 2
ACC relay 2
1h
ACC relay 1
IGN relay 1
11M)
FIL & fuse
p%&Ec
Body GND HICAS Oil sw Fuse block Steerlnc, wheel SW
Resumelaccelerate
---
Parking HICAS brake cut-off SW solenoid Body '
HICAS control ur~it
4I
,,
1
1
To stop light (via tail harness)
1 1
Connect bv equipped vehicle)
Body GND
flw**mm
fl
*ooz
Joint connector A
Joint connector B
/Terminal arranaement of ictint \ connector section may vary 1 within the dotted-line area.
Fig. No. 8 W-6 AIR CONDITIONER HARNESS

Electrically controlled active full-automatic air conditioner
f
To W-1 main harness

\
[ ~ u t o conditioner harness air
Air mix door actuator
Sunload sensor
m-5.
wii
wm
LO^B
Refrigerant temoerature sensor

u
Auto amplifier Intake air temperature sensor
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
RELAY BOX
ENGINE COMPTARTMENT
- RELAY BOX
FL 30A
FL 25A
-v^
FL 25A
'
A
FL 25A
FL
30A
FL 30A
v'
FL
75A
v TRANSFER CASE
COOLER
15A
<
v
PAD FAN
A
ENG CONT
POWER WDW
ANTI SKID
IGN SW
PTC HEATER A ~ W D
MAIN A ~ / A
>
HILAMP TRANSFER CASE COOLER BLOWER AIR CON RAD FAN HORN
TRANSFER CASE COOLER
~ A 0 W 9
Main power supply f r o m battery via F/L
F/L & fuse
Headlight relay
A I c relay
Radiator fan motor relay
r a s e case cooler relay
M Pump motor
Thermal switch
SIDE REPEATER LAMPS
Side repeater (Right)
turn
f ,
(Right1 (Projector headlight specificationl Headlight (Right1 (Standard specificationl Clearance light (Right)
Clearance light (Left) [Projector head light specif~cat~onl Headlight (Left) (Standard specification) Front urn signal
\@1 Side
repeater (Left)
OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING BRAKE LIGHT WARNING DIMMER SW INSTRUMENT PANEL ILLUMINATION
Combination meter
~ i g n sw t (Instrument)
Rear defogger
From interior illumination circuit
Oil temoerattre warning control
Relay brake warning lamp
Mode door actuator
Intake door actuator
module - dimmer
0
Remote control
Relay dimmer SW
REAR LAMPS AND H.M.S.L.
Tail stop Turn signal HMSL GND Rear (right1
Reverse combination light
I
modulator Fuel pump control modulator
Fuel gauge unit
High mounted stop lamp
' ,
<
4
5
&
Reverse light (right] License plate light (right1 License plate IiQht (left) Reverse light (left)
s
$
4.:;: 1 a
Rear combination light (left)
5. GND
TRANSFER CASE COOLER
VIEW
GROSS FINE LED...POWERWJ =-LB~ONXZILZAUTO FF,*!J(tHL A U T 0 5- FTIZS Bt+B&Tl5km / h U -tlC7~2tc%,~lJ) OPTION LED.. ......... POWER* LJ I-LA~~ONXI&AUTO T. H 3 G R O S S f i Y 1-LbTOPTlO NEB3RLkSILfit7 ({EL A U T OFFFl&SBbiB&Tl5km/ h UklLjX2tc S,6?7) (S?)ABSt'F%%I&AUTO LED. GROSS LED. FINE LED &FJI:~H$~L.ABSBEjSI&. kZZD&3 lL,$Zt7LZETo
'
i

Nissan GTR R32 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nissan GTR R32 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nissan GTR R32 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What precautions should be taken when inspecting and repairing 4WD vehicles?

What precautions should be taken when inspecting and repairing 4WD vehicles?

What are the contents of Section 1 in the manual?

What are the contents of Section 1 in the manual?

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

BODY HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SERVICE DATA

GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION

A1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

2.Configuration Components, Operation Contents and Procedures

2-1 CONFIGURATION COMPONENTS AND OPERATION CONTENTS

Inner grease seal

Screw (3) 3 4 ( . 0.4, 22 29) 03 B d t ( 4 ) E - S ( 2 5 - 3 . 4 , 18-25)

,:Always replace after every disassembly.

2-3 OPERATION NAME SYMBOLS

2. Fast, Accurate Operations

3. Electronic Trouble Diagnosis System

E.C.U. part number

Note: Refer to the CONSULT Operation Manual for further details.

Remarks Transmission Manual 5-speed

A4 VEHICLE AND UNIT IDENTIFICATION PLATE LOCATION

E-BNR32 model BNR32-000001 - (equipped with RB26DETT engine)

A5 TOW TRUCK TOWING

A5 TOW TRUCK TOWING

Safety stand points

A6 4WD INSPECTION AND REPAIR PRECAUTIONS

(1) Measurement with front wheels jacked up

Simple free roller

(2) Measurement with simple free roller

The length of the wheel base 2,615 mrn (102.96 in)

simple free roller

A6 4WD INSPECTION AND REPAIR PRECAUTIONS

2. Braking Performance Check

tion from full throttle to no throttle until the 4WD warning

A7 4WD VEHICLE TOWING PRECAUTIONS 1. Towing Precautions

1. Main Engine Specifications

kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm

1 Intake valve opening angle (BTDC)

(degrees) (degrees) (degrees) (degrees) m m (in) m m (in) 7 (BTDC)

0.1 max. 50 max.

7.5W-30 (SG grade for turbo)

Approx. 0.4 (318) Approx. 9.0 (7-718)

E-BNR32 RB26DETT ECCS (MPi) Airlfuel ratio feedback

Deceleration exhaust gas reduction equipment . .

Thermocouple 1850 (1,56211

Canister system Closed system

1 T h r d e valve opening angle sensor

Dcuble clamp band

Vacuum c m r d tube Swing valve contrdler (rear)

Length mm (in) 580 (22.83)

Part Turbocharged pressure control solenoid

1 Turbocharged pressure control solenoid - vacuum gallery

1 Throttle chamber - vacuum gallery

Pressure r e ~ u l a t o r balance tube

1 Vacuum gallery - vacuum gallery

Molded Molded 90 (3.54)

- vacuum control tube

B2 RB26 DOHC EGI (ECCS) TWIN-TURBOCHARGER ENGINE

Super tuner After number EG1151-9000, EGll52-9000, EGll53-9000 and EG1154-9000

Otherwise, tachometer tester (after number EGl334-9000)

gngine speed inspection